JP2023009183A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can favorably carry out a read-ahead performance.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes game performance mode reservation cancellation means which, when read-ahead determination means does not determine to turn into a special game state and a read-ahead performance is carried out by a read-ahead performance execution means, cancels a reservation of a game performance mode by a game performance mode reservation means, and, when the read-ahead determination means determines to turn into the special game state and the read-ahead performance is carried out by the read-ahead performance execution means, does not cancel the reservation of the game performance mode by the game performance mode reservation means.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 152

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a pinball game machine and a reel-type game machine.

In a pachinko machine, which is a representative game machine, an internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters a start winning slot provided on the game board. is performed, the display device provided in the game area starts to display the symbols in a variable manner. Then, when the internal lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops the combination of special symbols, notifies the player, and shifts to a special game state advantageous to the player. In the special game state, for example, a variable winning device (so-called attacker) provided in the game area is controlled to a state in which balls can be entered, and a prize is awarded according to the number of balls entering the variable winning device (number of winnings). Ball payout is executed. In this type of pachinko machine, the result of an internal lottery that is triggered by the winning of a game ball into the starting prize opening is referred to in advance (look-ahead determination), and based on the result of this look-ahead determination, the display effect ( There are things that perform look-ahead production).

JP 2013-111259 A

However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is not possible to suitably perform the look-ahead effect, and the interest of the player is diminished.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably executing a look-ahead effect.

The game machine according to the present invention has a plurality of game performance modes with different performance modes, a game performance mode change receiving means for receiving a selection change of the game performance mode, and whether or not to make a special game state advantageous to the player. a special game determination means for determining, a prefetch determination means for performing a prefetch determination as to whether or not the special game state will occur before the determination is made, and a predetermined predetermined value that makes the player expect that the special game state will occur A prefetching performance execution lottery means for randomly determining whether or not to execute a prefetching performance, a prefetching performance executing means for executing the prefetching performance based on the lottery result of the prefetching performance execution lottery means, and a selection of the game performance mode. A game presentation mode change prohibition period determination means for determining whether or not a change is not possible in a game presentation mode change prohibition period; a game effect mode reservation means for reserving a change to the game effect mode; When the reservation of the game effect mode by the effect mode reservation means is discarded, the prefetch determination means determines that the special game state is entered, and the prefetch effect is executed by the prefetch effect execution means, the game effect mode reservation. A game performance mode reservation canceling means for not canceling the reservation of the game performance mode by the means is provided.

According to the present invention, the look-ahead effect can be favorably performed.

It is a figure which shows the positional relationship with the top view and the player which opened the front door frame of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment in an expanded manner; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment in an expanded manner; FIG. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the front door frame of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a game board of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display apparatus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the inner frame of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. Fig. 2 is a perspective view showing the rear configuration of the game board of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; It is a rear view showing a state in which the main control unit is removed from the game board of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 2 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a main controller unit of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view showing the configuration of the back pack unit of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a first monitoring device viewed from the front of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the first monitoring device viewed from behind the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a game machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 2 is a plan view showing operation buttons of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the content of each counter used for the internal lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a winning/failing table storing values of random numbers for winning a jackpot in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the distribution table which memorize|stored the value of the random number which concerns on the allocation destination of the classification of the jackpot of the gaming machine based on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the prize-winning process for the starting openings of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. 4 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of game round control processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation|variation start process of the gaming machine based on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of display duration setting processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning a prize opening-and-closing process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning a prize opening processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the front door frame opening monitoring process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. 2 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device of the game machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the data structure stored in the ROM of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the data structure stored in the ROM 412, and (b) is the data structure stored in the common ROM 404. FIG. It is a figure which shows. FIG. 4 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of a register 952 included in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram for explaining a connection relationship between a DAC and a speaker unit provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; 4 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production|presentation determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment and the game state; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal time alerting|reporting process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 9 is a series of diagrams showing examples of effect images corresponding to variable display and stop display of special symbols of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram showing an example of a mode transition effect that is executed when a “best result” is obtained in the normal state of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect at the time of jackpot (opening and closing execution mode) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production|presentation type (production type) selection process of the gaming machine based on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart in another example of the effect type (effect type) selection process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; It is a figure explaining the transition processing to the 4th mode M4 of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to the 4th mode M4 of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to production|presentation MA of the gaming machine based on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to production|presentation MB of the gaming machine based on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to production|presentation MC of the gaming machine based on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of another example of the abnormality notification process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; It is a front view of the game board of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device of a game machine according to a second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between a DAC and a speaker unit provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal time alerting|reporting process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a gaming machine according to a modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between a DAC and a speaker unit included in a sound output LSI of a gaming machine according to a modification of the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a schematic configuration diagram of a speaker section and a cover member provided in a gaming machine according to a third embodiment, (a) is a front view of a state in which the speaker section is not covered by the cover member, and (b) is a FIG. 2C is a front view of a state covered by a cover member, FIG. 4C is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 4B, and FIG. 4D is a cross-sectional view taken along line YY of FIG. It is the figure which showed the schematic structure of the origin detection sensor of the gaming machine based on 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between a DAC and a speaker unit provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal time alerting|reporting process of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 12A is a schematic configuration diagram showing a speaker unit and its peripheral structure provided in a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment, and (a) is a partial sectional plan view showing a first state in which the speaker unit faces the front of the gaming machine; , (b) is a partial cross-sectional plan view showing the direction of the speaker portion changing from the front to the right side of the game machine, and (c) is a third view in which the speaker portion faces the right side of the game machine. It is a partially cross-sectional plan view showing two states. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device of a game machine according to a fourth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal time alerting|reporting process of the gaming machine based on 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between a DAC and a speaker unit provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram of temporal change in the reproduction volume of the speaker unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal time alerting|reporting process of the gaming machine based on 5th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of sound data reproduction processing of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment; It is a figure explaining the data used for the transition process to the production|presentation of 4th mode M4 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to production|presentation MA of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to production|presentation MB of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to production|presentation MC of 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure for performing execution control of the production|presentation of 7th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a register according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of sequence data according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of a sound and light ROM of the seventh embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning a prize opening-and-closing process of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ending period determination table memorize|stored in ROM of the main controller of 8th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ending period setting processing according to the eighth embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification timing of the RUSH rush of 8th Embodiment, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for shifting to a fourth mode M4 according to the eighth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the notification timing determination table of the RUSH rush and the right-handed navigation for RUSH memorize|stored in ROM of the audio|voice light emission control apparatus of 8th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing another example of a flowchart of processing for shifting to the fourth mode M4 according to the eighth embodiment; It is a figure explaining other examples of the transition processing to the 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of other examples of the production|presentation transition processing to 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a transition process A to a fourth mode M4 according to the eighth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a transition process B to a fourth mode M4 according to the eighth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a transition process C to a fourth mode M4 according to the eighth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing the timing of the effect type (effect type) selection process of the ninth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flow chart of effect type (effect type) selection processing of the ninth embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification timing of RUSH rush of 9th Embodiment, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining other examples of the transition processing to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of other examples of the production|presentation transition processing to 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing D to 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a transition process E to a fourth mode M4 according to the ninth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing F to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a flow chart of transition processing G to a fourth mode M4 according to the ninth embodiment; It is a diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values related to allocation destinations of jackpot types of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of display duration setting processing of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device of the game machine according to the tenth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production|presentation determination process of the gaming machine based on 10th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment and the game state; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment and the effects and the like; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion production|presentation processing (suggestion during time saving) of the gaming machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flow chart of result display processing of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestive effect processing (suggestion at the time of result display) of the gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion production|presentation process (suggestion during the jackpot after time saving) of the gaming machine based on the modified example 2 of 10th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flow chart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the tenth embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the tenth embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to Modification 5 of the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the success-or-failure table which memorize|stored the value of the random number which wins the jackpot generation of the gaming machine based on 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation|variation start process of the gaming machine based on 11th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when falling) of the gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when displaying a result) of the gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion production|presentation process (suggestion during the jackpot after time saving) of the gaming machine based on the modified example 2 of 11th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to Modification 5 of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the production|presentation mode of the gaming machine and volume setting which concern on 12th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device of the gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a flowchart of volume setting processing (step S6502 in FIG. 127) of the gaming machine according to the twenty-first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production|presentation mode determination process (FIG.127 S6503) of the gaming machine based on 12th Embodiment. It is a front view of a gaming machine according to a thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of images displayed in three game effect modes of the gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of prize winning processing for a starter of a gaming machine according to a thirteenth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the prefetch lottery process of the gaming machine based on 13th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device of a gaming machine according to a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device of the game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game production|presentation mode change process performed with the sound emission control apparatus of the game machine based on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the prefetch effect|presentation process performed with the sound emission control apparatus of the gaming machine based on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead effect|presentation performed with the audio|voice light emission control apparatus of the gaming machine based on 13th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the display control device of the gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of operations after command storage processing executed by the display control device of the gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of decoration counter update processing executed by the display control device of the gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game effect mode change processing executed by the display control device of the gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a specific example of game presentation mode change processing executed by the display control device of the gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the game production|presentation mode selection table memorize|stored in the sound light emission control apparatus of the game machine based on the modification 2 of 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game production|presentation mode change process performed with the audio|voice light emission control apparatus of the game machine based on the modified example 2 of 13th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game effect mode change processing executed by the display control device of the gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a specific example of game effect mode change processing executed by the display control device of the gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a prefetch effect determination table provided in the gaming machine according to the fourth modification of the thirteenth embodiment, (a) is an example of the prefetch effect determination table stored in the ROM of the sound emission control device, ( b) is an example of a look-ahead effect determination table stored in the ROM of the display control device. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game production|presentation mode change process performed with the audio|voice light emission control apparatus of the game machine based on the modified example 4 of 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the prefetch effect|presentation process performed with the audio|voice light emission control apparatus of the gaming machine based on the modified example 4 of 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the prefetch effect|presentation process performed with the audio|voice light emission control apparatus of the gaming machine based on the modified example 5 of 13th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game effect mode change processing executed by the sound emission control device of the gaming machine according to Modification 5 of the thirteenth embodiment.

The basic configuration of various game machines to which the present invention can be applied is shown below.

[Punchy ball game machine]
An operation means (shooting handle 41) operated by a player, a ball shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and a predetermined amount of the shot game ball. A game machine comprising a ball passage (inner rail 101 and outer rail 102) leading to a game area 104 and game parts (general prize winning opening 82, nails, etc.) arranged in the game area 104.

[A pinball game machine with a special display section and a variable display device]
An operation means operated by a player, a ball shooting means for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area 104, and a game area 104. 1st and 2nd starting ports 36 and 37, a main display device 98, a variable display unit 86 and a variable winning device 83 arranged in the This game machine variably displays display contents displayed on a main display device 98 when a ball is detected, and opens a variable prize winning device 83 in a predetermined mode when the display contents at the time of stopping are specific display contents.

[Pachislot game machines such as slot machines]
A variable display means for variably displaying a pattern row consisting of a plurality of patterns and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern row is provided, and the fluctuation of the patterns is started due to the operation of the operation means for starting and caused by the operation of the operation means for stopping. A special game state (bonus game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player is generated under the condition that the symbol variation is stopped after a predetermined period of time has passed, and that the last stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. game machine.

[Ball-use belt-type game machine]
A variable display means for variably displaying a pattern row consisting of a plurality of patterns and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern row is provided, and the fluctuation of the patterns is started due to the operation of the operation means for starting and caused by the operation of the operation means for stopping. A special game state (bonus game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player is generated under the condition that the symbol variation is stopped after a predetermined period of time has passed, and that the last stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. Further, the game ball is provided with a ball receiving tray and includes a throwing device for performing throwing processing of taking in the game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device for putting out the game balls to the ball receiving tray, and the game balls are thrown by the throwing device. The gaming machine is configured so that the operation of the starting operation means is enabled thereby.

Hereinafter, each embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. As the gaming machine, a general pachinko machine will be described as an example. Further, in the following description, directions such as up, down, left, and right are specified based on the front view of the pachinko machine 10 unless otherwise specified. For example, the front side in FIG. 2 is the front side, and the back side is the rear side.

The gaming machine of the present invention comprises an inner frame (first frame) attached to an outer frame (fixed frame) so as to be openable and closable, and a front door frame (second frame) attached to the inner frame so as to be openable and closable. body) and Here, in the game machine, it is assumed that the front door frame is opened and the game area provided on the front side of the inner frame is cheated. In addition, it is also assumed that the inner frame is opened and the control device mounted on the back side of the inner frame is tampered with.

Therefore, the game machine is provided with a control device and an open detection switch (detection device) for detecting the opening of the inner frame with respect to the outer frame and the opening of the front door frame with respect to the inner frame. When the front door frame or the inner frame is opened, the opening is detected by the open detection switch, and the detection result is input to the control device. The control device determines that the front door frame and the inner frame have been opened based on the detection result from the open switch, and uses the speaker section and the lamp section to notify that fact (abnormality notification).
However, the front door frame is supported on one of the right and left sides of the inner frame with one of the right and left sides of the inner frame as the supporting side. is rotated forward (toward the player) to open.

Therefore, for example, when the front door frame is opened during maintenance (maintenance, maintenance, maintenance, inspection, care) or repair, as shown in FIG. It opens so as to face the right side (see FIG. 1(a)) or the left side (see FIG. 1(b)).
Then, as described above, when the opening of the front door frame is detected, a loud speaker (audio device) outputs an abnormality report so that the manager and employees of the hall can hear it. For this reason, the player playing in the adjacent seat feels very annoyed by the anomaly notification. In addition, since the music (BGM), voice, and sound effects output from the game machine being played becomes difficult to hear due to abnormal notification, the exhilaration and immersion that comes from the music and sound output from the game machine are lost. Players are confused.
The above problem does not occur only in pachinko machines, but can also occur in other game machines having opening and closing bodies such as front door frames and inner frames, such as slot machines and parrots.

[First embodiment]
<Pachinko machine>
As shown in FIG. 2, a gaming machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as a pachinko machine 10) according to the present embodiment includes a rectangular outer frame 11 forming an outer shell, and an outer frame 11 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. and a game machine main body 12 which is attached.

The outer frame 11 is a fixed frame that is formed in a rectangular frame shape that is open in the front and rear and is installed in an installation frame stand (so-called island equipment) of the game arcade in a vertical posture. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine body 12
is an inner frame 13 (frame body) rotatably supported to the front side (player side) by the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 1
3, a front door frame 14 (frame body) rotatably supported to the front side (player side), and a back pack unit 15 rotatably supported to the inner frame 13 to the rear side (far side from the player). (box-shaped body), and has a configuration to be locked by a locking device 131 (see FIG. 4). A prepaid card type ball rental device (CR unit) (not shown) is provided on the left side of the outer frame 11 .

The inner frame 13 is supported by one of the right side and the left side of the outer frame 11 with one of the right side and the left side as the supporting side. The front door frame 14 has one of the right and left sides of the inner frame 13 (the left side in FIGS. 3 and 4) with one of the right side and the left side (the left side in FIGS. 3 and 4) as the support side. )
supported by The back pack unit 15 has one of the right side and the left side as the supporting side,
It is supported by either the right side or the left side of the inner frame 13 (the left side in FIGS. 3 and 4). The locking device 131 has a cylinder lock 75 provided at the bottom of the right side or the left side of the game machine main body 12 (lower right side in FIG. and a function of making the front door frame 14 unopenable with respect to the inner frame 13 . In the pachinko machine 10, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 75 (see FIG. 7) and then turned to the right, the inner frame 1
The function of making the front door frame 14 unopenable with respect to the outer frame 11 is released, and when it is rotated to the left, the function of making the front door frame 14 unopenable relative to the inner frame 13 is released. The locking device 131 will also be described in detail in FIG.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the front side of the inner frame 13, and has an elliptical window portion 21 that opens in the thickness direction, and a see-through glass plate, synthetic resin material, or the like that is fitted in the window portion 21. and a window panel 22 formed by (see FIG. 3).

Further, the front door frame 14 includes an indicator lamp device 23A as light emitting means arranged on the right side of the window portion 21, an indicator lamp device 23B as light emitting means arranged on the left side of the window portion 21, The error display lamp portion 24 provided at the top of the pachinko machine 10, the upper right side (speaker portion 26A) and upper left side (speaker portion 26B) of the gaming machine main body 12, and the lower left side (speaker portion 2
6C) and speaker units 26A to 26A as audio output means and navigation means disposed in and
26C. In addition, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has three speaker units 26A.
∼ 26C, but it is sufficient if one or more speaker units are provided, and for example, four or more speaker units may be provided. The indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B have light emitting bodies (not shown) such as light bulbs in which light emitting elements such as LEDs (light emitting diodes), filaments, and discharge elements are enclosed in a spherical shell of glass, and when a big hit or a predetermined reach Lighting and blinking are performed according to changes in the game state in the above. The error display lamp part 24 lights up when a predetermined error occurs. Also, the speaker units 26A to 26C
can output voice, sound effects, etc. Then, the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are lit and blinked (luminous effect) in accordance with the pattern variation effect on the pattern display device 91, which will be described later, and voices and sound effects are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C (audio effect). Thus, the indicator lamp device 23A
, 23B and the speaker units 26A to 26C are configured to function as effect executing means.

Further, the front door frame 14 has an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge forward (toward the player) on the lower side of the window portion 21 . The upper bulging portion 31 and the lower bulging portion 32 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The upper bulging portion 31 has an upper plate 33 which is provided inside so as to open upward and serves as a receiving plate for storing game balls. Further, the lower bulging portion 32 has a lower plate 34 which is provided inside so as to open upward and serves as a receiving plate for storing game balls. The upper tray 33 has a bottom surface that gently slopes from the left side to the right side and is tapered toward the right side, and the game ball shooting mechanism 110 aligns the stored game balls one by one. (See FIG. 7).

When game balls become surplus in the upper tray 33, the game balls are discharged to the lower tray 34. - 特許庁In other words, lower plate 3
4 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33 . In addition, the lower bulging portion 32
is provided with a lever capable of sliding in the left-right direction, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 34 are discharged from the lower portion of the lower tray 34 by the player sliding the lever. ing. In this embodiment, the upper bulging portion 31 and the lower bulging portion 32 are integrally formed with the front door frame 14 at the lower position of the front door frame 14, and are adjusted to open and close the front door frame 14. The upper bulging portion 31 and the lower bulging portion 32 are also configured to open and close.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a shooting handle 41 as shooting means at the lower right position of the game machine main body 12 . The shooting handle 41 is biased counterclockwise (leftward), and the game ball shooting mechanism 1 is activated by the player rotating the shooting handle 41 clockwise (rightward).
10 is operated, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 33 are moved to the game area 1 of the game board 81 (see FIG. 8).
One ball at a time is fired toward 04. In this embodiment, the shooting operation of the game ball by the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is performed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.6 sec). Further, in this embodiment, the number of game balls shot by the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is controlled so as not to exceed 100 balls per minute.

The shooting handle 41 is configured so that the game ball hitting force of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 changes according to the amount of rotation thereof, and as the player rotates the shooting handle 41 clockwise (right). The game ball shooting mechanism 110 gradually increases the hitting force of the game ball by the game ball shooting mechanism 110 and rotates the shooting handle 41 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) by the player.
It is configured so that the hitting force of the game ball due to is gradually reduced. That is, as the player rotates the shooting handle 41 clockwise (right), the reaching position of the game ball launched by the game ball shooting mechanism 110 on the game board 81 shifts from the left side to the right side.

The shooting handle 41 is provided with a touch sensor 41a for detecting that the player is touching the handle, and a shooting stop switch 41b for temporarily stopping the shooting of the game ball. A game ball is shot by the game ball shooting mechanism 110 when the touch sensor 41a is turned on by rotating the shooting handle 41 and the shooting stop switch 41b is turned off. is on, the game ball is not shot.

Further, an operation button 35 as an operation means is provided on the upper surface of the upper bulging portion 31 . The operation button 35 is used for selecting the type of effect (type of effect), and the player can select the type of effect by operating the operation button 35 . The operation button 35 is
As shown in FIG. 18, the decision button 35a arranged in the center, the left direction button 35b arranged on the left side of the decision button 35a, and the right direction button 3 arranged on the right side of the decision button 35a.
5c. When selecting the type of effect, the player selects the type of effect by pressing the left button 35b and the right button 35c, and determines the type of effect by pressing the enter button 35a arranged in the center. be able to. Furthermore, on the upper surface of the upper bulging portion 31, there is a ball lending button (not shown) for instructing the lending of game balls within the value balance (valuable balance) of the card inserted in the CR unit, and a CR unit. A return button (not shown) is provided for instructing return of the inserted card.

A passage forming unit 50 is attached to the rear surface of the front door frame 14 as shown in FIGS. The passage forming unit 50 is made of synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper tray passage 51 leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage 52 leading to the lower tray 34 . In the passage forming unit 50, a receptacle portion 5 projecting rearward and open upward is provided at an upper corner of the passage forming unit 50.
3 is formed, and by partitioning the receptacle portion 53 into right and left by a partition wall 54, the entrance portions of the front door side upper tray passage 51 and the front door side lower tray passage 52 are formed. The upstream side of the front door side upper tray passage 51 and the front door side lower tray passage 52 communicates with a game ball distribution section 225 which will be described later, and the game balls entering the front door side upper tray passage 51 are guided to the upper tray 33, A game ball entering the front door side lower tray passage 52 is guided to the lower tray 34.例文帳に追加

Protruding shafts 61 and 62 are provided at the upper and lower ends of the rotation base end side (right side in FIG. 6) on the rear surface of the front door frame 14 . These projecting shafts 61 and 62 constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13 . As shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of hook fittings 63 extending rearward are vertically arranged side by side on the front end side of the rotation on the back surface of the front door frame 14 (on the left side in FIG. 6). These hooks 63
constitutes a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13 .

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described with reference to FIG.
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 71 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . Support metal fittings 72 and 73 are attached to the upper end and lower end of the front surface of the resin base 71 on the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 7). Although illustration is omitted, the support fittings 72, 7
The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the projecting shafts 61 and 62 of the front door frame 14 into the shaft holes. there is

Insertion holes 74 for inserting hooks 63 provided on the rear surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the front surface of the resin base 71 on the front end side of the rotation (on the right side in FIG. 7). The pachinko machine 10 has a structure in which a locking device for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13 . Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened by engaging the hook 63 with the locking device through the insertion hole 74 .

A cylinder lock 75 for unlocking the locking device is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 71 . The cylinder lock 75 is integrated with a locking device, and the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13 by turning a key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 75 to the left. The inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11 by turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 75 to the right. The upper right corner of the resin base 71, that is, the front door frame 1
4 is formed with a substantially rectangular opening 71b penetrating inside and outside (that is, in the front-rear direction). A first monitoring device 250 for monitoring opening of the front door frame 14 is provided in the opening 71b.

A substantially elliptical window hole 76 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 71 . Resin base 71
A game board 81 is detachably attached to the . The game board 81 is made of plywood, and the game board 8
1 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 76 of the resin base 71 (see FIG. 8).

<Game board 81>
As shown in FIG. 8, the game board 81 is a substantially rectangular plate member made of plywood or synthetic resin. The game board 81 is provided on the front side (on the side of the player) and is curved into a substantially circular shape.
It has a guide portion 103 (hereinafter also referred to as a guide rail) consisting of rails (inner rail 101 and outer rail 102). The guide rail 103 has a function of guiding the game ball launched by the game ball launching mechanism 110 to the upper left part of the game board 81 . The player can use the firing handle 4
1 is operated to launch a game ball into a substantially circular game area 104 defined by the guide rail 103 to play a game. In addition, at the end of the guide rail 103, a return portion 103a is provided so that the game ball launched into the game area 104 does not return into the guide rail 103. As shown in FIG. A game ball hit into the game area 104 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided in the back pack unit 15 (not shown), and a ball detection signal of the detection sensor is sent to a hall computer (not shown). is configured to be output to Although the detection sensor is provided in the back pack unit 15 in this embodiment, it may be provided in another location, for example, the game board 81 .

In addition, the game board 81 is router-processed so that a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the board thickness direction are formed at appropriate positions. In each opening of the game board 81, a general winning opening 82, a first starting opening 84a, a second starting opening 84b, a variable winning device 83 and an out opening 87 are provided. The position and number of openings formed in the game area 104 of the game board 81 can be changed as needed. The game board 81 is provided with through gates 85 on the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion. A main display device 98 is provided at a position of the game board 81 that can be visually recognized by the player. A variable display unit 86 is provided in the center of the game board 81 . game board 8
1, a large number of game nails 89 are provided in the game area 104, and a rotation guide member 88 (so-called "windmill") is arranged on the right side of the game board 81. As shown in FIG. The rotation guide member 88 is arranged on the game board 81 so as to freely rotate upon contact with a game ball flowing down the game area 104 . Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the game area 104 contacts the game nail 89 or the rotation guide member 88, the flowing direction of the game ball changes irregularly (randomly).

In addition, in this embodiment, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area 104 continues to flow down without being discharged from the game area 104 . In addition, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of the game ball into the out hole 87, the entry of the game ball into various winning holes is also referred to as winning. Also, entering the through gate 85 refers to continuing to flow down the game area 104 without being ejected from the game area 104 after passing through the gate provided in the game area 104 . The entry of the ball into the through gate 85 is also referred to as a prize, as is the entry into various prize openings. Further, the game ball flowing down the game area 104 while contacting the game nail 89 and/or the rotation guide member 88 is also called rolling.

<Starting Prize Gate>
As shown in FIG. 8, the first starting port 84a and the second starting port 84b are arranged side by side in a vertical positional relationship, that is, in the vertical direction. Here, the first starting opening 84a located on the upper side is a constantly open type winning opening that always opens upward within the game area 104. As shown in FIG. In addition, on both left and right sides of the second starting port 84b located on the lower side, an electric accessory (so-called electric tulip (electric chu)) consisting of a pair of opening and closing members 84b1 configured to open and close the second starting port 84b. is provided. The pair of opening/closing members 84b1 is connected to an electric accessory driving portion 84b2 as a driving means, and the pair of opening/closing members 84b1 closes the second starting port 84b as the electric accessory driving portion 84b2 is driven. It is configured to be displaced between a position and an open position for opening. In this embodiment, a pair of opening/closing members 84b1 for opening and closing the second starting port 84b are arranged on the left and right side portions sandwiching the second starting port 84b, and the pair of opening/closing members 84b are arranged in accordance with the driving of the electric accessory driving portion 84b2.
1's mutual position is driven towards and away from each other.

That is, in the present embodiment, the first starting port 84a is configured so that the game ball flowing down the game area 104 can always win a prize with a certain probability, and the second starting port 84b includes the electric accessory driving section 84b2.
is configured to vary the winning probability of the game ball by driving the . Here, the opening/closing members 84b1 provided on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 84b are displaced to the closed position (hereinafter referred to as
In the electric work closed state), the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b is prevented, and the first starting port 84
The probability that the game ball will enter the second starting port 84b is lower than the probability that the game ball will enter the slot a.
In addition, in a state in which the opening/closing member 84b1 is displaced to the open position (hereinafter referred to as the electrical open state), the game ball received by the opening/closing member 84b1 is guided to the second starting port 84b, and is played to the first starting port 84a. The probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 84b is higher than the probability that the ball wins.

It should be noted that, instead of the above-described electrical work closed state and electrical work open state, the electric accessory is the second start port 84
It is also possible to switch between a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter b (a state in which a game ball can be entered unlike the closed state) and a state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the second start port 84b.

<Variable winning device>
As shown in FIG. 8, the variable prize winning device 83 has a rectangular plate-shaped opening and closing door for freely opening and closing a special prize winning opening 83a (hereinafter referred to as a "big prize winning opening") as a special prize winning means that opens in the game area 104. (Opening/closing member, opening/closing means) 83b is provided, and a variable prize winning driving section 83 as a driving means
The open/close door 83b is configured to be displaced between a closed state in which the open/close door 83b is closed and an open state in which the open/close door 83b is opened. In this embodiment, the opening/closing door 83b is configured to swing back and forth to open and close the special winning opening. FIG. showing.

In this embodiment, the opening/closing door 83b is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. When the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 83b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize. The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) means that the opening/closing door 83b is set to an open state,
3a refers to a mode in which game balls can be entered. Further, in the present embodiment, in the opening and closing execution mode, after the opening and closing door 83b is set to the open state, until it is set to the closed state again, it is regarded as one round game. The number of times of opening and closing is arbitrary. For example, the opening/closing door 83b may be opened and closed multiple times (two times or more) in one round game. It will happen.

The player maximizes the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 41, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area 104 from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 103 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting (so-called right hitting) to the variable display unit 86
The game ball can be guided to the variable prize winning device 83 by avoiding such as.

<Detection sensor>
The game board 81 detects the entry of game balls in the vicinity of various winning openings such as a general winning opening 82, a first starting opening 84a, a second starting opening 84b, and a large winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83. Detection sensors 152 to 154b are provided (see FIG. 17). In addition, these detection sensors 152-15
4b is arranged on the back side of the game board 81, the detection sensor 152 detects the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 82, and the detection sensor 154a detects the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 84a. The detection sensor 154b detects entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 84b, and the detection sensor 153 detects entry of a game ball into the large winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83. Detection sensors 152-15
4b is wired to the main control board 301 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and detection of game balls by the detection sensors 152 to 154b (general prize winning opening 82, first starting opening 84a,
A predetermined number of prize balls (game balls obtained by winning prizes) are paid out triggered by the winning of game balls into various prize winning ports of the second start port 84b and the large prize winning port 83a of the variable prize winning device 83. there is

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when the detection sensor 152 detects that the ball has entered the general winning hole 82, and the detection sensor 154a detects the first starting hole 84.
When a ball entering a is detected, three prize balls are paid out, and when the detection sensor 154b detects a ball entering the second starting port 84b, two prize balls are paid out, When it is detected that the ball has entered the big prize opening 83a of the variable prize winning device 83, 13 prize balls are paid out. It should be noted that the number of prize balls to be paid out due to the winning of game balls into various prize-winning ports is not limited to the above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball to the first starting port 84a and the number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball to the second starting port 84b may be the same number. In addition, a plurality of (two or more) variable winning devices 83 are provided in the game area 104 of the game board 81, and the number of prize balls to be paid out for each winning to the large winning opening 83a of the plurality of variable winning devices 83 is varied. For example, when two variable winning devices 83 are provided, the number of prize balls paid out by winning to the big winning opening 83a of each variable winning device 83 is 13.
and 14.

The out port 87 is provided at the lowest part of the game area 104 of the game board 81 , and the game balls that have not entered various prize winning ports are discharged from the game area 104 through the out port 87 . The out port 87 is provided on the back side of the game board 81 and has a detection sensor 156 for detecting an entry of a game ball (see FIG. 17).

Further, each through gate 85 is provided on the back side of the game board 81, and includes a detection sensor 155 for detecting the entry of a game ball (see FIG. 17). The detection sensors 155 and 156 are wire-connected to the main control board 301 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but the pachinko machine 10 is different from the case where a ball is entered into various prize-winning holes. If a ball enters 87 or each through gate 85, no prize ball is paid out.

The detection sensors 152 to 156 need only be able to individually detect the entry of game balls into various winning holes, and for example, an electromagnetic induction sensor or a transmissive photosensor can be used.

<symbol display>
The main display device 98 has a main display unit 93, a character object display unit 94, and a round display unit 97, and is a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display device, or the like. is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices. The main display device 98 is provided on the game board 81 so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof, and is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22. ing. Also, the main display device 9
The distance (gap) between 8 and the window panel 22 is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. For this reason, game balls are prevented from flowing down in the gap between the main display device 98 and the window panel 22 , that is, in front of the main display device 98 .

<Main display unit 93>
The main display portion 93 has a first result display portion 93a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the first start opening 84a, and the display portion 93a for displaying the result of the internal lottery based on the winning at the second starting opening 84b. and a second result display portion 93b for displaying the result of the internal lottery (see FIG. 17).

<First result display section 93a>
The first result display unit 93a executes the variable display of symbols with the winning of the first starting port 84a as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, it is performed based on the winning of the first starting port 84a. Display the results of the internal lottery. Specifically, with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 84a as a trigger, the first result display section 93a sequentially turns on and off to perform blinking variable display, and finally the first result display section 93a. is designed to display a plurality of types (types) of special symbols depending on the lighting position (stop result) that is definitely lit. When the result of this internal lottery corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 93a displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. .

<Second result display portion 93b>
The second result display unit 93b executes the variable display of the symbols with the winning to the second starting port 84b as a trigger, and the result of stopping the variable display is performed based on the winning to the second starting port 84b. Display the results of the internal lottery. Specifically, with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b as a trigger, the second result display section 93b sequentially turns on and off to perform blinking variable display, and finally the second result display section 93b. is designed to display a plurality of types (types) of special symbols (hereinafter also referred to as special symbols) depending on the lighting position (stop result) that is definitely lit. If the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 93
b displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the special figure is a pattern for notification indicating the result of the internal lottery such as whether or not it is a big hit (special game). It is possible to display multiple types of special figures. Specifically, the special figures that can be displayed in the first result display portion 93a and the second result display portion 93b include a plurality of kinds of special figures as a big win display result that can recognize a big win, and a loss that can be recognized as a big win. One type of special figure is set as a display result. Then, one special figure is determined according to the result of the lottery per special figure, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the previously decided special figure is stopped and displayed in the first result display section 93a or the second result display section 93b. be done.

In the following description, the variable display performed in the first result display unit 93a is referred to as "special figure 1 variable display", and as a result of the special figure 1 variable display, the fixed stop display is displayed in the first result display unit 93a Toku-zu is also called Toku-zu 1. Similarly, the variation display performed in the second result display unit 93b is referred to as "second special figure variation display", and as a result of the second special figure variation display, the special figure that is fixed and displayed in the second result display unit 93b is also called special figure 2.

<Accessory display unit 94>
The character object display unit 94 executes variable display of symbols with the winning of each through gate 85 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 85 is performed. to display the results of Specifically, when a game ball enters each of the through gates 85, the character object display unit 94 sequentially turns on and off to perform a blinking variable display, and finally, the character object display unit 94 A plurality of types of normal patterns (hereinafter also referred to as normal patterns) are displayed depending on the lighting position (stop result) that is definitely lit. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state, the role item display unit 94 displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. do. In this electric operation open state, the opening/closing member 84b1 of the electric accessory provided in the second starting port 84b is in an open state.

<Round display portion 97>
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when winning the jackpot determination, one jackpot game is determined from a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) described later. A plurality of types of jackpot games with different numbers of rounds are set, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game won is notified by the round display section 97. - 特許庁In this embodiment, two types of “15 times” and “2 times” are set as the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the number of rounds is notified by the lighting pattern of the LED provided in the round display section 97 . In this embodiment, the round display unit 97 is provided with two LEDs arranged on the left and right, and when the left LED lights up, it is notified that the number of rounds is "15" jackpot game, and the right LED By turning on the LED, it is notified that the number of rounds is "twice" in the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 93 and character object display unit 94 are configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as segment displays and dot displays, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix. The patterns to be variably displayed on the main display unit 93 and the character object display unit 94 include a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched for display, or the like can be adopted. In addition, in the present embodiment, the round display unit 97 notifies the number of round games by means of light emission display using LEDs, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. , a dot matrix, or another type of display device may be used to notify the number of round games. The display areas of the main display section 93, the character display section 94, and the round display section 97 are the same as those of the pattern display device 9.
1, which is set to be extremely small compared to the display area for the notification effects, which will be described later. It is difficult to easily recognize each piece of information in the lighting state of the character item display section 94 and the round display section 97 .

The variable display unit 86 also includes a pattern display device 91 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. In addition, the variable display unit 86 is the pattern display device 9
A center frame 92 is provided so as to surround 1. This center frame 9
2 is provided so as to bulge toward a window panel 22 provided on its front side. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 91, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

<Pattern display device 91>
The pattern display device 91 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display screen G of the pattern display device 91 faces the front side (player side) of the game board 81 .
1 is detachably attached. This pattern display device 91 is triggered by establishment of a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b), and the variable display of decorative patterns for production (hereinafter also referred to as decorative patterns). Start. That is, the pattern display device 91 performs the variable display in the first result display portion 93a of the main display portion 93 and the second result display portion 93a of the main display portion 93.
When the variable display is executed in the result display section 93b, the variable display is executed accordingly. The pattern display device 91 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or the like, or may be a drum type pattern display device or a dot matrix type pattern display device. Various conventionally known display devices capable of stopping and variably displaying various patterns such as .

As shown in FIG. 9, the pattern display device 91 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 capable of variably displaying decoration symbols. Mouth 84b
Triggered by the winning of , the decoration patterns start to change in each of the pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Effective stop positions of decorative symbols are set in each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, and a stop symbol effective line is formed by combining the effective stop positions of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 by means of symbol variation performance. The pattern combination of the decoration figure stopped and displayed on L is derived. In the symbol display device 91 of the present embodiment, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are set in a laterally arranged manner, and the effective stop position of the decorative figure is set for each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3. It is determined one by one, and a pattern variation effect consisting of three rows of decorations is performed. That is, one stop symbol effective line L is set in the symbol display device 91 of the present embodiment. In the following description, the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z2, and the symbol row Z3 may be referred to in order from the left.

In addition, the display area of the decorative figure in each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the symbol display device 91 is the first
Compared with the result display part 93a and the second result display part 93b, it is composed of a large area, and the decorative figure is displayed much larger than the special figure. Therefore, the player can visually recognize whether the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L of the symbol display device 91 is a big win or is a miss.

The symbol display device 91 is configured to perform variable display such that the decorative symbols move along a predetermined variation direction (vertical direction from top to bottom in this embodiment) when the symbol variation effect is started. The variably displayed decorative figures are stop-displayed at the effective stop positions of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 in a predetermined stop order. In addition, the symbol display device 91 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the effective stop positions of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 before the completion of the symbol variation effect, and displays the decoration symbols of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3. When the figure is stopped and displayed, one pattern variation effect is completed. That is, the pattern variation production (special figure 1 variation display and second special figure variation display) is performed based on one start reservation information (special figure 1 and special figure 2) From the start of fluctuation to the fixed stop 1
It is designed to be executed as times.

Here, "variable display" refers to a state in which the decorative symbols displayed at the effective stop positions in each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are varied in a predetermined order. In addition, the "determined stop" of the decoration figure means that the decoration figure is in the effective stop position in each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3. This is the state in which the display is stopped. In addition, the "temporary stop" of the decoration figure means that the decoration figure displayed so as to stay at the effective stop position in each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 is not stopped continuously during the special figure fluctuation interval time. be. That is, the temporary stop of the decoration image includes a state in which the decoration image is displayed in a swinging state at the effective stop position, and a state in which the decoration image is stopped and displayed for a time shorter than the special symbol variation interval time.

Also, in the first result display unit 93a and the symbol display device 91, the special figure 1 variation display and the symbol variation effect related to the special figure 1 variation display are started, and the special figure 1 and the decoration figure are fixed and stopped. Similarly,
In the second result display unit 93b and the symbol display device 91, the second special figure variation display and the symbol variation effect related to the second special figure variation display are started, and the special figure 2 and the decoration figure are fixed and displayed. In addition, the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b, the special figure fluctuation display is not performed at the same time, and the special figure fluctuation in either the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b If the display is performed, the other special figure fluctuation display is not performed.

Here, the symbol display device 91 according to the present embodiment has "0" in each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3.
10 types of numbers from ~ "9" are set as basic decoration figures, and the decoration figures are each symbol row Z1,
Z2 and Z3 are changed and displayed in order. It should be noted that the pattern display device 91 is not limited to this, and the pattern display device 91 is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbol rows, the scrolling direction of each symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of a picture and a number instead of only numbers, or may be a picture only. In addition, the decoration diagram includes a first identification pattern that allows the player to definitely recognize that a variable probability state (described later) will be given after the end of the jackpot game, and the possibility of being given a variable probability state after the jackpot game. It is classified as a second identification pattern that can be recognized non-deterministically.

Here, as the first identification pattern, it is possible to appropriately set a basic decorative pattern, or to use a predetermined special decorative pattern other than the basic decorative pattern. For example, "1", "3", "5
, "7", and "9" and even number patterns of "0", "2", "4", "6", and "8" are used as the first identification patterns, and "0" and "2" are used. , "4", "6", and "8" can be used as the second identification symbols. In this way, the player can display each symbol row Z on the symbol display device 91.
1, Z2, Z3 effective stop positions (stop symbol effective line L), it is possible to grasp whether or not a winning game is given by the decoration figures of each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 which are fixedly stopped and displayed. ing. In this embodiment, the winning symbol combination is a symbol combination in which the same decoration symbol is fixed and displayed at the effective stop position of each symbol row (for example, "1-1-1", "2-2-2").
etc.) are set.

The symbol combination of the decoration figures that can recognize the big win becomes a winning display result, and a big winning game advantageous to the player is awarded after the completion of the symbol variation performance. On the other hand, if even one pattern in all rows fixedly displayed at the effective stop position of the pattern display device 91 is of a different type, the combination of symbols is in principle "missing" in which no jackpot game is awarded. can recognize A pattern combination of decoration figures that allows recognition of this deviation is a result of the deviation display.

Further, the symbol display device 91 displays a symbol combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the displayed special symbols as a result of the special symbol fluctuation display in the first result display section 93a and the second result display section 93b. That is, the special symbols displayed on the first result display portion 93a and the second result display portion 93b correspond to the symbol combinations of the decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display device 91, and when the symbol variation effect is completed, , The special symbols are confirmed and stopped on the first result display portion 93a and the second result display portion 93b, and the decoration symbols are confirmed and stopped on each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the symbol display device 91. there is In addition, it is not necessary to make the pattern combination of the decoration pattern for the special pattern one-to-one,
It is also possible to make one special symbol correspond to a symbol combination of a plurality of decoration symbols.

The center frame 92 includes a first holding lamp portion 95a provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 91, a second holding lamp portion 95b provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 91, and a pattern display. and a third holding lamp portion 96 provided in the upper region of the device 91 .

<Holding lamp>
The first reservation lamp part 95a has an LED for displaying the number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 84a, and the same number of LEDs as the reserved number of game balls are lit. The pachinko machine 10 can reserve up to four game balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs provided in the first reservation lamp portion 95a is four, which is the same as the maximum number of game balls to be reserved. Also, the first pending lamp portion 95a corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 93a and the symbol display device 91. FIG. That is, the number of reservations displayed on the first reservation lamp portion 95a is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the first start port 84a, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display of the first result display portion 93a is performed. be.

The second reservation lamp part 95b has an LED for displaying the number of reserved game balls that have won the second starting port 84b, and the same number of LEDs as the reserved number of game balls are lit. The pachinko machine 10 can reserve up to four game balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs provided in the second reservation lamp portion 95b is four, which is the same as the maximum number of game balls to be reserved. Also, the second pending lamp portion 95b corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 93b and the pattern display device 91. FIG. That is, the number of reservations displayed in the second reservation lamp portion 95b is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the second start port 84b, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display of the second result display portion 93b is performed. be.

The third reservation lamp part 96 has an LED for displaying the number of reserved game balls that have won each through gate 85, and the LED lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. This third holding lamp portion 96
, the pachinko machine 10 can hold up to four game balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs provided in the third reservation lamp portion 96 is four, which is the same as the maximum number of game balls to be reserved.
Also, the second holding lamp portion 95b corresponds to the variable display of the character object display portion 94. FIG. That is, the number of reservations displayed on the third reservation lamp section 96 is incremented by 1 when a game ball enters each through gate 85, and is decremented by 1 each time a variable display is performed on the character display section 94. .

The pachinko machine 10 is configured to notify the number of game balls on hold by lighting the LEDs of the respective holding lamps 95a, 95b, and 96. Other configurations, such as informing the number of game balls that have entered the starting port 84a, the second starting port 84b, and the respective through gates 85, may be used. In the pachinko machine 10, the number of LEDs provided in each of the holding lamp units 95a to 96 is four corresponding to the maximum holding number of 4. ”-“2”, the LEDs are “lit” in order from the left or right, and when the number of holds is “3”-“4”, by “blinking” in order from the left or right,
The number of reservations may be notified to the player.

The game ball shooting mechanism 110 is attached below the window hole 76 in the resin base 71, as shown in FIG. The game ball shooting mechanism 110 is composed of an electromagnetic solenoid 111, a shooting rail 112, and a ball feed mechanism 113. When an electrical signal is input to the solenoid 111, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 moves in the expansion/contraction direction. , the game ball placed on the shooting rail 112 by the ball feeding mechanism 113 is launched toward the game area.

Between the launch rail 112 and the inner and outer rails 101, 102 attached to the game board 81, there is a gap of a predetermined interval, and below this gap is the foul formed in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. A ball passage 55 is provided (see FIG. 3). Therefore, if the game ball fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 110 does not reach the upper part of the game area, the inner and outer rails 101
, 102, the foul ball enters the foul ball passage 55. As shown in FIG. The foul ball passage 55 communicates with the front door side lower tray passage 52, and the game ball entering the foul ball passage 55 is discharged to the lower tray 34. - 特許庁

Below the launch rail 112 in the resin base 71, a substantially rectangular opening 71c penetrating inward and outward (that is, in the front-rear direction) is formed (see FIG. 5). A second monitoring device 290 for monitoring opening of the inner frame 13 is fitted in the opening 71c. Details of the second monitoring device 290 will be described later.

A passage forming portion (see FIG. 3) 121 is provided on the resin base 71 to the left of the firing rail 112 so as to pass through the resin base 71 in the front-rear direction. 10 in the passage forming portion 121
1, a body-side upper tray passage 122 and a body-side lower tray passage 123 are formed. The upstream sides of the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 communicate with a game ball distribution section 225 which will be described later. Further, below the passage forming portion 121, the socket portion 53 of the passage forming unit 50 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted, and below the main body side upper tray passage 122, the front door side upper tray passage 51 is provided. A front door side upper tray passage 51 is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage 123 (see FIG. 6).

Below the passage forming portion 121 in the resin base 71, an opening/closing member 124 (see FIG. 10) for opening and closing the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 is attached. The opening/closing member 124 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction by a support shaft provided at its lower end, and is urged to a front position (not shown) to close the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 . A biasing member is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening/closing member 124 rises as shown to close the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123. As shown in FIG. As a result, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage 122 or the main body side lower tray passage 123, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the stored balls fall down. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the front door frame 14
The opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the urging force by the receptacle portion 53 provided in the passage forming unit 50 . In this state, the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage 51 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage 52 communicate with each other.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described. 10 is a rear view of the inner frame 13. FIG.
A locking device 131 is provided on the back surface of the resin base 71 on the rotating front end side (left side in FIG. 10). Unlocking of the frame 14 is performed. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 10, a rear pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the rear pack unit 15 is provided on the upper left side of the rear surface of the inner frame 13 .

A bearing metal fitting 132 is attached to the rear surface of the resin base 71 on the rotation base end side (the right side in FIG. 10). Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing metal fitting 132 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction. A fastening hole 134 for fastening the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame 13 is provided on the rear surface of the resin base 71 .

A plurality of locking metal fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 71, and these locking metal fittings 1
A game board 81 is attached to the resin base 71 by 35 as described above.
Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 81 will be described. 11 is a perspective view of the game board 81 viewed from the rear, and FIG. 12 is a rear view showing a state in which the main controller unit 160 is removed from the game board 81. As shown in FIG.

A variable display unit 86 arranged in the center of the game board 81 is provided with a synthetic resin frame cover 141 that covers the center frame 92 from behind and protrudes rearward from the frame cover 141 . The pattern display device 91 described above is attached, and a display control device for driving the pattern display device is attached (not shown). The pattern display device 91 and the display control device are stacked in the front-rear direction (the pattern display device is in the front and the display control device is in the rear), and the sound lamp control device unit 142 is mounted behind it. The audio lamp controller unit 142 includes an audio light emission controller 400 (FIGS. 10-1).
2 (not shown) and a mounting base 144 on which the sound emission control device 400 is mounted.

The audio light emission control device 400 includes an audio lamp control board that controls audio, lamp display, and the display control device 500 according to instructions from the main control device 300, which will be described later. It is housed in a board box 145 made of.

A collective plate unit (not shown) is provided below the variable display unit 86 on the back surface of the game board 81 . The gathering plate unit is provided with a game ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have entered various winning holes, a winning detection mechanism for detecting winning of game balls into various winning holes, and the like.

The game ball recovery mechanism will be explained with reference to FIG. A recovery passage 151 is formed corresponding to the part and gathered at one place on the downstream side. Therefore, any game ball that has won a prize such as the general prize-winning port 82 or the like passes through the recovery passage 151 to the game board 81.
gather below. Below the game board 81 there is a discharge passage, which will be described later, and the game balls collected under the game board 81 are discharged into the discharge passage by the collection passage 151 . Incidentally, the out port 87 is similarly connected to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the prize winning ports are discharged into the discharge passage through the out port 87.

Similarly, the winning detection mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. 12. The collective plate unit is provided with detection sensors 152 at positions corresponding to the general winning openings 82 on the front side of the game board 81 . A detection sensor 153 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 83, and detection sensors 154a and 154b are provided at positions corresponding to the first and second starting ports 84a and 84b. Winning of game balls is detected by these detection sensors 152 to 154b. Further, a detection sensor 155 for detecting game balls passing through the through gate 85 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 86 outside the gathering plate unit. A detection sensor 156 (see FIG. 7) is provided at a position corresponding to the outlet 87 .

As shown in FIG. 11, a main controller unit 160 is mounted on the rear surface of the game board 81 so as to cover the collecting plate unit from the rear side. The configuration of main controller unit 160 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the main controller unit 160. As shown in FIG.
The main controller unit 160 has a synthetic resin mount 161 on which a main controller 300 (not shown in FIG. 13) is mounted. The main control device 300 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that governs the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power supply, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a board box 163 made of, for example.

The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing portion 164 as sealing means,
The substrate box 163 is thereby sealed. The sealing part 164 is attached to the board box 163
At least one of them is used for the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover are combined in an unopenable manner. and are connected in an unopenable manner. Sealing part 164
The sealing process by prevents unauthorized opening after sealing, and in the unlikely event that unauthorized opening is performed, such a situation can be detected early and easily. It is possible to perform the sealing process again. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the plurality of sealing portions 164 . When the circuit board box 163 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the main control circuit board housed therein, or when the main control circuit board is inspected, the connecting portion between the sealing portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing portion is removed. disconnect. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other sealing portion. If the history of the opening of the circuit board box 163 is left in the circuit board box 163, it can be easily detected that the circuit board box 163 has been illegally opened.

A plurality of coupling pieces 165 are provided on one of the short sides of the board box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These connecting pieces 165 are in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of connecting pieces 166 formed on the mounting table 161 , and the connecting pieces 165 and the connecting pieces 166 connect the board box 163 and the mounting table 161 together. A sealing process is performed.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be explained. 14 is a front view of the back pack unit 15. FIG.
The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and for the back pack 201, a dispensing mechanism section 202, a discharge passage board 203 (see FIG. 4), and a control device assembly unit 204.
is installed. The back pack 201 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is open.
large enough to enclose the

A pair of upper and lower locking pins 214 are provided at the right end of the base portion 211 when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. By inserting the locking pins 214 into the bearing portions 133 provided on the inner frame 13, the back pack is formed. A unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 . Further, the fastener 2 for fastening to the fastening target hole 134 provided in the inner frame 13 is provided on the base portion 211 .
15 is provided, and the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by fitting the fastener 215 into the fastening hole 134 .

A payout mechanism part 202 is arranged on the base part 211 so as to bypass the protective cover part 212 . That is, a tank 221 opened upward is provided at the uppermost part of the back pack 201, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. A tank rail 222 gently sloping downstream is connected to the lower side of the tank 221 , and a vertically extending case rail 223 is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222 . A dispensing device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 pass through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 224 to the game ball distribution portion 22 provided at the base portion 211 of the back pack 201.
5.

The game ball distribution unit 225 distributes the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to the upper tray 33 and the lower tray 34.
Alternatively, it has a function of distributing it to any of the discharge passages described later, and the inner opening communicates with the upper tray 33 via the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage 51 described above, and the central opening 123 and the front door side lower tray passage 52 to the lower tray 34, and the outer opening is formed to communicate with the discharge passage.

A back pack substrate (electric power receiving section or external power receiving section) 229 is installed in the dispensing mechanism section 202 . A main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied to the back pack board 229, and the power supply is turned on or off by switching operation of the power switch 229a.

At the lower end of the base portion 211, a discharge passage board 203 (
4) and controller assembly unit 204 are attached. The discharge passage board 203 has a rearwardly open discharge passage formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204 , and the opening of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204 . The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game balls to the island facility of the game hall, etc., and the game balls drawn out from the recovery passage 151 or the like to the discharge passage pass through the discharge passage to be discharged to the pachinko machine 10.
Discharged to the outside.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a mounting base 241 having a horizontally long shape, and the mounting base 241 is equipped with a payout control device 242 and a power supply and launch control device 243 (hereinafter also referred to as a power supply and launch control device 243). there is The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are arranged so that the payout control device 242 is located behind the pachinko machine 10 .

The payout control device 242 contains a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 in a board box 244 . The payout command signal from the payout control device 242 to the payout device 224 is relayed by the back pack board 229 described above. Also, the payout control device 242 is provided with a state return switch 245 . For example, when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing device 224, pressing the state return switch 245 clears the ball clogging.

An external terminal plate 213 is provided on the right side of the board box 244 . External terminal plate 21
3, an output terminal for outputting various error information occurring in the pachinko machine 10;
An output terminal for outputting a signal when the door frame 3 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and the like are provided. Through these output terminals, signals relating to the state of the frame side are output to the management control device (or hall computer) on the game hall side.

The power supply/launch control device 243 has a power supply and launch control board housed in a board box 246. The board generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices, etc.
Furthermore, the launching of the game ball is controlled according to the operation of the shooting handle 41 by the player.
A RAM erase switch 247 is also provided in the power/emission control device 243 . This pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure is retained, and upon recovery from the power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be restored. It's becoming Therefore, if the power is cut off in a normal procedure, such as when the game hall is closed, the state before the cut-off is stored, but if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 247, the RAM data is initialized. It's like

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 10, etc., a first monitoring device 250 and a second monitoring device 290 are attached to the resin base 71 of the inner frame 13 . Moreover, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 10, the inner frame 13
A rear pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the rear pack unit 15 is provided on the upper left side of the rear surface of the . The first monitoring device 250 is arranged above the inner frame 13 on the opening/closing tip side, and the opening of the front door frame 14 is monitored by this first monitoring device 250 . On the other hand, the second monitoring device 290 is arranged below the inner frame 13 . Specifically, it is arranged below the lower edge of the back pack unit 15 when the back pack unit 15 is closed, and is visible from behind the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 5). The opening of the inner frame 13 is monitored by this second monitoring device 290 . Further, the opening of the back pack unit 15 is detected by the back pack unit open detector 289 .

As shown in FIGS. 3, 10, etc., the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290
3 is mounted on the resin base 71. The first monitoring device 250 is arranged above the inner frame 13 on the opening/closing tip side, and the opening of the front door frame 14 is monitored by this first monitoring device 250 . On the other hand, the second monitoring device 290 is arranged below the inner frame 13 . Specifically, the second monitoring device 290 is arranged below the lower edge of the back pack unit 15 in the closed state of the back pack unit 15, and is used to open the gaming machine body 12, in other words, to open the inner frame 13. Release is monitored.

The first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 have the same configuration, but differ in the mounting direction and accompanying configuration. Therefore, here, the first monitoring device 25
0 will be described, and the configuration of the second monitoring device 290 will be omitted.
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the first monitoring device 250 includes a storage case body 251 and a lid case body 280. Both the case bodies 251 and 280 are fixed by fasteners such as screws. A housing 252 is formed. housing 252 (both case bodies 251,
280) is made of a material such as a transparent synthetic resin material having light transmittance, and the housing 252
The inside is visible. Therefore, the inside of the first monitoring device 250 can be easily checked, and maintenance and the like are facilitated. Since it is easy to check the inside of the first monitoring device 250 in this way, it is easy to discover fraudulent acts such as obstructing the monitoring function of the first monitoring device 250 .

The first monitoring device 250 is arranged at an upper corner of the resin base 71 with the housing case body 251 on the front side and the lid case body 280 on the rear side. In such a state, it is fixed to the rear surface of the resin base 71 with fasteners such as bolts.
The storage case body 251 includes a top plate portion 253 , a bottom plate portion 254 , a front plate portion 255 and a left side plate portion 256 .
and a right side plate portion 257, and is formed in a box shape in which the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is opened when attached to the upper part of the inner frame 13 on the opening/closing tip side. The front plate portion 255 is substantially parallel to the rear surface of the resin base 71 . The front plate portion 255 is formed with an upper extension portion 258 extending upward from the boundary with the top plate portion 253 and a lower extension portion 259 extending downward from the boundary with the bottom plate portion 254. Protrusions 258 and 259 are in contact with the rear surface of resin base 71 .

Both extending portions 258 and 259 are provided with round holes 258a and 259a, respectively, into which cylindrical boss portions formed on the resin base 71 are fitted. The first monitoring device 250 is positioned vertically and horizontally by fitting cylindrical bosses into the round holes 258a and 259a.

A protruding portion 260 protruding forward in a stepped manner is formed at the lower portion of the front plate portion 255 , and an opening 71 b corresponding to the protruding portion 260 is formed in the resin base 71 . The opening 71b is a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer peripheral shape of the projecting portion 260. As shown in FIG. By fitting the projecting portion 260 into the opening portion 71b, the resin base 7
1 and the first monitoring device 250 has a crank shape. As a result, inconvenience such as insertion of an illegal tool or the like from the boundary between the opening 71b and the projecting portion 260 is suppressed. Further, the dimensions are set so that the front surface of the resin base 71 and the front surface of the projecting portion 260 are substantially flush with each other, and the projecting portion 260 does not project forward beyond the resin base 71 . ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the problem that the position of the first monitoring device 250 is displaced due to the protruding portion 260 being caught during maintenance work or the like.

Inside the housing 252 (more specifically, inside the storage case body 251), there are a detection device 265 for detecting the open/closed state of the front door frame 14, and an operation mechanism that continuously operates when power is supplied. 275 are installed.

The detection device 265 is arranged behind the opening 71 b of the resin base 71 , that is, behind the projecting portion 260 . More specifically, it is arranged on the front end side of the rotation of the front door frame 14 inside the storage case body 251 . The detection device 265 includes a light-emitting element 266 (photodiode) that emits light, a light-receiving element 267 (phototransistor) that receives light from the light-emitting element 266, and a housing 268 that houses the light-emitting element 266 and the light-receiving element 267. I have it.

The container 268 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped body portion 269 and projecting portions 269 a and 269 b projecting in the left-right direction from the lower portion of the body portion 269 . The container 268 is arranged so that the front surface thereof is parallel to the front plate portion 255 . Each projecting portion 269a, 269b is formed in a plate shape parallel to the bottom plate portion 254, and each projecting portion 269a, 269b is fitted (inserted) into a first guide groove 270 formed in the housing case body 251. As a result, the detection device 265 moves into the storage case body 251
is attached to the
The first guide grooves 270 face each other and extend in the front-rear direction.
As the protrusions 269a and 269b are inserted, the outer peripheral surfaces of the protruding portions 269a and 269b and the inner peripheral surface of the first guide groove 270 are brought into contact with each other, and movement of the detection device 265 in the vertical and horizontal directions is restricted.

A contact portion 271 is provided at the front portion of the first guide groove 270 with which the container 268 contacts. The contact portion 271 protrudes toward the inside of the storage case body 251, and has an upper contact surface 271a parallel to the inner surface of the bottom plate portion 254 and a rear contact surface 271b parallel to the inner surface of the front plate portion 255. are doing. When the detection device 265 is pushed along the first guide groove 270, the container 26
8 and the rear side contact surface 271b are in contact with each other. This restricts the forward movement of the detection device 265 . In this state where the forward movement is restricted, the storage case body 251
A predetermined gap is secured between the front plate portion 255 and the detection device 265 . The housing body 268 is fixed to the housing case body 251 by fasteners such as screws while its movement in the forward, left-right and vertical directions is restricted as described above.

Through-holes 269c and 269d penetrating in the front-rear direction are arranged side by side in the main body 269 of the container 268 with a predetermined gap therebetween. A light-emitting element 266 and a light-receiving element 267 are fitted in the through holes 269c and 269d, respectively, with the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion directed forward. Each through hole 269c, 269d is connected to each element 272, 2 by the contact portion 271.
It is arranged above the upper contact surface 271a (contact portion 271) so that the passage of light between 73 is not blocked. More specifically, the light emitted from the light emitting element 266 reaches the contact portion 27
The light is emitted from the storage case body 251 without being blocked by 1, and is irradiated toward the rear surface of the front door frame 14. - 特許庁The central axes of the through holes 269 c and 269 d are perpendicular to the front plate portion 255 , and the central axes of the elements 266 and 267 are also perpendicular to the front plate portion 255 . Therefore, when the light from the light emitting element 266 is incident on the front plate portion 255, it is less likely to be refracted or reflected.

As shown in FIG. 6 , a light reflecting member 274 that reflects light from the light emitting element 266 toward the light receiving element 267 is provided in front of the detection device 265 , that is, on the back side of the front door frame 14 . The light reflecting member 274 is housed in the housing recess 14a formed in the front door frame 14,
It is fixed to the front door frame 14 by fasteners such as screws, and is prevented from protruding from the rear surface of the front door frame 14 .
The light reflecting member 274 is composed of a glass prism having optical transparency. When the front door frame 14 is not opened, in other words when the front door frame 14 is closed, the light from the light emitting element 266 is reflected by the light reflecting member 274 and the reflected light is received by the light receiving element 267. be.
On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is opened, in other words, when the front door frame 14 is not closed, the position of the light reflecting member 274 is displaced by opening the front door frame 14 . Therefore, the light from the light emitting element 266 is reflected in a different direction by the light reflecting member 274 , and the reflected light is not received by the light receiving element 267 .

Next, the operating mechanism 275 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the operating mechanism 275 is arranged to the side of the detecting device 265, and its main components are a solenoid 276 provided as a power source for the operating mechanism 275 and a solenoid 276. and an operating shaft 277 inserted through.

The solenoid 276 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape extending in the vertical direction, and has an attachment portion 278 to the housing case body 251 at its upper portion. The mounting portion 278 is formed in a plate shape parallel to the top plate portion 253 of the storage case body 251 , and is formed on the top plate portion 253 and the left side plate portion 256 .
It fits in the guide groove 279 . These second guide grooves 279 face each other and extend in the front-rear direction, and their rear ends are open to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 . By inserting the mounting portion 278 from the rear end side of the second guide groove 279 and pushing in the solenoid 276, the operation mechanism 275 is mounted. By inserting the attachment portion 278 into the second guide groove 279 in this way, the outer peripheral surface of the attachment portion 278 and the inner peripheral surface of the second guide groove 279 come into contact with each other. This restricts movement of the operating mechanism 275 in the vertical and horizontal directions. operating mechanism 27
5 along the second guide groove 279, the mounting portion 278 and the front plate portion 255 of the housing case body 251 come into contact with each other, and the forward movement of the pachinko machine 10 is restricted. The operation mechanism 275 is fixed to the storage case body 251 with fasteners such as screws while movement in each direction is thus restricted. In this embodiment, the second guide groove 279 is provided in order to improve the mounting workability of the operation mechanism 275, but the configuration may be such that they are not provided.

The operating shaft 277 has an iron cylindrical portion 277a extending vertically. The cylindrical portion 27
7a is in a state accommodated inside the solenoid 276. As shown in FIG. Cylindrical portion 277a
and the central axis of the solenoid 276 overlap, and the operating shaft 277 is movable in the direction of the central axis of the solenoid 276 . The lower end of the operating shaft 277 is the solenoid 27
6, and a plate-shaped shielding portion 277b and a crank portion 277c that offsets the shielding portion 277b from the operating shaft 277 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 are integrally formed at the lower end thereof. In addition, in this embodiment, the cylindrical portion 277a of the operating shaft 277 and the shielding portion 277
b and the crank portion 277c are integrally molded, but it is also possible to mold them individually. For example, only the cylindrical portion 277a may be made of iron, and the shielding portion 277b and the crank portion 277c may be made of synthetic resin.

The shielding portion 277 b is formed substantially parallel to the front plate portion 255 and moves parallel to the front plate portion 255 following the vertical movement of the operating shaft 277 . In addition, the shielding portion 277b is connected to the crank portion 277c.
A space formed between the detection device 265 and the front plate portion 255 secures a gap (operating gap) for its operation. The lower end of the shielding portion 277b contacts the upper contact surface 271a at its lower limit position. In such a contact state, the shielding portion 277b overlaps the light receiving element 267 when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front. In other words, the front side of the light receiving element 267 is covered. On the other hand, when the shielding portion 277b is at the upper limit position, the shielding portion 277b
is set above the light receiving element 267 . In other words, the front side of the light receiving element 267 is not covered. The shielding portion 277b is coated with a paint that absorbs light (a paint with a low light reflectance) so that the light from other light sources is reflected by the shielding portion 277b and does not reach the light receiving element 267. It is In this embodiment, the shielding portion 277b is configured to overlap only the light receiving element 267, but may be configured to overlap the light emitting element 266, or may be configured to overlap both the light receiving element 267 and the light emitting element 266. .

In this embodiment, the operating shaft 277 is held at the upper limit position of the operating range when power is supplied to the solenoid 276, in other words, at a position where the front surface of the detecting device 265 is not covered (hereinafter also referred to as the first position). be. Here, the output of the solenoid 276 is set to be large enough to lift the operating shaft 277 against gravity in the energized state. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the operation shaft 277 is lowered by its own weight and held at the lower limit position of the operation range, in other words, the position covering the front surface of the detection device 265 (hereinafter also referred to as the second position). .
More specifically, the shielding portion 277b abuts against the upper abutment surface 271a so that the operating shaft 277
is held at the second position. That is, the holding position of the operating shaft 277 changes between the first position and the second position depending on the presence or absence of power supply. In other words, motion axis 2
As the position of the shielding portion 277b is switched, the position of the shielding portion 277b is switched between the first position and the second position.

A predetermined gap area is set between the lower end of the shielding portion 277b at the first position and the upper end of the shielding portion 277b at the second position. In other words, the operating distance dimension of the operating shaft 277 is set larger than the axial length dimension of the shielding portion 277b, and the front plate portion 255 (more specifically, the overhang A part of the portion 260) is formed with an insertion hole 260a penetrating inside and outside (that is, in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10). As shown in FIG. 6, the rear surface of the front door frame 14 is provided with a protrusion 14b that can be inserted into the insertion hole 260a. The protrusion 14b is integrally formed with the front door frame 14, and the pachinko machine 1
It extends behind 0. The tip of the projection 14b is located slightly behind the rear end of the shielding portion 277b. Since the projection 14b is provided on the front door frame 14 as described above, it moves as the front door frame 14 rotates. That is, the protrusion 14b is inserted through the insertion hole 260a when the front door frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 13, and is not inserted through the insertion hole 260a when the front door frame 14 is opened by a predetermined amount or more. state.

When the protrusion 14b is inserted through the insertion hole 260a, that is, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the shielding portion 277b and the protrusion 14b come into contact with each other, so that the shielding portion 277b is positioned at both the first position and the second position. Movement between them is restricted. More specifically, when the projection 14b is inserted into the insertion hole 260a while the shielding portion 277b is at the first position, movement of the shielding portion 277b to the second position is restricted. Further, when the protrusion 14b is inserted while the shielding portion 277b is at the second position, the movement of the shielding portion 277b to the first position is restricted.

In addition, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the inner frame 13 as described above. Therefore, before the hook metal fitting 63 of the front door frame 14 and the bearing metal fitting 132 are locked, the relative positions of the projection 14b and the shielding portion 277b and the insertion hole 260a may vary. For this reason, there is concern that the closing operation of the front door frame 14 may be hindered by the protrusions 14b and the like being caught. In addition, the insertion hole 260 a has a tapered shape that widens toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, catching when inserting the projection 14b is suppressed, and workability when closing the front door frame 14 is ensured.

Next, the relative relationship between the projection 14b and the shielding portion 277b will be described in detail. front door frame 14
is closed, the rear end of the protrusion 14b protrudes slightly rearward from the rear end of the shielding portion 277b. Therefore, even if the position of the front door frame 14 in the front-rear direction varies slightly, the protrusion 1
4b function is ensured. When the front door frame 14 is opened, the projection 14b moves to a position where it does not overlap the shielding portion 277b and the pachinko machine 10 in a plan view by opening the front door frame 14 at a predetermined angle or more. As a result, the movement restriction (regulation) of the shielding portion 277b is released.

An opening flange 13a extending toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, that is, toward the front door frame 14, is formed integrally with the peripheral portion of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. Due to this opening flange 13a, the peripheral edge of the inner frame 13 and the peripheral edge of the front door frame 14 overlap each other when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the side and from the top. In this way, both the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are overlapped with each other.
It suppresses the inconvenience of inserting an illegal tool or the like from the boundary between the Note that the protrusion 14
The amount of overlap between b and the shielding portion 277b is set smaller than the amount of overlap between the opening flange 13a and the front door frame 14 . More specifically, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the shielding portion 277b to the rear end portion of the protrusion 14b is greater than the distance dimension in the front-rear direction from the front edge of the opening flange 13a to the rear edge of the front door frame 14. is also set small. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 rotates and shifts to a state in which the protrusion 14b and the shielding portion 277b do not overlap, the opening flange 13
The boundary portion between the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is not exposed due to a. That is, at a position where the front surface of the inner frame 13 can be visually recognized from the boundary portion between the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, the movement restriction of the shielding portion 277b by the projection 14b is released. .

Next, the main configuration of the lid case body 280 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. The lid case body 280 includes a top plate portion 281, a bottom plate portion 282, a back plate portion 283, and a left side plate portion 28.
4 and a right side plate portion 285, the pachinko machine 10 has a box shape opened to the front.
The rear opening edge of the housing case body 251 is housed in the opened portion of the lid case body 280 . A relay board 286 electrically connected to the detection device 265 and the like by a harness (not shown) is arranged inside the lid case body 280 . The relay board 286 has a back plate portion 283
and is fixed to the inner surface of the back plate portion 283 with fasteners such as screws.

A communication hole 287 penetrating inside and outside is formed behind the relay board 286 , that is, at a portion of the back plate portion 283 facing the relay board 286 . A connector 288 is arranged behind the communication hole 287 . In other words, the relay board 286 and the connector 288 are provided facing each other across the communication hole 287, and the relay board 286 and the connector 288 are electrically connected by a harness or the like (not shown). The connector 288 is fixed to the rear surface of the back plate portion 283 with fasteners such as screws with the insertion opening directed toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 . Then, the first monitoring device 250 is connected to the first monitoring device 250 by a harness (not shown) through the connector 288 .
and main controller 300 are electrically connected. In the present embodiment, the cover case body 280 is configured to have light transmittance as described above, thereby facilitating confirmation of fraud or the like with respect to the first monitoring device 250 . However, it is also possible for the lid case body 280 to have a configuration in which it does not have light transmittance. In this case, the lid case body 280 may be made of, for example, an opaque synthetic resin material or a light metal material such as aluminum.

Next, detection of opening of the front door frame 14 while power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10 will be described.
When power is supplied to the first monitoring device 250, that is, when the solenoid 276 is energized, the solenoid 276 is energized. As a result, the operating shaft 277 is held at the first position. In this state, there is no shielding portion 277b in front of the light receiving element 267, and the light emitted from the light emitting element 266 reaches the light receiving element 267 via the light reflecting member 274. FIG. When the light reaches the light-receiving element 267, a light-receiving signal is output to the relay board 286. By reading this light-receiving signal, it is detected that the front door frame 14 is closed.

When the front door frame 14 is opened while power is being supplied to the first monitoring device 250, both elements 2
The relative positions of 66, 267 and light reflecting member 274 change. In this case, the light emitted from the light emitting element 266 does not reach the light reflecting member 274 , or even if it reaches the light reflecting member 274 , the reflected light is emitted toward a portion other than the light receiving element 267 . For this reason,
Light from the light emitting element 266 does not reach the light receiving element 267 . Therefore, a predetermined light reception signal is no longer output. By reading the change in the light reception signal, it is detected that the front door frame 14 is closed.

In this way, by making it possible to detect the opening of the front door frame 14 while power is being supplied, it is possible to suppress unauthorized opening of the front door frame 14 during the opening of the hall. result,
It is possible to contribute to suppression of illegality with respect to the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, when power supply to the first monitoring device 250 is stopped due to closing of the store, power failure, or the like, the power supply to the solenoid 276 is stopped, so that the excitation state is released. In this case, the motion axis 27
7 and the shielding portion 277b move downward due to their own weight and come into contact with the projection 14b. Shielding portion 277
By coming into contact with the projection 14b, the downward movement of b is restricted, and movement to the second position is restricted. In this state, when the power supply is started again, the solenoid 2
76 is in an excited state, and the operating shaft 277 is lifted upward by overcoming the action of its own weight. In this case, since the light from the light emitting element 266 can reach the light receiving element 267, it can be detected that the front door frame 14 is closed. In this way, it is detected that the front door frame 14 was not opened while the power supply was stopped.

Next, a case where the front door frame 14 is opened and closed while the power supply is stopped will be described.
As the front door frame 14 is opened, the projection 14b is separated from the first monitoring device 250, so that the shielding portion 277b loses its support and moves downward (that is, to the second position) by its own weight. Shielding portion 277
When b moves downward, it contacts the upper contact surface 271a, and further downward movement is restricted. When the front door frame 14 is closed again in this state, the protrusion 14b returns to its original position (the protrusion 14b is inserted into the insertion hole 260a), thereby restricting the upward movement of the shielding portion 277b. In this state, the shielding portion 277b is positioned in front of the light receiving element 267, and its vertical movement is restricted by the projection 14b and the upper contact surface 271a. By making the shielding portion 277b immovable from the second position in this way, the fact that the front door frame 14 has been opened is mechanically preserved.

When the power supply is started while the movement of the shielding portion 277b from the second position is restricted, the solenoid 276 is energized and the shielding portion 277b attempts to move upward (that is, to the first position). However, the shielding portion 277b hits the protrusion 14b and is prevented from moving. That is, the state in which the light receiving element 267 is covered with the shielding portion 277b continues. The light emitting element 266 starts emitting light when the power supply is started. light emitting element 266
The light emitted from is irradiated toward the light receiving element 267 via the light reflecting member 274 .
However, the light reaching the light receiving element 267 is blocked by the shielding portion 277b positioned in front of the light receiving element 267. FIG. As a result, the output of the light reception signal is suppressed, and it is detected that the front door frame 14 is open. Although the front door frame 14 is actually closed, it is detected that the front door frame 14 is open when the power is turned off.

As described above, in the state in which the opening of the front door frame 14 at the time of power interruption is detected, the front door frame 14 is opened again.
is released, the projection 14b is separated from the first monitoring device 250, and the shielding portion 277b is moved to the first
Move to position. That is, the restriction on movement of the shielding portion 277b is released. By operating the front door frame 14 in this manner, the unauthorized opening detection state is canceled and the normal state is restored. Further, with such a configuration, the unauthorized opening detection state is reset when the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, there is no need to provide a reset switch or the like, which contributes to the simplification of the configuration. In addition, the front door frame 1
Since the door 4 is opened by a predetermined operation (locking/unlocking operation), it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of illegally canceling the unauthorized opening detection state.

The second monitoring device 290 also includes the storage case body 251, the lid case body 280, the detection device 265, the operating mechanism 275, the relay board 286, and the connector 288, similarly to the first monitoring device 250.
, and projections and light reflecting members corresponding to the second monitoring device 290 are provided on the outer frame 11 .

In the above description, the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 are configured to detect that the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened even when power is cut off when no power is supplied (specifically, is equipped with an operation mechanism 275). However, a configuration for detecting that the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened when power is shut off when power is not supplied is essential for this embodiment. Instead of the configuration of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 1 in a state where power is supplied
It is sufficient if the configuration is such that it is detected that 3 is opened. Specifically, in this embodiment, the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 may be provided with the detection device 265 that detects the open/close state of the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 .

In the above description, the detection device 265 includes the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267, the light emitted by the light emitting element 266 is reflected by the light reflecting member 274, and whether or not the reflected light can be received by the light receiving element 267 is determined. Thus, the opening/closing state of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 is detected. However, in this embodiment, it is sufficient if the open/closed states of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 can be detected. For this reason, for example, the light-emitting element 266 and the light-receiving element 267 are provided at positions facing each other on the back side of the resin base 71 and the front door frame 14, and when the front door frame 14 is closed, the light emitted by the light-emitting element 266 can be received by the light receiving element 267, and the light emitted by the light emitting element 266 may not be received by the light receiving element 267 when the front door frame 14 is opened. Similarly, regarding the detection of the opening and closing of the inner frame 13, the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267 are provided at positions facing each other on the front side of the resin base 71 and the inner frame 13, and when the inner frame 13 is closed, The light emitted by the light emitting element 266 can be received by the light receiving element 267, and the light emitted by the light emitting element 266 may not be received by the light receiving element 267 when the inner frame 13 is open.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the optical elements of the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267 are used to detect the opening and closing of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13. 1
3 may be detected to be opened or closed. For example, by providing an ultrasonic oscillator instead of the light emitting element 266 and an ultrasonic wave receiving element instead of the light receiving element 267, the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13
The opening and closing of the may be detected. Further, a magnet may be provided instead of the light emitting element 266 and a magnetic sensor may be provided instead of the light receiving element 267 to detect opening/closing of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 . Moreover, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 10, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment
0 is provided with a back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15, but various mechanisms for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15 can be employed. For example, similarly to the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290, the optical elements of the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267 may be used to detect the opening and closing of the back pack unit 15, or instead of the light emitting element 266 , and an ultrasonic wave receiving element instead of the light receiving element 267 may be provided to detect the opening and closing of the back pack unit 15 . Further, a magnet may be provided in place of the light emitting element 266 and a magnetic sensor may be provided in place of the light receiving element 267 to detect opening and closing of the back pack unit 15, or a mechanical contact sensor may be provided. good too.

<Electrical configuration>
FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG.
0 and a display control device 500 . These devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 . The pachinko machine 10 also includes a payout control device 242 that executes payout control for causing the payout device 224 to pay out game balls, a power supply that supplies necessary power to the pachinko machine 10, and controls the game ball shooting mechanism 110. and firing controls 243, which are mounted on the back pack unit 15;

The main controller 300 includes a main control board 301 that controls the main control of the pachinko machine 10 and a power outage monitoring board 303 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 300 includes a board box that houses the main control board 301 and the like. The substrate box may have a trace structure that leaves a trace upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies, or the like can be adopted.

The main control board 301 is an MPU (Micro-Processor) mounted on the main control board 301.
ssing Unit) 302 and a ROM (Read
Only Memory) 312 and RAM (Random Access Memory)
y) 313; The MPU 302 includes a ROM 312 and a RAM 313 as well as a CP
U, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, etc. are integrated into a single chip, and is called a one-chip microcomputer. In this embodiment, the ROM 312 and the RAM 313 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 302, but the ROM 312 and the RAM 313 may be individually integrated into chips. Also, although the ROM 312 and the RAM 313 are physically separated individual memories, they may be one memory that is not physically separated, and the ROM 312 area and the RAM 313 area may be provided by logical addresses. . In this case, for example, a specific area in the RAM may be write-inhibited to have the function of a ROM. Main controller 30
The same applies to the MPUs of other control units other than 0.

A ROM 312 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is used as a main storage device for the MPU 302 . The ROM 312 is a non-volatile memory that does not require power supply from the outside to retain stored information (data), and is a semiconductor element that cannot be written. This ROM 312 has a plurality of areas (regions) logically separated by logical addresses, such as a hit/fail table storage area, a distribution table storage area, a reach table storage area, a variation table storage area, and the like. has various areas. These areas are described in detail later.

A RAM 313 is a semiconductor memory in which information can be written and erased arbitrarily. RAM
A memory 313 temporarily stores various data when reading out and executing the control program stored in the ROM 312, and does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a volatile memory that This RAM 313 has a plurality of areas (regions) logically separated by logical addresses. have. These areas are described in detail later. In addition, in this embodiment, the RAM 31
As 3, a volatile memory such as a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) or an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) is used.
Non-volatile memory such as Random Access Memory) may be used. In the present embodiment, the RAM 313 retains data even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off by being supplied with power for data storage and holding from the power supply/launch control board provided in the power supply/launch control device 243. It is configured.

The MPU 302 has an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). MP
An input port of U302 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 303 provided in the main controller 300 and a plurality of detection sensors 152-156. The output port of the MPU 302 is connected to the blackout monitoring board 303 , the payout control device 242 and the sound emission control device 400 . This sound emission control device 400 and a display control device 500 connected to the sound emission control device 400
will be described later in detail. Also, the output port of the MPU 302 is the second starting port 84b.
The electric accessory driving unit 84b2 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 84b1 of the variable winning device 83, the variable winning driving unit 83c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 83b of the variable winning device 83, the main display unit 93, and the accessory display unit 94. It is

Here, the main control board 301 has a driver circuit (not shown), and the MPU 302 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the power release state, the MPU 302 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 84b2 to open and close the opening/closing member 84
Open and close b1. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 302 controls the variable winning drive unit 83c.
is executed to open and close the open/close door 83b of the variable winning device 83. Also, in each game round, the MPU 302 executes display control of the main display section 93 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the start ports 84a and 84b. Further, the MPU 302 executes display control of the character item display unit 94 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 85 .

The power outage monitoring board 303 includes the main control board 301 and a power supply/
Direct current stabilization 24 that relays the launch control device 243 and is output from the power supply/launch control device 243
Monitor voltage in volts. MPU 302 receives power (DC 24
V). In addition, the MPU 302 performs prize winning determination (ball entry determination) to the various prize winning ports 82 to 84b, the out port 87, and each through gate 85 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 152 to 156. FIG. The MPU 302 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b.

The payout control device 242 supplies the payout device 224 with a prize ball (a game ball obtained by winning a prize) or a rental ball (a game ball lent to a player) based on a command (control instruction) transmitted from the main control device 300. Execute payout control to pay out the

The power supply/launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Power supply / launch control device 243 is equipped with an AC-DC converter that generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 301 and the payout control device 242 etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, The generated operating power is supplied to each device. In addition, power supply
The launch control device 243 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power supply unit for power failure supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 313 of the main controller 300 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

The power/shooting control device 243 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 110 to shoot a game ball. Here, the game ball launching mechanism 110 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 103 of the game board 81, a ball feeding device that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 33 onto the launch rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 103 toward the guide rail 103 . When the power supply/firing control device 243 and the predetermined firing conditions (when the firing handle 41 is rotated, the touch sensor 41a is on, and the firing stop switch 41b is off) are met, the solenoid to supply a drive signal (shooting permission signal) to shoot a game ball.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launching mechanism 110 of the pachinko machine 10 employs a method of launching game balls by linear expansion and contraction of a plunger type solenoid. The ball-striking hammer may operate to hit the game ball, or the ball-striking mallet supported at a different position may operate to hit the game ball with respect to the rotation of the motor. Specifically, in the method of hitting a game ball by a motor, the motor and the ball-striking mallet are supported at different positions, and the ball-striking mallet is operated by rotating a cam connected to the motor. A ball-striking mallet operated by a motor (cam) operates in the opposite direction due to the elasticity of a connected spring or the like to strike a game ball and launch it into a game area 104 of the game board 81 .
In addition, in the method of launching the game ball with a rotary solenoid, the power supply / launch control device 24
A game ball is hit by rotating the rotating shaft in response to the pulse from 3, and the game board 81
A game ball is shot to the game area 104 of . A ball-striking mallet directly connected to the rotating shaft of the rotary solenoid hits the game ball on the launch rail by rotating to the game ball supporting position, and the game ball is shot. After hitting the ball, the torque of the rotary solenoid disappears, and the ball hitting mallet rotates in the opposite direction due to the recoil of hitting the stopper and its own weight, and stops at the position before operation by the stopper. In the method of hitting a game ball by a plunger-type solenoid, a ball-striking mallet is directly connected to the movable iron core of the plunger-type solenoid, and a game ball is hit by linear reciprocating motion of the mallet. A game ball is fired to. There is also a plunger-type solenoid that strikes a game ball by energizing the solenoid to strike out the ball-striking mallet, and by energizing the solenoid to retract the ball-striking mallet, which compresses the spring and advances the ball-striking mallet with the elasticity of the spring to hit a game ball. Either can be used.

Also, the ball feeding device of the game ball launching mechanism 110 may be either mechanical or magnetic. In the case of the mechanical type, the power of the motor that drives the ball-striking mallet is used to operate the ball feeding device. In the case of the mechanical type, since the driving source of the ball hitting mallet and the ball feeding device is the same, it is possible to supply game balls to the shooting rail one by one according to the timing of hitting the ball with a simple structure. is possible. In the case of the magnet type, apart from the operation of the ball-striking mallet, an independent solenoid operates the ball-feeding operation to supply ball-game balls onto the launch rail one by one. The magnet type is preferably employed when the game ball shooting mechanism 110 shoots game balls using a rotary solenoid or a plunger type solenoid.

The first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290 and the back pack unit open detector 289 are
It is connected to the main control board 301 via a built-in relay board (not shown). The first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290 and the back pack unit open detector 289 are connected to the main control board 3.
01 to operate.

<Internal lottery>
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery. "Internal lottery" is a special game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the starting winning opening (first and second starting openings 84a, 84b) provided on the game board. It is a lottery to decide whether to transfer or not. MPU 302, as shown in FIG. 19, counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS
, C4 to execute an internal lottery or the like. Specifically, MPU3
02 uses a big win random number counter C1 for a lottery for the occurrence of a big win, uses a big win type counter C2 for a lottery for the type of the big win when a big win occurs, and uses a reach random number counter C3 for a lottery for whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display. to use. Also, the MPU 302 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display continuation time on the main display section 93 and the pattern display device 91. Further, the MPU 302 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether the opening/closing member 84b1 of the second starting port 84b is to be opened. Note that each counter C1 to C3, CI
NI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas of RAM 313 (see FIG. 19).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds (increments) 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching a predetermined maximum value.
Each counter is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec). The updated value is stored in RAM
It is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area 313 . Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2,
And each value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved ball storage area (see FIG. 19) provided as acquisition information storage means in the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 84a or the second start port 84b. be done. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 is stored in the electric role holding area (see FIG. 19) of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 85. be.

The reserved ball storage area includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4
is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C
The storage capacity is set to be capable of storing one set of each of the three values. The MPU 302 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3.
Each area Ra
1 to Ra4 in chronological order, that is, the previously acquired values are sequentially stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4. Specifically, when the winning to the first starting port 84a occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 302 stores the pending information in the order of the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4. to store

In this embodiment, since the first result display holding area Ra has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls into the first starting port 84a are held. there is In addition, the reservation area Ra for the first result display section is a reserved jackpot random number counter C1
, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are provided. It should be noted that the number of reserves related to the first starting port 84a is not limited to four, and may be any number, for example, one to three, or may be five or more.

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means comprises four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4
is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C
The storage capacity is set to a storage capacity capable of storing one set of each of the three values. The MPU 302 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3.
Each area Rb in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the second start port 84b as pending information
1 to Rb4 in chronological order, that is, the previously acquired values are sequentially stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4. Specifically, when the winning to the second starting port 84b occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 302 stores the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. are stored chronologically.

In the present embodiment, since the second result display holding area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls to the second start opening 84b are held. there is In addition, the reservation area Rb for the second result display section is a reserved jackpot random number counter C1
, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are provided. It should be noted that the number of reserves related to the second starting port 84b is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be, for example, one to three, or may be five or more.

The execution area AE displays the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 461 and 462. This is an area for moving.

Since the power reserve area has four storage areas, up to four game ball winnings to each through gate 85 are reserved. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with two through gates 85. Regardless of which through gate 85 is won, if one of the through gates 85 is won, the operator is transferred to the through gate 85. Winning of the game ball is suspended. It should be noted that the number of reserves related to the second starting port 84b is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be, for example, one to three, or may be five or more.

<Description of each counter>
Next, details of each counter will be described.
<Electric accessory release counter C4>
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is
For example, each time the value is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value of 250, it returns to 0, thereby forming a loop counter that loops within the range of 0-250. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is
R through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters each through gate 85
It is stored in the electric service reservation area of the AM 313 . The MPU 302 conducts a lottery (electric role release lottery) as to whether or not to open the opening/closing member 84b1 of the second start port 84b based on the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area. Run.

<Support Mode>
Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of modes (hereinafter referred to as support modes) in which the frequency of opening the opening/closing member 84b1 that allows the winning of game balls to the second starting port 84b is different. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode in which the frequency of setting the opening/closing member 84b1 to the open state is relatively low, and a high frequency support mode in which the frequency of setting the opening/closing member 84b1 to the open state is relatively high. and

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery (for example, both 4/5), but the high frequency support mode is the low frequency support mode. , when winning the electric role open state, the opening and closing member 84b1
is set to the open state more times, and the opening time per time of setting the opening/closing member 84b1 to the open state is also longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the opening/closing member 84b1 to the closed state between each opening in one electric power opening state is shorter than the opening time per time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role duration of one fluctuation display in the object display section 94) is shortened.

In the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the second starting port 84b than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball is the second
The probability of winning the first starting hole 84a is higher than the starting hole 84b, and in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the second starting hole 84b than the first starting hole 84a. In addition, when the detection sensor 154b detects the winning of the second starting port 84b, a predetermined number (for example, two) of prize balls are paid out. The game can be played without reducing the number of balls.

Note that the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to the above. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared to the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved time may be configured to be shortened. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the opening/closing member 84b1 is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode compares the frequency of setting the opening/closing member 84b1 to the open state with the low frequency support mode. and relatively high. Also, the number of types of support modes is not limited to two types, and may be arbitrary, and may be, for example, three types or more.

<Jackpot random number counter>
Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 599. . In addition, the jackpot random number counter C1, every loop, the random number initial value counter CINI at that time
value is read as the initial value. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 includes a jackpot random number counter C1 and a random number initial value counter CINI.
By using and, the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers appears is determined by a random value. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 advances the random number from the initial value of 0 when the power is turned on. Value counter CI
The value obtained from NI becomes the initial value. Assuming that 100 is obtained as the initial value from the random number initial value counter CINI, the jackpot random number counter C1 is 100, 101, 10
When the count proceeds to 2 and counts up to 599, it returns to 0 and when the count proceeds to 99, the initial value is obtained again from the random number initial value counter CINI random. That is, in this method, the initial value is changed each time the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, so that the timing at which the specific random number appears does not appear to be periodic.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 84a or the second start port 84b. is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 84a, and the game ball enters the second start hole 84b. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 313 at the timing of winning. Then, the MPU 302 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit (win or miss lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing values of random numbers that win the jackpot. Jackpot random number counter C
Among the values of 1, the random number value that wins the jackpot is stored as a success/failure table (success/failure information group) in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 312 provided as success/failure information group storage means, as shown in FIG. there is

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode (hereinafter also referred to as a normal state) in which it is difficult to win a big win, and a high-probability mode (hereinafter also referred to as a variable probability state) in which it is easy to win a big win.
It has two winning lottery modes. The success/failure table includes a success/failure table for the low-probability mode (low-probability (normal) success/failure information group) shown in FIG. (probable variation) use propriety information group). MPU3
02 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big win by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the big win random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

These hit/fail tables have lottery results (hit/fail results) of occurrence of a plurality of jackpots, such as "big win win", "special loss result", and "ordinary loss result". Specifically, under the game state (normal state) in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. There are 2 values. In addition, under the game state (probability variable state) in which the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is one. Here, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is included in the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

The value and the number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and the high probability mode should have a higher probability of winning a "big win" than the low probability mode. Further, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode must not include the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and become the "big win".

In addition, in each win/fail lottery mode, random numbers other than "big win winning" results in a loss without winning a big win. Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result (small win result)" and the "normal loss result".
These outliers are common in that none of them serve as a trigger for shifting to the lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the "special deviation result" serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. . The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 84a or the second start port 84b. is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 84a, and the game ball enters the second start hole 84b. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 313 at the timing of winning. And MPU3
02 executes a lottery (distribution lottery) for the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing values of random numbers related to allocation destinations of types of jackpots. As shown in FIG. 21, the value of the random number related to the sorting destination of the jackpot type is R provided as the sorting information group storage means.
It is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area (see FIG. 17) of the OM312. The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 21(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 21(b). ing.
The MPU 302 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the first result display unit reservation area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the first start port 84a It is a table that is referred to when a jackpot type lottery is performed. As shown in FIG. 21(a), the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)", "non-explicit small round high probability result (latency high probability result corresponding to small round )”,
A plurality of distribution results of "explicit small round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to few rounds)" and "most favorable result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)" are assigned as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" (probability 1
/ 3) are distributed to “low probability results”, “10 to 14” (probability 1/6) are distributed to “non-explicit small round high probability results”, and “15 to 19” (probability 1/6) are “explicit "Few Rounds High Probability Results" and "20 to 29" (probability 1/3) are assigned to "Most Favorable Results".

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the second start port 84b It is a table that is referred to when a jackpot type lottery is performed. The second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 21(b), has two distribution results, "low probability result" and "best result", as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the value "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" (probability 1/3) "low probability result"
, and ``10 to 29'' (probability 2/3) are assigned to ``most advantageous result''.

Each sorting result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winner/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends (2) Support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) Mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 83 in the opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the win/fail lottery modes (1) will be described. The "low-probability result" is a distribution result in which the win-or-fail lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. "Non-explicit small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "Most favorable result" have a high probability of success or failure lottery mode after opening and closing execution mode regardless of the lottery mode before closing execution mode. This is the distribution result set in the mode.
This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described. The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The “non-explicit few rounds high probability result” is a sorting result that maintains the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues at least until "big win" is won in the lottery. The "explicit few rounds high probability result" and "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

The difference in the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 83 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) will be described later in detail.

<Reach random number counter>
Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. . The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 84a or the second start port 84b. is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 84a, and the game ball enters the second start hole 84b. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 313 at the timing of winning. And MPU302
executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) to determine whether to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

The MPU 302 does not become a "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, but "usually loses result".
In this case, by comparing the reach table and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area, a lottery is executed to determine whether to generate the reach display,
When the ready-to-win display is generated in this lottery, the ready-to-win display is generated. The ready-to-reach table is information on the value of the random number related to the generation of the ready-to-reach display, and is stored in the table storage area for to-reach of the ROM 312 (see FIG. 17).

Here, when "big hit winning" is obtained in the lottery lottery and "best result" is distributed in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 91 displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. is stopped on the stop symbol effective line L.
In addition, when the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution lottery results in a "low-probability result", the symbol display device 91 stops the combination of symbols having the same even number as a result of stopping. It is stopped and displayed on the valid symbol line L. In addition, in the lottery, "
If it becomes a "jackpot winning" and is distributed to "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, or if it is "special loss" without becoming "big hit winning" in the lottery result", the symbol display device 91 does not select a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result, but different numbers that are not selected in the case of a "normal result" in the winning lottery. A combination of special symbols having is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L.

Reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (
In the case of "big win winning" in the success/failure lottery and sorting to "most advantageous result" or "low probability result" in the sorting lottery), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is used when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed ("jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, and "unspecified small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery
Or if it is sorted to "explicit small round high probability result", or if it becomes "special loss result" without becoming "jackpot winning" in the lottery), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 do not do.

The mode of the ready-to-win display is a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91.
Of Z3, a specific symbol row (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3 in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L, and the remaining symbol rows (symbol row Z2 in this embodiment) are stopped and displayed. The variable display (ready-to-win display) is configured so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win state (ready-to-win) has occurred. Specifically, the ready-to-win display is a combination of symbols in which the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3.
↓·2” (“↓” indicates that it is fluctuating), and the like. In addition, the symbols of the specific symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) forming the ready-to-win display are temporarily stopped, and the remaining symbol rows (symbol row Z2) are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped). display), the decoration figures of all the symbol rows are fixed and stopped.

The pachinko machine 10 generates the ready-to-win display, after the variable display is started on the pattern display device 91, and before displaying the predetermined stop result, it becomes a ``big hit winning'' in the winning lottery, and the distribution is performed. It is possible to make the player expect that the lottery has been sorted into a "low probability result" or "most advantageous result". Note that the ready-to-win display mode is not limited to this, and some of the symbol rows are displayed stationary and the rest of the symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed in the background as a moving image. Alternatively, each pattern row may be reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main control board 301 of the main controller 300 is a reach random number counter C
3, and the MPU 302 generates a reach indication by comparing the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 312 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area. We are running a lottery of whether or not. That is, in the present embodiment, the lottery as to whether to generate the ready-to-win display is executed by the main controller 300, but the lottery to determine whether to generate the ready-to-win display is sent to the sound emission control device 400. It may be configured to be executed by

<Expected performance>
Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the pattern display device 91 . The expectation effect is such that the player expects that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the symbol display device 91 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. I mean performance. The aforementioned ready-to-win display is also an expected effect that occurs when the winning lottery does not result in a "big win" but results in a "normal failure", and the pachinko machine 10
has two types of expectation effects, namely, the aforementioned ready-to-reach display and advance notice display. Since the reach display has already been explained, the advance notice display will be explained below.

<Notice display>
The notice display will be displayed in the case of "jackpot winning" in the lottery, or "
It is an expectation performance that makes it easier to produce a performance than the case where a ``special loss result'' instead of a ``jackpot win'' results in a success or failure lottery without a ``jackpot win'' and a ``ordinary loss result''. . Instead of facilitating the occurrence of effects, this advance notice display may facilitate the selection of effects with a low appearance rate, or may be combined. In the present embodiment, the lottery to determine whether to generate the ready-to-win display is performed by the main controller 300, whereas the lottery to determine whether to generate the advance notice display is performed by the sound emission control device 400. is executed.

The form of the notice display is a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91.
3, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, or some of the symbol rows (for example,
A symbol row Z1) is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L, and a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed. to display. This notice display occurs both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. It is Note that the advance notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the variation type counter CS is
Each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value of 198, it returns to 0, forming a loop counter that loops within the range of 0-198. Fluctuation type counter C
S is updated at least once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated. Then, the MPU 302 compares the fluctuation table and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer, and determines the duration of display of the symbols on the main display unit 93 and the number of symbols on the symbol display device 91. determine the display duration. It should be noted that the variation table is information of random number values related to the display duration, and is stored in the variation table storage area of the ROM 312 (see FIG. 17) as described above.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, random number generation is performed by the counter circuits (counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4) that are ICs for generating random numbers. ) can be counted at extremely high speed. In addition, in the case of soft random numbers, it is processed as part of the program control of the game machine, so it is a burden on the software in the limited memory space, but in the case of hard random numbers, the random numbers are generated by hardware. As a result, a random number having a count value several times as large as the soft random number can be generated without imposing a burden on the software.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 300>
The MPU 302 of the main control device 300 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing that advances the game, and main processing that is started when the power is turned on. Timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order below. Note that the MPU 302 performs timer interrupt processing,
In addition to normal processing and main processing, NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) is executed, but description of this processing is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing. In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 302 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S108, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 302 reads the states (detection states) of the plurality of detection sensors 152 to 156, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 313 as winning detection information.
The MPU 302 has a general winning opening 82, a first starting opening 84a, a second starting opening 84b, and a special winning opening 8.
When it is determined that the detection sensors 152 to 154b provided in various winning ports of 3a detect the winning of the game ball, a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball is set, and the set command is payout control. Send to device 242 . For example, when the MPU 302 determines that the detection sensor 153 corresponding to the variable winning device 83 has detected the winning of game balls, the MPU 302 transmits a prize ball command instructing the payout of 13 prize balls to the payout control device 242. do.
Further, in step S101, the MPU 302 controls the first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 2
90 and the signal (light receiving signal) input from the back pack unit open detector 289 is read. The information of this read signal is stored and held in the register of the MPU 302 . In this case, the MPU 302 is provided with at least first to third registers.
The signal information of the monitoring device 250 is stored in the first register, the signal information of the second monitoring device 290 is stored in the second register, and the signal of the back pack unit open detector 289 is stored in the third register.
Stored in a register. This also applies to the following description of the registers of MPU 302 .

In step S102, front door frame opening monitoring processing is executed. In the front door frame opening monitoring process, based on the input signal from the first monitoring device 250, a process related to monitoring the opening of the front door frame 14 is executed while power is being supplied from the external power source. The details of the front door frame open monitoring process will be described later.

In step S103, inner frame opening monitoring processing is executed. In the inner frame opening monitoring process, based on the input signal from the second monitoring device 290, processing related to monitoring the opening of the gaming machine body 12, in other words, the opening of the inner frame 13 in a state where power is being supplied from the external power source. Run. The details of the inner frame release monitoring process will be described later.

In step S104, back pack open detection processing is executed. In the back pack open detection process, based on the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289, the open detection process of the back pack unit 15 is executed in the state where power is being supplied from the external power supply. Specifically, the input signal (input voltage) from the rear pack unit open detector 289 is LOW or HI.
GH is determined. In the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, when the back pack unit 15 is not opened, the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289 becomes LOW, and when the back pack unit 15 is opened, the back pack The input signal from the unit open detector 289 becomes HIGH, but a different system may be used. For example, when the back pack unit 15 is not opened, the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289 becomes HIGH, and when the back pack unit 15 is opened, the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289 becomes HIGH. may be LOW. Note that step S10
4, when the opening of the back pack unit 15 is detected, the MPU 302 sets a back pack unit open command in the RAM 313. FIG. The back pack unit open command set in the RAM 313 is transmitted from the main control unit 300 (MPU 302) to the sound emission control unit 400 (M).
PU 402).

In step S105, the MPU 302 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the MPU 302 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 . Note that the MPU 302 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 if the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to it.

In step S106, the MPU 302 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 302 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessary product release counter C4 and updates them. The subsequent value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 . Note that the MPU 302 sets the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 if the previous values of the counters C1 to C4 have reached the maximum value when adding 1 to each of them.
back to Also, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops.

In step S107, the MPU 302 executes the winning process for through. Specifically, when the MPU 302 determines that the detection sensor 155 provided in each through gate 85 detects the winning of the game ball, the electric accessary product open counter C4 updated in step S106
Stores the value of in the wire hold area. In addition, the MPU 302 sets a command for executing variable display of the symbols on the character object display section 94, and displays on the character object display section 94 the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of each through gate 85. Let In the character object display section 94, based on the command instruction from the MPU 302, a variable display that blinks and turns on and off sequentially is performed. result) will display the normal map.
Also, the MPU 302 sets a command for instructing lighting of the third suspension lamp unit 96 and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 400 . Note that the sound emission control device 400
lights the third suspension lamp unit 96 based on a command sent from the MPU 302 . The number of reserved game balls that have entered the through gate 85 is four at maximum, and the third reservation lamp part 96 lights up in the same number as the number of reserved balls.

In step S108, the MPU 302 executes a prize winning process for the start opening. The prize winning process for the start opening will be described in detail below.

<Winning processing for the starting gate>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for the starting gate.
In step S201, the MPU 302 detects the detection sensor 1 provided at the first starting port 84a.
Based on whether or not the game ball 54a has detected entry of the game ball, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 84a (start win). When the MPU 302 determines that the game ball has won the first starting port 84a in step S201 (YES), in step S202, the first
The number of reservations stored in the reservation area Ra for the result display section is grasped, and the number of reservations is set in a predetermined storage area in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section as the first start reservation storage number RaN. After that, the MPU 302 processes steps after step S205.

When the MPU 302 determines that the game ball has not won the first starting hole 84a in step S201 (NO), the MPU 302 moves to the second starting hole 84b in step S203.
Based on whether or not the detection sensor 154b provided in has detected the entry of the game ball, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 84b (start winning). When the MPU 302 determines that the game ball has not won the second starting hole 84b in step S203 (NO), it ends the winning process for the starting hole. Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the game ball has won the second starting port 84b in step S203 (YES), in step S204, the second
The number of reservations stored in the result display section reservation area Rb is grasped, and the number of reservations is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display section reservation area Rb as the second start reservation storage number RbN. Thereafter, the MPU 302 processes steps after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 302 determines in step S205 that the start suspension memory number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not. When the MPU 302 determines in step S205 that the number N of starting suspension memories is not less than the upper limit value (NO), it ends the winning process for the starting port. Further, the MPU 302 performs step S
If it is determined at 205 that the number N of start suspension memories is less than the upper limit (YES), step S
At 206, the value of the start pending memory number N (RaN or RbN) is updated by adding one.

In step S207, the MPU 302 stores the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process out of the free storage area of the result display holding area. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area, ie, the storage area corresponding to the start suspension storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the MPU 302 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process,
A set of values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is updated in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first result display unit reservation area Ra, that is, the first start reservation storage number RaN in step S206 is stored as pending information in the storage area corresponding to .
For example, when the MPU 302 sets "3" to the first start-up pending memory number RaN in step S202, the MPU 302 sets a storage area corresponding to "4" in the first start-up pending memory number RaN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in 4 area Ra4.

Also, for example, when the MPU 302 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process The set of values is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second result display section reservation area Rb, that is, in step S2.
In 06, it is stored as suspension information in a storage area corresponding to the second start suspension storage number RbN updated. For example, in step S204, the MPU 302 sets the second start pending storage number RbN to "3
" is set, the second start pending memory number RbN updated in step S206 is "4".
Hold information is stored in a fourth area Rb4, which is a storage area corresponding to .

Also, in step S<b>207 , the MPU 302 sets a command for instructing lighting of the first suspension lamp section 95 a or the second suspension lamp section 95 b and transmits this set command to the sound emission control device 400 . After that, the MPU 302 terminates the winning process for the start opening. Note that the sound emission control device 400, based on the command transmitted from the MPU 302, the first
The reservation lamp portion 95a or the second reservation lamp portion 95b is turned on. Also, in this embodiment,
The maximum number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b is four. Also, the number of the first reservation lamp units 95a or the second reservation lamp units 95b that is the same as (corresponding to) the number of reservations is lit.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing. Normal processing is the main processing for progressing the game. Specifically, the MPU 302 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, and when a remaining time occurs, steps S308 to S31
1 is repeatedly executed, and step S312 and subsequent steps are executed according to the determination result of step S308. Note that the "remaining time" means the cycle time (4 msec) to steps S301 to S30.
It is the remaining time after subtracting the time taken for the processing of 9.

In step S301, the MPU 302 executes timer interrupt processing or external output processing for transmitting a command set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. Specifically, M
PU302 determines whether or not a prize ball command is set, and if it is determined that a prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the voice emission control device 400 or the payout control device 24
2. Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 302 determines whether or not a command for effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is set. command is set, the command for the effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S302, the MPU 302 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, the MPU 302 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS to update it, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 . Note that the MPU 302 resets the value of the fluctuation type counter CS to 0 when the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to it.

In step S303, the MPU 302 executes game round control processing for advancing the game round. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes a winner lottery and a distribution lottery, determines information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 91, and selects a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93. Execute determination of related information, etc.

In step S304, the MPU 302 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes transition processing to each game state such as an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode. The game round control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 302 executes demonstration display execution determination processing. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for the start of the demonstration has elapsed without a new game round being started after the game round is completed, and If it is determined that the waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400 . Sound emission control device 400 starts demonstration display execution processing based on a demonstration command transmitted from MPU 302 . This demonstration display execution processing will be described later in detail.

Here, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, let the start waiting period be 3 seconds,
When the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 3
02 counts the number of executions of the process of step S305 and determines that the start waiting period has elapsed when the number reaches 3000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC). again,
The MPU 302 resets the value of the count when a new game cycle is started while counting the number of executions of the process of step S305.

In step S306, the MPU 302 opens and closes the opening/closing member 84 provided at the second starting port 84b.
A process for executing the opening/closing control of b1 (hereinafter referred to as an electric support process) is executed. in particular,
The MPU 302 stores the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electrical work holding area of the RAM313.
Based on the value of , the electric accessory open lottery is executed, and when the electric accessory open lottery is won, the opening/closing process of the opening/closing member 84b1 is executed. Further, the MPU 302 performs display control of the accessory display unit 94 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 302 executes game ball launch control processing. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes shooting control to cause the power supply/shooting control device 243 to shoot game balls based on the player's turning operation of the shooting handle 41 clockwise (right). Let More specifically, the power supply and launch control unit 243 is set to a predetermined period (eg, 0.
6 sec), the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is excited to cause the game ball shooting mechanism 110 to shoot a game ball. In addition, the solenoid is energized so as to shoot the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 41 . Specifically, the greater the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 41, the stronger the excitation, and the stronger the shooting intensity of the game ball. Power/launch control device 24
3, the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is activated when a predetermined shooting condition (when the shooting handle 41 is rotated, the touch sensor 41a is on, and the shooting stop switch 41b is off) is met. A drive signal is output to shoot a game ball.

In step S<b>308 , the MPU 302 determines whether or not a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 313 . The power failure flag is set in the RAM 3 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitor board 303 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 302 .
Set to 13. The power failure monitor board 303 outputs this power failure signal when it confirms the occurrence of power failure. This power failure flag is cleared when the main process is executed next time.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area such as the RAM 313, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power outage flag by substituting 1 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 313 and clears the power outage flag by substituting 0 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 313 .

When the MPU 302 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308 (YES), the MPU 302 performs power failure processing in and after step S312 without performing the processing in and after step S309. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 302 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 302 determines the RAM determination value (R
AM313 checksum) is calculated and stored. In step S314, the MPU 302
prohibits access to the RAM 313 . After that, the MPU 302 continues an infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag has not been set (NO), in step S309 it determines whether the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, from when the current normal process is started. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 4 msec) has passed. If the MPU 302 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not reached (NO), that is, the cycle time of 4 m
If sec has not elapsed and remaining time has occurred, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S310, and the variation type counter CS is updated in step S311. Note that the MPU 302 repeats the processing of steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived (4 msec, which is the cycle time, has elapsed).

If the MPU 302 determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process (YES), that is, if the cycle time of 4 msec has elapsed and there is no remaining time, step S301 is executed again. By doing so, the next normal processing is started.

<Main processing>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In step S401, the MPU 302 executes start-up processing upon power-on.
This start-up process is provided with a waiting time for waiting for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 400) to become operable. Specifically, the MPU 302
waits until a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) elapses after the power is turned on.

In step S402, the MPU 302 prohibits access to the RAM 313 for a period (
It is determined whether or not 1 sec, which is hereinafter referred to as a permission/prohibition period), has elapsed. The MPU 302 is
The processing of step S402 is repeatedly executed until it is determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed. That is, if the MPU 302 does not determine that 1 sec has elapsed in step S402, it repeatedly executes the processing in step S402, and
If it is determined that ec has passed, the process from step S403 is executed.

In this embodiment, the MPU 302 determines whether or not 1 sec has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, when the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 302
It is determined that 1 second has elapsed when the number of executions of the process of (1) is counted and reaches 10000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

In step S<b>403 , the MPU 302 permits access to the RAM 313 . In step S404, the MPU 302 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/launch control device 243 is turned on. MPU 302 performs step S
If it is determined at 404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on (YES), the processing from step S409 onwards is executed. Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the RAM erase switch is not turned on in step S404 (NO), in step S405,
It is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 313 .

When the MPU 302 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405 (NO), it executes the processes after step S409. Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405 (YES), step S40
6, a RAM determination value (checksum) is calculated. In step S407, the MPU
302 confirms the validity of the data stored in RAM 313 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU
302 compares the RAM determination value (checksum) calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value (checksum) stored in step S313 (power failure processing) of normal processing, and if they match. , the RAM judgment value is judged to be normal;
The M judgment value is judged to be abnormal.

When the MPU 302 determines that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S407 (N
O), that is, when it is determined that the checksum values do not match, the processing from step S409 is executed. If the MPU 302 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407 (YES), that is, if it determines that the checksum values match, the MPU 302 stores the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 313 in step S408. clear the power failure flag.

In this embodiment, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313 is confirmed using a checksum. may be determined by a different method. For example, in power failure processing, R
The validity of the data stored in the RAM 313 may be confirmed by writing the keyword in a predetermined area of the AM 313 and determining in the main processing whether or not the keyword is normally written. Also, a CRC (cyclic redundancy check) or MD5 (hash function) hash value may be used to confirm the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313 . The method of calculating the checksum is very simple, and for example, the lower one word of the total sum of the individual words in the word string may be used as the code value as it is. Therefore, the effectiveness of data confirmation by checksum is less reliable than other error detection codes, but the algorithm is very simple, so it does not burden the MPU 302 even in a limited memory space. can be calculated to

If the MPU 302 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404 (YES), determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405 (NO), or determines the RAM in step S407. If the value is determined to be abnormal (N
O), the processing after step S409 is executed.

In step S<b>409 , MPU 302 outputs an audio lamp initialization command to audio emission control device 400 . As a result, initialization of RAM data and abnormality of data stored and held by the RAM judgment value are reported.
In step S410, the MPU 302 outputs a payout initialization command or the like in order to initialize the payout control board or the like, which is the slave side control board.
At step S411, the MPU 302 clears the work area of the RAM 313, and at step S412, initializes (initializes) the RAM 313. FIG.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 313 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. In addition, the pachinko machine 10, even when the power failure monitoring board 303 does not confirm the occurrence of a power failure, or when the RAM determination value is abnormal, the RAM 313
Initialize the data stored in

After executing the process of step S408 or step S412, the MPU 302 executes the opening monitoring process for power recovery. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes detection state comprehension processing in step S413. In the detection state comprehension processing, signals input from the first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290, and the back pack unit open detector 289 are read in the same manner as the signal reading processing in step S101 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22). The information of this read signal is stored and held in the register of the MPU 302 .

In step S414, a comparison process is executed. In the comparison process, the value of the signal of the first monitoring device 250 stored in the register of the MPU 302 in the detection state grasping process is compared with the judgment reference value stored in the ROM 312 . In the comparison process, the value of the signal of the second monitoring device 290 stored in the register of the MPU 302 in the detection state grasping process is compared with the judgment reference value stored in the ROM 312 .

In step S415, it is determined whether or not the value of the signal of the first monitoring device 250 compared in the comparison process exceeds the determination reference value, and if the value of the signal of the second monitoring device 290 exceeds the determination reference value. determine whether or not there is As a result, when both are equal to or greater than the judgment reference value, the process of step S417 is executed. If either one of them is smaller than the judgment reference value, it means that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 has been opened while the power is off.
The process of step S416 is executed.

In step S416, power recovery notification processing is executed. In the power recovery notification process, a power recovery notification command is output to the sound emission control device 400 . As a result, the speaker section 26A~
The notification sound is output from 26C, the error display lamp section 24 is lit, and the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is performed. Note that these notification modes may differ from the notification mode based on the normal notification command. Further, in the sound emission control device 400, the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14
Various notifications are continued until a notification cancellation operation is performed such that the door is opened or closed (when the notification cancellation operation is performed, a door open notification cancellation command is sent from the main control unit 300 (MPU 302) to the sound emission control device 400 (MPU 402). ). In other words, not only the mode of notification but also the mode of cancellation of notification differs between the normal time and the time of power recovery. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode of notification and the mode of cancellation of notification may be the same between normal and power recovery.

In addition, in the notification process for when power is restored, a signal for notification when power is restored is output to the hall computer provided in the game hall via the external terminal plate 213 . In this case, the hall computer stores identification information such as the date and time when the power recovery notification signal was input from the pachinko machine 10 and the machine number of the pachinko machine 10 as a history, and the monitoring cameras installed in the game hall are targeted. A process of directing the ball to the pachinko machine 10 is executed.
By executing the power recovery notification process, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13
is opened, it can be notified to the manager of the game hall or the like, and if it is an illegal opening, it can be dealt with.

In addition, in the power recovery notification process, the information format of the power failure notification command or the power failure opening detection signal depends on whether the front door frame 14 has been opened or the inner frame 13 has been opened. can be different. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the power is cut off and when the inner frame 13 is opened while the power is cut off, the pachinko machine 10 itself or the hall computer can make different notification modes, It is possible to make the manager of the game hall or the like deal with the problem appropriately. Further, the power recovery notification process is not limited to the above, and may be configured to output only one of the power recovery notification command and the power recovery notification signal.
In addition, as a process based on the output of the power recovery notification command, only a part of the output of the notification sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the lighting of the error display lamp unit 24, or the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is performed. It may be configured to execute.

In step S417, the MPU 302 permits generation of timer interrupt processing. After that, the MPU 302 shifts to normal processing described with reference to FIG. As a result, the state before the power shutdown is restored.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing.
In step S501, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
If the MPU 302 determines in step S501 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (YES
), the game round control process is terminated without executing the process after step S502. That is, when determining that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 302
The progress of the game cycle is not started irrespective of whether or not the winning of the game ball is detected.

Here, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 313 . The same applies to each of the following steps. Further, the MPU 302 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S501 that it is not in the opening/closing execution mode (NO
), in step S502, it is determined whether or not the main display section 93 is performing variable display, that is, whether or not a game cycle is in progress. When the MPU 302 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 93 is not performing the variable display (NO), the MPU 302 executes the game round start processing in steps S503 to S505. Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the main display unit 93 is performing the variable display in step S502 (YES), the MPU 302 executes the game cycle progressing process in steps S506 to S509.

In step S503, the MPU 302 recognizes the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb. is equal to or less than "0". MPU30
2, if it is determined in step S503 that the total number CRN is "0" or less (YES)
, ends the game round control process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the total number CRN is not equal to or less than "0" in step S503 (NO), in step S504, the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb A data setting process is executed for setting the stored hold information for completion of game rounds. After that, in step S505, the MPU 302
The main display unit 93 and the pattern display device 91 are caused to start the variable display, and the variation start processing for finishing the game round is executed, and the game round control processing is ended. The data setting process in step S504 will be described later with reference to FIG. 27, and the variation start process in step S505 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S502, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the main display section 93 is performing variable display. If it is determined that the main display section 93 is performing variable display (YES), the game cycle progresses in steps S506 to S509. process.

In step S506, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 28), which will be described later, has elapsed. Specifically, M
PU 302 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of RAM 313 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed (NO), in step S507, the MPU 302 executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 302 updates the display on the main display section 93 during variable display. After that, MP
U302 ends the game round control process.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed (YES), in step S508, the MPU 302 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation end process, the MPU 302 stores the information stored in the RAM 313 in any one of steps S710, S713, and S715 of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 28), which will be described later (see FIG. 28). (information related to the pattern to be displayed) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 302 executes display control of the main display section 93 so as to display the symbol corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 93 during the variable display.

Here, the symbol finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 93 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game arcade or the like can display the main display section 93 at the end of the game cycle.
The game result can be confirmed by visually observing the . According to this, the manager of the game parlor can easily confirm whether or not the pachinko machine 10 behaves in the same manner as in the case of winning a lottery to generate a big win. can be done systematically.

The main display portion 93 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the pattern display device 91, and the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display portion 93 are the symbol columns Z1 to Compared to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 instead of the main display section 93 to determine whether or not the player has won the big win. Attention to screen G increases.

In step S509, the MPU 302 sets a fluctuation end command. MPU302
, in step S301 of the normal processing, transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 400. FIG. After that, the MPU 302 terminates the game round control process. In addition, the sound emission control device 400 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 302 . Here, the sound emission control device 400 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variable end command.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process in step S504 of FIG. 26 will be described in detail. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In step S601, the MPU 302 performs the winning process for the starting opening described above (see FIG. 23).
It is determined whether or not the second start pending memory number RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb set in step S204 is "0" or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0" (YES), step S
When the data setting process for the first result display portion (for the first start port 84a) of 602 to S606 is executed, and it is determined in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less (
NO), the data setting process for the second result display section (for the second starting port 84b) in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described. In step S602, the MPU 302 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start suspension storage number RaN in the first result display holding area Ra, and the first start holding stored in the first result display holding area Ra Update the value of the memory number RaN. In step S603, the MPU 30
2 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.

In step S604, the MPU 302 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 302 sends the pending information of the second area Ra2 to the first
Shift to area Ra1, shift the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2,
The hold information in the fourth area Ra4 is shifted to the third area Ra3. That is, step S60
3 and S604, shift processing of the data stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed by the FIFO (First In, First Out) method.

In step S<b>605 , the MPU 302 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 313 . This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which main display section 93, of the first result display section 93a and the second result display section 93b, is caused to start the variable display when completing a game cycle. is. In this step S605, the MPU 302 clears the second result display section flag, so when completing the game cycle, the first start port 84a
This indicates that the first result display portion 93a is caused to start the variable display based on the winning of the game ball.

In step S606, the MPU 302 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 400, and ends the data setting process. This shift command is the first start port 84
Information for making the sound emission control device 400 recognize that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to a I'm in.

Note that the sound emission control device 400 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp portion 95a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 302 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 400 reduces the number of reserved game balls that have won the first start opening 84a, that is, the number of first start reserved memories stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra As the RaN decreases, the number of lights of the first reservation lamp portion 95a is decreased.

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described. In step S607, the MPU 302 displays the second result display section holding area Rb.
1 is subtracted from the value of the start pending memory number RbN, and the value of the second start pending memory number RbN stored in the second result display portion reserve area Rb is updated. In step S608, the MPU 302
moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb2 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.

In step S609, the MPU 302 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 302 sends the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first
Shifting to area Rb1, shifting pending information in third area Rb3 to second area Rb2,
The pending information in the fourth area Rb4 is shifted to the third area Rb3. That is, step S60
8 and S609, FIFO (First In First Out, FIFO)
According to the method, the data stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is shifted.

In step S<b>610 , the MPU 302 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 313 . In this step S610, since the MPU 302 has set the second result display flag, the second
This indicates that the result display section 93b is caused to start the variable display.

In step S611, the MPU 302 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 400, and ends the data setting process. This shift command is the second start port 84
Information for making the sound emission control device 400 recognize that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to b I'm in. Note that the sound emission control device 400 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp portion 95b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 302 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 400 reduces the number of reserved game balls that have won the second start hole 84b, that is, the second start reserved storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reserved area Rb decreases, the number of lights of the second reservation lamp portion 95b is decreased.

As described above, in the data setting process in FIG. 27, the reservation area Ra for the first result display section
for the first result display section (first start port 84a
) data setting process (S602 to S606), and for the second result display section (for the second start port 84b )
data setting processing (S607 to S611). MPU 302 performs step S
If it is determined in 601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the data setting process for the second result display section is executed without executing the data setting process for the first result display section. . When the MPU 302 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 84a. irrespective of whether or not there is any pending information stored in the first result display holding area Ra, the holding information stored in the second result holding holding area Rb is preferentially used for completing the game cycle. set to

<Change Disclosure Processing>
Next, the variation start processing in step S505 of FIG. 26 will be described in detail. Figure 28 shows
It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a fluctuation start process.
In step S701, the MPU 302 determines whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the MPU 302 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (NO), in step S702, the win/fail table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 20A) is retrieved from the win/fail table storage area of the ROM 312. read out. Also, M
If the PU 302 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode (YES), in step S703, the win-fail table for the high-probability mode (FIG. 20(b)
)) is read from the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 312 .

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 302 executes the suitability determination process in step S704. Specifically, the MPU 302, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, the success or failure table for the low probability mode read in step S702 or the success or failure table for the high probability mode read in step S703 The result of the winning lottery (winning result) is determined by comparing with. In addition, the pass/fail result is
Either "jackpot winning", "special failure result", or "normal failure result", and whether in the low probability mode or the high probability mode, the success or failure result is "jackpot election", "special failure result" ”, and “out of normal result”.

In step S705, the MPU 302 determines that the pass/fail result determined in step S704 is "
It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot winning. If the MPU 302 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning" (YES), it executes the processing from step S706 onwards, and if it determines that the win/loss result is not "jackpot winning" in step S705 ( NO
), and the processing after step S712 is executed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is "big win" (YES), in step S706 it determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313 .

Here, when the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 313, it indicates that the first result display section 93a is caused to start the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 84a. Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 313 (NO), in step S707,
A first distribution table (see FIG. 21A) is read from the distribution table storage area of the ROM 312 .

Further, when the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 313, the second start port 84
This indicates that the second result display section 93b is caused to start the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to b. Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313 (YES), in step S708, the second
A distribution table (see FIG. 21B) is read from the distribution table storage area of the ROM 312 .

After performing the process of step S707 or step S708, MPU302 performs a distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 302 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708 to determine the result of the distribution lottery ( distribution result).

In step S710, the MPU 302 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 302 determines information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 93a or the second result display portion 93b of the main display portion 93, and determines the determined information. In other words, the RAM 313 is made to store information relating to symbols to be stopped and displayed. Here, the MPU 302 stores the allocation result determined in step S709 and the ROM
By comparing with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in 312, the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 93 is determined. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display section 93 so as to be different for each sorting result.

In step S711, the MPU 302 sets a flag in the RAM 313 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 302 specifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag, and specifies that it is a "non-explicit small round high probability result", If the non-explicit small round high probability result flag is set and it is specified as "explicit small round high probability result", the explicit small round high probability result flag is set and it is specified as "best result" If so, set the best result flag. After that, the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S716. In addition, in the processing of each step below, the MPU 302 refers to the presence or absence of a flag set in the RAM 313 to determine the sorting result.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is not "big hit winning" (NO), in step S712, the win/fail result determined in step S704 is "
It is determined whether or not it is a "special out-of-order result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S712 that the win/loss result is the “special outlier result” (YES), it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and determines in step S712 that the win/fail result is not the “special outlier result”. If (NO
), and the processing after step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 302 executes stop result setting processing for the special outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 302 determines information related to symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 93a or the second result display portion 93b of the main display portion 93, The RAM 313 is caused to store information, that is, information relating to symbols to be stopped and displayed. Here, the MPU 302 refers to a stop result table for special outlier results stored in advance in the ROM 312 to determine information related to symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 93 . The mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the big win result. In step S714, the MPU 302 sets a special exclusion flag in the RAM313. In each of the following processes, the MPU 302 refers to the presence or absence of the special loss flag set in the RAM 313 to determine whether the win/loss result is the "special loss result".

In step S715, the MPU 302 executes a stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In this stopping result setting process for the out-of-ordinary result, the MPU 302 determines information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 93a or the second result display portion 93b of the main display portion 93, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 313 . Here, the MPU 302
By referring to a stop result table for abnormal results stored in the ROM 312 in advance, information related to symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 93 is determined. It should be noted that the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the normal winning result is different from the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special losing result.

After executing any of the processes in steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 302 executes display duration time (display duration) setting processing in step S716. The processing for setting the display continuation time (display continuation period) will be described later in detail.

In step S717, the MPU 302 sets a variation command and a type command. The MPU 302 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S717 to the sound emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 24). The sound emission control device 400 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302, and the processing will be described later in detail.

Note that the variation command includes information regarding the display duration time, but does not include information regarding whether or not the ready-to-reach display will occur. In addition, the type command includes information related to win/fail results and information related to sorting results. More specifically, the type command includes each information related to "big win win", "special loss result", and "usual loss result" as information related to win/fail results. In addition, in the type command, as information related to the sorting result, "low probability result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "best result"
Each information related to is included. It should be noted that in the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are also collectively referred to as the game result. That is, the type command includes information about the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 313, and causes the main display section 93 to start variable display based on the determination result. Here, if the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 313, the first result display section 93 will
A indicates that the variable display is to be started.

Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 313, it causes the first result display section 93a to start the variable display in step S718. Further, when the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 313, the second result display section 93b is made to start the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b when the game round is completed. It is shown that. Therefore, the MPU 302 stores the second
When determining that the result display flag is set, the MPU 302 performs step S71.
8, the second result display section 93b is caused to start the variable display.

<Display duration setting processing>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a display duration setting process.
In step S<b>801 , the MPU 302 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 313 . again,
The MPU 302 determines whether or not a ready-to-win display will occur on the symbol display device 91 . Specifically, in step S802, the MPU 302 determines whether the sorting result determined in step S709 is the "low probability result" or the "best result".

In step S802, the MPU 302 determines that the sorting result is a "low probability result" or a "best result".
(YES), in step S803, it is determined whether the success/failure result determined in step S704 of FIG. MPU 302 performs step S80
3 (YES), step S804
, the reach generation lottery is executed by comparing the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area with the reach table pre-stored in the ROM 312 .

In step S805, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs in the ready-to-win occurrence lottery in step S804. When the MPU 302 determines that the reach display occurs in step S805 (YES), in step S806, the display duration table for reach occurrence stored in the ROM 312 is referred to. Also, when the MPU 302 determines that the sorting result is not the “low probability result” or the “best result” in step S802 (NO)
, If it is determined in step S803 that the success/failure result is not the "normal deviation result" (NO), or if it is determined in step S805 that the ready-to-win display does not occur (NO), step S8
07, the non-reach display duration table stored in the ROM 312 is referred to.

In step S808, the MPU 302 determines the display continuation time after executing the process of step S806 or step S807. Specifically, the MPU 302 performs step S8
Based on the reach generation display duration table referenced in step S807 or the reach non-occurrence display duration table referenced in step S807, the display duration corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired from the movement type counter buffer decide. Also, the MPU 302 sets the display duration time determined in step S807 to display duration counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 .

In this embodiment, as described with reference to steps S804 to S808 in FIG.
The PU 302 determines whether or not to generate a reach indication by comparing the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 312 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the held ball storage area. Although the lottery is executed, the audio emission control device 400 may be configured to execute the lottery as to whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display.

Here, in the present embodiment, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the pending number increases. That is, the display duration time when the pending information related to the first starting port 84a is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the first starting port 84a increases. Further, the display continuation time when the pending information related to the second starting port 84b is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the second starting port 84b increases. Exceeding the maximum value (4 pieces) of the number of reservations, the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b
If you win a prize, you can receive the payout of prize balls, but you cannot receive the lottery for the jackpot. However, as in the present embodiment, the display duration time is shortened as the number of reserved balls increases, and the game cycle is completed quickly, so that the state in which the maximum number of reserved balls is exceeded and the prize is won. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the player can win the lottery but cannot receive the big winning lottery, thereby providing a game state advantageous to the player.

Further, in the reach non-occurrence display duration table, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the display duration is set to be shorter than when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. That is, when the pending number is the same, the display continuation time in the high-frequency support mode is set shorter than the display continuation time in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the display continuation time table for reach occurrence and the display continuation time table for reach non-occurrence are set so that the display continuation time is different from each other.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are different. different from each other. Therefore, even if the variation command does not include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs, the ready-to-win display is performed by the sound emission control device 400, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information regarding the display duration time. can be determined whether or not occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.

In the present embodiment, the display duration table for reach non-occurrence has a shorter display duration as the number of reservations increases, but the display duration increases as the number of reservations increases. The relationship may be reversed, and the display continuation time may be configured so as not to fluctuate (change) according to the number of pending items or the support mode. Also, the reach occurrence display duration table and the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be the same. In this case, referring to the same display duration table regardless of whether or not reach occurs,
A display continuation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained from the motion type counter buffer may be determined and set in display continuation time counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 . Furthermore, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the sorting result.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In step S901, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 302 determines that it is not in the opening/closing execution mode in step S901 (NO)
, the processing of steps S902 to S910 is executed. Further, the MPU 302 performs step S9
If it is determined in 01 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (YES), steps S911 to S91
4 is executed.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S901 that it is not in the opening/closing execution mode (NO
), and in step S902, it is determined whether or not the variable display on the main display section 93 has ended. When the MPU 302 determines in step S902 that the variable display on the main display section 93 has not ended (NO), it ends the game state transition processing. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S902 that the variable display of the main display section 93 has ended (YES), in step S903, it determines whether the success/failure result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. judge. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "big win win" or a "special loss result".

If the MPU 302 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (NO), that is, if it determines that the win/fail result is the "normal deviation result", the game state transition processing is executed. finish. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S903 that the pass/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (YES), the R
After setting the opening/closing execution mode flag in the AM 313, it is determined in step S904 whether or not the result is a "special failure result".

When the MPU 302 determines in step S904 that the win/fail result is the “special loss result” (YES), in step S905, the MPU 302 sets “2” to the open/close counter SOC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 . This opening/closing counter SOC counts the total number of opening/closing times of the large winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.
02 is a counter for specifying. In addition, when the MPU 302 determines that the success/failure result is not the "special loss result" in step S904 (NO), that is, when it determines that the success/failure result is the "jackpot winning", the distribution result is small in step S906. It is determined whether it is a round high probability result ("implicit small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result").

When the MPU 302 determines in step S906 that the result of allocation is a small round high probability result (YES), in step S907 the MPU 302 sets the round counter RC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 to "2". In addition, when the MPU 302 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is not a high-probability result for a small number of rounds (NO), that is, when it determines that the distribution result is a "low-probability result" or a "best result", In step S908, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 302 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening and closing execution modes with mutually different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds regulation mode that shifts when the win/loss result is "jackpot winning", and a win/fail result is "special losing result".
and an opening/closing number regulation mode in which the transition is made when .

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC. The opening/closing number regulation mode ends on condition that the large winning opening 83a is opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or a predetermined number of game balls enter the large winning opening 83a. Here, the total number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 83a corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the big winning hole 83a once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions (1) and (2) is satisfied. That is, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 83b to the open state, and then satisfies the following two conditions (1) and (2).
), the opening/closing door 83b is set to the closed state again by satisfying one of the conditions.
(1) Elapse of a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) (2) The total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 83a reaches a predetermined upper limit number

After the MPU 302 executes any one of steps S905, S907, and S908, in step S909, the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 is set to " 10
00” is set. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. In addition, the waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined according to the combination of the game state and the winning design (special design).

Thus, when the MPU 302 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 302 sets the waiting time for opening to the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. . In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S910, the MPU 302 sets an opening command. afterwards,
The MPU 302 ends the game state transition process. Here, the opening command includes the information of the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and the MPU 302 sets in step S910 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 24). An opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400 . Note that the sound emission control device 400 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S901 that the game is in the opening/closing execution mode (YES), in step S911, the MPU 302 executes the big winning opening opening/closing process. Note that the processing for opening and closing the big winning opening at step S911 will be described later in detail.

In step S912, the MPU 302, after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S911, checks whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less. judge.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S912 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it ends the game state transition processing. Further, the MPU 302 sets the open/close counter S at step S912.
If it is determined that both the OC value and the round counter RC value are less than or equal to "0" (YE
S), in step S913, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less.

When the MPU 302 determines that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" in step S913 (NO), it ends the game state transition processing. Further, the MPU 302 performs step S
If it is determined in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" (YES), in step S914, after clearing the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 313, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is performed. to run. After that, the MPU 302 ends the game state transition processing.

Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S911 of FIG. 30 will be described in detail.
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In step S1001, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the big winning opening 83a is open. When the MPU 302 determines that the large winning opening 83a is not open in step S1001 (NO), it executes the processing from step S1002. Also, the MPU 302
When it is determined in step S1001 that the big winning opening 83a is open (YES), the processing after step S1006 is executed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1001 that the big winning opening 83a is not open (NO), in step S1002, the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less, and the value of the round counter RC is "0". Determine whether or not: When the MPU 302 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0" (YES), the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), in step S1003, the value of the timer counter T is set to "0". ” or less.
When the MPU 302 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" at step S1003 (YES), at step S1004, the MPU 302 executes a special winning opening opening process. It should be noted that the special prize opening opening process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

In step S1005, the MPU 302 sets an open command. Also, MPU3
02 is step S10 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 24).
05 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400 . After that, MPU3
02 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process. Note that the audio light emission control device 400 includes the MPU 302
Based on the open command transmitted from, it recognizes that the opening/closing door 83b has been set to the open state, and executes a predetermined process.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 83a is open (YES), in step S1006, it determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, that is, whether the large winning opening is open. It is determined whether or not the upper limit continuous time set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 of the process (see FIG. 32) has elapsed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), in step S1007 it determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 83a. It should be noted that the determination of whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special prize opening 83a is
It is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 153 corresponding to the big winning opening 83a.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1007 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 83a (NO), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening/closing process. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1007 that a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning opening 83a (YES), in step S1008, the value of the prize winning counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1009, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less. In step S1009, the MPU 302 determines that the value of the winning counter PC is "
0” or less (NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. Also, MPU3
When 02 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is less than or equal to "0" (YES), in step S1010, it executes closing execution processing. In this closing execution process, the MPU 302 sets the open/close door 83b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 83c.

In step S1011, the MPU 302 sets a closing command. The MPU 302 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the sound emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 24). Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 302, the sound emission control device 400 recognizes that the opening/closing door 83b has been set to the closed state, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S1012, the MPU 302 determines whether the hit/fail result is a "special loss result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S1012 that the win/fail result is the “special loss result” (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1018, which will be described later.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1012 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result" (NO), it executes the processing from step S1013. Step S1013
Then, the MPU 302 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it. Also, in step S1014, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1015. After that, the MPU 302 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is the opening/closing door 83b.
is set to the open state, the open state is set to the closed state again, and the open standby time is defined until the open/close door 83b is set to the open state again. In this embodiment, the waiting time for opening is set to 1 second, but the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode and the progress.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0" (YES), it executes the processing from step S1016. In step S1016, the MPU 302 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. The value set in this timer counter T is
Each time the timer interrupt process is executed, the value is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value. Here, timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 se
becomes c. It should be noted that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined according to the combination of the game state and the winning design (special design).

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for the opening. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S1017, the MPU 302 sets an ending command. MPU
302 is step S1 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 24).
The ending command set in 017 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400 . After that, the MPU 302 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process. Note that the sound emission control device 400
Based on the ending command sent from PU 302, it recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode and executes a predetermined process.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1010 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the win/fail result is the “special losing result” in step S1012 (YES), in step S1018, the value of the open/close counter SOC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1019, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1019 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it executes the processes after step S1015 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1019 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" (YES), it executes the processes after S1016 described above.

Next, the special winning opening opening process in step S1004 of FIG. 31 will be described in detail.
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In step S<b>1101 , the MPU 302 sets “8” to winning counters PC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 . In step S1102, the MPU 302
determines whether the hit/fail result is a "special failure result". MPU 302 performs step S
If it is determined at 1102 that the result is a "special loss result" (YES), step S
At 1103, the timer counter T is set to "85". As mentioned above, the MPU
302 updates the timer counter T by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is executed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1102 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result" (NO), in step S1104, the sorting result is a small round high probability result (
It is determined whether it is “non-explicit small round high probability result” or “explicit small round high probability result”).

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1104 that the allocation result is the small round high probability result (YES), in the above-described step S1103, the timer counter T is set to "85
” is set. As described above, the MPU 302 updates the timer counter T by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is 2m
It is executed in sec cycles. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17
sec.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1104 that the distribution result is not the small round high probability result (NO), in step S1105, the timer counter T is set to "1500
0”. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is executed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the process of step S1103 or step S1105, the MPU 302 executes the opening execution process of the big winning opening 83a in step S1106. In this opening execution process, the MPU 302 sets the open/close door 83b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 83c. After that, the MPU 302 ends the big winning opening opening process.

It should be noted that the value set in the winning counter PC in step S1101 is
It defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to. Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1105 defines the upper limit duration time from when the opening/closing door 83b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU
302 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting "85" or "15000" in the timer counter T, as described above. Specifically, MP
U302 sets a long-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 110 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. again,
The MPU 302 sets the winning counter PC to "8" to open the big winning opening 83a.
The upper limit of the total winning number of game balls is set to eight. Therefore, the upper limit duration time (30 sec) of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 83a and the firing cycle of the game balls, so the upper limit is 8. It is easy to let the game ball win the big winning hole 83a. On the other hand, the upper limit duration (0.17 sec) of the short-time mode is
Since it is shorter than the shooting period of the game ball, it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 83a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 83a.

Next, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in step S914 of FIG. 30 will be described in detail.
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In step S1201, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few rounds high probability result". If the MPU 302 determines in step S1201 that the sorting result is the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high probability result” (YES
), and in step S 1202 , a high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 .
If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode to the high-frequency support mode.

In step S<b>1203 , the MPU 302 clears the count limit flag stored in the RAM 313 .
Here, the high-frequency support mode is continued at least until "big win" is won in the lottery if the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number of times limit flag is not set.

In step S<b>1204 , the MPU 302 sets the high probability mode flag to the RAM 313 . If the high-probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the winning/failing lottery mode to the high-probability mode. This high probability mode is at least "jackpot winning" in the lottery
This is continued until After that, the MPU 302 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When ending the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 302 sets the flags (low probability result flag, non-explicit small round high probability result flag, explicit small round high probability Clear the definite result flag and the most favorable result flag) and the special outlier flag. Further, in step S701 of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 28) described above, MP
U302 determines whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM313.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit few rounds high probability result” (NO), in step S1205 the distribution result is “non-explicit few rounds high It is determined whether or not it is a “definite result”. If the MPU 302 determines in step S1205 that the result of allocation is the “non-explicit small round high probability result” (Y
ES), in step S1206, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 .

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1206 that the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1203 described above. If the MPU 302 determines in step S1206 that the high-frequency support flag has not been set in the RAM 313 (NO), it sets the high-probability mode flag in the RAM 313 in step S1207. If the high-probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. This allows the MPU 302
sets or maintains the lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode is continued at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 302
Terminates transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1205 that the allocation result is not the "non-explicit small round high probability result" (NO), in step S1208 it determines whether the allocation result is the "low probability result". .

If the MPU 302 determines in step S1208 that the sorting result is not the "low-probability result" (NO), that is, if it determines that the win-or-fail result is the "special failure result", transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode exit.
Moreover, when MPU302 determines with a distribution result being a "low probability result" in step S1208 (YES), in step S1209, it clears a high probability mode flag.
As a result, the MPU 302 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is continued at least until a "big win" is obtained in the winning lottery and the sorting result is anything other than a "low-probability result".

In step S<b>1210 , the MPU 302 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 313 . If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode to the high-frequency support mode. In step S1211, the MPU 302 stores the RAM 31
"100" is set to the value of the number-of-games counters provided in the various counter areas of 3.
In step S<b>1212 , the MPU 302 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 313 . The MPU 302 maintains the count limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313 . After that, the MPU 302 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end standard number of times set in the number-of-games counter, are counted. Continue until digested. MPU 302 is 1
When 00 games have been played, the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 302 performs these processes in step S3 of the above-described normal process (see FIG. 24).
06, it is executed as an electrical support process, but the detailed description is omitted.

In this way, when the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the allocation result in the allocation lottery becomes a "most advantageous result" or a "high probability result in a small number of explicit rounds", the game state is the current game state. Regardless, after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Also, when the current support mode is high-frequency support mode, in the lottery "
If the distribution result in the distribution lottery is "non-explicit small round high probability result", the game state will be a high probability after the opening and closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode). mode and the high-frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the win-or-loss lottery results in a "jackpot win", and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "non-explicit small round high probability result". , The game state is the opening and closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode)
After the end of, it shifts to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

In addition, if the winning lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery results in a "low probability result", the game state will be the open/close execution mode (that is, the number of rounds) regardless of the current game state. After the specified mode) ends, the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low probability mode is "jackpot winning" at least in the winning lottery
The high-frequency support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode when 100 game rounds are completed without becoming "big win" in the winning lottery.

Further, when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, when the winning result in the winning lottery is a "special losing result" or a "normal losing result", the game state does not shift.

Next, the front door frame opening monitoring process in step S102 in FIG. 22 will be described using the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the front door frame open monitoring process.

In the front door frame opening monitoring process, first, a comparison process is executed in step S1301. In the comparison process, the detection state information (light receiving signal) stored in the register of the MPU 302 in the signal reading process is compared with the judgment reference value stored in the ROM 312 . Following step S1
At 302, it is determined whether or not the value of the signal compared in the comparison process exceeds the determination reference value.

If the value of the signal is smaller than the determination reference value in step S1302 (NO), it means that the front door frame 14 has been opened with respect to the inner frame 13 . When the value of the signal is less than the determination reference value in this way, in order to notify that the front door frame 14 has been opened with respect to the inner frame 13 while power is being supplied from the external power supply, In step S1303, a notification process for normal time is executed.

In the normal time notification process, a normal time notification command is set. This set normal time notification command is output to the sound emission control device 400 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 23). The sound emission control device 400 causes the speaker sections 26A to 26C to output notification sounds, turns on the error display lamp section 24, and further causes the pattern display device 91 to perform notification display. In the sound emission control device 400, various notifications are continued until a notification cancellation operation is performed such that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened or closed (when the notification cancellation operation is performed, a door open notification cancellation command is transmitted to the MPU 402). ). Note that the sound emission control device 400 may stop the various notifications after continuing the above-described various notifications for a predetermined notification time (notification period). For example, 10 seconds or the like can be considered as this notification time.

Also, in the normal time notification process, a normal time notification signal is output to the hall computer provided in the game hall via the external terminal plate 213 . In this case, the hall computer stores identification information such as the date and time when the normal time notification signal was input from the pachinko machine 10 and the machine number of the pachinko machine 10 as a history, and the pachinko machine for the surveillance camera installed in the game hall. A process such as pointing to the machine 10 is executed.

In a situation where electric power is being supplied from an external power source, if the above normal notification processing is executed at the timing when the front door frame 14 is opened, not when the front door frame 14 is closed. It is possible to have the manager of the game hall deal with the illegal opening of the front door frame 14. - 特許庁

Note that the normal time notification process is not limited to the above, and may be configured to output only one of the normal time notification command and the normal time notification signal. In addition, as processing based on the output of the normal time notification command, output of notification sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C, lighting of the error display lamp unit 24, or part of the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is executed. It is good also as a structure which carries out. After executing normal notification processing in step S1303,
The front door frame opening monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the signal is equal to or greater than the determination reference value in step S1302 (YES), it is determined in step S1304 whether or not the normal time notification command has already been set.
In step S1304, if the normal time notification command has already been set (
YES), the notification cancellation process is executed in step S1305.
In step S1302, when the value of the signal is equal to or greater than the determination reference value, the front door frame 14
means that it is closed to Also, if the normal time notification command has already been set in step S1304, it means that notification is being performed. In this way, when the signal value is equal to or greater than the determination reference value and the normal time notification command has already been set, the front door frame 14 is moved to the inner frame 13 while power is being supplied from the external power source. On the other hand, since it means that the closing operation (notification cancellation operation) has been performed, notification cancellation processing is executed in step S1305.

In step S1306, the set normal time notification command is canceled, in other words, the flag of the normal time notification command is cleared (set to 0).
In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22), after the front door frame open monitoring process is executed in step S102, the second monitoring device 290 in a state where power is being supplied from the external power supply is performed in step S103. As monitoring processing of the inner frame 13 via the inner frame opening monitoring processing and opening detection of the back pack unit 15 via the back pack unit open detector 289 are executed.

In the inner frame open monitoring process, when the information (light receiving signal) of the detection state of the second monitoring device 290 grasped by the signal reading process is smaller than the judgment reference value stored in the ROM 312,
Along with executing the normal notification process, the detection state information is updated. Further, the information (light reception signal) of the detection state of the second monitoring device 290 grasped by the signal reading process is stored in the ROM
If the value is equal to or greater than the determination reference value stored in 312, it is determined whether or not the normal time notification command has already been set, and if the normal time notification command has already been set, notification cancellation processing is performed. The specific processing configuration is the same as that of the front door frame opening monitoring processing, and redundant description will be omitted. In the open detection of the back pack unit 15, based on the output signal (High or Low) from the back pack unit open detector 289, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit 15 is opened.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 400 and Display Control Device 500>
FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 35, the audio emission control device 400 includes an audio emission control board 401, an MPU 402 mounted on the audio emission control board 401, and an RO
It has M412 and RAM413. Here, the MPU 402 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit (RTC), a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 412 and the RAM 413 are combined into a chip.

The ROM 412 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require power supply from the outside to hold data as a read-only memory. The ROM 412 has a plurality of areas logically separated by logical addresses, and each area stores fixed value data used when executing various control programs and processes according to the programs. ing. MPU
402 controls execution of effects based on instructions from main controller 300 by executing processing according to control programs stored in ROM 412 . The ROM 412 is a CPU
are chipped and connected by an internal bus, it is relatively difficult to increase the data capacity. Specifically, the data capacity is 2 Mbytes.

The RAM 413 is configured to use a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM or DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to hold data, for both reading and writing.
Random access is possible, and when compared with the same data capacity, the ROM 41
2, the time required for reading is shorter. The RAM 413 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, and has various areas such as various counter areas and various flag storage areas, for example. The RAM 413 stores the ROM 4
When the control program stored in 12 is executed, various data etc. are temporarily stored. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 412 and the RAM 413 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 402, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The sound emission control board 401 has an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the sound emission control board 401 is connected to the main controller 300 . Also, the input port of the sound emission control board 401 is connected to the operation button 35 . The output port of the sound emission control board 401 is connected to the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, the error display lamp section 24, the first to third reservation lamp sections 95a to 96, the speaker sections 26A to 26C, the display control device 500, and the like. there is The MPU 402 controls the driving of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, the error display lamp section 24, the first to third reservation lamp sections 95a to 96, the speaker sections 26A to 26C, etc. based on commands transmitted from the main control device 300. to run.

Also, the MPU 402 analyzes a command transmitted from the main control device 300 to determine the content of the effect in a predetermined period, and transmits a command according to the content of the determined effect to the display control device 500 . A signal path provided to connect the MPU 402 and the MPU 502 is used for this command transmission. The sound emission control device 400 is electrically connected to the display control device 500 via a connector unit (connection unit) such as a harness having connectors at both ends of a signal line.

MPU402 performs the light emission control of not only the display control apparatus 500 but the display lamp apparatuses 23A and 23B, when the content of the production|presentation in a predetermined period is determined. In this case, in FIG.
Although the sound emission control board 401 and the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are described as being directly connected, the present invention is not limited to this, and the connection between the sound emission control board 401 and the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is possible. A relay substrate may be interposed therebetween.

When the MPU 402 determines the content of the presentation for the predetermined period, the speaker units 26A-2
6C drive control is executed. Sound output L
SI 403 and common ROM 404 are used.

The common ROM 404 is configured to read-only use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside to retain data, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The common ROM 404 is
2, but externally attached to the sound output LSI 403, it is easier to increase its data capacity than the ROM 412. The data capacity is 1 Gbyte. However, this data capacity is arbitrary,
It may be 500 Mbytes or 4 Gbytes.

The sound output LSI 403 includes an I/F 403a, a register 403b, a sound data processing unit 40
3c, a DAC 403d, and a data transfer unit 403e. Sound output LSI403
executes control for outputting sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C according to data transmitted from the MPU 402. FIG.

The I/F 403a connects to the MP through a bus B1 provided as a signal path group for two-way communication.
It is an interface for the sound output LSI 403 to communicate with the U402. A bus B1 connected to the I/F 403a is composed of eight signal paths, and data is transmitted and received between the MPU 402 and the sound output LSI 403 via each signal path.

The register 403b has a function as storage means for temporarily storing various data used in the sound output LSI 403, and is used for both reading and writing of a memory that requires power supply from the outside to hold the data. is configured to In addition, random access is possible, and when compared with the same data capacity, the ROM 412 and the common ROM
The time required for reading is shorter than that of 404 .

The register 403b has a data capacity of many bytes so that a plurality of data can be stored at the same time, and has a data capacity in units of kilobytes or megabytes.
Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 10 kilobytes.

The sound data processing unit 403c converts the sequence data and parameter data transmitted from the MPU 402 and stored in the register 403b so that they can be used for outputting sound, and outputs the contents of the conversion result and the common ROM 404. It has a function of creating digital musical sound data using the read sound data. The sequence data includes time data indicating the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data that determines the pitch, volume, and timbre of sounds at a predetermined timing. there is

The sound data processing unit 403c has a function of a plurality of sound generation channels so that a plurality of different sounds can be output at the same time. has a function to create Although 16 channels are provided as a plurality of tone generation channels, the number of channels is arbitrary. Also, by using virtual tracks, it is possible to use a larger number of tracks (for example, 64 tracks) than the actual number of sound generating channels, but a configuration that does not use virtual tracks is also possible.

The DAC 403d is a digital/analog converter and includes an analog signal amplifier circuit. The DAC 403d has a function of amplifying an analog audio signal obtained by converting the digital musical tone data or the digital synthesized musical tone data created by the sound data processing section 403c into an analog signal and outputting the amplified analog audio signal to the speaker sections 26A to 26C.

The data transfer unit 403e is connected to the common ROM 404 via a bus B2 provided as a signal path group for bidirectional communication, and has a function of transferring data read from the common ROM 404 to the register 403b. ing. This data transfer unit 403e and common R
A bus B2 provided between the OM 404 is composed of 16 signal paths, and the number of signal paths is greater than that of the bus B1 between the MPU 402 and the I/F 403a. The data communication speed between the data transfer unit 403e and the common ROM 404 is M
This is faster than the data communication speed between PU 402 and I/F 403a. The data transfer unit 403e transfers sound data necessary for sound output to the common ROM 4 based on the data converted from the sequence data and parameter data in the sound data processing unit 403c.
04 and stored in the register 403b.

Here, the data transfer unit 403e not only has a function of transferring sound data required by the sound data processing unit 403c to the register 403b, but also reads data required by the MPU 402 from the common ROM 404 and stores it in the register 403b. Register 4
03b to transfer the data to the MPU 402. A configuration related to data transfer will be described below.

<Data structure of ROM 412 and common ROM 404>
First, the data configurations of the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 will be described with reference to FIG. 36A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the ROM 412, and FIG. 36B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the common ROM 404. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), the ROM 412 contains a program and processing data (1) for executing the processing for effect control and abnormality notification in the MPU 402, a program and processing data (2), . . , programs and processing data (P) are stored in advance. These programs and processing data include data tables used for executing each effect, and sequence data and parameter data to be provided to the sound output LSI 403 . Programs and data for processing necessary for executing processing for effect control in the MPU 402 are all stored in the ROM 412 . The program and processing data for executing the abnormality notification process are the program and processing data used in the power recovery notification process in FIG. 25 and the normal notification process in FIG. It is different from the program and processing data that Therefore, the sound data described later is reproduced in different manners in the notification process for power recovery and the notification process for normal time.

The ROM 412 stores not only the program and processing data (1), the program and processing data (2), .
, 23B and light emission data (1
), light emission data (2), . . . , light emission data (Q) are stored in advance. In each of these light emission data, information on the type of light emitting portion to be turned on among the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, the lighting period, and the lighting order is set for a predetermined effect period. The content differs depending on the type of each light emission data. Each light emission data stored in the ROM 412 has a different target light emission control period and a different light emission pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36(b), the common ROM 404 stores the
sound data (1), sound data (2), .
Sound data (S) is stored in advance. Each of these sound data includes waveform data obtained by sampling melodies and sounds actually produced by musical instruments corresponding to various timbres, and melodies with lyrics are produced by musical instruments corresponding to various timbres. It contains waveform data obtained by sampling the voice in addition to the melody. All sound data are stored in the common ROM 404 . Note that the sound data stored in the common ROM 404 includes music (BGM) and sound data (music data and voice data) used in productions A to D shown in FIG. Abnormality notification used in the notification process for power recovery in 25 and the notification process for normal time in FIG. For example, "The door is open!"
The door is closed! ”, etc.) corresponding to the sound data (music data and voice data), the sound data corresponding to the music and voice used in the production of the first mode M1 to the fifth mode M5 in FIG. 43 (
music data and voice data), and sound data (music data and voice data) corresponding to the music and voices used in the fourth mode productions MA to MC in FIG.

Sound data is digital signal data obtained by converting an analog signal into a pulse train with a predetermined sampling frequency and a predetermined number of quantized signals by pulse code modulation (PCM). Specifically, the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz and the number of quantized signals is 16 b
It is. Therefore, sound waveform data consisting of analog signals for 1 sec is 1×4
The amount of data is 4.1 k×16 bits. Incidentally, the sampling period T1 in this case is 22.7 μsec.

The sound data is set so as to be readable from the common ROM 404 for each pulse-code-modulated data for one pulse, that is, data for one sample. That is, an address is set for each data of one sample, and the data transfer unit 403e of the sound output LSI 403 can transfer data from the common ROM 404 in units of data of one sample.

The sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz if good sampling can be achieved.
and may be, for example, 32 kHz, 48 kHz or 96 kHz. Also, the number of quantized signals is not limited to 16 bits, and any number of bits other than 16 bits may be used as long as good quantization can be achieved.

The common ROM 404 also stores sound data (1), sound data (2), . . . sound data (
S), but also light emission data (Q+1), light emission data (Q+2), ..., light emission data (
R) is stored in advance. Here, the light emission data stored in the common ROM 404 includes the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error display lamp unit 24 used in the notification process for power recovery in FIG. 25 and the notification process for normal time in FIG. It contains light emission data used to control the light emission of the Each of these light emission data has a different target light emission control period and a different light emission pattern.

Here, the light emission patterns of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are different between the notification process for power recovery (step S416) in FIG. 25 and the notification process for normal time (step S1303) in FIG. Specifically, in the notification process for power recovery, the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 emit light, while in the notification process for normal time, the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 The light emission data is defined so that the light does not emit light. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the normal time notification process, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, the display lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light, in other words, they are turned off. The emission data are defined as follows.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the notification process for power recovery in FIG. 25 and the notification process for normal time in FIG.
By using different light emission data, in normal notification processing, the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14
is open, the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light. , in the normal notification process, the display lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light,
The supply of power for light emission to light emitters such as light bulbs in which light emitting elements such as LEDs (light emitting diodes), filaments, and discharge elements of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are enclosed in a glass spherical shell may be stopped. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and hold different light emission data for the notification process for power restoration and the notification process for normal time, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification processing. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player playing a game in the adjacent seat may find the lighting of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B to be an annoyance. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat loses the exhilaration and immersion and loses interest. It should be noted that, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened, of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, the display lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is configured not to emit light. You may In this case also, the light emission data for the normal time notification processing may be defined so that the display lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light. It is also possible to stop the supply of light-emitting power to a light-emitting body such as a light bulb in which a light-emitting element such as an LED (light-emitting diode), a filament, or a discharge element of the display lamp device on the open side is enclosed in a glass spherical shell.

The light emission data used by the MPU 402 as described above is stored not only in the ROM 412 directly connected to the MPU 402 via the bus, but also in the common ROM 404 connected to the sound output LSI 403 . In other words, the light emission data is stored in the ROM 412,
It is distributed to and stored in the common ROM 404 .

By storing the light emission data in the common ROM 404 in this manner, the ROM 4
12, it is possible to increase the data capacity of the light emission data. In particular, since the ROM 412 is connected via the internal bus within the MPU 402, as already explained, it is relatively difficult to increase its data capacity.
An attempt to increase the data capacity requires expansion of the internal bus width, which is not easy to deal with. On the other hand, as already explained, the common ROM 404 is not directly connected to the MPU 402, but externally attached to the sound output LSI 403, resulting in an increased data capacity. is relatively easy. By storing the light emission data in the common ROM 404, it is possible to cope with an increase in the data capacity of the light emission data.

Also, basically, when setting data to the ROM, it is necessary to set a few percent of the total data capacity (for example, 2
%) is blank (unused area). In this case, for example, common ROM 4
Assuming that the data capacity of 04 is 1 Gbyte, the blank is 20 Mbytes.
This data capacity is larger than the 2 Mbyte data capacity of the ROM 412 . According to this configuration, it is possible to distribute and store the light emission data using such a blank.

Furthermore, since the sound data corresponds to melodies and voices for a predetermined period, the data capacity for performing a series of outputs is relatively large. As a result, it becomes difficult to adapt the data capacity of the sound data, and from this point as well, the common ROM 404 tends to become blank. According to this configuration, it is possible to distribute and store the light emission data using such blanks.

The light emission data stored in the common ROM 404 is used by the MPU 402, and when the MPU 402 needs to use it, it is shared by the sound output LSI 403 according to a transfer instruction from the MPU 402. Light emission data is read from the ROM 404 and the read light emission data is transferred to the MPU 402 . For this transfer, the bus B1 connecting the MPU 402 and the sound output LSI 403 is used. in short,
Light emission data distributed and stored in the common ROM 404 is transferred to the MPU 402 using a signal path for data transfer from the MPU 402 to the sound output LSI 403 or from the sound output LSI 403 to the MPU 402 . As a result, for example, an RO separate from the ROM 412
Compared to the configuration in which M is externally attached to the MPU 402 and the redundant light emission data is stored in the ROM, it is possible to store the redundant light emission data without increasing the number of signal paths. Become.

Of the programs and processing data used by the MPU 402 and the light emission data, all of the programs and processing data are stored in the ROM 412, and part of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 404. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute data satisfactorily. In other words, if the program and processing data are distributed to the common ROM 404, a separate program and processing data are required to transfer the program and processing data to the RAM 413 of the MPU 402, which complicates the design of the program. become something. On the other hand, for the light emission data, the address where the light emission data is originally stored is grasped, the light emission data is read based on the address, transferred, and developed so that it can be used. Therefore, even if the light emission data are distributed, the design of the program is unlikely to become complicated.

Further, when a production-related command is transmitted from the main controller 300, the MPU 402 first executes a predetermined process corresponding to the command using a program, and uses light emission data in the process of executing the predetermined process. to control the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B. In other words, the program needs to be read abruptly in response to the reception of a command from the main controller 300, and the read timing is highly arbitrary. Read timing is less arbitrary. In addition, since the light emission data is used on the premise that a predetermined process using the program is executed, the readout priority is higher for the program, and if the readout of the program is delayed, the process waits. Under such circumstances, the program is stored in the ROM 412, and at least part of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 404, so that the program can
While allowing the MPU 402 to independently read the data regardless of the state of the SI 403, it is possible to increase the data amount of the light emission data, which tends to be large compared to the program.

Furthermore, instead of storing all the light emission data in the common ROM 404, a part of the light emission data is stored in the ROM 412 and the rest is stored in the common ROM 404. Therefore, the data capacity of the common ROM 404 is reduced. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing an extreme increase.

<Configuration of register 403b of sound output LSI 403>
Next, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to output sound, and the common R
The configuration of the register 403b used to transfer the sound data stored in the OM 404 from the sound output LSI 403 to the MPU 402 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 37
4 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of a register 403b; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 37, the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403 has an area 9523 in which data is set when the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to output sound.
a to 9523e; buffers 9524a to 9524e for temporarily storing and holding data read from the common ROM 404 based on the data transfer instruction from the MPU 402; Area 9 where data setting is performed
525 and an area 9526 for recognizing the internal state of the sound output LSI 403 in the MPU 402 are separately provided.

In detail, the above areas 9523a to 9526 will be described as areas in which data setting is performed when a sound output instruction is performed. and a fourth parameter area 9523d.
In addition, an area 9523e for sequence data is provided.

Areas 9523a to 9523d for parameters store parameter data necessary for outputting melodies and sound effects, and parameter data necessary for outputting voices. Since a plurality of areas 9523a to 9523d for parameters are provided in this manner, a plurality of sounds can be produced simultaneously. Further, the already explained sequence data is stored in the sequence data area 9523e.

Incidentally, since the sound output LSI 403 has functions for 16 channels, parameter data for a plurality of (specifically, four) channels are stored in one parameter area. Also, in a configuration using virtual tracks, a larger number of parameters may be stored in one parameter area.

A transfer instruction area 9525 is provided as an area in which data is set when the MPU 402 issues a data transfer instruction to the sound output LSI 403 . Transfer instruction area 95
25 stores the address data of the light emission data required in the MPU 402, and stores the light emission data read out from the common ROM 404 to the sound output LSI 403 in the MPU 40.
2 is stored.

A buffer 9524a for external reading is used as an area for temporarily storing data read from the common ROM 404 based on a data transfer instruction from the MPU 402.
9524e are provided. The light emission data necessary for the MPU 402 is temporarily stored in external readout buffers 9524a to 9524e, and transferred to the MPU 402 at a predetermined readout timing.

As an area for recognizing the internal state of the sound output LSI 403 in the MPU 402,
A flag area 9526 is provided. As the flag area 9526, for example, a read completion flag is provided.
When the transfer to the M
It is grasped in PU402.

Each of the above areas 9523a to 9523e, 9525 to 9526 and each buffer 9524a
. there is In other words, the number of areas that can be accessed simultaneously in MPU 402 corresponds to the number of first to eighth signal paths (eight in this embodiment) forming bus B1 between MPU 402 and sound output LSI 403. there is

Specifically, an area 9523a for a first parameter and a buffer 9524a for external reading of 1 are allocated as a first area 9521a corresponding to the first signal path forming the bus B1. Second area 9521b corresponding to second signal path
, the area 9523b for the second parameter and the buffer 952 for external reading of 1
4b are allocated, and a third area 95 corresponding to the third signal path forming the bus B1.
21c, an area 9523c for the third parameter and a buffer 9524c for external reading of 1 are allocated, and an area 9523d for the fourth parameter is allocated as a fourth area 9521d corresponding to the fourth signal path forming the bus B1. and 1 buffers 9524d for external reading. An area 9523e for sequence data and a buffer 9524e for external reading of 1 are allocated as a fifth area 9521e corresponding to the fifth signal path forming the bus B1.

A transfer instruction area 9525 is provided as an area corresponding to the sixth signal path forming the bus B1.
is allocated, and a flag area 9526 is allocated as an area corresponding to the seventh signal path forming the bus B1.

For the register 403b, selectors 9522a to 9522e are provided corresponding to the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e, respectively.
2a to 9522e, MPU 40 as first area 9521a to fifth area 9521e
2 can switch the accessible area. This switching is performed through binary switching to the selector area 9527 provided in the register 403b corresponding to the eighth signal path forming the bus B1.

Specifically, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the initial value “0”, the area to be accessed is set by the selectors 9522a to 9522e, and the first area 9
521a to fifth area 9521e correspond to areas 9523a to 9523e for sound output control. That is, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the initial value, M
The PU 402 can access the areas 9523a to 9523d for each parameter and the area 9523e for the sequence data, and can instruct the sound output LSI 403 to output sound. That is, the sound output LSI 403 is in the first state of interference with the MPU 402 .

When the information in the selector area 9527 is the switching execution value "1", the first area 9521 is set by the selectors 9522a to 9522e to set the area to be accessed.
The a to fifth areas 9521e correspond to external readout buffers 9524a to 9524e. That is, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the switching execution value,
The MPU 402 can access the external read buffers 9524a to 9524e, and is ready to read data for which a transfer instruction has been issued. That is, the sound output LSI 403 is in a second interference state with respect to the MPU 402 .

On the other hand, a transfer instruction area 9525, a flag area 9526 and a selector area 95
27 are not subject to switching by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. therefore,
Regardless of the interference state of the sound output LSI 403, the MPU 402
525, a flag area 9526 and a selector area 9527 are accessible.

The display control device 500 includes a display control board 501 , an MPU 502 , a program ROM 512 and a work RAM 513 that constitute the MPU 502 , a video display processor (VDP) 505 , a character ROM 506 and a video RAM 507 . Here, the MPU 502 is an element in which a program ROM 512, a work RAM 513, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. Note that MPU 502, VDP 505, character ROM 506, and video RA
M507 is mounted on the display control board 501 .

MPU 502 performs VDP 5 based on a command sent from sound emission control device 400
05. Specifically, the MPU 502 analyzes a command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 and controls the VDP 505 by generating a command for the VDP 505 based on the analysis result.

The program ROM 512 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, is a non-volatile memory that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information, and cannot be written. It is a semiconductor device. This program RO
M512 has various areas such as various data storage areas. These areas are described in detail later.

The work RAM 513 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 512. The work RAM 513 is a volatile memory that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. memory. This work RAM 513
has various areas such as various counter areas and various flag storage areas. These areas are described in detail later. In this embodiment, a volatile memory such as DRAM or SRAM is used as the work RAM 513, but a nonvolatile memory such as MRAM may be used.

The VDP 505 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 91 . Since the VDP 505 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 505 reads image data from the character ROM 506 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 502 and stores the image data in the video RAM 507 .

The character ROM 506 pre-stores various image data (image information) including sprite data such as patterns and characters displayed on the pattern display device 91, background data, moving image data, etc., and functions as an image data library. The character ROM 506 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. The video RAM 507 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 91 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 91 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 507 .

Returning to the description of the sound emission control device 400, the MPU 402 receives the variation command transmitted from the main control device 300, recognizes that it is necessary to start the game round effect, and starts the game round effect. Execute start processing. Further, by receiving an end command transmitted from the main control device 300, it recognizes that it is necessary to end the effect for the game round, and executes the end processing for the effect for the game round. Also, by receiving various commands for the big win performance transmitted from the main controller 300, it recognizes that the big win performance needs to be started or progressed, and executes the big win performance processing. Also, by receiving a demonstration display command transmitted from main controller 300, it recognizes that it is necessary to start demonstration display, and executes demonstration display processing. Note that the main controller 300 in the MPU 402
Command reception from is not limited to the configuration of directly receiving a command from main controller 300, and may be a configuration of receiving a command relayed by a relay board.

In the game round effect start processing, based on both the variation command and the type command, the variable display time grasping process for grasping the variable display time (display continuation period) of the corresponding game round and the presence or absence of the ready-to-win display are grasped. a reach display comprehension process, a big win result occurrence comprehension process for comprehending the presence or absence of a big win result, and a jackpot type comprehension process for comprehending the jackpot type when a big win result occurs are executed. Also, based on the results of the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, the display effect for determining the type of display effect performed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91 in this game round. Along with executing the comprehension process, a symbol type comprehension process for determining the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 in this game round is executed. Then, based on the results of these grasping processes, the display control device 500 outputs a variation pattern command including information on the variation display time and information on the type of display effect, and a symbol designation command including information on the type of symbol to be displayed in the final stop. Send to

In addition, in the game round effect start process, in addition to the above grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for determining whether or not to perform notice display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery for the advance notice display is also executed. Then, if it is determined that the announcement display is generated and won, an announcement command including information on the type of announcement display is transmitted to the display control device 500 . In addition, in the game round production start process,
Based on the above processing results, light emission data for game rounds (including sequence data and parameter data) and sound data for game rounds (including sequence data and parameter data)
are read out from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and the display lamp devices 23A and 23B
It defines the light emission mode by and the output mode from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In the game round effect end processing, the light emission control of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the sound output control of the speaker units 26A to 26C in the current game round are ended. In addition, in the game round effect end processing, an end command including information for ending the game round effect is transmitted to the display control device 500 . In the jackpot effect processing, based on the received various commands for the jackpot effect, the mode of effect such as the opening, each round, between rounds, and the ending is grasped, and the jackpot effect corresponding to the grasped result is obtained. display control device 5
00. In addition, based on the grasped result, the display data for the jackpot effect, the sequence data for the jackpot effect, the parameter data, the sound data, and the light emission data are stored in the ROM 41.
2 and read from the common ROM 404, the display lamp device 23A during the jackpot production
, 23B and the output mode of sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In the demonstration display process, based on the received demonstration display command, the effect mode of the demonstration display is grasped, and a demonstration display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 500 . Further, based on the grasped result, light data for demonstration display (including sequence data and parameter data) and sound data for demonstration display (including sequence data and parameter data) are read from ROM 412 and common ROM 404, It defines the lighting mode of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the output mode of the sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the demonstration display. In addition, based on the command transmitted from the main controller 300, the MPU
The processing executed in 402 includes processing for controlling light emission of various lamp units 95 to 97 in addition to the processing described above.

Further, the MPU 402 recognizes that the operation button 35 has been operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the operation button 35 based on the operation of the operation portion of the operation button 35, and performs operation corresponding processing. Run. Also, when the operated state is canceled, it is recognized by the fall of the operation signal, and the operation corresponding processing is executed. In the operation response process, an operation mode is specified according to the type of the operation signal, and an operation generation command including information indicating that the operation button 35 has been operated and information on the operation mode is transmitted to the display control device 500 . Further, in the operation response process, an operation cancellation command is transmitted to the display control device 500 when the operation of the operation unit is canceled (cancelled). In addition to sending the above commands, in the operation response process,
The lighting mode of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the output mode of the sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C are defined so as to correspond to the operation of the operation button 35. FIG.

Next, the connection relationship between the DAC 403d provided in the sound output LSI and the speaker units 26A to 26C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between a DAC provided in the sound output LSI and a speaker section.
As shown in FIG. 38, the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c that amplify the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. . Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker unit 26A, and the amplifier circuit 4
The analog signal amplified by 03d2b is output to the speaker section 26B, and the amplifier circuit 403
The analog signal amplified by d2c is output to the speaker section 26C.
That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can independently control the volume output (reproduced) from each of the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 35, the program and processing data for executing the abnormality reporting process stored in the ROM 412 are different between the power recovery reporting process and the normal reporting process. different. Specifically, each speaker unit 26A to 2 provided in the pachinko machine 10
At least the parameter data defining the reproduction volume in 6C, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c are different. More specifically, the power recovery notification process is different from the normal notification process. Specifically, the reproduction volume of each speaker unit 26A to 26C provided in the pachinko machine 10, in other words, the amplification circuit 403d2a to the amplification circuit 403
At least the parameter data defining the amplification factor of d2c are different.

More specifically, in the notification process for power recovery, each speaker unit 26A ~ provided in the pachinko machine 10
26C, in other words, the parameter data is defined so that the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c are the same, whereas in the normal notification process, the speaker unit provided in the pachinko machine 10 26A is reproduced by the other speaker units 26B and 2
The parameter data is defined to be smaller than the reproduction volume in 6C, in other words, so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is smaller than the amplification factors of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2c. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, the playback volume of the speaker section 26A is equal to that of the speaker section 26B.
, 26C. Note that, in the present invention, the expression that the reproduction volume is reduced includes a mode in which the reproduction volume is zero or substantially zero.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 reduces the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A among the plurality of speaker sections 26A to 26C when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, so that the player can play games at the next seat. It is possible to reduce the risk that the player who plays the game will feel annoyed by the notification sound. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voices output from the game machine being played from becoming difficult to hear due to an abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voices output from the game machine is lost and the game can be played. This reduces the risk of disappointing people.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 has a frame body (inner frame 13 or front door frame 14) on a side different from the supporting side,
In other words, when the frame is opened, the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A arranged on the side closer to the player sitting next to the player is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively reduce the annoyance of the notification sound by the players sitting in the adjacent seats. In addition, the music and voice output from the game machine you are playing,
It is possible to more effectively suppress difficulty in hearing due to the abnormality notification, and further reduce the possibility that the player loses interest due to the loss of exhilaration and immersion caused by music and voice output from the game machine.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a speaker unit 26B and a speaker arranged on the support side of the frame (the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14), in other words, on the far side from the player sitting next to the player when the frame is opened. The reproduction volume of the section 26C is not decreased. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player sitting next to the player may feel annoyed by the notification sound, and reduce the risk that the manager or employees of the hall may miss the abnormality notification.

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device. The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes timer interrupt processing to progress the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 402 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes the timer interrupt process of FIG.

In step S1401, the MPU 402 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 402 receives a command from the MPU 302 , it stores the received command in the RAM 413 . Specifically, the RAM 413 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 302 .
2 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 302 . The MPU 402 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

For example, the MPU 302 controls performance control including basic information necessary for the game such as the result of the jackpot lottery (lottery result of whether it is a jackpot or a loss, and if it is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot), information on the number of operation pending balls, and the fluctuation time of special symbols. A command (type command, variation pattern command, or decoration designating command) is transmitted, and the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 receives this. Moreover, MPU302 transmits the production|presentation control command (production|production stop command) which instruct|indicates production stop after predetermined time (special design fluctuation time) progress, and MPU402 receives this. Furthermore, with respect to the information specifying the game state, the MPU 302 transmits the effect control command (game state specification command or jackpot command) including the information at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the game state transition occurs). and the MPU 402 receives it. MP
U402, in other words, the current game state is grasped on the side of the sound emission control device 400, and the transition to a predetermined effect mode is controlled.

In step S1402, the MPU 402 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 302 of the main controller 300. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 402
It executes an effect for a game round, an effect for an open/close execution mode, and the like. In step S1403, M
PU 402 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the command received from MPU 302 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 402 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. . Note that the effect determination processing in step S1402 will be described later in detail.

In step S1404, the MPU 402 controls the display lamp devices 23A and 23B based on the effect determination processing in step S1402 and the demonstration display execution processing in step S1403.
, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of the first to third holding lamp portions 95a to 95a to 96a.
At step S1405, the MPU 402 executes sound control processing for controlling the sound of the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the effect determination processing at step S1402 and the demonstration display execution processing at step S1403.

In step S1406, the MPU 402 performs power recovery notification processing (step S416) in the main processing (see FIG. 25) and normal notification processing (step S1303) in the front door frame open monitoring processing (FIG. 34). Then, an abnormality notification process is performed. The details of this abnormality notification process will be described later.
After that, the MPU 402 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by sound emission control device 400>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing. The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like.

In step S1501, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302 have been received. The MPU 402, step S15
If it is determined in 01 that each command has not been received (NO), the processing from step S1509 is executed. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that each command has been received in step S1501 (YES), in step S1502, based on the content of the type command, the game result is "best result" or "low probability result". It is determined whether or not.

The MPU 402 determines in step S1502 that the game result is the "best result" or the "low probability result".
If it is determined to be (YES), in step S1503, symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result is executed. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 402 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. Symbols with numbers (e.g. "1 1 1
” or “2, 2, 2”) is determined, and if it is determined that the game result is a “low probability result”, as a stop result that is finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L Information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number (for example, "2.2.2") is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S1502 that the game result is not the “best result” or the “low-probability result” (NO), in step S1504, based on the content of the type command, the game result is determined to be “out of normal”. result”. The MPU 402 is
If it is determined in step S1504 that the game result is not the "normal result" (NO), that is, the game result is "special error result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", and "explicit small round high probability result" If it is determined to be either, in step S1505, common symbol determination processing is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 402 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3.4.1") is determined. It should be noted that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "normal failure result" in step S1504 (YES), in step S1506, the MPU 402 executes symbol determination processing for normal failure. In this normal-off symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs based on the content of the variation command.

When determining that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 402 determines information relating to a combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like. When the MPU 402 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 402 determines information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. Specifically, the MPU 402 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S1503, step S1505, or step S1506, the MPU 402 executes effect pattern determination processing in step S1507. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 402 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to data pre-stored in the ROM 412 . Specifically, the MPU 402 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In addition, the MPU 402 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and audio control of the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S1508, the MPU 402 performs steps S1503 and S1505.
Alternatively, a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes in step S1506 and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected in step S1507 are transmitted to the display control device 500. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 is the MPU 40
Based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from 2, the data table for executing the effect for the game cycle on the pattern display device 91 is read from various data storage areas of the program ROM 512. Then, the MPU 502 updates the VDP 5 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) comes.
05 to output a command. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes an effect for a game cycle based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400, and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 402 on the stop symbol effective line L. to finally stop displaying.

After executing the process of step S1508, or when it is determined in step S1501 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S1509 and subsequent steps. In step S1509, the MPU 402 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1509 that the opening command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S1513. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S1509 that an opening command has been received (YES
), and in step S1510, the type of game result is determined based on the contents of the opening command.

In step S1511, the MPU 402 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1510. In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, when the MPU 402 determines in step S1510 that the game result is the "special loss result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is determined. Select performance A.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the “low-explicit round high-probability result”, the MPU 402 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "most favorable result", the MPU 402 selects the effect C as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "low probability result", it selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. Also, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed 15 times in a long time mode in the open/close execution mode.

Further, in step S1511, the MPU 402 controls the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B based on the selection result of the effects A to D, and also controls the speaker units 26A to 26A to 26B.
6C voice control is executed.

In step S<b>1512 , the MPU 402 transmits to the display control device 500 an opening/closing execution mode command including information related to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S<b>1511 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads from the program ROM 512 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 91 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

After the MPU 402 executes the process of step S1512, or when it determines that the opening command has not been received in step S1509 (NO), step S1513
, it is determined whether or not to generate an effect type selection process for allowing the player to select a mode effect after the end of the jackpot game, and the effect type selection process is executed according to the determination result. This effect type selection process will be described later in detail.

In step S1514, the MPU 402 executes effect transition processing. In effect transition processing, the MPU 402 performs transition processing to the mode effect after the end of the jackpot game selected in step S1513. Details of the effect transition processing in step S1514 will be described later.

In step S1515, the MPU 402 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 402 executes processing for advancing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode and the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends, for example, based on the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 302. . After that, the MPU 402 ends the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction. The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG.
As game results excluding "normal outlier result", the success or failure result of "jackpot winning" and "special outright result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", "best result",
and a distribution result of "low-probability result".

As shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 41, the "special losing result" is the game result selected when the "big win" is not won in the lottery (symbol x in the drawing). Also, the sorting result is the game result selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure). Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the "special failure result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 83a is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", it does not shift to the lottery mode. In "implicit small round high probability result",
The opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short period of time. In addition, in the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In this way, the "special outlier result" and the "non-explicit small round high probability result" differ in the type of opening and closing execution mode,
They are common in that the opening and closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short period of time.

In addition, in the "special failure result" and the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. This production A includes an opening production for the opening/closing execution mode, a production for opening and closing the variable winning device in the opening/closing execution mode, and an ending production for the opening/closing execution mode. It is structured as a series of performances. Also, the support mode does not shift in the "special outlier result" and the "non-explicit few rounds high probability result". In addition, the symbol display device 91 does not display, on the display screen G, an image indicating that the high-probability mode is set in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is the "special failure result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result" by checking the stop result or the effect A. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "non-explicit small round high probability result" and shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 91 does not perform the winning lottery in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Disguise as if the mode has not changed. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction as to whether or not the win/fail lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short time mode. be. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. This production B includes an opening production for the opening/closing execution mode, a production for opening and closing the variable winning device, and an ending production for the opening/closing execution mode. It is configured. In addition, in the "explicit small number of rounds high probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 91 displays an image on the display screen G clearly indicating that the high probability mode is selected. Therefore, the player can understand that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 83a is performed 15 times in a long time mode. times. Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the open/close execution mode The production of will be production C. This production C includes an opening production for the opening/closing execution mode, a production for opening and closing the variable winning device, and an ending production for the opening/closing execution mode. It is configured.

In addition, in the "low-probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the win-or-fail lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode effect is
It becomes the production D. Further, for "Most Favorable Outcome" and "Less Probable Outcome", the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode. This production D includes an opening production for the opening/closing execution mode, a production for opening and closing the variable winning device, and an ending production for the opening/closing execution mode. It is configured.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance time of each opening performance is the same. Also, in the present embodiment, the effect time of each ending effect is the same. However, the presentation time of the opening presentation and the presentation time of the ending presentation are arbitrary, and the presentation time of the opening presentation and the presentation of the ending presentation may be different times. Also, the effect time may be set for each game result, that is, for each opening effect, or only part of the opening effect may be different for the effect time. Further, the performance time may be set for each game result, that is, for each ending performance, or only part of the ending performance may be different.

<Regarding Abnormal Notification Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process. Sound emission control device 400
When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 executes abnormality notification processing in order to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and description of other abnormality notification will be omitted.

In step S<b>1601 , the MPU 402 determines whether or not the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 413
determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the command for notifying when power is restored is stored in the various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1601 that the command for notifying when the power is restored has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S1604 onward. Also, M
If the PU 402 determines in step S1601 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), it transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S1602. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores a data table in the program ROM 512 for executing the power recovery notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from various data storage areas in Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the display for notifying when the power is restored based on the command for notifying when the power is restored which is transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S1603, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program and processing data, light emission data, and sound data for notifying when power is restored from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power restoration is performed in a closed (closed) state of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 . That is, since the front door frame 14 is not opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, there is little possibility that the player playing in the adjacent seat will feel annoyed by the abnormal notification. Therefore, in the program and processing data for notifying when the power is restored, the reproduction volumes of the speaker units 26A to 26C are the same or substantially the same when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. The parameters are defined so that the amplification factors of 403d2c are the same or substantially the same.

In step S1604, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 413
determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the normal notification command is stored in the various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1604 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S1609, which will be described later.
If the MPU 402 determines in step S1604 that the normal time notification command has been received (YES), it transmits the normal time notification command to the display control device 500 in step S1605. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received normal time notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S1606, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the normal time notification program, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and common ROM. In the program and processing data for normal time notification, the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A is set to be smaller than the reproduction volume of the other speaker sections 26B and 26C when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. , in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is equal to that of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2b.
The parameters are defined to be smaller than the amplification factor of d2c. In addition, light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S1607, the MPU 402 performs processing for stopping BGM (including music and voice for presentation). In this BGM stop processing, the BG being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C
Perform processing to stop or mute M. When stopping the BGM, the MPU 402 causes the RAM 413 to store the address of the data for stopping the reproduction of the BGM in order to restart the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is cancelled. When restarting BGM playback when the door open notification is canceled, MP
The U402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts playing the BGM from that address, thereby restarting the playing of the BGM from the position where it was stopped.
Also, when muting the BGM, the MPU 402 does not stop the playback of the BGM itself.
The sound output LSI 403 is instructed to mute the BGM so that no sound is output. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S1608, the MPU 402 performs step S1603 or step S160.
At 6, reproduction (output) of the sound data read out and light emission are started. Specifically, MP
U402 outputs the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data read out in step S1603 or S1606, and sound data as sound output LS
The register 403b of I403 is set, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C notify the abnormality (for example, when the power is restored, a voice such as "The door was opened while the power was off!" and output of warning sound) is started. Also, MPU40
2 causes the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error display lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, processing data and light emission data read out in step S1603 or step S1606. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, the light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished.
A and 23B stop emitting light.

In step S1609, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit open command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402
It is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to the back pack unit open command is stored in the various flag storage area of M413. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1609 that the back pack unit open command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S1611. If the MPU 402 determines in step S1609 that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), in step S1610 the MPU 4
02 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification (output of sound such as "the door is open!" and warning sound) output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
The sound output LSI 403 outputs the speaker units 26A to 26C based on instructions from the MPU 402.
Controls to reduce the playback volume of anomaly reports, etc., output from the .

Here, in step S1610, the control to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C may be controlled to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C. Of the parts 26A to 26C, only a specific speaker part, for example, the speaker part 26A, which is closest to the ears of the player playing in the seat on the left side when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, is reduced in volume. can be controlled to In step S1610, when controlling the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to be small, the sound output LSI 403 sets the parameters that define the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to the back pack unit 15. update to the parameters of the case, and the speaker unit 26
By decreasing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c of A to 26C, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is decreased. When performing control to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a of the speaker section 26A, thereby reducing only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A. control to

In step S<b>1611 , the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received a door open notification cancel command for canceling the door open notification transmitted from the MPU 302 . Specifically, MP
U402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the door open notification cancellation command is stored in various flag storage areas of RAM413. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1611 that the door open notification cancellation command has not been received (NO), it ends the abnormality notification processing without executing the processing after step S1612. Moreover, the MPU 402 performs step S
If it is determined at 1611 that the door open notification cancellation command has been received (YES), the processing from step S1612 is executed.
At step 1612 , the MPU 402 transmits a door open notification cancellation command to the display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is canceled based on the received door open notification cancellation command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S1613, the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door open notification cancellation command (for example, when the power is restored, "The door was opened while the power was off!" If so, stop the output of the voice such as "The door is open!" and the warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification cancellation command.
In step S1613, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read out and reproduce the voice data "The door is closed!" stored in the common ROM 404. FIG. The sound output LSI 403 reads the voice data "The door is closed!" from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the sound "The door is closed!" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S1614, the MPU 402 stores the RAM data based on the door open notification cancellation command.
The flags corresponding to the power restoration notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas 413 are cleared, in other words, the flag values are set to zero. In step S1615, MP
U402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM that was stopped or muted in step S1607. The sound output LSI 403 resumes reproduction of BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402 . Here, if the BGM is stopped in step S1607, the MPU 402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413,
By instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the GM, the reproduction is restarted from the position where the BGM was stopped. Also, if the BGM is muted in step S1607, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM.
Unmute the BGM to the sound output LSI 403 and output the BGM from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
is output. After that, the MPU 402 terminates the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S1607, the BGM (including music and sound for effect) is stopped or muted. Alternatively, a process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value may be performed immediately. In this case, in step S1608, when playing back (outputting) the sound data whose reading was started in step S1603 or step S1606, processing is performed so that the playback volume of the voice or warning sound is gradually decreased or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may Further, in step S1607, if the volume is decreased gradually or in stages while the BGM is being played without stopping, then in step S1613, the abnormality notification is played back from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The volume is gradually decreased or stepwise decreased until the volume reaches zero or approximately zero, and in step S1615, when the BGM playback is resumed, the BGM playback volume is gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the user without causing a sense of incongruity due to the sudden stop of the BGM and the change to a warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of incongruity due to the change to BGM.

In the above description, it is determined in step S1609 whether or not the back pack unit open command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), the process of step S1610 is executed. Then, the reproduction volume of the warning sound or the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must be opened after the inner frame 13 is opened, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15. There is a high possibility that the opening is due to maintenance, etc., rather than a so-called goto act to obtain an illegal profit by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside, and that the back pack unit 15 is opened to perform maintenance, etc. Since it takes time to do so, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the back pack unit open command is received, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is opened. In such a case, a configuration (two-stage control) is adopted in which the warning sound or the like is reduced. As a result, there is no need to hear a loud warning sound indefinitely during time-consuming maintenance or the like, and the possibility that a player playing a game in the next seat will be bothered by the abnormal warning sound is further reduced. Since the opening of the back pack unit 15 is not due to maintenance or the like, but may be due to fraud, it is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like. Note that steps S1609 and S1
A configuration may be adopted in which the processing of 610 is not performed, in other words, it is not determined whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control is performed). In this case, pachinko machine 1
0 does not need to be provided with the back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15 .

<Game flow>
FIG. 43 is a diagram explaining the game flow developed in the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. When starting a game with the pachinko machine 10, the game is started from the first mode M1. "First
Mode" (normal mode) is a game state in which the lottery mode is a low-probability mode and there is no support mode. In the first mode M1, by entering a game ball into the first starting port 84a, the special figure 1 starts to fluctuate and the game progresses.

In the first mode M1, if you win the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the second mode M2 (
takeoff mode). The "second mode" is a game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and there is no support mode. The second mode M2 is a mode in which the next big win is guaranteed, and the high probability mode continues until the next big win.

Also, in the first mode M1, if you win the "explicit small round high probability result", the third mode M
3 (flight mode). The "third mode" is a mode in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a game state with no limit on the number of times played. The third mode M3 is a mode in which the next big win is guaranteed, and the high probability mode and the support mode continue until the next big win.

Also, in the first mode M1, if the "best result" is won, the game shifts to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). The "fourth mode" is a mode in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a game state with no limit on the number of times played. The fourth mode M4 is a mode in which the next big win is guaranteed, and the high probability mode and the support mode continue until the next big win. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of types of effects MA to MC (three types in this embodiment) with different effects as the effects of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode).

In this embodiment, an effect type selection effect for selecting the effect type in the fourth mode M4 is executed during the effect of the opening and closing execution mode of "best result", more specifically during the round game. An image for selecting the effect of M4 is displayed on the display screen G. The player operates button 3
5 is operated to select a desired effect from among the effects MA to MC displayed on the display screen G, the effect in the fourth mode M4 which shifts after the game of "best result" is selected. . In the fourth mode M4, since the next big win is guaranteed, the fourth mode M4 continues until the next big win.

Also, in the first mode M1, if the "low-probability result" is won, the game shifts to the fifth mode M5 (revenge mode). The "fifth mode" is a game state mode in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times.
In the fifth mode M5, the next big win is not promised, and if the big win is won again by the support mode limit of 100 times, the revenge will be successful, but the support mode will reach the limit of 100 times. When the jackpot is not won again, the revenge fails, the high-frequency support ends, and the success/fail lottery mode shifts to a low-probability mode and a first mode M1 having no support mode.

Note that the game flow shown in FIG. 43 shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all game flows of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. For example, in the present embodiment, mode transition is not performed for the special out result (small hit), but as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a "special out result (small hit result)", The "special loss result" does not serve as a trigger for transitioning to the lottery mode or the support mode, but serves as a trigger for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode. For this reason, it may be configured such that the mode is shifted when the "special loss result" is won.

<Example of production image>
Next, an effect image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with an example. When an internal lottery for a big win is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined by the MPU 302 of the main controller 300, and the variation display is performed on the main display section 93. As described above, the main display section 93 The display area of is set to be extremely small, and it is difficult for a player who pays attention to various effects executed by the pattern display device 91 to easily recognize each piece of information in the lighting state. Accordingly, in the pachinko machine 10, as described with reference to FIG. Note that illustration of a background image is omitted in FIG. 44 described below.

<Before change display>
Figure 44 (A): Before the special figure 1 starts to change (not in the demonstration stage), the display screen G displays a large row of decorative figures, which are the effect symbols. At this time, according to the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the decoration figures of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are also stopped on the stop symbol effective line L.

<Start of changing display effect>
Figure 44 (B): Synchronizing with the start of fluctuation of special figure 1, the symbol row Z1 ~ on the display screen of the display screen G
When Z3 scrolls and fluctuates, the fluctuating display effect is started. That is, in synchronism with the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 or special figure 2, the variable display effect is performed by scrolling (flowing) each decorative figure of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the display screen of the display screen G in the vertical direction. be started. Incidentally, in FIG. 44, the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is indicated by downward arrows. In addition, during variable display, individual production patterns are displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the production pattern is displayed in a state that is easy to see on the display screen. be done.

The background image in this case represents, for example, the scenery of an airport or the like. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the presentation is, for example, the "first mode".
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the "first mode" is, as described above, a game state (normal mode) in which the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and there is no support mode.
The pachinko machine 10 is provided with various other performance modes, and a different background image is prepared for each performance mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the difference between the internal "win-win lottery mode" and "support mode". Although not shown in FIG. 44,
After that, for example, an image of a specific character, an item, or the like may be displayed on the display screen to perform an announcement effect.

<Stop display of symbol row Z1>
FIG. 44(C): After a predetermined period of time (for example, about half of the variation time) has elapsed, the symbol row Z1 first stops varying display. In this example, it is shown that a decorative figure representing the number "8" is stopped on the stop symbol valid line L.

<Stop display of symbol row Z3>
FIG. 44(D): After symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3 stops changing display. In this example, it is shown that a decorative figure representing the number "3" is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol valid line L. At this point, it has already been determined that the reach state will not occur, so it is almost clear visually that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. note that,
Here, it is assumed that reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. The "sliding pattern" means that, for example, after a decorative figure representing the number "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed, the symbol row slides by one symbol, and a decorative figure representing the number "8" is stopped and displayed. It is said that it develops into a reach by Alternatively, after the decorative figure representing the number "9" is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative figure slides in the opposite direction by one symbol and the decorative figure representing the number "8" is stopped and displayed, thereby increasing the reach. Evolving patterns are also possible. In addition, after a performance symbol representing a completely different number such as "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed, if a character appears on the screen and the variable display of the symbol row Z3 is resumed, the number "8" is displayed. It is also possible to think of a pattern in which a decorative figure representing "" is stopped and displayed to develop into a reach.

<Stop display effect>
Figure 44 (E): Synchronizing with the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the last symbol row Z2 stops the variable display. If the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the special figure 1 is stop-displayed in a non-winning (losing) mode, the non-winning (losing) combination is also stop-displayed for the decorative figure.
That is, in the example shown in FIG. 44(E), it indicates that a decoration figure representing the number "1" is stopped on the stop symbol valid line L. In this case, the combination of the decoration figures is "8.1".・Since it is a deviation of 3", it is expressed in the production that it corresponds to a normal "loss" in this change.

An example of the variation display and the stop display (at the time of non-winning) performed using a decorative figure for each variation has been described above with reference to FIG. Through the performance displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91, the player is given a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the big win will be won, and finally the result of the internal lottery is clearly taught in the performance. can be done.

<Production example of variable display>
Figure 45 and Figure 46, in the first mode M1 (gaming state where the lottery mode is a low probability mode and there is no support mode), a case where a big win is won in the lottery and sorted to the "best result" ( FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect C that is executed when a so-called first hit occurs. It should be noted that in the following description, the description of matters common to the above-described production example will be omitted. 45 and 46, background images are omitted.

<Before starting the variable display effect>
FIG. 45(A): On the display screen G, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed large. Each pattern row Z
In 1 to Z3, a combination of decoration figures representing the numbers "9, 1, 3" are displayed in a stationary manner.

<Start of changing display effect>
FIG. 45(B): When the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll and fluctuate on the display screen G, a variable display effect is started.

<Stop display of symbol row Z1>
FIG. 45(C): The symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. FIG. In FIG. 45(C), a decorative figure representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed.

<Stop display of symbol row Z3>
FIG. 45(D): The symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. FIG. In FIG. 45(D), a decorative figure representing the number "1" is displayed still.

<Stop display effect>
Figure 45 (E): In synchronization with the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed. Normally, if the special symbols are stopped and displayed as lost symbols, the decorative symbols, which are performance symbols displayed on the display screen G, are similarly stopped and displayed in a lost manner. However, in FIG. 45(E), "
A special symbol is stopped in the form of "Most Advantageous Result", and a decoration symbol representing the number "1" is stopped in the symbol row Z2.

<Production in open/close execution mode>
When the combination of decoration figures for the big win is stop-displayed on the display screen G, the opening/closing execution mode is entered after that, and the performance of the opening/closing execution mode is executed on the display screen G according to the result of lottery for the big win. Specifically, the effect C is executed as the effect of the opening/closing execution mode of the "best result" which is the result of the internal lottery.

Fig. 46(F): When the opening/closing execution mode is entered, an opening effect is executed. In this opening effect, for example, the background image displayed on the display screen G is greatly changed, and "BO
NUS! , etc. is displayed in a large size on the display screen G, and the player is notified that the jackpot has been won. If the player can be notified that he or she has won the jackpot, the notification may be made in another manner (for example, by outputting sound).

FIG. 46(G): Next, in order to inform the player that the game will be played with the right hand, a character image G2 reading, for example, "Right hand!" be. At this time, a right-pointing arrow is displayed to the right of the character image G3 of "Right shot!" In addition, in accordance with the notification of the right-handed game on the display screen G, the speaker units 26A to 26C output, for example, a voice saying "Right-handed!" In the pachinko machine 10, a variable winning device 83 is provided on the right side of the game board 81 as shown in FIG.
In order to let the game ball enter the big prize winning opening 83a of the variable prize winning device 83, the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 41 is maximized, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area 104
Since it is necessary to shift from the side where the exit portion of 03 is formed to the opposite side (so-called right hitting), as shown in FIG. The player is notified that the game will be played. Note that the right-pointing arrow and the character image G3 of "Right shot!" may be displayed so as to flow from the left side of the screen to the right side of the screen. As a result, even a player who cannot understand Japanese can intuitively understand that a right-handed game is to be played. In addition, in the following description, the right hitting navigation which is a suggestion of the right hitting game in the jackpot game state is also called the right hitting navigation for the jackpot game.

FIG. 46(H): Following the opening effect, the effect of opening and closing the variable winning device is executed. In this production, for example, a battle production is performed. This battle effect is performed for the purpose of informing the player that the character on the player side and the enemy character will battle and that the game will be shifted to the high-probability mode after the jackpot game by winning the battle. again,
On the upper end side of the display screen G, a plurality of letters "Right-handed" and a rightward arrow "→" are displayed to indicate that the right-handed game is continued. In addition, the characters "Right shot" and the right arrow "→
” may be displayed so as to flow from the left end to the right end of the display screen G.

Figure 46 (I): Also, during the production of the situation in which the variable winning device is opened and closed, the
0 step S1513, the effect type selection effect is executed to make the player select the effect mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In this effect type selection effect, the player depresses the left direction button 35b and/or the right direction button 35c of the operation buttons 35, and selects one of the images GA to GC indicating the effect type displayed on the display screen G. Select an image that shows the type of effect. In the example shown in FIG. 46(I), the image GA is an image representing the effect MA, and the image GB is an image representing the effect M
B, and the image GC is an image representing the effect MC. When the player presses the operation button 35 to select one of the images GA to GC, the selected image is displayed on the display screen G larger than the other non-selected images, indicating that the image has been selected. is configured so that After the player selects a desired effect, the determination button 3 of the operation buttons 35 is pressed.
When 5a is pressed down, the effect corresponding to the selected image is determined as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the player is allowed to enter within a predetermined period of time, specifically, the first
If the desired effect is not selected and determined by the fifth round, a predetermined effect (in this embodiment, the effect MA) is automatically selected as the effect in the fourth mode M4. If the player does not select/determine the effect mode within the predetermined time, the effect corresponding to the image being selected on the display screen G is automatically selected as the effect in the fourth mode M4 when the predetermined time elapses. You may do so. In the example shown in FIG. 46(I), the selected image GB
The effect MB corresponding to (the image GB displayed larger than the other images on the display screen G) is automatically selected as the effect in the fourth mode M4.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 46(I), the selected image is displayed on the display screen G larger than the other images. / Or when the right direction button 35c is pressed, an image GA corresponding to each of the effects MA to MC is displayed.
∼ GC may move to the center of the display screen G. In the example shown in FIG. 46(J), the image GB corresponding to the effect MB is selected, so the image GB is arranged in the center of the display screen G. In the example shown in FIG. 46(J), in order to clearly show the selected image to the player, the currently selected image GB is placed in the center of the display screen G, and other selected images are displayed. The image GB is displayed on the topmost surface by being superimposed (superimposed) on the images GA and GC that are not present, clearly indicating that the image GB is selected. It should be noted that the selected image GB may be displayed larger than the other non-selected images GA and GC in order to more clearly show the selected image to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46(J), the time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected may be displayed with a gauge. For example, a gauge image G4 showing the time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected
is displayed below the image GB, and the remaining time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected is indicated in red, and the red area G4a of the gauge image G4 (hatched area in FIG. 46(J)) decreases with the lapse of time. Configuration, specifically, boundary line L between red region G4a (hatched portion) and white region G4b (white portion)
1 may move to the left side of the display screen G as time elapses. again,
A configuration in which the red region G4a (shaded portion in FIG. 46(J)) of the gauge image G4 increases over time, specifically, the boundary between the red region G4a (shaded portion) and the white region G4b (white portion). A configuration in which the line L1 moves rightward toward the display screen G as time elapses is also possible.
Furthermore, the details of the effect being selected, for example, an explanation of what effect the selected effect is, may be displayed on the display screen G. In this case, the attribute information (metadata) describing each effect content is stored in the ROM 412 or the like, and the MPU 402 stores the attribute information (metadata) of the effect being selected based on the operation signal of the operation button 35 in the ROM 412. , and displays the read attribute information on the display screen G.
to send commands to Further, the attribute information of the effect is stored in various data storage areas of the program ROM 512, and the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 stores the attribute information (metadata) of the effect being selected based on the operation signal of the operation button 35. the program R
A command for instructing the display control device 500 to read from various data storage areas of the OM 512 and display the data on the display screen G may be transmitted. Also, the music used in the currently selected presentation may be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. At this time, the music being output in the current presentation is temporarily stopped, and the music used in the currently selected presentation is played back to the speaker unit 26.
Output from A to 26C. In this way, by presenting the details of the selected effect to the player,
The player can easily select the performance that matches his or her taste, and the interest increases.

<Production type (type) selection processing>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect type (type) selection process. As described above, the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 performs step S15 of the effect determination process in FIG.
In 13, the effect type selection process is executed.
In step S1701, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the game result is the "best result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1501 of FIG. MP
If U402 determines in step S1701 that the game result is not the "best result" (
NO), the effect type selection process is terminated.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1701 that the game result is the "best result" (YES), in step S1702 it determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the opening command was received. Note that the MPU 402 determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S1702 is executed. for example,
The predetermined time is 10 sec, and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S1702 is 2 m.
If it is sec, the MPU 402 counts the number of executions of the process in step S1702 and determines that 10 sec has passed when the number reaches 5000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the predetermined time is arbitrary, and for example, the predetermined time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC). When the MPU 402 determines in step S1702 that the predetermined time has not passed since the reception of the opening command (NO), it ends the effect type selection process.

If the predetermined time has elapsed in step S1702 (YES
), in step S1703, the display control device 500
to control. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the image of the effect type selection effect on the display screen G. As described above, the effect type selection effect provides the player with three different types of effects of the fourth mode M4, which is shifted to when the player wins a jackpot in the lottery and is sorted to the "best result". It allows selection from the type modes MA, MB, and MC. The player operates the operation button 35 in this type of effect selection effect to select a desired effect mode.

At step S1704, the MPU 402 accepts selection of the effect type mode MA, MB, MC by the operation button 35 by the player. The player presses the left direction button 35b and/or the right direction button 35c of the operation buttons 35 to display the image GA displayed on the display screen G.
Select an image corresponding to the desired effect MA-MC from ~GC. In this step S1704, when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GA, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 50 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.
control 0. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.

Further, when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GB, the MPU 402
The display control device 500 is controlled to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. Further, when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GC, the MPU 402 replaces the selected image GC with the other images GA and G.
The display control device 500 is controlled to display larger than B. In the display control device 500,
Based on an instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500
to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB.

In step S1705, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player has operated the operation button 35 to determine the effect, that is, whether or not the pressing operation of the determination button 35a has been accepted.
When the MPU 402 determines in step S1705 that the pressing operation of the enter button 35a has been accepted (YES), the MPU 402 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the fourth mode M4. Specifically, in step S1705, M
When the decision operation is received with the image GA selected, the PU 402
, in step S1706, the effect MA is shifted to the fourth mode M after the first mode M1
Set as 4 production. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

Further, in step S1705, when the decision operation is accepted with the image GB selected, the MPU 402 sets the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the first mode M1 in step S1706. do. Specifically, the MPU
402 sets the flag of the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM413. Also, in step S1705, the MPU 402
When the decision operation is accepted with C selected, the MPU 402 performs step S170.
6, the effect MC is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 to be shifted after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MC in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

If it is determined in step S1705 that the pressing operation of the enter button 35a has not been accepted (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S1707 whether a predetermined time has elapsed. Note that the MPU 402 determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S1707 is executed. For example, the predetermined time is 10 sec, and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S1707 is 2 msec.
, the MPU 402 counts the number of executions of the process in step S1707 and counts 50
It is determined that 10 seconds have passed when 00 times have been reached. Moreover, the configuration for measuring the predetermined time is arbitrary, and for example, the predetermined time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

In step S1707, if the predetermined time has passed (YES), the MPU 402
In step S1708, an effect (in this embodiment, an effect MA) predetermined by initial setting is set as an effect in the fourth mode M4. Specifically, the MPU 402
A flag of the effect MA is set in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4. Note that, as described above, in step S1707, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the effect corresponding to the image being selected on the display screen G may be automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. good.

Further, in step S1707, if the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO), the MPU
402 ends the effect type selection process.

<Another example of effect type selection processing>
In addition, instead of measuring the predetermined time in steps S1702 and S1707 of FIG. 47, the determination processing of S1702 and step S1707 may be performed based on the number of rounds of the jackpot game. For example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game can be counted based on the number of received opening commands and round start commands (hereinafter also referred to as opening commands, etc.) in step S1005 of FIG. In this case, in step S1702, M
PU 402 determines whether the number of receptions such as an open command is 3 (third round),
If the number of receptions such as an opening command is 3, the production type selection effect of step S1703 is started, and in step S1707, the MPU 402 determines whether the number of receptions of an opening command etc. is 15 (the 15th round which is the final round). Determine whether or not, the number of received open commands, etc. is 1
If it is 5, an initial setting effect may be set in step S1708.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of another example of the effect type selection process. MPU 402 of sound emission control device 400 executes the effect type selection process in step S1513 of the effect determination process in FIG. 40, as described above.
In step S1801, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the game result is the "best result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1501 of FIG. MP
If U402 determines in step S1801 that the game result is not the "best result" (
NO), the effect type selection process is terminated.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1801 that the game result is the "best result" (YES), in step S1802 it sets a counter to count the number of opening commands received after receiving the opening command. .

In step S1802, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the game state is the third round of the jackpot game. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 402 increments the counter each time it receives an open command or the like, and determines whether or not the number of received open commands and the like has reached 3 (third round). MPU 402 performs step S
If it is determined at 1803 that the number of received opening commands and the like is not equal to or greater than 3 (NO), the effect type selection process is terminated.

Further, when the number of received opening commands or the like is 3 or more in step S1803 (YES), the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 to start the effect type selection effect in step S1804. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the image of the effect type selection effect, specifically the image shown in FIG. indicate.

At step S1805, the MPU 402 accepts selection of the effect type mode MA, MB, MC by the operation button 35 by the player. The player presses the left direction button 35b and/or the right direction button 35c of the operation buttons 35 to display the image GA displayed on the display screen G.
Select an image corresponding to the desired effect MA-MC from ~GC. In this step S1805, when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GA, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 50 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.
control 0. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.

Further, when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GB, the MPU 402
The display control device 500 is controlled to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. Further, when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GC, the MPU 402 replaces the selected image GC with the other images GA and G.
The display control device 500 is controlled to display larger than B. In the display control device 500,
Based on an instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500
to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB.

In step S1806, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player has operated the operation button 35 to decide the effect, that is, whether or not the pressing operation of the decision button 35a has been accepted.
When the MPU 402 determines in step S1806 that the pressing operation of the enter button 35a has been accepted (YES), the MPU 402 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the fourth mode M4. That is, in step S1806, the MPU
402, when the decision operation is accepted with the image GA selected, the MPU 402
At step S1807, the effect MA is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 to be shifted after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

Further, in step S1806, when the decision operation is accepted while the image GB is selected, the MPU 402 sets the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the first mode M1 in step S1807. do. Specifically, the MPU
402 sets the flag of the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM413. Also, in step S1806, the MPU 402 changes the image G
When the decision operation is accepted with C selected, the MPU 402 performs step S180.
At 7, the effect MC is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 to be shifted after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 413 .

The MPU 402 determines in step S1808 whether or not an open command or the like has been received. If it is determined in step S1808 that an open command or the like has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 terminates the effect type selection process. Also, step S1808
, when it is determined that an open command or the like has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S1809 whether or not the game state is the final round of the jackpot game, that is, the 15th round. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 402 increments the counter each time it receives an opening command or the like, and checks whether the number of receptions of the opening command or the like reaches 15 or more (the 15th round), which is the final round. judge.

In step S1809, if it is determined that the number of received open commands and the like is not equal to or greater than 15 (15th round), which is the final round (NO), the MPU 402 proceeds to step S18.
At 10, the player is instructed to make a notification to confirm whether or not to cancel the determined effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 displays a message "Do you want to cancel the effect?" on the display screen G.
, etc., to display a character image for confirming whether to cancel the determined effect. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display a character image such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" In addition, the MPU 402 controls so that the sound "Do you want to cancel the presentation?" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice “Do you want to cancel the effect?” set, and the speaker units 26A to 2
Sound output LSI 403 so as to output the voice "Do you want to cancel the effect?" from 6C
to control. Also, in step S1809, if it is determined that the number of receptions of the release command or the like is 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round (YES), the MPU 402
ends the effect type selection effect processing.

In step S1811, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the effect determined in step S1806 has been cancelled. Specifically, the MPU 402 operates the player's operation button 35
It is determined whether or not the performance has been canceled based on the operation of . In step S1811, if it is determined that the effect has been canceled (YES), the MPU 402
Return to operation 1805 . Also, in step S1811, when it is determined that the effect has not been canceled (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection effect process.

If it is determined in step S1806 that the pressing operation of the decision button 35a has not been accepted (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S1812 whether or not an open command or the like has been received. In step S1812, when it is determined that the opening command or the like has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 terminates the effect type selection process. If it is determined in step S1812 that an open command or the like has been received (Y
ES), the MPU 402 determines whether or not the game state is the final round of the jackpot game, that is, the 15th round, in step S1813. Specifically, MPU40
2 increments a counter each time an opening command or the like is received after receiving an opening command, and determines whether or not the number of receptions of an opening command or the like reaches 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round.

In step S1813, if it is determined that it is the 15th round (YES), M
In step S1814, PU 402 sets an effect (in this embodiment, effect MA) predetermined by initial setting as effect in fourth mode M4. Specifically, the MPU
402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4. In step S1813, if it is determined that it is the final round (15th round) (YES), the effect corresponding to the image being selected on the display screen G is automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. You may do so. In addition, MP
U402 ends the effect type selection effect processing when the effect is set in step S1814.

Also, in step S1813, when it is not determined that it is the final round (15th round) (NO), in step S1815, the MPU 402 instructs the player to perform notification prompting selection/decision of the effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 causes the display control device 500 to display a character image prompting selection/decision of an effect such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" Control. In the display control device 500, MPU4
02, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 and prompts the selection and determination of effects such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" Display a character image. In addition, the MPU 402 controls so that sounds such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to voices such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" The sound output LSI 403 is read out and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that sounds such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" .

It should be noted that the timing at which the effect type selection effect is started is arbitrary.
Also, the number of rounds for starting the effect type selection effect may be randomly determined using a counter stored in the RAM 413 . Also, in the above description, the effect can be canceled according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (specifically, the effect can be canceled up to the 14th round). The configuration may be such that the performance can be canceled.

<Production Transition Processing>
Next, a description will be given of the transition processing to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) when a jackpot is won in the lottery and the distribution result is the "best result". Normally, when a big win is won in a winning lottery, the performance of the opening/closing execution mode is executed according to the distribution result, and after the ending period ends, the performance of the next mode is started. However, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the distribution result is the "best result", the effect C of the opening/closing execution mode is executed according to the best result. During the ending period of the effect C, the effect of the fourth mode M4 is started.

Specifically, control is performed so that the output of the music used in the fourth mode M4 effect is started during the ending period of the effect C corresponding to the most advantageous result. In this embodiment, the timing of starting to output music and voice from the speaker units 26A to 26C changes according to the type of effect set in step S1706 or S1708 of the type of effect selection process in FIG. Note that in the following description, in the presentation of the fourth mode M4, the music presentation is the music presentation, and the display screen G
The presentation of the video displayed on the screen is also called video presentation.

Hereinafter, the processing for shifting to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, there are three types of effects MA to MC in the fourth mode M4.
Migration processing differs for each C. Details of transition processing for each of the effects MA to MC will be described below. In the following description, right-handed navigation, which is a suggestion of a right-handed game when shifting to the fourth mode (RUSH mode), is also referred to as right-handed navigation for RUSH.

<Transition processing to effect MA: Fig. 49(a)>
First, the case where the effect MA is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition processing to the production MA, the intro part of the music used in the production MA of the fourth mode M4 is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C from the start time T1 of the ending period of the production C corresponding to the "best result". is controlled to start. Here, in the production MA, the ending period of the production C and the period of the intro part of the music used in the production MA of the fourth mode M4 have the same length (time). Therefore, the output of the intro part ends at the end time T2 of the ending period. Further, the speakers 26A to 26C are controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part of the music is continuously output after the output of the intro part of the music is finished.

In addition, in the transition processing to the production MA, the speaker units 26A to 26A-2 are displayed during the output period of the intro part.
6C is controlled to output the voice "A RUSH Rush". Specifically, "A
RUSH Rush" is output from the start time T1 of the ending period to the voice start time TW1
It is controlled so that the output of the voice of "A RUSH Rush" ends at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part ends. Here, the voice start time TW1 is a time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "A RUSH Rush" from the ending period or the output period of the intro part. For example, if the output period of the ending period or the intro part is 10 seconds and the audio output time of "A RUSH Rush" is 2 seconds, the audio start time TW1 is 8 seconds. In this case, "A R
USH Rush” is controlled to start outputting the voice.

In addition, at the end of the ending period T2, "Right-handed" for suggesting a right-handed game
is output, and control is performed to start right-hand navigation for RUSH. That is, "
The output of the voice saying "I hit the right" is at the end of the ending period, in other words, in the fourth mode M4 (
RUSH mode) is started. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, control is performed so that the image effect of the effect MA is started. It should be noted that control may be performed so that characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G at the end time T2 of the ending period to suggest a right-handed game. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "I'm hitting right", "
Please hit right." is controlled to be displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode).

<Transition processing to production MB: FIG. 49(b)>
Next, the case where the effect MB is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described.
In the transition processing to the production MB, the intro part of the music used in the production MB of the fourth mode M4 is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C from the start time T1 of the ending period of the production C corresponding to the "best result". is controlled to start. Here, in the effect MB, the period of the intro portion of the music used in the effect MB of the fourth mode M4 is longer than the ending period of the effect C. Therefore, the output of the intro part continues even after the ending time T2 of the ending period. Further, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the output of the intro part of the music is completed.

In addition, in the transition processing to the effect MB, the speaker units 26A to 26A to 26A during the output period of the intro part
6C is controlled to output the sound "B RUSH Rush". Specifically, "B
RUSH Rush" is output from the start time T1 of the ending period to the voice start time TW2
It is controlled so that the output of the sound of "B RUSH rush" is started later and ends at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part ends. Here, the voice start time TW2 is the time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "BRUSH Rush" from the output period of the intro part. For example, the output period of the intro part is 11 seconds, and the output time of the voice of "B RUSH Rush" is 2 seconds.
, the speech start time TW2 is 9 seconds. In this case, control is performed so that the output of the sound "B RUSH rush" is started 9 seconds after the start time T1 of the ending period.

Here, in the transition processing to the effect MB, the sound of "B RUSH rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C across the ending time T2 of the ending period. For this reason, when the sound "Right hit" is output at the end of the ending period T2 to suggest a right-hand game, the "B RUSH rush" sound and the "Right hit" sound are output together. be done. Therefore, in the process of transitioning to this effect MB, without outputting the sound of "Right shot", at the end of the ending period T2, characters such as "Please hit right" to suggest a right hand game is displayed on the display screen G, and the RUSH right-hand navigation is controlled to start. That is, "
Please hit right." is controlled to be displayed on the display screen G at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, control is performed so that the image effect of the effect MB is started.

<Transition processing to production MC: FIG. 49(c)>
Next, the case where the effect MC is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described.
In the transition processing to the production MC, the intro part of the music used in the production MC of the fourth mode M4 is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C from the start time T1 of the ending period of the production C corresponding to the "best result". is controlled to start. Here, in the production MC, the period of the introduction portion of the music used in the production MC of the fourth mode M4 is shorter than the ending period of the production C. Therefore, the output of the intro part ends before the ending time T2 of the ending period. Further, the speakers 26A to 26C are controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the output of the intro part of the music is completed.

In addition, in the transition processing to the production MC, the speaker units 26A to 26A-2 are displayed during the output period of the intro part.
6C is controlled to output the voice "C RUSH Rush". Specifically, "C
RUSH Rush" is output from the start time T1 of the ending period to the voice start time TW3
It is controlled so that the output of the voice of "CRUSH Rush" ends at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part ends. Here, the voice start time TW3 is the time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "CRUSH Rush" from the output period of the intro part. For example, if the output period of the intro part is 6 seconds and the output time of the voice of "CRUSH Rush" is 2 seconds, the voice start time TW3 is 4 seconds. In this case, control is performed so that the output of the voice "CRUSH Rush" is started 4 seconds after the start time T1 of the ending period.

In addition, in the production MC, following the output of the sound of "CRUSH rush", the sound of "please hit the right" for suggesting a right-handed game is output, and at the end of the ending period T2, or at approximately the same time. At the same time, it is controlled so that the output of the voice saying "Please strike right" ends. In other words, the output time of the voice "Please hit right" is the time obtained by subtracting the output period of the intro part from the ending period. In addition, in the process of transitioning to the effect MC, at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4, characters such as "please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G to suggest a right-handed game. is controlled to start right-hand navigation for RUSH.

<Production data>
Next, data used for transition processing to the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. fourth
The music data and voice data used in each of the effects MA to MC of mode M4 are sequence data, parameter data and sound data as described with reference to FIG.
00 ROM 412 and common ROM 404 . Specifically, the ROM
412 stores sequence data and parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C used respectively in the productions MA to MC.
The sound data corresponding to the music data A to C used respectively in the are stored. and MP
U402 reads the sequence data and parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C from the ROM412 and the sound data from the common ROM404 as necessary.
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from 6A to 26C. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the read music data A to C are set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data A to C are output to the speaker units 26A to 26A.
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output (reproduce) from 6C.

Here, according to the data table stored in the ROM 412, the music data A is associated with the presentation MA, the music data B is associated with the presentation MB, and the music data C is associated with the presentation MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process in FIG. read from common ROM 404 and set in register 403b of sound output LSI 403,
Sound output LSI 40 so that music data A is output (reproduced) from speaker units 26A to 26C
3. Also, the MPU 402 performs step S1706 of the effect type selection process in FIG.
Alternatively, if the effect type set in S1708 is the effect MB, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data B are stored in the ROM 412 and common ROM 4.
04 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the music data B is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process in FIG. The music data C is read from the ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403.
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output (reproduce) from 26C.

Music data A to C are composed of an intro part (prelude), an A melody part (the first melody of the song), a B melody part (a melody that follows A melody), a chorus part (chorus), an interlude,
It is composed of multiple clauses such as the out mouth (postlude). Examples of common musical compositions are shown below. Note that the following example A and example B are merely examples, and the composition of music used in this embodiment is not limited to the examples shown below.
Example A) Intro → A verse → B melody → Chorus → Interlude → A melody → B melody → Chorus → Interlude → C melody →
Chorus → Outro example B) Intro → A verse → B melody → Chorus → Interlude → B melody → Chorus → C melody → Outro

Further, the common ROM 404 and ROM 412 store voice data A to E and voice start times TW1 to TW3 described with reference to FIG. 49, respectively. Here, voice data A
. . . C and the voice start times TW1 to TW3 are associated with each other. The MPU 402 reads out the audio data stored in the common ROM 404 as necessary and outputs it to the speaker unit 26A.
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from ~26C.
RUSH rush", audio data B is "B RUSH rush", audio data C is "C RUS
The voice data D is "Right shot", and the voice data E is "Right shot please".

The ROM 412 also stores the time TE corresponding to the ending period described with reference to FIG. The MPU 402 refers to the time TE corresponding to the ending period stored in the ROM 412 when judging whether or not the ending period has ended.

Further, according to the data table stored in the ROM 412, the audio data A is associated with the production MA, the audio data B is associated with the production MB, and the audio data C is associated with the production MC. Also, the audio data D is associated with the production MA, and the audio data E is associated with the production MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process in FIG. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to do so. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data A and sound data D are read out from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and set to the sound data A and sound data D. is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
Also, the MPU 402 performs step S1706 or S170 of the effect type selection process in FIG.
8 is the effect MB, the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data B is read out and output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the audio data B are stored in the ROM 412.
and read from the common ROM 404, set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and set the sound output LSI 4 so that the sound data B is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
03.
Also, the MPU 402 performs step S1706 or S170 of the effect type selection process in FIG.
8 is the effect MC, the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data C and the audio data E are read out and output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data C and the sound data E are read out from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404, and the sound output LSI
403, the audio data C and the audio data E are set in the register 403b of the speaker unit 26A.
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output (reproduce) from ~26C.

The MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the sound data corresponding to the sound data A to C are read out from the common ROM 404 based on the sound start times TW1 to TW3 and output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 receives audio data A
is output after the voice start time TW1 has elapsed from the start time T1 of the ending period (Fig. 49
reference), the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the audio data A are R
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to read from the OM 412 and common ROM 404 and output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. When outputting the audio data B, the MPU 402 stores the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data B after the audio start time TW2 has elapsed from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 49).
And the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that it reads from the common ROM 404 and outputs from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Furthermore, when outputting the audio data C, the MPU 402 stores the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data C after the audio start time TW3 has elapsed from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 49). The sound output L is read from the common ROM 404 and output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
SI403 is controlled.

In addition, the image data used in each effect of the fourth mode M4 is the MP of the display control device 500
It is stored in the performance data storage area 1032 of the program ROM 512 of the U502. Specifically, image data A to D are stored in effect data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 follows the instruction from the MPU 402 and stores data storage area 1 for effect.
032 and instructs the VDP 52 to display it on the display screen G. FIG.

Here, according to the data table, the image data A is associated with the effect MA, the image data B is associated with the effect MB, and the image data C is associated with the effect MC. Therefore, the MPU 502 performs step S1706 or S1 of the effect type selection process in FIG.
When the effect type set in 708 is the effect MA, the video data A is read out and VD
P52 is instructed to display on the display screen G. Also, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process in FIG. Also, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process in FIG.

The video data D is image data for right-hand navigation for RUSH. The MPU 502 retrieves the video data D from the effect data storage area 1032 when performing right-hand navigation for RUSH.
and instruct the VDP 52 to display it on the display screen G. Note that the image data D for right-hand navigation for RUSH is stored in the character ROM 506, and when performing right-hand navigation for RUSH, the MPU 502 reads out the image data D from the character ROM 506 and displays it on the display screen G. may be instructed to

<Transition processing to the fourth mode (RUSH mode)>
Next, the processing for shifting to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53. FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for shifting to the fourth mode (RUSH mode). Here, the operation of the audio light emission control device 400 in the transition process to the fourth mode (RUSH mode) described with reference to FIG. 49 will be described.

In step S1901, the MPU 402 determines whether an ending command has been received. In this determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether an ending command is stored in various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1901 that an ending command has been received (YES), in step S1902 it determines the effect type of the fourth mode M4. Specifically, the MPU 402 performs step S170 in FIG.
6 or step S1708, the type of effect of the fourth mode M4 is determined based on the type of flag set in the various setting flag storage area. Also, in step S1901, MP
When U402 determines that the ending command has not been received (NO), it ends the effect type selection process.

If the determination result of step S1902 is the effect MA, the MPU 402
At 903, a transition process to the effect MA is executed. Note that the production MA in step S1903
The process of transitioning to is described with reference to FIG. Moreover, when the determination result of step S1902 is production|presentation MB, MPU402 performs the transition process to production|presentation MB in step S1904. In addition, the transfer processing to the effect MB in step S1904 will be described with reference to FIG. Furthermore, when the determination result of step S1902 is production|presentation MC, MPU402 performs the transition process to production|presentation MC in step S1905. It should be noted that the transition processing to the effect MC in step S1905 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S1906, the MPU 402 clears the flags set in the various setting flag storage areas in step S1706 or step S1708 of FIG.

<Transition processing to production MA>
Next, referring to FIG. 51, a detailed description will be given of the transition processing to the effect MA in step S1903 of FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing when the effect MA is set.
In step S2001, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S2004, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to and a value corresponding to the speech start time TW1 is set as the measurement time. For example, the period of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec, and TW1 is set to "2 sec
c", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "1000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for TW1. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2002, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S2006, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referenced and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. Each time timer interrupt processing is executed, the value set in this timer counter is changed to the previous value by 1.
is updated by subtracting

In step S2003, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data A for the production MA from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data A to the speaker. Part 26A
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from ~26C. As a result, the speaker section 2
The output (reproduction) of the intro part of music data A starts from 6A to 26C.

In step S2004, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the speech start time TW1 has passed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2001. When the MPU 402 determines that the voice start time TW1 has passed (
YES), and in step S2005, the output of the sound for the effect MA is started. Specifically, M
PU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data A "A RUSH rush" for the effect MA from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the sound data A to the speaker. Part 26A
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from ~26C. As a result, the speaker section 2
The output (reproduction) of the voice data A "A RUSH Rush" is started from 6A to 26C. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S2004 that the voice start time TW1 has not passed (NO), it ends the transition processing to the effect MA.

In step S2006, the MPU 402 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2002. The MPU 402 is
If it is determined that the ending period has ended (YES), in step S2007 RUS
Start right-hand navigation for H. Specifically, the MPU 402 receives the audio data D for the effect MA.
Sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to "Right shot" are stored in the ROM 41
2 and the common ROM 404 to set it in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and control the sound output LSI 403 so that the sound data D is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (playback) of the voice data D "Right-handed" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has not passed in step S2006 (NO), the effect M
End the transition processing to A.

In step S2008, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the image effect of the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 402 is the MPU 5 of the display control device 500
02 to read out the video data A stored in the performance data storage area 1032 and reproduce it. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads the video data A from the performance data storage area 1032 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 and stores it in the VDP 505 .
is displayed on the display screen G.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in steps S2004 and S2006 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition processing to production MB>
Next, the transition processing to the effect MB in step S1904 of FIG. 50 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing when setting an effect MB.
In step S2101, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S2104, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referenced and a value corresponding to the voice start time TW2 is set as the measurement time. For example, the period of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec, and TW2 is set to "3 sec
c", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "1500" as the waiting time (waiting period) for TW2. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2102, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S2106, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referenced and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. Each time timer interrupt processing is executed, the value set in this timer counter is changed to the previous value by 1.
is updated by subtracting

In step S2103, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data B for the effect MB from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data B to the speaker. Part 26A
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from ~26C. As a result, the speaker section 2
The output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data B is started from 6A to 26C.

In step S2104, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the speech start time TW2 has elapsed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2101. When the MPU 402 determines that the voice start time TW2 has passed (
YES), the output of the sound for effect MB is started in step S2105. Specifically, M
The PU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data B "B RUSH rush" for the effect MB from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the sound data B to the speaker. Part 26A
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from ~26C. As a result, the speaker section 2
The output (reproduction) of the audio data B "B RUSH Rush" is started from 6A to 26C. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the voice start time TW2 has not passed in step S2104 (NO), it ends the transition processing to the effect MB.

In step S2106, the MPU 402 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2102. The MPU 402 is
If it is determined that the ending period has ended (YES), then in step S2107 the playing navigation is started. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500, based on instructions from the MPU 402,
The video data D is read out from the effect data storage area 1032 and controlled to be displayed on the display screen G by the VDP 505, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has not passed in step S2106 (NO),
End the transition processing to the effect MB.

In step S2108, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the image effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 402 is the MPU 5 of the display control device 500
02 to read out and reproduce the video data B stored in the performance data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads the video data B from the performance data storage area 1032 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 and stores it in the VDP 505 .
is displayed on the display screen G.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in steps S2104 and S2106 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition processing to production MC>
Next, referring to FIG. 53, a detailed description will be given of the transition processing to the effect MC in step S1905 of FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing when the effect MC is set.
In step S2201, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S2204, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referenced and a value corresponding to the voice start time TW3 is set as the measurement time. For example, the cycle of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec, and TW3 is set to "1 sec
c”, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to “500” as the waiting time (waiting period) for TW3. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2202, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S2206, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referenced and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. Each time timer interrupt processing is executed, the value set in this timer counter is changed to the previous value by 1.
is updated by subtracting

In step S2203, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for the effect MC. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C for the production MC from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data C to the speaker. Part 26A
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from ~26C. As a result, the speaker section 2
The output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data C is started from 6A to 26C.

In step S2204, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the speech start time TW3 has passed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2201. When the MPU 402 determines that the voice start time TW3 has passed (
YES), and in step S2205, the output of the sound for the effect MC is started. Specifically, M
PU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to sound data C "C RUSH rush" for production MC from ROM 412 and common ROM 404, sets them in register 403b of sound output LSI 403, and sets sound data C to a speaker. Part 26A
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from ~26C. As a result, the speaker section 2
The output (playback) of the audio data C "C RUSH Rush" is started from 6A to 26C.

Also, in step S2205, after outputting the sound data C "C RUSH rush" for the effect MC, the MPU 402 transfers the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data E "Right shot" to the ROM 412 and common data. read from the ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, the audio data E is output from the speaker unit 26A to
26C to control the sound output LSI 403. As a result, the speaker section 26
The output (playback) of the voice data E "Please hit right" starts from A to 26C. After outputting the audio data C "C RUSH rush", the MPU 402 outputs the audio data E "
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that "Please hit right" is output. Therefore, from the speaker units 26A to 26C, after the sound "Rush into C RUSH" is output, the sound "Please hit right" is output. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the voice start time TW3 has not passed in step S2204 (NO), it ends the transition processing to the effect MC.

In step S2206, the MPU 402 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2202. The MPU 402 is
If it is determined that the ending period has ended (YES), then in step S2207 the playing navigation is started. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the performance data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500, based on instructions from the MPU 402,
The video data D is read out from the performance data storage area 1032 and controlled to be displayed on the display screen G by the VDP 505, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has not passed in step S2206 (NO),
Terminate the transition processing to the effect MC.

In step S2208, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the image effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 402 is the MPU 5 of the display control device 500
02 to read out and reproduce the video data C stored in the performance data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads out the video data C from the performance data storage area 1032 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 and stores it in the VDP 505 .
is displayed on the display screen G.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in steps S2204 and S2206 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

Note that in the present embodiment, the types of effects in the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are effects MA, M
The transition processing to each of the effects MA to MC has been described assuming that there are three types of effects B and MC.
The types of effects in mode M4 are not limited to the three types described above, but may be arbitrary, and may be two types or four types or more.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side of the inner frame 13 with the left side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 is on the left side of the outer frame 11. is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 with the support side. When the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened, they are opened by rotating forward (toward the player) with the supporting side as the rotation axis.
Therefore, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, it opens so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player who plays in the seat next to the left. closest to the ear. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A is reduced when notifying that the door is open. The parameters may be defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A is zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker section 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A becomes zero. When muting is performed, an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2a may be used, or an output open type circuit that disconnects the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a by a selector or the like may be used.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 is supported on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the supporting side. When supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, the door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent right seat. , and the speaker section 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. In this case, when notifying the abnormality that the door is open, the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B is set to the level of the other speaker section 26A.
, 26C. It suffices to specify the parameters of the program and the data for processing.

In addition, the front door frame 14 is supported on both sides of the inner frame 13 with the right and left sides (hereinafter also referred to as both sides) of the inner frame 13 as supporting sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11. is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11 as the supporting side, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double-opening structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected. the first monitoring device 2
50 and a second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 1
A detector may be provided to detect which side each of 3 is open, and the volume of either the speaker section 26A or the speaker section 26B may be reduced based on the detection result of this detector.

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 has been opened with the left side as the support side, the door frame 13 is positioned so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the left. As a result, the speaker section 26A comes closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent left seat. Therefore, when notifying the abnormality that the door is open, the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A is made smaller than the reproduction volume of the other speaker sections 26B and 26C.
The ROM 4 of the sound emission control board 401 stores a program and processing data whose parameters are defined so that the amplification factor of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2c is smaller than that of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2c.
12 to reproduce an alarm sound and voice to inform the abnormality. note that,
A parameter may be defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A becomes zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a becomes zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker section 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A becomes zero. When muting is performed, an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2a may be used, or an output open type circuit that disconnects the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a by a selector or the like may be used.

Also, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the supporting side, it opens so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the right. , the speaker unit 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. Therefore, when notifying an abnormality that the door is open, the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B is set to the level of the other speaker sections 26A and 26B.
A program and processing data whose parameters are defined such that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b is smaller than the amplification factor of the other amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2c is emitted. It is only necessary to read out from the ROM 412 of the control board 401 and reproduce the alarm sound and voice that informs of the abnormality. The parameters may be defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B is zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b is zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker section 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B becomes zero. When muting is performed, an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2b may be used, or an output open type circuit that cuts off the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2b by a selector or the like may be used.

<Another Example of Abnormality Notification Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the abnormality notification process when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double-opening structure. MPU 40 of audio light emission control device 400
2, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, an abnormality notification process is executed to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and description of other abnormality notification will be omitted.

In step S2301, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 413
determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the command for notifying when power is restored is stored in the various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2301 that the command for notifying when the power has been restored has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processing from step S2304. Also, M
If the PU 402 determines in step S2301 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), it transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2302. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores a data table in the program ROM 512 for executing the power recovery notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from various data storage areas in Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the display for notifying when the power is restored based on the command for notifying when the power is restored which is transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S2303, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program and processing data, light emission data, and sound data for notifying when power is restored from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. According to the power recovery notification program and processing data, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is the same or substantially the same when notifying the abnormality that the door is open.
The parameters are defined so that the amplification factors of a to 403d2c are the same or substantially the same.

In step S2304, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 413
determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the normal notification command is stored in the various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2304 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2311, which will be described later.
If the MPU 402 determines in step S2304 that the normal notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the normal notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2305. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received normal time notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S2306, the MPU 402 detects that the detector is opened with the left side of the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 as the support side, in other words, the detector detects that the right side of the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened. It is determined whether or not it is detected.

If it is determined in step S2306 that the right side is open (YES), the MP
In step S2307, U402 starts reading data for normal time notification for opening the right side. Specifically, the MPU 402 includes a ROM 412 and a common R
The OM starts to read the normal time notification program for opening the right side, the processing data, the light emission data, and the sound data. In the program and processing data for normal time notification for opening the right side, the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A when notifying the abnormality that the door is open is higher than the reproduction volume of the other speaker sections 26B and 26C. becomes smaller, in other words, the amplifier circuit 4
The parameters are defined so that the amplification factor of 03d2a is smaller than the amplification factors of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2c. The parameters may be defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A becomes zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a becomes zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker section 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A becomes zero. When muting, the amplifier circuit 403
An output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of d2a may be used, or an output open type circuit that disconnects the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a by a selector or the like may be used. Further, light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2306 that the right side is not opened (NO)
In step S2308, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal time notification for opening the left side. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading a program for normal time notification for opening the left side, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. In the program and processing data for normal time notification for opening the left side, the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B is higher than the reproduction volume of the other speaker sections 26A and 26C when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. In other words, the parameters are defined so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b is smaller than the amplification factors of the other amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2c. The parameters may be defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B is zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b is zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker section 26B may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B becomes zero. When muting is performed, an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2b may be used, or an output open type circuit that cuts off the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2b by a selector or the like may be used. Further, light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S2309, the MPU 402 performs processing to stop BGM (including music and voice for presentation). In this BGM stop processing, the BG being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C
Perform processing to stop or mute M. When stopping the BGM, the MPU 402 causes the RAM 413 to store the address of the data for stopping the reproduction of the BGM in order to restart the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is cancelled. When restarting BGM playback when the door open notification is canceled, MP
The U402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts playing the BGM from that address, thereby restarting the playing of the BGM from the position where it was stopped.
Also, when muting the BGM, the MPU 402 does not stop the playback of the BGM itself.
The sound output LSI 403 is instructed to mute the BGM so that no sound is output. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2310, the MPU 402 performs steps S2303 and S2307.
Alternatively, the reproduction (output) and light emission of the sound data read out in step S2308 is started. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data read out in step S2303, step S2307, or step S2308, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to reproduce (output) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C notify the abnormality (for example, when power is restored, "
The door was opened while the power was off! ”, and in normal times, the output of a voice such as “The door is open!” and a warning sound) is started. Also, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp section 24 to emit light based on the program, processing data and light emission data read out in step S2303, step S2307 or step S2308. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, the indicator lamp devices 23A, 2
Since the light emission data is defined so that 3B is extinguished, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S2311, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit open command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402
It is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to the back pack unit open command is stored in the various flag storage area of M413. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2311 that the back pack unit open command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S2313. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2311 that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), in step S2312 the MPU 40
2 is a sound output LSI 403 so as to reduce the playback volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C (output of normal notification sounds such as "The door is open!" and warning sounds).
to. The sound output LSI 403 outputs the speaker unit 2 based on an instruction from the MPU 402.
Control is performed to reduce the reproduction volume of anomaly information output from 6A to 26C.

Here, the control to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S2312 may be controlled to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C. Of the parts 26A to 26C, only the reproduction volume of a specific speaker part, for example, the speaker part 26A or the speaker part 26B, which is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, is adjusted. You may control to make it small. Here, in step S2306, if the right side is open, the sound output LSI
403 controls to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A, and the sound output LSI 4
03 controls to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B if the left side is open.

In step S2312, when controlling the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to be reduced, the sound output LSI 403 sets the parameters that define the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to the back pack unit 15. Update to the parameters for the case,
By reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits of the speaker sections 26A to 26C, the speaker sections 26A to 26C
Decrease the playback volume of 6C. When performing control so as to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker section 26A. to control. Furthermore, when controlling to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B, the sound output LSI
403 reduces the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker unit 26B, so that the speaker unit 26B
control to reduce only the playback volume of

In step S2313, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received a door open notification cancel command for canceling the door open notification transmitted from the MPU 302. FIG. Specifically, MP
U402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the door open notification cancellation command is stored in various flag storage areas of RAM413. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2313 that the door open notification cancellation command has not been received (NO), it ends the abnormality notification processing without executing the processing after step S2314. Moreover, the MPU 402 performs step S
If it is determined at 2313 that the door open notification cancellation command has been received (YES), the processing from step S2314 is executed.
At step 2314 , MPU 402 transmits a door open notification cancellation command to display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is canceled based on the received door open notification cancellation command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S2315, the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door open notification cancellation command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was off!" If so, stop the output of the voice such as "The door is open!" and the warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification cancellation command.
In step S2315, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read out and reproduce the voice data "The door is closed!" stored in the common ROM 404. FIG. The sound output LSI 403 reads the voice data "The door is closed!" from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the sound "The door is closed!" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2316, the MPU 402 stores information in the RAM based on the door open notification cancellation command.
The flags corresponding to the power restoration notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas 413 are cleared, in other words, the flag values are set to zero. In step S2317, MP
U402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM that was stopped or muted in step S2309. The sound output LSI 403 resumes reproduction of BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402 . Here, if the BGM is stopped in step S2309, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in the RAM 413,
By instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the GM, the reproduction is restarted from the position where the BGM was stopped. Also, if the BGM is muted in step S2309, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM.
Unmute the BGM to the sound output LSI 403 and output the BGM from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
is output. After that, the MPU 402 terminates the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2309, the BGM (including music and sound for effect) is stopped or muted. Alternatively, a process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value may be performed immediately. In this case, in step S2310, step S2303, step S2307 or S2
When playing back (outputting) the sound data read out in 308, the playback volume of the voice or warning sound may be gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. Furthermore, step S2
In step S2315, if the process of lowering the volume gradually or step by step is being performed while the BGM is being played without stopping in step S2315, the speaker units 26A to 26C
The playback volume of the abnormality notification from is gradually decreased or stepwise decreased until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and in step S2317, when resuming the playback of the BGM, the playback volume of the BGM is gradually decreased to a predetermined value or The volume may be increased stepwise. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform notification without causing a sense of incongruity caused by suddenly stopping the BGM and replacing it with a warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of incongruity due to the change to BGM.

In the above description, it is determined in step S2311 whether or not the back pack unit open command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), the process of step S2312 is executed. Then, the reproduction volume of the warning sound or the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must be opened after the inner frame 13 is opened, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15. There is a high possibility that the opening is due to maintenance, etc., rather than a so-called goto act to obtain an illegal profit by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside, and that the back pack unit 15 is opened to perform maintenance, etc. Since it takes time to do so, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the back pack unit open command is received, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is opened. In such a case, a configuration (two-stage control) is adopted in which the warning sound or the like is reduced. As a result, there is no need to hear a loud warning sound indefinitely during time-consuming maintenance or the like, and the possibility that a player playing a game in the next seat will be bothered by the abnormal warning sound is further reduced. Since the opening of the back pack unit 15 is not due to maintenance or the like, but may be due to fraud, it is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like. Note that steps S2311 and S2
The processing of 312 may not be performed, in other words, a configuration may be adopted in which it is not determined whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control is performed). In this case, pachinko machine 1
0 does not need to be provided with the back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15 .

In this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the notification process for power recovery and the notification process for normal time, in the notification process for normal time, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, , The indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light, but while using the same light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal notification process, in the normal notification process,
The power supply for light emission to the light emitters of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B may be stopped so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and hold different light emission data for the notification process for power restoration and the notification process for normal time, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

Also, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, the display lamp device 23A
, 23B, preferably the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14, may be configured not to emit light. In this case also, the light emission data for the normal time notification process may be defined so that the display lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light. A configuration may be adopted in which the supply of power for light emission to the light emitter of the display lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 is stopped. In this way, the pachinko machine 10, in the normal time notification process, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, the display lamp device 23A
, 23B are configured so as not to emit light, the possibility that a player playing a game at an adjacent seat will be bothered by the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat loses the exhilaration and immersion and loses interest.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes a frame (inner frame 1
3, the front door frame 14), a plurality of sound devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) provided in the frame, and detection devices for detecting the opening of the frame (first and second monitoring devices 250, second monitoring device 290), and an abnormality notification means (MPU 402) that controls a plurality of sound devices to notify an abnormality when the detection device detects the opening of the frame. The anomaly notifying means, when announcing an anomaly,
The reproduction volume of one or more of the plurality of audio devices is made smaller than the reproduction volume of the other audio devices (in this embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A is made smaller). For this reason,
It is possible to reduce the possibility that a player playing a game in an adjacent seat may feel annoyed by the notification sound. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voices output from the game machine being played from becoming difficult to hear due to an abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voices output from the game machine is lost and the game can be played. This reduces the risk of disappointing people.

(2) The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10 is supported by either the right side or the left side of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with either the right side or the left side as the supporting side. , anomaly reporting means (M
PU 402) adjusts the reproduction volume of the sound device (speaker unit 26A) arranged on the side different from the support side among the plurality of sound devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) to another sound device (speaker unit 2).
6B, 26C). In other words, the pachinko machine 10 reduces the reproduction sound volume of the acoustic device arranged on the side different from the supporting side of the frame, in other words, on the side closer to the player sitting next to the player when the frame is opened. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively reduce the annoyance of the notification sound by the players sitting in the adjacent seats. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine being played due to abnormal notifications, and the exhilaration and sense of immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine can be suppressed more effectively. This further reduces the risk that the player will be distracted by being caught.

(3) The abnormality notification means (MPU 402) of the pachinko machine 10 does not reduce the reproduction volume of the sound devices (speakers 26B and 26C) arranged on the support side among the plurality of sound devices (speakers 26A to 26C). In other words, when the frame is opened, the volume of the sound devices (speakers 26B and 26C) arranged far from the player sitting next to the player is not reduced. For this reason,
It is possible to reduce the possibility that a player sitting next to the player may feel annoyed by the abnormality notification sound, and at the same time reduce the possibility that the hall manager or employees may miss the abnormality notification.

[Second embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more notification sounds from the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened. By making the volume smaller than the volume of the notification sound reproduced by other audio devices (in the first embodiment, the volume reproduced by the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing in the adjacent seat is not annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I am trying to reduce the fear of thinking. In this embodiment, the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14
A pachinko machine 10 having a dedicated speaker unit for notifying that the is opened will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described below, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are assigned the same reference numerals, and redundant description will be omitted.

<Game board 81>
FIG. 55 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine according to this embodiment. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a speaker section 26D for notifying that the front door frame 14 has been opened at the upper right portion of the front side of the game board 81 . As shown in FIG. 55, the speaker section 26D is provided outside the substantially circular game area 104 defined by the guide rail 103 so as not to interfere with the game. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is located on the rear side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 81
A speaker portion 26E for notifying that the inner frame 13 is opened is provided at a position that does not interfere with the back pack unit 15 on the back side (where the back pack unit 15 is provided). Other configurations are the same as those of the game board 81 included in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 8, and redundant description will be omitted.

In addition, the speaker part 26</b>D should not move as the front door frame 14 is rotated when the front door frame 14 is opened. In other words, when the front door frame 14 is opened, the speaker section 26D
should be directed to the right or left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat. Accordingly, the location where the speaker section 26D is provided is not limited to the upper right portion of the game board 81, but may be provided in the upper left portion or the lower left portion of the game board 81. FIG. It should be noted that, even in this case, it is preferable to provide it outside the substantially circular game area 104 defined by the guide rail 103 so as not to hinder the game. Alternatively, the speaker section 26D may be provided on the front surface of the resin base 71 of the inner frame 13. FIG.

In addition, since the speaker unit 26E is provided on the back side of the inner frame 13 (game board 81),
When the inner frame 13 is opened, it moves along with the rotation of the inner frame 13, but the direction of outputting the sound of the speaker part 26E does not face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player who plays the game in the adjacent seat. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player playing a game in the adjacent seat will be bothered by the anomaly notification sound. The place where the speaker section 26E is provided is not limited to the upper right portion on the back side of the game board 81, but may be provided in the upper left portion or the lower left portion on the back side of the game board 81. note that,
Even in this case, it is preferable to provide it at a position that does not interfere with the back pack unit 15 or the like supported on the back surface of the game board 81 .

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 400 and Display Control Device 500>
FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a speaker unit 26 for notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened as described above.
D and 26E are further provided.
is connected to the output port of More specifically, the speaker units 26D and 26E are connected to the output port of the DAC 403d of the sound output LSI 403 provided on the sound emission control board 401. FIG. The DAC 403d converts the digital musical tone data or the digital synthesized musical tone data created by the sound data processing section 403c into analog signals, amplifies them, and then outputs them to the speaker sections 26D and 26D.
output to 6E.

FIG. 57 shows the DAC 40 included in the sound output LSI 403 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment.
3d and speaker units 26A to 26E are conceptual diagrams for explaining connection relationships.
In the example shown in FIG. 57(a), the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and three amplifier circuits that amplify the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. 403d2a, an amplifier circuit 403d2d and an amplifier circuit 403d2e. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2d is output to the speaker unit 26D, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2e. is output to the speaker section 26E.

In the example shown in FIG. 57(a), the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes speaker units 26A to
26C is amplified by a common amplifier circuit 403d2a. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (operational amplifiers) can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 57(a), the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2d is output to the speaker unit 26D, The analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2e is output to the speaker section 26E, so that the speaker sections 26A to 26C, the speaker section 26D, and the speaker section 26E have different amplifier circuits. Figure 57 (
As in the example shown in b), the number of amplifier circuits included in the DAC 403d is one, and the amplifier circuit 403d
2 to switch the output destination of the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2 to the speaker units 26A to 26C, the speaker unit 26D, or the speaker unit 26E. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (operational amplifiers) can be further reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be further reduced.

In this embodiment, the reproduction volume of the program and processing data stored in the ROM 412 for executing the abnormality notification process at the speaker units 26A to 26C, the speaker unit 26D, and the speaker unit 26E, in other words, the amplifier circuit 403d2a, the amplifier circuit 403d2d, and the amplifier circuit 403d2e may have the same parameter data.
The parameter data may be defined so that the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e are higher than the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2a of the speaker units 26A to 26C.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the dedicated speaker unit 26D for notifying that the front door frame 14 is opened on the game board 81 attached to the inner frame 13, so that the front door frame 14 is opened. In this case, the direction of the speaker section 26D does not face the right side or the left side of the upper half of the body of the player playing in the adjacent seat. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a dedicated speaker part 26E for notifying that the inner frame 13 is opened on the back side of the game board 81 attached to the inner frame 13, and when the inner frame 13 is opened Moreover, the direction of the speaker part 26E does not face the right or left side of the upper half of the body of the player playing in the adjacent seat. Therefore, the speaker sections 26D, 26
When notifying that the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened from E, the dedicated speaker unit 26
There is no need to reduce the reproduction volume of D and 26E, and the possibility that the player will be bothered by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine being played due to an abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine are lost. This reduces the risk of disappointing people.

<Regarding Abnormal Notification Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the abnormality notification process of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. The operation of the abnormality notification process of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment is substantially the same as the operation of the abnormality notification process in the first embodiment, but there are some differences, so please refer to FIG. The operation of the abnormality notification process of the pachinko machine 10 according to .

When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400
Abnormal notification processing is executed to notify the abnormality. Here, the monitoring devices 250, 290
The abnormality notification process when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened by , will be explained, and the description of other abnormality notification will be omitted.

In step S2401, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 413
determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command is stored in the various flag storage areas. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2401 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processing from step S2404. Also, M
If the PU 402 determines in step S2401 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), it transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2402. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores a data table in the program ROM 512 for executing the power recovery notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from various data storage areas in Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the display for notifying when the power is restored based on the command for notifying when the power is restored which is transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S2403, the MPU 402 starts reading data for notification when power is restored. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program and processing data, light emission data, and sound data for notifying when power is restored from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, since the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed in the closed (closed) state of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, the volume output from the speaker units 26D and 26E is small outside the pachinko machine 10.
For this reason, it is preferable that the anomaly notification at the time of power recovery be performed from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, parameters are defined so that an abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the parameters are defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is a predetermined value and the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is a predetermined value, while the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26D and 26E is set to zero and the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e are set to zero.

Note that the speaker units 26D and 26E are adjusted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26D and 26E becomes zero.
26E may be muted. When muting, the amplifier circuit 403
An output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the outputs of d2d and 403d2e may be used, or an output open type circuit that cuts off the inputs to the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e by a selector or the like may be used.

When an abnormality is notified from the speaker units 26D and 26E, as described above, the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed with the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 closed (closed). , 26E is reduced outside the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Therefore,
The reproduction volume of the loudspeakers 26D and 26E may be increased in announcing an abnormality at the time of power recovery. In this case, the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e of the speaker units 26D and 26E in the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery are equal to
For example, the parameters may be defined so as to be larger than the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e of 26E.

In step S2404, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 413
determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the normal notification command is stored in the various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2404 that the command for normal time notification has not been received (NO), it executes the processing after step S2411, which will be described later.
If the MPU 402 determines in step S2404 that the normal time notification command has been received (YES), it transmits the normal time notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2405. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received normal time notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S2406, the MPU 402 determines that the received normal time notification command is the front door frame 1
4 is opened. The determination result in step S2406 indicates that the front door frame 14
(YES), the MPU 402 starts reading the normal notification data for opening the front door frame in step S2407. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading a program for normal time notification for opening the front door frame, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, in the present embodiment, parameters are defined so that when the front door frame 14 is open, the abnormality is notified from the speaker section 26D. Specifically, the parameters are defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26D is a predetermined value and the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2d is a predetermined value, while the reproduction volume of the speaker sections 26A to 26C and 26E is set to a predetermined value. becomes zero, the amplifier circuit 403d2
The parameters are defined so that the amplification factor of a and the amplification circuit 403d2e is zero.
Further, light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, at the time of normal notification, the indicator lamp device 23A
, 23B are stopped.

The reproduction of the speaker units 26A to 26C and 26E may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C and 26E becomes zero. In the case of muting, an output short type circuit that short-circuits (connects to GND) the outputs of the amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2e may be used. It may be a type circuit. In addition, Fig. 5
7B, when only one amplifier circuit is used, the output destination of the amplifier circuit 403d2 may be set to the speaker unit 26D by the selector 403f.

Moreover, when the determination result in step S2406 is not due to the opening of the front door frame 14 (NO), the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal time notification for opening the inner frame in step S2408. Specifically, the MPU 402 includes a ROM 412 and a common RO
From M, reading of the normal time notification program for opening the inner frame, processing data, light emission data, and sound data is started. Here, in the present embodiment, parameters are defined so that when the inner frame 13 is opened, the abnormality is notified from the speaker section 26E. Specifically, parameters are defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26E becomes a predetermined value and the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2e becomes a predetermined value, while the reproduction volume of the speaker sections 26A to 26D is zero. The parameters are defined so that the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2d are zero. Further, light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

Note that the speaker units 26A to 26D are adjusted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26D becomes zero.
26D playback may be muted. When muting, the amplifier circuit 403
d2a and the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2d may be short-circuited (connected to GND).
An output open type circuit that disconnects the input to d may be used. Also, as in the example shown in FIG. 57(b), when only one amplifier circuit is used, the output destination of the amplifier circuit 403d2 may be set to the speaker unit 26E by the selector 403f.

In step S2409, the MPU 402 performs processing for stopping BGM (including music and voice for presentation). In this BGM stop processing, the BG being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C
Perform processing to stop or mute M. When stopping the BGM, the MPU 402 causes the RAM 413 to store the address of the data for stopping the reproduction of the BGM in order to restart the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is cancelled. When restarting BGM playback when the door open notification is canceled, MP
The U402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts playing the BGM from that address, thereby restarting the playing of the BGM from the position where it was stopped.
Also, when muting the BGM, the MPU 402 does not stop the playback of the BGM itself.
The sound output LSI 403 is instructed to mute the BGM so that no sound is output. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2410, the MPU 402 performs steps S2403 and S2407.
Alternatively, the reproduction (output) and light emission of the sound data read out in step S2408 is started. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data that started reading in step S2403, step S2407, or step S2408, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the speaker unit 26D, or the speaker unit 26E. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C, the speaker unit 26D, or the speaker unit 26E notify an abnormality (for example, "The door was opened while the power was off!" at the time of power recovery, and "The door was opened during the power shutdown!" It is open!” and the output of a warning sound) is started. Also, the MPU 402 performs steps S2403 and S2407.
Alternatively, the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error display lamp unit 24 are caused to emit light based on the program, processing data, and light emission data read out in step S2408.
Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, the light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished, so the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S2411, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit open command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402
It is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to the back pack unit open command is stored in the various flag storage area of M413. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2411 that the back pack unit open command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S2413. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2411 that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), in step S2412 the MPU 40
2 is a speaker portion 26D (when the front door frame 14 is opened) or a speaker portion 26E (inner frame 1
3 is opened) is output from the abnormal notification (“Door is open!” for normal notification)
, etc. and warning sound output) is instructed to the sound output LSI 403 to decrease the reproduction volume. The sound output LSI 403 performs control to reduce the reproduction volume of an abnormality notification output from the speaker section 26D or the speaker section 26E based on an instruction from the MPU 402 .

In step S2413, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received a door open notification cancel command for canceling the door open notification transmitted from the MPU 302. FIG. Specifically, MP
U402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the door open notification cancellation command is stored in various flag storage areas of RAM413. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2411 that the door open notification cancel command has not been received (NO), it ends the abnormality notification processing without executing the processing after step S2414.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S2413 that it has received the door open notification cancel command (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the door open notification cancel command to the display control device 500 in step S2414. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is canceled based on the received door open notification cancellation command, and the normal state is restored.
In step S2415, the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification from the speaker unit 26D or the speaker unit 26E based on the door open notification cancellation command (for example, when power is restored, "The door was opened while the power was off!", If it is a normal time, stop the output of the voice such as "The door is open!" and the warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification cancellation command.
In step S2415, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read out and reproduce the voice data "The door is closed!" stored in the common ROM 404. FIG. The sound output LSI 403 reads the voice data "The door is closed!" from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the sound "The door is closed!" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2416, the MPU 402 stores information in the RAM based on the door open notification cancellation command.
The flags corresponding to the power restoration notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas 413 are cleared, in other words, the flag values are set to zero. In step S2417, MP
U402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM that was stopped or muted in step S2409. The sound output LSI 403 resumes reproduction of BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402 . Here, if the BGM has been stopped in step S2409, the MPU 402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413,
By instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the GM, the reproduction is restarted from the position where the BGM was stopped. Also, if the BGM is muted in step S2409, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM.
Unmute the BGM to the sound output LSI 403 and output the BGM from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
is output. After that, the MPU 402 terminates the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2409, the BGM (including music and sound for production) is stopped or muted. A process of lowering the reproduction volume to a predetermined value may be performed immediately. In this case, in step S2409, step S2403, step S2407 or S2
When playing back (outputting) the sound data read out in 408, the playback volume of the voice or warning sound may be gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. Furthermore, step S2
In step S2415, if the process of decreasing the volume gradually or step by step is being performed while the BGM is being played without stopping, the playback volume of the abnormality notification from the speaker unit D or the speaker unit 26E is reduced in step S2415. is decreased gradually or step by step until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and in step S2417, when resuming the playback of the BGM, the playback volume of the BGM is gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. can be By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform notification without causing a sense of incongruity caused by suddenly stopping the BGM and replacing it with a warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of incongruity due to the change to BGM.

In the above description, it is determined in step S2411 whether or not the back pack unit open command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), the process of step S2412 is executed. Then, speaker section D or speaker section 2
It is configured to reduce the reproduction volume of the warning sound, etc., from 6E. This is because the back pack unit 15 must be opened after the inner frame 13 is opened, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15. There is a high possibility that the opening is due to maintenance, etc., rather than a so-called goto act to obtain an illegal profit by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside, and that the back pack unit 15 is opened to perform maintenance, etc. Since it takes time to do so, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the back pack unit open command is received, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is opened. In this case, the warning sound, etc. is reduced (2
step control). As a result, there is no need to listen to a loud warning sound indefinitely during maintenance, etc., which requires time, and the possibility that a player playing a game in the next seat or a maintenance worker will be bothered by the abnormality warning sound is further reduced. Since the opening of the back pack unit 15 is not due to maintenance or the like, but may be due to fraud, it is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like. It should be noted that the processing of steps S2411 and S2412 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with the back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15. - 特許庁

[Modification of Second Embodiment]
The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment includes the speaker section 26D for notifying that the front door frame 14 is opened. It may be used not only as a part but also as a shared speaker part with the speaker part 26A.
FIG. 59 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a modified example of the second embodiment. When the speaker unit 26D is used not only as a speaker unit for notifying that the front door frame 14 is opened, but also as a speaker unit for the speaker unit 26A, as shown in FIG. 59, the front door frame 14 is closed ( The sound reproduced by the speaker part 26D can be controlled by providing an opening 14c having a plurality of through holes in the area of the front door frame 14 (mesh part in FIG. 59) facing the speaker part 26D when closed). It is preferable to make it difficult to attenuate.

FIG. 60 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between the DAC and the speaker section provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine according to the modification of the present embodiment.
In the modification of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. and three amplifier circuits 403d2a, 403d2d and 403d2e. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker sections 26B and 26C, and the amplified signal is output to the amplifier circuit 403d2d.
The amplified analog signal is output to the speaker section 26D, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2e is output to the speaker section 26E.

58, when the front door frame 14 is opened, the abnormality notification is performed from the speaker unit 26D. The parameters of the program and processing data stored in the ROM 412 for executing the abnormality notification process are specified so that the amplification factor of the circuit 403d2d becomes a predetermined value. The parameters of the program and processing data stored in the ROM 412 for executing the abnormality notification process are defined so that the reproduction volume becomes zero and the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2e become zero. ing.

Note that the reproduction of the speaker units 26B, 26C, and 26E may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26B, 26C, and 26E becomes zero. In the case of muting, an output short type circuit that short-circuits (connects to GND) the outputs of the amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2e may be used. It may be a circuit of the type.

58, when the inner frame 13 is open, the abnormality notification is performed from the speaker unit 26E. 403d2e, the amplification factor of 403d2e becomes a predetermined value. Amplifier circuit 4 so that the volume becomes zero
The parameters of the program and processing data stored in the ROM 412 for executing the abnormality notification process are defined so that the amplification factor of the 03d2a and the amplification circuit 403d2d becomes zero.

The reproduction of the speaker units 26B, 26C, and 26D may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26B, 26C, and 26D becomes zero. In the case of muting, an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the outputs of the amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2d may be used. It may be a type circuit.

In this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the notification process for power recovery and the notification process for normal time, in the notification process for normal time, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, , The indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light, but while using the same light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal notification process, in the normal notification process,
The power supply for light emission to the light emitters of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B may be stopped so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and hold different light emission data for the notification process for power restoration and the notification process for normal time, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

Also, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, the display lamp device 23A
, 23B, preferably the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14, may be configured not to emit light. In this case also, the light emission data for the normal time notification process may be defined so that the display lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light. A configuration may be adopted in which the supply of power for light emission to the light emitter of the display lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 is stopped. In this way, the pachinko machine 10, in the normal time notification process, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, the display lamp device 23A
, 23B are configured so as not to emit light, the possibility that a player playing a game at an adjacent seat will be bothered by the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat loses the exhilaration and immersion and loses interest.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes a first frame (inner frame 13) that is openable and closable with respect to a fixed frame (outer frame 11) and a second frame that is openable and closable with respect to the first frame. (front door frame 14), a first acoustic device (speaker sections 26D and 26E) provided on the first frame, and a plurality of second acoustic devices (speaker sections 26A to 26C) provided on the second frame. a detection device (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) for detecting the opening of the first and second frames; and when the detection device detects the opening of the first frame or the second frame. Anomaly reporting means (MP
U402, and a sound output LSI 403). That is, the first acoustic device is provided on the first frame and does not rotate together with the opened second frame. Therefore, the abnormality notification sound from the first acoustic device is not output to the player playing the game in the adjacent seat. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player will be bothered by the anomaly notification sound. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine being played due to an abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine are lost. This reduces the risk of disappointing people.

(2) The detection device (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) of the pachinko machine 10 includes the first frame (
A first detection device (second monitoring device 290) that detects opening of the inner frame 13) and a second detection device (first monitoring device 250) that detects opening of the second frame (front door frame 14) Prepare. Therefore, even when either of the first and second frames is opened, the opening can be detected and an abnormality can be notified.

(3) The first frame (inner frame 13) of the pachinko machine 10 is a game board (a game board 81
), and the first audio device (speaker units 26D and 26E) is provided on the game board of the first frame (inner frame 13). For this reason, the degree of freedom of the arrangement position (layout) of the first acoustic device is improved. Also, since it is attached to the game board, it is easy to attach the first acoustic device.

[Third embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more notification sounds from the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened. By making the volume smaller than the volume of the notification sound reproduced by other audio devices (in the first embodiment, the volume reproduced by the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing in the adjacent seat is not annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I am trying to reduce the fear of thinking. In this embodiment, the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14
is provided with a cover member that attenuates the notification sound when notifying that the is opened, and the cover member reduces the reproduction volume of the notification sound of any one or more of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C to another sound device A pachinko machine 10 in which the possibility that a player playing a game at an adjacent seat is annoyed by an abnormal notification sound is reduced by setting the reproduction volume of the notification sound to be smaller than the volume of the notification sound. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described below, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description will be omitted.

<Schematic configuration of speaker unit and cover member provided in gaming machine>
FIG. 61 is a schematic configuration diagram of the speaker section 26A and the cover member 27 provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 61(a) shows a state where the speaker section 26A is not covered by the cover member 27 (hereinafter 61(b) is a front view of a state in which the speaker section 26A is covered with the cover member 27 (hereinafter also referred to as a second state), and FIG. 61(c) is a front view of , and FIG. 61(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX in FIG. 61(b), and a cross-sectional view taken along the line YY in FIG. 61(b).

When attached to the pachinko machine 10, the cover member 27 includes a plate-like first member 27a (surface member) facing the speaker section 26A, and a bottom side to a back side (back side) of the first member 27a.
A plate-shaped second member 27b (lower side member) extending in the direction toward the back side) and a plate-like second member 27b (lower side member) extending in the direction toward the back side (back side) from the upper side of the first member 27a and facing the second member 27b and a plate-shaped third member 27c (upper side member) extending from the left side of the first member 27a toward the rear side (back side), and connecting the left sides of the second member 27b and the third member 27c to each other. Plate-shaped fourth member 27d to be connected
(left side member) and a box-shaped member with an open right side. Moreover, the cover member 2
A second member 27b of 7 is provided with a slide gear 27e that meshes with a driving gear 30a of a cover member driving section 30, which will be described later.

An origin projection 27f1 for the origin detection sensor 28 is provided at the left end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27, and a projection for the maximum point detection sensor 29 is provided at the right end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27. is provided with a maximum point projection 27f2. Here, the origin detection sensor 28 is provided at the position of the origin projection 27f1 of the second member 27b of the cover member 27 when the cover member 27 is in the first state (origin position). Further, at the position of the maximum point projection 27f2 of the second member 27b of the cover member 27 when the cover member 27 is in the second state (maximum point position),
A maximum point detection sensor 29 is provided.

In the present embodiment, a rack-and-opinion system is adopted as a configuration for driving the cover member 27. The cover member 27 is placed near the cover member 27, and the speaker section 26A is covered by the cover member 27. A cover member driving section 30 is provided for changing between a first state (origin position) in which the speaker section 26A is not closed and a second state (maximum point position) in which the speaker section 26A is covered by the cover member 27.
The cover member drive unit 30 includes a cover member drive motor (not shown) and a drive gear 30a which is a gear. When the cover member drive motor is driven, the cover member drive unit 30 meshes with the slide gear 27e of the cover member 27. The drive gear 30a rotates to drive the cover member 27, and the cover member 2
The position of 7 changes between a first state and a second state.

The cover member driving motor is, for example, a stepping motor, and is driven by a pulse signal applied from a driver (not shown) to drive and rotate the driving gear 30a at a predetermined step angle. In addition, instead of a stepping motor, a DC motor with an encoder that detects the amount of rotation is used.
A motor or the like may be used. The cover member 27 can be manufactured at a lower cost than a stepping motor.
drive mechanism can be configured.

The slide gear 27e is tooth-cut on the second member of the cover member 27, is meshed with the drive gear 30a, and is capable of reciprocating in the left-right direction as the drive gear 30a rotates. . Therefore, by rotating the drive gear 30a step by step by the motor for driving the cover member, the slide gear 27e is moved in the left-right direction in step units.
Along with this, the cover member 27 can be driven in the range from the origin position to the maximum point position.

Two rib portions 14b1 and 14b2 are formed on the right side of the speaker portion 26A of the front door frame 14 so as to protrude toward the front side. The two rib portions 14b1 and 14b2 are spaced apart by a width slightly wider than the outer diameter of the speaker portion 26A. These two rib portions 14b1 and 14b2 cooperate with the cover member 27 to guide the reproduced sound output from the speaker portion 26A to the opening portion 14d formed on the right side surface of the front door frame 14. function as That is, in the first state in which the speaker section 26A is not covered by the cover member 27, the reproduced sound output from the speaker section 26A is transmitted from the front door frame 14 through the opening 14c provided on the front side of the front door frame 14. emitted forward. On the other hand, in the second state in which the speaker section 26A is covered by the cover member 27, the reproduced sound output from the speaker section 26A passes through the guide path 14e formed by the cover member 27 and the rib sections 14b1 and 14b2.
to the opening 14d formed in the right side surface of the front door frame 14, and radiated from the opening 14d of the front door frame 14 toward the right side of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG.

<Schematic configuration of origin detection sensor>
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of an origin detection sensor.
Next, referring to FIG. 62, the configuration of the origin detection sensor 28 will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the origin detection sensor 28. As shown in FIG. Note that the maximum point detection sensor 29 has the same configuration as the origin detection sensor 28, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The origin detection sensor 28 has a light emitting element mounting portion 28a to which a light emitting element (not shown) is mounted.
, a light-receiving element mounting portion 28b to which a light-receiving element (not shown) is mounted, and a light-emitting element mounting portion 2
8a and one end of the light-receiving element mounting portion 28b, and a connecting portion 28c that connects the light-emitting element and the light-receiving element so that they are arranged facing each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. , the light emitting element mounting portion 28a, the light receiving element mounting portion 28b and the connecting portion 28c form a detection groove 28d.

When there is no insert (origin projection 27f1) in the detection groove 28d, the light emitting element mounting portion 28a
The light emitted from the light emitting element attached to is received by the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element attachment portion 28b as it is. On the other hand, when an insert is inserted into the detection groove 28d,
Light emitted from the light-emitting element attached to the light-emitting element mounting portion 28a is blocked, and the light-receiving element attached to the light-receiving element mounting portion 28b cannot receive the light. The origin detection sensor 28 is
By outputting an off signal when light is received by the light receiving element and an on signal when light is not received, in the sound light emission control device 400 receiving the signal, it is possible to determine whether an object has been inserted into the detection groove 28d. can decide whether or not

The origin detection sensor 28 has a light-emitting element mounting portion 28a on the front side in a front view, and a light-receiving element mounting portion 2 on the front side.
8b is located on the rear side when viewed from the front, the connecting portion 28c is located on the lower side when viewed from the front, the cover member 27 is at the origin position, and the origin projection 27f1 provided at the left end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27 is the detection groove. By being inserted into the inside of 28d, it is mounted so that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked. Therefore, when the origin detection sensor 28 detects that the light emitted from the light-emitting element to the light-receiving element is blocked, by outputting an ON signal from the origin detection sensor 28, the audio light emission control device 400 can It can be determined that the cover member 27 has reached the origin position.

The maximum point detection sensor 29 is arranged in the same direction as the origin detection sensor 28, the cover member 27 is at the maximum point position, and the maximum point projection provided on the right end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27 27f2 is inserted into the detection groove of the maximum point detection sensor 29 so as to block the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element. For this reason,
By outputting an ON signal from the maximum point detection sensor 29 when the maximum point detection sensor 29 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the audio light emission control device 400 It can be determined that the cover member 27 has reached the maximum point position.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device and Display Control Device>
FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment includes the origin detection sensor 28 and the maximum point detection sensor 29 . The origin detection sensor 28 and the maximum point detection sensor 29 are connected to the input ports of the sound emission control board 401 , and the ON signals output from the origin detection sensor 28 and the maximum point detection sensor 29 are sent to the sound emission control board 401 . is entered. The MPU 402 is in a state (first state) in which the cover member 27 is at the origin position, in other words, the speaker section 26A is not covered by the cover member 27 by the ON signals output from the origin detection sensor 28 and the maximum point detection sensor 29. or whether the cover member 27 is at the maximum position, in other words, whether the speaker section 26A is covered by the cover member 27 (second state).

Also, the cover member driving section 30 is connected to the output port of the sound emission control board 401 . The cover member driving section 30 drives the cover member 27 between the origin position and the maximum point position based on the control signal from the MPU 402 input via the output port of the sound emission control board 401, and the speaker section 26A is activated. A first state in which the cover member 27 is not covered and a second state in which the speaker section 26A is covered by the cover member 27 are changed.

In this embodiment, since the reproduced sound output from the speaker section 26A is attenuated by the cover member 27, unlike the first embodiment, the DAC 403 stored in the ROM 412
The value of the parameter that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit provided in d does not differ between the speaker section 26A and the speaker sections 26B and 26C. In other words, the value of the parameter that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the DAC 403d stored in the ROM 412 is the value of the speaker unit 2.
6A to 26C have the same value.

<Connection relationship between DAC and speaker unit provided in sound output LSI>
FIG. 64 shows the DAC 40 included in the sound output LSI 403 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment.
3d and speaker units 26A to 26C are conceptual diagrams for explaining connection relationships.
In the example shown in FIG. 64, the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and an amplifier circuit 403d2a that amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. Here, the amplifier circuit 403d2
The analog signal amplified by a is output to speaker units 26A to 26C.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in order to attenuate the reproduced sound output from the speaker section 26A by the cover member 27, the analog signal output to the speaker sections 26A to 26C can be amplified by the common amplifier circuit 403d2. , the speaker unit 26A as in the first embodiment
There is no need to prepare a different amplifier circuit for ~26C. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (operational amplifiers) can be reduced, and since there is no need to perform control for each of a plurality of amplifier circuits, the arithmetic processing load of the MPU 402 can be reduced.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the common amplifier circuit 403d2 amplifies the analog signals to be output to the speaker units 26A to 26C, the program for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412 and the There is no need to prepare parameter data defining the reproduction volume of the processing data for each of the speaker sections 26A to 26C for each of the speaker sections 26A to 26C.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the opening of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is detected by the first and second monitoring devices 250 and 290, one or more of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C ( In this embodiment, the speaker section 26A) or the cover member 27 provided in the vicinity thereof changes from the first state to the second state. Therefore, the abnormality notification sound output forward from the speaker portion 26A is attenuated by the cover member 27 and becomes small. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player playing a game in the adjacent seat will be bothered by the abnormal notification sound. Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 which is playing
Since it is possible to prevent the music and voices output from 0 from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, there is a risk that the player will lose interest due to the loss of exhilaration and immersion caused by the music and voices output from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加reduced.

<Regarding Abnormal Notification Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process. Sound emission control device 400
The MPU 402 of , when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, executes abnormality notification processing in order to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and description of other abnormality notification will be omitted.

In step S2501, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 413
determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the command for notifying when power is restored is stored in the various flag storage areas. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2501 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S2504. Also, M
If the PU 402 determines in step S2501 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), it transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2502. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores a data table in the program ROM 512 for executing the power recovery notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from various data storage areas in Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the display for notifying when the power is restored based on the command for notifying when the power is restored which is transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S2503, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program and processing data, light emission data, and sound data for notifying when power is restored from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power restoration is performed in a closed (closed) state of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 . That is, since the front door frame 14 is not opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, there is little possibility that the player playing in the adjacent seat will feel annoyed by the abnormal notification. For this reason, the MPU 402 performs the abnormality notification without driving the cover member 27 from the origin position to the maximum point position when the power is restored. In other words, M
The PU 402 makes an abnormality notification in the first state in which the speaker section 26A is not covered by the cover member 27 . As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker unit 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is transmitted to the front door frame 1.
It will be in a state of being emitted toward the front of 4.

In step S2504, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 413
It is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to the normal notification command is stored in the various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2504 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), it executes the processes after step S2510, which will be described later.
If the MPU 402 determines in step S2504 that the normal time notification command has been received (YES), in step S2505, the MPU 402 controls the cover member driving section 30 to shift the position of the cover member 27 from the origin position. Drive to the maximum point position. In other words, MP
U402 controls the cover member driving section 30 to change the first state in which the speaker section 26A is not covered by the cover member 27 to the second state in which the speaker section 26A is covered by the cover member 27. FIG. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker portion 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG.

In step S<b>2506 , the MPU 402 transmits a normal notification command to the display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received normal time notification command.
Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S2507, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the normal time notification program, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and common ROM. Here, light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, at the time of normal notification, the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B
is stopped.

In step S2508, the MPU 402 performs processing for stopping BGM (including music and voice for presentation). In this BGM stop processing, the BG being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C
Perform processing to stop or mute M. When stopping the BGM, the MPU 402 causes the RAM 413 to store the address of the data for stopping the reproduction of the BGM in order to restart the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is cancelled. When restarting BGM playback when the door open notification is canceled, MP
The U402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts playing the BGM from that address, thereby restarting the playing of the BGM from the position where it was stopped.
Also, when muting the BGM, the MPU 402 does not stop the playback of the BGM itself.
The sound output LSI 403 is instructed to mute the BGM so that no sound is output. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2509, the MPU 402 performs step S2503 or step S250.
At 7, reproduction (output) of the sound data read out and light emission are started. Specifically, MP
U402 outputs the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data read out in step S2503 or S2507, and sound data as sound output LS
The register 403b of I403 is set, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C notify the abnormality (for example, when the power is restored, a voice such as "The door was opened while the power was off!" and output of warning sound) is started. Also, MPU40
2 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp section 24 to emit light based on the program, processing data and light emission data read out in step S2503 or S2507. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, the light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished.
A and 23B stop emitting light.

In step S2510, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit open command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402
It is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to the back pack unit open command is stored in the various flag storage area of M413. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2510 that the back pack unit open command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S2512. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2510 that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), in step S2511 the MPU 40
2 is a sound output LSI 403 so as to reduce the playback volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C (output of normal notification sounds such as "The door is open!" and warning sounds).
to. The sound output LSI 403 outputs the speaker unit 2 based on the instruction from the MPU 402.
Control is performed to reduce the reproduction volume of anomaly information output from 6A to 26C.

Here, the control to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S2511 may be controlled to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C. Of the parts 26A to 26C, only a specific speaker part, for example, the speaker part 26A, which is closest to the ears of the player playing in the seat on the left side when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, is reduced in volume. can be controlled to In step S1610, when controlling the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to be small, the sound output LSI 403 sets the parameters that define the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to the back pack unit 15. update to the parameters of the case, and the speaker unit 26
By reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits A to 26C, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced. When performing control so as to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker section 26A. (In this case, the speaker section 26A is provided with a dedicated amplifier circuit).

In step S2512, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received a door open notification cancel command for canceling the door open notification transmitted from the MPU 302. FIG. Specifically, MP
U402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the door open notification cancellation command is stored in various flag storage areas of RAM413. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2512 that the door open notification cancellation command has not been received (NO), it ends the abnormality notification processing without executing the processing after step S2513.
If the MPU 402 determines in step S2512 that the door open notification cancel command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 controls the cover member driving section 30 in step S2513 so that the position of the cover member 27 is changed. is driven from the maximum point position to the origin position. In other words, the MPU 402 controls the cover member driving section 30 to operate the speaker section 26
A is changed from the second state in which A is covered by the cover member 27 to the first state in which the speaker section 26A is not covered by the cover member 27 . As a result, the speaker section 26A
, i.e., an abnormality notification is radiated forward of the front door frame 14 .

In step S<b>2514 , the MPU 402 transmits a door open notification cancellation command to the display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is canceled based on the received door open notification cancellation command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S2515, the MPU 402 issues an abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door open notification cancellation command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was off!" If so, stop the output of the voice such as "The door is open!" and the warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification cancellation command.
In step S2515, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read out and reproduce the voice data "The door is closed!" stored in the common ROM 404. FIG. The sound output LSI 403 reads the voice data "The door is closed!" from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the sound "The door is closed!" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2516, the MPU 402 stores information in the RAM based on the door open notification cancellation command.
The flags corresponding to the power restoration notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas 413 are cleared, in other words, the flag values are set to zero. In step S2517, MP
U402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM that was stopped or muted in step S2508. The sound output LSI 403 resumes reproduction of BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402 . Here, if the BGM is stopped in step S2508, the MPU 402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413,
By instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the GM, the reproduction is restarted from the position where the BGM was stopped. Also, if the BGM is muted in step S2508, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM.
Unmute the BGM to the sound output LSI 403 and output the BGM from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
is output. After that, the MPU 402 terminates the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2508, the BGM (including the music and sound for production) is stopped or muted. A process of lowering the reproduction volume to a predetermined value may be performed immediately. In this case, in step S2509, when playing back (outputting) the sound data whose reading was started in step S2503 or step S2507, processing is performed so that the playback volume of the voice or warning sound is gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. You may Further, in step S2508, if the volume is decreased gradually or in stages while the BGM is being played without stopping, then in step S2515, the anomaly notification is played back from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The volume is gradually decreased or stepwise decreased until the volume reaches zero or approximately zero, and in step S2517, when the BGM playback is restarted, the BGM playback volume is gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform notification without causing a sense of incongruity caused by suddenly stopping the BGM and replacing it with a warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of incongruity due to the change to BGM.

In the above description, it is determined in step S2510 whether or not the back pack unit open command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), the process of step S2511 is executed. Then, the reproduction volume of the warning sound or the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must be opened after the inner frame 13 is opened, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15. There is a high possibility that the opening is due to maintenance, etc., rather than a so-called goto act to obtain an illegal profit by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside, and that the back pack unit 15 is opened to perform maintenance, etc. Since it takes time to do so, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the back pack unit open command is received, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is opened. In such a case, a configuration (two-stage control) is adopted in which the warning sound or the like is reduced. As a result, there is no need to hear a loud warning sound indefinitely during time-consuming maintenance or the like, and the possibility that a player playing a game in the next seat will be bothered by the abnormal warning sound is further reduced. Since the opening of the back pack unit 15 is not due to maintenance or the like, but may be due to fraud, it is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like. Note that steps S2510 and S2
The processing of 511 may not be performed, in other words, the configuration may be such that it is not determined whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control is performed). In this case, pachinko machine 1
0 does not need to be provided with the back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15 .

In the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side of the inner frame 13 with the left side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 supports the left side of the outer frame 11. It is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 as the support side. When the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened, they are opened by rotating forward (toward the player) with the supporting side as the rotation axis. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, it opens so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player who plays in the seat next to the left. closest to the ear. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the second state in which the speaker section 26A is covered with the cover member 27 is set when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 is supported on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the supporting side. When supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, the door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent right seat. , and the speaker section 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. In this case, the cover member 27, the cover member drive unit 30, the origin detection sensor 28, and the maximum point detection sensor 29 are provided in the vicinity of the speaker unit 26B, and the rib portions 14b1 and 14 that constitute the guideway 14e.
b2 is formed so that the speaker section 26B is in the second state covered with the cover member 27 when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified. In this case, an opening 14d is formed in the left side surface of the front door frame 14 so that the notification sound is emitted from the left side surface of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the front door frame 14 is supported on both sides of the inner frame 13 with the right side and left side (hereinafter also referred to as both sides) of the inner frame 13 as supporting sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11. is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double-opening structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected. the first monitoring device 2
50 and a second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 1
3 is provided with a detector for detecting which side is opened, and based on the detection result of this detector, either the speaker section 26A or the speaker section 26B is covered with the cover member 27 to enter the second state. It may be configured as

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 has been opened with the left side as the support side, the door frame 13 is positioned so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the left. As a result, the speaker section 26A comes closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent left seat. For this reason, when notifying an abnormality that the door is open, the speaker section 26A is in the second state covered with the cover member 27, and an alarm sound and voice are reproduced to notify the abnormality.
Also, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the support side, it opens so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the right. , the speaker unit 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. For this reason, when notifying an abnormality that the door is open, the speaker section 26B is in the second state covered with the cover member 27, and an alarm sound and a voice for notifying the abnormality may be reproduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the guide path 14e is formed on the right side of the speaker portion 26A, and the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker portion 26A is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14, but the speaker portion The direction in which the abnormality notification sound reproduced by 26A is radiated may be any direction other than the front surface of the front door frame 14. For example, the guide path 14e is formed above the speaker section 26A and reproduced by the speaker section 26A. A configuration may be adopted in which the abnormality notification sound is radiated toward the upper side of the front door frame 14 . When the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the supporting side, the guide path 14e is formed on the left side of the speaker section 26B, and the abnormality notification sound is reproduced by the speaker section 26B. A guide path 14e may be formed above the speaker section 26B so that the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker section 26B is radiated toward the upper side of the front door frame 14. It may be configured to be

In addition, in this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the notification process for power recovery and the notification process for normal time, in the normal time notification process, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, , The indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light, but while using the same light emission data in the notification process for power recovery and the notification process for normal time, in the notification process for normal time,
The power supply for light emission to the light emitters of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B may be stopped so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and hold different light emission data for the notification process for power restoration and for the notification process for normal time, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

Also, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, the display lamp device 23A
, 23B, preferably the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14, may be configured not to emit light. In this case also, the light emission data for the normal time notification process may be defined so that the display lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light. A configuration may be adopted in which the supply of power for light emission to the light emitter of the display lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 is stopped. In this way, the pachinko machine 10, in the normal time notification process, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, the display lamp device 23A
, 23B are configured so as not to emit light, the possibility that a player playing a game at an adjacent seat will be bothered by the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat loses the exhilaration and immersion and loses interest.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes a frame (inner frame 1
3, the front door frame 14), a plurality of sound devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) provided in the frame, and detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) that detect opening of the frame. , an abnormality notification means (MPU) for notifying an abnormality from a plurality of sound devices when the opening of the frame is detected by the detection device;
402, sound output LSI 403), and a cover member (cover member (cover member 27), and driving means (cover member driving section 30) for changing the cover member from the first state to the second state when the detecting device detects the opening of the frame.
Therefore, the abnormality notification sound output forward from the acoustic device (speaker portion 26A) is attenuated and reduced by the cover member (cover member 27). As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player playing a game in the adjacent seat will be bothered by the abnormal notification sound. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine being played due to an abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine are lost. This reduces the risk of disappointing people.

(2) When the pachinko machine 10 is in the second state covering the sound device (speaker section 26A), the abnormality notification sound output from the sound device (speaker section 26A or speaker sections 26B and 26C) is set to the frame body (inner frame 13. It has a guideway (14b) that guides in a direction other than the front of the front door frame 14).
For this reason, when the cover member (cover member 27) is in the second state covering the sound device, the abnormality notification sound output from the sound device is guided by the guideway in a direction other than the front of the frame, for example, the pachinko machine 10 side. direction (side surface side), upward (top side), and downward (bottom side). Therefore, when the frame body of the pachinko machine 10 is opened, the possibility that the player positioned in front of the player will be disturbed by the abnormal notification sound is reduced. In addition, since the induced anomaly notification sound is output from a direction other than the front of the frame, it is possible to reduce the risk that the hall operator or employees will miss the anomaly notification.

(3) The frame (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10 is supported on either the right side or the left side of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with either the right side or the left side as the supporting side. The cover member (cover member 27) is arranged on a side of a plurality of sound devices (speaker portions 26A to 26C) different from the support side (speaker portion 26A or speaker portions 26B, 26C) or its located nearby. Therefore, the side different from the supporting side of the frame, in other words,
When the frame is opened, the cover member 27 reduces the sound volume of the sound device arranged on the side closer to the player sitting next to the player. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively reduce the annoyance of the anomaly notification sound to the player sitting in the adjacent seat. In addition, the music and voice output from the game machine you are playing,
It is possible to more effectively suppress difficulty in hearing due to the abnormality notification, and further reduce the possibility that the player loses interest due to the loss of exhilaration and immersion caused by music and voice output from the game machine.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more notification sounds from the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened. By making the volume smaller than the volume of the notification sound reproduced by other audio devices (in the first embodiment, the volume reproduced by the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing in the adjacent seat is not annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I am trying to reduce the fear of thinking. In this embodiment, the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14
When notifying that the is opened, by changing the direction of the speaker section, the radiation direction of the reproduced sound output from one or more of the plurality of speaker sections 26A to 26C is changed. A pachinko machine 10 that reduces the possibility that a player playing a game in an adjacent seat will be bothered by an abnormal notification sound will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described below, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description will be omitted.

<Schematic configuration of speaker unit and cover member provided in gaming machine>
FIG. 66 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line ZZ in FIG. 66, and shows a schematic configuration diagram showing the speaker section provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment and its peripheral structure. FIG. 67(a) shows the speaker section 26
A is a partially cross-sectional plan view showing the first state in which A faces the front of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 67(b) shows the direction of the speaker section 26A from the front to the right side of the pachinko machine 10 (front door frame 14). FIG. 67(c) is a partial cross-sectional plan view showing a state in the middle of changing, and FIG.
It is a partially cross-sectional plan view showing a second state facing the right side of the front door frame 14). Speaker section 2
6A, as shown in FIG. 67, includes cone paper 26a and cone paper vibrating section 26b, and is configured to be rotatable about rotating shaft 26c by speaker section driving section 26d.

When the game is played without any abnormality or when the abnormality is notified when the power is restored, FIG. 67 (
As shown in a), the speaker portion 26A has the cone paper 26a in front of the front door frame 14 (front side).
through the opening 14c formed in the region on the front side of the front door frame 14 facing the speaker portion 26A, BGM, sound effects, and anomaly notifications (for example, "Power off The door has been opened inside!” etc.) is output toward the front of the front door frame 14 (player).

On the other hand, in the normal time abnormality notification, the normal time notification command indicating that is sent to the main controller 300
to the sound emission control device 400. The sound emission control device 400 outputs a signal for generating an abnormality notification to the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the reception of the normal time notification command, and outputs a drive signal to the speaker unit driving unit 26d, Speaker section 2
6A is rotated counterclockwise (CCW) around the rotation shaft 26c and controlled to face the right side of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the speaker section 26A
It rotates counterclockwise around the rotating shaft 26c, and finally, as shown in FIG. is turned to the right side (second state). In this state, a normal notification (for example, "The door is open while the power is off!" 14 is output toward the right side (the direction away from the player).

Here, the speaker section driving section 26d is composed of, for example, a stepping motor, and is driven by a pulse signal applied from a driver (not shown) to drive and rotate the speaker section 26A at a predetermined step angle. A DC motor or the like with an encoder for detecting the amount of rotation may be used instead of the stepping motor. A drive mechanism for the speaker section 26A can be configured at a lower cost than a stepping motor.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment, a speaker portion 26A is formed on the right side of the speaker portion 26A of the front door frame 14 so as to protrude toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Two rib portions are formed, and the reproduced sound output from the speaker portion 26A is transmitted to the front door frame 1.
4 may be provided with a guiding path leading to the opening 14d formed on the right side of the device. By providing the guide path in this way, it is possible to reduce the component radiated to the front side of the front door frame 14 in the reproduced sound output from the speaker section 26A in normal abnormality notification.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device and Display Control Device>
FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the speaker drive section 26d that changes the direction of the speaker section 26A.
The speaker unit driving unit 26d is connected to the output port of the sound emission control board 401. FIG. The speaker unit driving unit 26d receives the MP input via the output port of the sound emission control board 401.
Based on the control signal from U402, the orientation of the speaker section 26A is changed between a first state facing the front of the front door frame 14 and a second state facing away from the front of the front door frame 14. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the direction of the speaker portion 26A is changed from the first state in which the speaker portion driving portion 26d faces the front of the front door frame 14 to the second state in which the direction of the speaker portion 26A faces away from the front of the front door frame 14. , different from the first embodiment, the parameter value that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit provided in the DAC 403d stored in the ROM 412 is the speaker unit 26A, the speaker unit 26B, and the speaker unit 26B.
26C does not have a different value. In other words, the DAC stored in ROM 412
403d is equipped with a parameter value that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit.
C has the same value.

<Connection relationship between DAC and speaker unit provided in sound output LSI>
The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the speaker section 26A driven by the speaker section driving section 26d.
In order to change the radiation direction of the reproduced sound output from the speaker unit 26A as in the first embodiment,
There is no need to prepare a different amplifier circuit for ~26C. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment described with reference to FIG. A DAC circuit 403d that converts a signal into an analog signal and an amplifier circuit 403d2a that amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d are provided. be. Therefore, unlike the first embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare different amplifier circuits for the speaker units 26A to 26C. This saves expensive amplifier circuits (
The number of operational amplifiers can be reduced, and the load of arithmetic processing on the MPU 402 can be reduced because there is no need to perform control for each of a plurality of amplifier circuits.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the amplification of the analog signals to be output to the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed by the common amplifier circuit 403d2a, the program and processing for executing the abnormality notification processing stored in the ROM 412 It is not necessary to prepare parameter data for each of the speaker sections 26A to 26C that defines the reproduction volume of the data for each of the speaker sections 26A to 26C.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the opening of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is detected by the first and second monitoring devices 250 and 290, the plurality of speaker portions 26A are controlled by the speaker portion driving portion 26d.
26C (speaker part 26A in this embodiment)
4 is changed from the first state facing forward to the second state facing other than the front of the front door frame 14 (the right side in this embodiment). Therefore, the abnormality notification sound is not output to the player positioned in front of the frame, in other words, to the player playing in the adjacent seat. As a result, the possibility that the player will be bothered by the anomaly notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine being played due to an abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine are lost. This reduces the risk of disappointing people.

<Regarding Abnormal Notification Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process. Sound emission control device 400
The MPU 402 of , when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, executes abnormality notification processing in order to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and description of other abnormality notification will be omitted.

In step S2601, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 413
determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the command for notifying when power is restored is stored in the various flag storage areas. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2601 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S2604. Also, M
If the PU 402 determines in step S2601 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), it transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2602. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores a data table in the program ROM 512 for executing the power recovery notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from various data storage areas in Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the display for notifying when the power is restored based on the command for notifying when the power is restored which is transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S2603, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program and processing data, light emission data, and sound data for notifying when power is restored from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power restoration is performed in a closed (closed) state of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 . That is, since the front door frame 14 is not opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, there is little possibility that the player playing in the adjacent seat will feel annoyed by the abnormal notification. Therefore, the MPU 402 notifies the abnormality at the time of power recovery without changing the direction of the speaker unit 26A from the first state to the second state. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker portion 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated forward of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG.

In step S2604, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 413
determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the normal notification command is stored in the various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2604 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2610, which will be described later.
If the MPU 402 determines in step S2604 that the normal notification command has been received (YES), in step S2605, the MPU 402 controls the speaker drive unit 26d to direct the speaker unit 26A to the front door frame. 14 is changed to a second state in which the front door frame 14 faces away from the front. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker portion 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG.

In step S<b>2606 , the MPU 402 transmits a normal notification command to the display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received normal time notification command.
Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S2607, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the normal time notification program, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and common ROM. Here, light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, at the time of normal notification, the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B
is stopped.

In step S2608, the MPU 402 performs processing for stopping BGM (including music and voice for presentation). In this BGM stop processing, the BG being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C
Perform processing to stop or mute M. When stopping the BGM, the MPU 402 causes the RAM 413 to store the address of the data for stopping the reproduction of the BGM in order to restart the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is cancelled. When restarting BGM playback when the door open notification is canceled, MP
The U402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts playing the BGM from that address, thereby restarting the playing of the BGM from the position where it was stopped.
Also, when muting the BGM, the MPU 402 does not stop the playback of the BGM itself.
The sound output LSI 403 is instructed to mute the BGM so that no sound is output. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2609, the MPU 402 performs step S2603 or step S260.
At 7, reproduction (output) of the sound data read out and light emission are started. Specifically, MP
U402 outputs the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data read out in step S2603 or step S2607, and sound data as sound output LS
The register 403b of I403 is set, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C notify the abnormality (for example, when the power is restored, a voice such as "The door was opened while the power was off!" and output of warning sound) is started. Also, MPU40
2 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp section 24 to emit light based on the program, processing data and light emission data read out in step S2603 or S2607. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, the light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished.
A and 23B stop emitting light.

At step S2610, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit open command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402
It is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to the back pack unit open command is stored in the various flag storage area of M413. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2610 that the back pack unit open command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S2612. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2610 that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), in step S2611 the MPU 40
2 is a sound output LSI 403 so as to reduce the playback volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C (output of normal notification sounds such as "The door is open!" and warning sounds).
to. The sound output LSI 403 outputs the speaker unit 2 based on an instruction from the MPU 402.
Control is performed to reduce the reproduction volume of anomaly information output from 6A to 26C.

Here, the control to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S2611 may be controlled to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C. Of the parts 26A to 26C, only a specific speaker part, for example, the speaker part 26A, which is closest to the ears of the player playing in the seat on the left side when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, is reduced. can be controlled to In step S2611, when controlling the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to be reduced, the sound output LSI 403 sets the parameters that define the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to the back pack unit 15. update to the parameters of the case, and the speaker unit 26
By reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits A to 26C, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced. When performing control to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker section 26A. to control.

In step S2612, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received a door open notification cancel command for canceling the door open notification transmitted from the MPU 302. FIG. Specifically, MP
U402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the door open notification cancellation command is stored in various flag storage areas of RAM413. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2612 that the door open notification cancellation command has not been received (NO), it ends the abnormality notification processing without executing the processing after step S2613.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S2612 that it has received the door open notification cancel command (YES), the MPU 402 controls the speaker drive unit 26d in step S2613 to open the front door frame 14. From the second state facing other than forward, the speaker unit 2
The orientation of 6A is changed (restored) to the first state in which the front door frame 14 faces forward. This will
A reproduced sound of the speaker portion 26A, that is, an abnormality notification is radiated forward of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG.

In step S<b>2614 , MPU 402 transmits a door open notification cancellation command to display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is canceled based on the received door open notification cancellation command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S2615, the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door open notification cancellation command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was off!" If so, stop the output of the voice such as "The door is open!" and the warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification cancellation command.
In step S2615, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read out and reproduce the voice data "The door is closed!" stored in the common ROM 404. FIG. The sound output LSI 403 reads the voice data "The door is closed!" from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the sound "The door is closed!" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2617, the MPU 402 stores information in the RAM based on the door open notification cancellation command.
The flags corresponding to the power restoration notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas 413 are cleared, in other words, the flag values are set to zero. In step S2618, MP
U402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM that was stopped or muted in step S2608. The sound output LSI 403 restarts reproduction of BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402 . Here, if the BGM is stopped in step S2608, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in the RAM 413,
By instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the GM, the reproduction is restarted from the position where the BGM was stopped. Also, if the BGM is muted in step S2608, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM.
Unmute the BGM to the sound output LSI 403 and output the BGM from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
is output. After that, the MPU 402 terminates the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2608, the BGM (including the music and sound for production) is stopped or muted. Alternatively, a process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value may be performed immediately. In this case, in step S2609, when playing back (outputting) the sound data whose reading was started in step S2603 or step S2607, processing is performed so that the playback volume of the voice or warning sound is gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. You may Further, in step S2608, if the volume is decreased gradually or step by step while the BGM is being played without stopping, then in step S2615, the anomaly notification is played back from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The volume is gradually decreased or stepwise decreased until the volume reaches zero or approximately zero, and in step S2617, when the BGM playback is resumed, the BGM playback volume is gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the user without causing a sense of incongruity due to the sudden stop of the BGM and the change to a warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of incompatibility due to the change to BGM.

In the above description, it is determined in step S2610 whether or not the back pack unit open command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), the process of step S2611 is executed. Then, the reproduction volume of the warning sound or the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must be opened after the inner frame 13 is opened, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15. There is a high possibility that the opening is due to maintenance, etc., rather than a so-called goto act to obtain an illegal profit by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside, and that the back pack unit 15 is opened to perform maintenance, etc. Since it takes time to do so, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the back pack unit open command is received, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is opened. In such a case, a configuration (two-stage control) is adopted in which the warning sound or the like is reduced. As a result, there is no need to hear a loud warning sound indefinitely during time-consuming maintenance or the like, and the possibility that a player playing a game in the next seat will be bothered by the abnormal warning sound is further reduced. Since the opening of the back pack unit 15 is not due to maintenance or the like, but may be due to fraud, it is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like. Note that steps S2610 and S2
The processing of 611 may not be performed, in other words, a configuration may be adopted in which it is not determined whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control is performed). In this case, pachinko machine 1
0 does not need to be provided with the back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15 .

In the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side of the inner frame 13 with the left side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 supports the left side of the outer frame 11. It is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 as the support side. When the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened, they are opened by rotating forward (toward the player) with the supporting side as the rotation axis. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, it opens so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player who plays in the seat next to the left. closest to the ear. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified, the direction of the speaker unit 26A is changed from the first state in which the direction of the speaker unit 26A faces the front of the front door frame 14 to the front of the front door frame 14. It is changed to a second state facing away.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 is supported on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the supporting side. When supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, the door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 should be opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent right seat. , and the speaker section 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. In this case, the orientation of the speaker portion 26B is changed from the first state in which it faces the front of the front door frame 14 to the second state in which it faces away from the front of the front door frame 14 .

In addition, the front door frame 14 is supported on both sides of the inner frame 13 with the right side and left side (hereinafter also referred to as both sides) of the inner frame 13 as supporting sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11. is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double-opening structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected. the first monitoring device 2
50 and a second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 1
3 is opened, and based on the detection result of this detector, the direction of the speaker part 26A or the speaker part 26B is set to the first direction facing the front of the front door frame 14.
The state is changed to a second state in which the front door frame 14 faces away from the front.

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 has been opened with the left side as the support side, the door frame 14 is positioned so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the left. As a result, the speaker section 26A comes closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent left seat. For this reason, when notifying the abnormality that the door is open, the direction of the speaker part 26A is changed from the first state in which it faces the front of the front door frame 14 to the second state in which it faces other than the front of the front door frame 14. change.
Also, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the support side, it opens so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the right. , the speaker unit 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. For this reason, when notifying the abnormality that the door is open, the direction of the speaker part 26B is directed to the front of the front door frame 14.
The state is changed to a second state in which the front door frame 14 faces away from the front.

Further, in this embodiment, by changing the orientation of the speaker portion 26A to the right side of the front door frame 14, the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker portion 26A is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14. However, the direction in which the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker portion 26A is emitted may be any direction other than the front surface of the front door frame 14. For example, the direction of the speaker portion 26A is changed to the upper side of the front door frame 14. By doing so, the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker portion 26A may be radiated toward the upper side of the front door frame 14 . In addition, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the supporting side, by changing the direction of the speaker section 26B to the left side of the front door frame 14, the sound is reproduced by the speaker section 26B. The abnormality notification sound may be emitted toward the left side of the front door frame 14, and by changing the direction of the speaker section 26B to the upper side of the front door frame 14, the abnormality notification sound is reproduced by the speaker section 26B. The configuration may be such that the light is radiated upward from the front door frame 14 .

In this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the notification process for power recovery and the notification process for normal time, in the notification process for normal time, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, , The indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light, but while using the same light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal notification process, in the normal notification process,
The power supply for light emission to the light emitters of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B may be stopped so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and hold different light emission data for the notification process for power restoration and the notification process for normal time, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

Also, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, the display lamp device 23A
, 23B, preferably the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14, may be configured not to emit light. In this case also, the light emission data for the normal time notification process may be defined so that the display lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light. A configuration may be adopted in which the supply of power for light emission to the light emitter of the display lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 is stopped. In this way, the pachinko machine 10, in the normal time notification process, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, the display lamp device 23A
, 23B are configured so as not to emit light, the possibility that a player playing a game at the adjacent seat will be bothered by the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat loses the exhilaration and immersion and loses interest.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes a frame (inner frame 1
3, the front door frame 14), a plurality of sound devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) provided in the frame, and detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) that detect opening of the frame. , an abnormality notification means (MPU) for notifying an abnormality from a plurality of sound devices when the opening of the frame is detected by the detection device;
402, sound output LSI 403), and when the opening of the frame is detected by the detection device, one or more of the plurality of sound devices is oriented forward of the frame from a first state in which one or more of the plurality of sound devices faces forward of the frame. and a driving means (speaker driving section 26d) for changing to the second state facing away from the speaker.
That is, when the opening of the frame is detected by the detection device, the orientation of one or more of the plurality of sound devices changes from the first state to the second state, and the player positioned in front of the frame, In other words, the abnormal annunciation sound is not output to the player playing in the adjacent seat. As a result, the possibility that the player will be bothered by the anomaly notification sound can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine being played due to an abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine are lost. This reduces the risk of disappointing people.

(2) The pachinko machine 10, when the sound device (speaker units 26A to 26C) is in the second state, creates a guideway that guides the abnormality notification sound output from the sound device in a direction other than the front of the frame. Prepare. For this reason, when the sound device is in the second state, the abnormality notification sound output from the sound device is directed by the guide path in a direction other than the front of the frame, for example, the side (side surface side) or the upper side (upper surface side) of the game machine. ) and is guided downward (bottom side). Therefore, when the frame body of the game machine is opened, the possibility that the player positioned in front of the game machine will be disturbed by the abnormal notification sound is reduced. In addition, since the induced anomaly notification sound is output from a direction other than the front of the frame, it is possible to reduce the risk that the hall operator or employees will miss the anomaly notification.

(3) Frame (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of frame (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of pachinko machine 10
is supported on either the right side or the left side of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with one of the right side and the left side as the supporting side, and the drive means (speaker drive part 26d) includes a plurality of sound devices (speakers section 26A to 26C), the acoustic device (speaker section 2
6A or the orientation of the speaker units 26B and 26C). Therefore, it is possible to more effectively reduce the annoyance of the anomaly notification sound to the player sitting in the adjacent seat. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine being played due to abnormal notifications, and the exhilaration and sense of immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine can be suppressed more effectively. This further reduces the risk that the player will be distracted by being caught.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more notification sounds from the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened. By making the volume smaller than the volume of the notification sound reproduced by other audio devices (in the first embodiment, the volume reproduced by the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing in the adjacent seat is not annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I am trying to reduce the fear of thinking. In this embodiment, the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14
When notifying that the is opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sound of the plurality of loudspeakers 26A to 26C is decreased stepwise or gradually. A pachinko machine 10 that reduces the possibility that a player playing a game in an adjacent seat will be bothered by an abnormal notification sound will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described below, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description will be omitted.

<Connection relationship between DAC and speaker unit provided in sound output LSI>
In this embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sound of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced stepwise or gradually.
Unlike the embodiment, the value of the parameter stored in the ROM 412 that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit provided in the DAC 403d does not differ between the speaker section 26A and the speaker sections 26B and 26C. In other words, the values of the parameters stored in the ROM 412 that define the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit provided in the DAC 403d are the same in the speaker units 26A to 26C.

FIG. 70 shows the DAC 40 included in the sound output LSI 403 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment.
3d and speaker units 26A to 26C are conceptual diagrams for explaining connection relationships.
In the example shown in FIG. 70, the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and an amplifier circuit 403d2a that amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. Here, the amplifier circuit 403d2
The analog signal amplified by a is output to speaker units 26A to 26C.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sound of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced stepwise or gradually. Therefore, unlike the first embodiment, different amplifier circuits are not prepared for the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (operational amplifiers) can be reduced, and the arithmetic processing load of the MPU 402 can be reduced because there is no need to control each of a plurality of amplifier circuits.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the common amplifier circuit 403d2a amplifies the analog signals to be output to the speaker units 26A to 26C, the program for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412 and the Speaker units 26A to 26C for processing data
Parameter data defining the reproduction volume in the speaker units 26A to 26C is not prepared for each of the speaker units 26A to 26C.

As described above, in this embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sound of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced stepwise or gradually. As a result, the abnormality notification sound output forward from the speaker units 26A to 26C is decreased stepwise or gradually. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player playing a game in the adjacent seat will be bothered by the abnormal notification sound. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the pachinko machine 10 being played due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersion caused by the music and voices output from the pachinko machine 10 are lost. This reduces the risk that the player will lose interest in the game.

<Regarding the time change of the playback volume of the speaker>
FIG. 71 is a conceptual diagram of temporal changes in the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. As described above, when the MPU 402 of the pachinko machine 10 notifies that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sound of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is gradually or gradually reduced. is controlled to be small. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 71, the reproduction volume of the notification sound of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced at a constant rate (eg, by 1 db) at each predetermined time interval T (eg, 5 sec).

Note that the time interval T for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is not limited to 5 seconds and is arbitrary. Since there is a possibility that a player sitting next to the player may feel annoyed by the abnormal notification sound, it is preferable not to make it too long. In addition, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is decreased not at time intervals, but each time an abnormality notification sound (for example, "The door is open!") is reproduced. You may do so.

<Regarding Abnormal Notification Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process. Sound emission control device 400
When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 executes abnormality notification processing in order to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and description of other abnormality notification will be omitted.

In step S2701, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 413
determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the command for notifying when power is restored is stored in the various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2701 that the command for notifying when power is restored has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S2705. Also, M
If the PU 402 determines in step S2701 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), it transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2702. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores a data table in the program ROM 512 for executing the power recovery notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from various data storage areas in Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the display for notifying when the power is restored based on the command for notifying when the power is restored which is transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S2703, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts to read the program and processing data, light emission data, and sound data for reporting when power is restored from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power restoration is performed in a closed (closed) state of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 . That is, since the front door frame 14 is not opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, the player playing in the adjacent seat is less likely to feel annoyed by the abnormal notification. Therefore, in the power recovery notification program and processing data, there is no process for gradually or gradually decreasing the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified. Absent.

In step S2704, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) the sound data read out in step S2703 and emitting light. Specifically, the MPU 402 performs step S
2703 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data read out in 2703, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the sound data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. do. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C start announcing an abnormality (for example, outputting a voice such as "The door was opened while the power was off!" and a warning sound). Moreover, the MPU 402 performs step S
Based on the program, processing data and light emission data read out in 2703, the error display lamp unit 24 is caused to emit light.

In step S2705, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 413
determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the normal notification command is stored in the various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2705 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), it executes the processes after step S2712, which will be described later.
If the MPU 402 determines in step S2705 that the normal time notification command has been received (YES), it transmits the normal time notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2706. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received normal time notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S2707, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the normal time notification program, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and common ROM. Here, light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, at the time of normal notification, the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B
is stopped.

In step S2708, the MPU 402 performs processing for stopping BGM (including music and voice for presentation). In this BGM stop processing, the BG being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C
Perform processing to stop or mute M. When stopping the BGM, the MPU 402 causes the RAM 413 to store the address of the data for stopping the reproduction of the BGM in order to restart the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is cancelled. When restarting BGM playback when the door open notification is canceled, MP
The U402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts playing the BGM from that address, thereby restarting the playing of the BGM from the position where it was stopped.
Also, when muting the BGM, the MPU 402 does not stop the playback of the BGM itself.
The sound output LSI 403 is instructed to mute the BGM so that no sound is output. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

At step S2709, the MPU 402 sets a counter to count the number of times the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is decreased. Specifically, the MPU 402
The number of times the reproduction volume is decreased is set in counters provided in various counter areas of M413. For example, when "4" is set in the counter, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced in five steps. The value set in this counter is decremented by 1 each time a predetermined time period described later with reference to FIG. 73 elapses. .

As described above, in this embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced stepwise or gradually. For this reason, in the present embodiment, a counter is set in step S2709 to limit the number of times the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is decreased. This prevents the notification from becoming meaningless. Although there is no limit to the value of the counter set in step S2709, it is preferable to set the value so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C does not become too low.

In step S2710, the MPU 402 performs sound data reproduction processing. This step S
In the sound data reproduction process of 2710, the MPU 402 controls the sound volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C so as to decrease stepwise or gradually. Details of the sound data reproduction process in step S2710 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S2711, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp section 24 to emit light based on the program, processing data, and light emission data read out in step S2707. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, the light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished, so the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S2712, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received a door open notification cancel command for canceling the door open notification transmitted from the MPU 302. FIG. Specifically, MP
U402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the door open notification cancellation command is stored in various flag storage areas of RAM413. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2712 that the door open notification cancellation command has not been received (NO), it ends the abnormality notification processing without executing the processing after step S2713.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S2712 that it has received the door open notification cancel command (YES), it transmits the door open notification cancel command to the display control device 500 in step S2713. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is canceled based on the received door open notification cancellation command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S2714, the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door open notification cancellation command (for example, "The door was opened during power shutdown!" If so, stop the output of the voice such as "The door is open!" and the warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification cancellation command.
In step S2714, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read out and reproduce the voice data "The door is closed!" stored in the common ROM 404. FIG. The sound output LSI 403 reads the voice data "The door is closed!" from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the sound "The door is closed!" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

At step S2715, the MPU 402 stores information in the RAM based on the door open notification cancellation command.
The flags corresponding to the power restoration notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas 413 are cleared, in other words, the flag values are set to zero. In step S2716, MP
U402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM that was stopped or muted in step S2708. The sound output LSI 403 resumes reproduction of BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402 . Here, if the BGM is stopped in step S2708, the MPU 402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413,
By instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the GM, the reproduction is restarted from the position where the BGM was stopped. Also, if the BGM is muted in step S2708, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM.
Unmute the BGM to the sound output LSI 403 and output the BGM from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
is output. After that, the MPU 402 terminates the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2708, the processing of stopping or muting the BGM (including music and sound for production) is performed. A process of lowering the reproduction volume to a predetermined value may be performed immediately. Further, in step S2708, if the volume is decreased gradually or step by step while the BGM is being played without stopping, then in step S2714, the abnormality notification is played back from the speaker units 26A to 26C. When the volume is decreased gradually or step by step until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and the BGM is resumed in step S2716, the BG
The reproduction volume of M may be gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform notification without causing a sense of incongruity caused by suddenly stopping the BGM and replacing it with a warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of incongruity due to the change to BGM.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 73, the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is configured to decrease stepwise or gradually as time elapses. . Therefore, it is not determined whether or not the back pack unit open command has been received. In this case, it is not necessary to provide the back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15 in the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. note that,
In this embodiment, as in the other embodiments, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit open command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit open command has been received (Y
ES), and a configuration (two-stage control) in which the reproduction volume of the warning sound or the like is reduced. As a result, during time-consuming maintenance or the like, the possibility that a player playing a game in an adjacent seat will be bothered by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced. Since the opening of the back pack unit 15 is not due to maintenance or the like, but may be due to fraud, it is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like.

<Regarding Sound Data Playback Processing Executed by Audio Light Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of sound data reproduction processing (processing of step S2710) in FIG.
At step S2801, the MPU 402 sets a timer counter to measure the time interval for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, MPU40
2, a timer counter provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 and a speaker unit 26;
"2500" is set as the time interval for decreasing the playback volume of A to 26C. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time interval for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is 5 seconds. Note that the time interval for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is not limited to this and is arbitrary.
Since there is a possibility that a player sitting next to the player may feel annoyed by the abnormality notification sound, it is preferable not to make the sound too long.

In step S2802, the MPU 402 starts playing (outputting) the sound data read out in step S2707 of FIG. Specifically, the MPU 402 performs step S
The sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data read out in 2707 are set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. do. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C start anomaly notification (for example, output of a voice such as "The door is open!" and a warning sound).

In step S2803, the MPU 402 subtracts 1 from the counter value set in step S2708 of FIG. For example, in step S2708 in FIG. 72, if the value of the counter provided in each counter area of the RAM 413 is set to 4, the MPU 40
In 2, the value of the counter provided in each counter area of the RAM 413 is updated to 3.

In step S2804, the MPU 402 determines whether the value of the timer counter set in step S2801 is zero. In step S2804, if the value of the timer counter is not zero (NO), the MPU 402 terminates the sound data reproduction process without performing subsequent processes. At step S2804, if the value of the timer counter is zero (YES), M
PU 402 reduces the reproduction volume of speaker units 26A to 26C. More specifically, M
PU 402 changes the value of the parameter that defines the amplification factor of amplifier circuit 403d2a to reduce the reproduction volume of speaker units 26A to 26C (step S2805).

At step S2806, the MPU 402 determines whether the counter value set at step S2709 in FIG. 72 is zero. In step S2806, if the counter value is not zero (NO), the MPU 402 terminates the sound data reproduction process without performing subsequent processes. At step S2806, if the value of the counter is zero (YES), the MPU 402
is to prevent the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C from becoming any smaller. More specifically, the MPU 402 fixes the value of the parameter that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a in subsequent processing.

[Another example of the fifth embodiment]
In the above description, the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C provided in the pachinko machine 10 is reduced stepwise or gradually. may be configured to be independently controllable. In other words, like the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.
3d1, and an amplifier circuit 403d that amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1.
2a to 403d2c, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker section 26A, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2b is output to the speaker section 2
6B, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2c is output to the speaker section 26C.
may be configured to be output to
In this case, the audio data reproduction process described with reference to FIG. 73 (step S271 in FIG. 72)
0), only the volume parameter of the amplifier circuit 403d2a for outputting an analog signal to the speaker unit 26A is changed at predetermined time intervals or at predetermined notification times to gradually increase the playback volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26A. Or it is controlled to become smaller gradually.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side of the inner frame 13 with the left side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 is on the left side of the outer frame 11. is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 with the support side as the support side, when opening the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10, the front side (player side) is supported with this support side as the rotation axis. ) to open. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, it opens so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player who plays in the seat next to the left. closest to the ear. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the volume output (reproduced) from each of the speaker units 26A to 26C can be independently controlled as described above, An amplifier circuit 4 that outputs an analog signal to the speaker section 26A
Only the volume parameter 03d2a may be changed for each predetermined time period or for each predetermined number of times of notification so that the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26A is controlled to decrease stepwise or gradually.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 is supported on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the supporting side. When supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, the door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent right seat. , and the speaker section 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. In this case, the volume parameter of the amplifier circuit 403d2b that outputs the analog signal to the speaker units 26B and 26C is changed every predetermined time period or every predetermined number of times of notification so that the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26B is stepped. Alternatively, control may be performed so as to gradually decrease.

In addition, the front door frame 14 is supported on both sides of the inner frame 13 with the right side and left side (hereinafter also referred to as both sides) of the inner frame 13 as supporting sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11. is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double-opening structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected. the first monitoring device 2
50 and a second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 1
3 is opened, and based on the detection result of this detector, the playback volume of the abnormality notification output from either the speaker unit 26A or the speaker unit 26B is changed stepwise or Control may be performed so as to gradually decrease.

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 has been opened with the left side as the support side, the door frame 14 is positioned so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the left. As a result, the speaker section 26A comes closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent left seat. For this reason, control is performed so that the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26A is decreased stepwise or gradually when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified.
Also, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the support side, it opens so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the right. , the speaker unit 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. For this reason, when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified, control may be performed so that the reproduction sound volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26B is decreased stepwise or gradually.

In addition, in this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the notification process for power recovery and the notification process for normal time, in the normal time notification process, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, , The indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light, but while using the same light emission data in the notification process for power recovery and the notification process for normal time, in the notification process for normal time,
The power supply for light emission to the light emitters of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B may be stopped so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and hold different light emission data for the notification process for power restoration and for the notification process for normal time, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

Also, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, the display lamp device 23A
, 23B, preferably the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14, may be configured not to emit light. In this case also, the light emission data for the normal time notification process may be defined so that the display lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light. A configuration may be adopted in which the supply of power for light emission to the light emitter of the display lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 is stopped. In this way, the pachinko machine 10, in the normal time notification process, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, the display lamp device 23A
, 23B are configured so as not to emit light, the possibility that a player playing a game at the adjacent seat will be bothered by the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat loses the exhilaration and immersion and loses interest.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes a frame (inner frame 1
3, the front door frame 14), a plurality of sound devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) provided in the frame, and detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) that detect opening of the frame. and abnormality notification means (MPU 402, sound output LSI 403) for controlling the plurality of sound devices to notify an abnormality when the detecting device detects that the frame is open. The anomaly notification means reduces the volume of the plurality of audio devices in a stepwise or gradual manner when anomaly is notified. That is, although the notification is performed at a high volume at first, the volume is reduced step by step or gradually. It is possible to reduce the risk that employees will miss the anomaly notification.

(2) The abnormality notification means (MPU 402, sound output LSI 403) of the pachinko machine 10 increases the volume of one or more of the plurality of sound devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) in a stepwise manner relative to the volume of the other sound devices. Or decrease gradually. That is, when notifying an abnormality, the volume of one or more of the plurality of sound devices is reduced, but the sound volume output from the other sound devices is not reduced, so that the music or voice output from the game machine is reduced. It is possible to reduce the risk that the player loses interest due to the loss of exhilaration and immersion, and more effectively reduce the risk that the manager or employee of the hall misses the anomaly report.

(3) The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10 is supported by either the right side or the left side of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with either the right side or the left side as the supporting side. , anomaly reporting means (M
PU 402, sound output LSI 403) is an acoustic device (speaker section 26A or speaker section 26B) arranged on a side different from the support side among a plurality of acoustic devices (speaker sections 26A to 26C).
, 26C) is made stepwise or gradually smaller than the volume of other audio devices (speaker units 26B, 26C or speaker unit 26A) (including a mode in which the reproduction volume is set to zero or substantially zero). Therefore, it is possible to more effectively reduce the annoyance of the anomaly notification sound to the player sitting in the adjacent seat. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine being played due to abnormal notifications, and the exhilaration and sense of immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine can be suppressed more effectively. This further reduces the risk that the player will be distracted by being caught.

In each of the above embodiments, the volume of the speaker units 26A to 26E, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier, is changed by the parameters stored in the ROM 412, but the volume of the speaker units 26A to 26E is changed by setting the volume. It may be configured to allow

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the music data (BGM) and the voice data of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are individually stored in the common ROM 404 of the voice emission control device 400, and the effect MA
~ Separately from the music data (BGM) used in MC (BGM) A ~ C, "A RUSH rush", "B
RUSH Rush" and "C RUSH Rush" are read out and output respectively. However, as described with reference to FIG. 49, during the output of the intro portion of the music used in the productions MA to MC, "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", "C RUSH rush"
The sound of "SH rush" is output respectively. For this reason, the intro parts of the music data A to C may include sounds of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush", respectively. In this embodiment, "A RU
A description will be given of this embodiment including the sounds of "SH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush". The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described below, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description will be omitted.

<Production data>
FIG. 74 shows music data stored in common ROM 404. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, as described above, the intro parts of each of the music data A to C contain audio data of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush". If you include a voice such as "Please hit right" in the intro part of the music, when the music finishes playing and returns to the beginning and restarts the music output, so-called loop processing, "Please hit right" Please” is output even when looping (when playing for the second time or later). Therefore, in this embodiment, it is preferable not to include the intro part in the loop processing.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data used in each of the productions MA to MC are divided into an intro part and other loop parts. It is stored in the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 . More specifically, each of the music data A to C includes sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data only for the intro part including voice data such as "Please hit right", and excluding the intro part. The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data after the A melody are divided into the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404.
stored in

For example, when the music data A used in the production MA is to be looped, the MPU 402 reproduces the music data of the intro part at the time of outputting the music for the first time, and then reproduces the music data of the loop part. When the part of the music data is completed, the process of outputting the loop part of the music data again (hereinafter also referred to as loop processing) is performed. In addition, production MB, M
By performing the same processing as above for the music data B and C used in C, during loop processing, the voice such as "Please hit right" will be played for the second and subsequent times (during loop processing) prevented from being output.

The sound "A RUSH rush" included in the intro part of the music data A is set so that the output of the sound "A RUSH rush" ends at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part of the music data A ends. ing. Also, "
The sound "B RUSH rush" is set so that the output of the "B RUSH rush" ends at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part of the music data B ends. Furthermore, the sound "C RUSH rush" included in the intro part of the music data C is set so that the output of the sound "C RUSH rush" ends at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part of the music data C ends. ing.

Further, according to the data table stored in the ROM 412, the music data A is associated with the production MA, the music data B is associated with the production MB, and the music data C is associated with the production MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process in FIG. It controls the LSI 403 . Also, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process in FIG. to control. Also, MP
U402 reads the music data C and outputs it to the speaker units 26A-2 when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process in FIG. 47 is the effect MC.
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from 6C. More specifically, the MPU 402 loads the ROM 412 based on the programs and processing data stored in the ROM 412.
Then, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data are read out from the common ROM 404 and set in the register 403 b of the sound output LSI 403 . The sound output LSI 403 outputs the music data A to C to the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the data set in the register 403b.
output (playback) from

Furthermore, sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the audio data D and E are stored in the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 . The MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data stored in the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 as necessary, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and outputs the sound data D and E to the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output (reproduce) from the units 26A to 26C. Here, the voice data D is "Right-handed",
The voice data E is data of the voice saying "Please hit right". Here, the audio data D is associated with the production MA, and the audio data E is associated with the production MC. Therefore, the MPU 402 performs step S1706 or S of the effect type selection process in FIG.
When the effect type set in 1708 is the effect MA, the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data D is read out and output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Also, the MPU
402 reads out the audio data E and reads out the sound data E to display the speaker units 26A to 26 when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process in FIG. 47 is the effect MC.
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from C.

<Transition processing to production MA>
Next, the transition processing to the effect MA in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a flow chart of processing for shifting to the effect MA of this embodiment.
In step S2901, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S2903, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referenced and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, if the cycle of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2902, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data A from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403.
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from 6C. As a result, the speaker section 26A
The output (playback) of the intro part of the music data A starts from 26C. Also, the intro part of the music data A includes audio data of "A RUSH Rush". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW1) has elapsed from the start of the output of the intro part of the music data A, the speaker unit 2
A voice "A RUSH rush" is output (reproduced) in accordance with the intro part of the music data A from 6A to 26C.

In step S2903, the MPU 402 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2901. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), in step S2904 the RU
Start right-hand navigation for SH. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data D "Right shot" from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the sound data D to the register 403b. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data D "Right shot" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. If the MPU 402 does not determine that the ending period has ended in step S2903 (NO), it ends the transition process.

In step S2905, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the image effect of the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 402 is the MPU 5 of the display control device 500
02 to read out the video data A stored in the performance data storage area 1032 and reproduce it. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads the video data A from the performance data storage area 1032 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 and stores it in the VDP 505 .
is displayed on the display screen G.

In step S2906, the MPU 402 performs loop processing. Specifically, MPU4
02 determines whether or not the output of the music data A has ended, and if the output of the music data A has ended, sequence data and parameters corresponding to the loop portion (excluding the intro portion) of the music data A Data and sound data are read out from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404, set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the loop portion of the music data A is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. .
Also, the MPU 402 does not read the loop portion of the music data A when the output of the music data A has not ended.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in step S2903 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition processing to production MB>
Next, referring to FIG. 76, a detailed description will be given of the transition processing to the effect MB in this embodiment. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing to the effect MB of the present embodiment.
In step S3001, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S3003, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referenced and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, when the period of the timer interrupt processing is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3002, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data B from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data B to the speaker units 26A-2.
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from 6C. As a result, the speaker section 26A
The output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data B starts from 26C. Also, the intro part of music data B includes audio data of "B RUSH rush". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW2) has elapsed from the start of the output of the intro part of the music data B, the speaker unit 2
A voice "B RUSH rush" is output (reproduced) in accordance with the intro part of the music data B from 6A to 26C.

In step S3003, the MPU 402 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S3001. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), in step S3004 the RU
Start right-hand navigation for SH. Specifically, the MPU 402 is the M of the display control device 500 .
The PU 502 is instructed to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the performance data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads out the video data D from the presentation data storage area 1032 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 and stores it in VDP5.
05, control is made to display on the display screen G, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started. MPU
402, if it is not determined in step S3003 that the ending period has ended (NO
), ending the migration process.

In step S3005, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the image effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 402 is the MPU 5 of the display control device 500
02 to read out and reproduce the video data B stored in the performance data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads the video data B from the performance data storage area 1032 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 and stores it in the VDP 505 .
is displayed on the display screen G.

In step S3006, the MPU 402 performs loop processing. Specifically, MPU4
02 determines whether or not the output of the music data B has been completed, and if the output of the music data B has been completed, sequence data and parameters corresponding to the loop portion (excluding the intro portion) of the music data B. Data and sound data are read out from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the loop portion of the music data B is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. .
Further, the MPU 402 does not read the loop portion of the music data B if the output of the music data B has not ended.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in step S3003 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition processing to production MC>
Next, referring to FIG. 77, a detailed description will be given of the transition processing to the effect MC in this embodiment. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing to the effect MC of the present embodiment.
In step S3101, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S3103, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referenced and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, if the cycle of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3102, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data C to the speaker units 26A-2.
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from 6C. As a result, the speaker section 26A
The output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data C starts from 26C. Also, the intro part of the music data C includes voice data of "Rush into CRUSH" and "Right hit". Therefore, a predetermined time (T
W3) After a lapse of time, the speaker units 26A to 26C output the voice "C RUSH rush" in time with the intro part of the music data C, and after the voice "C RUSH rush" is output, the voice "Please hit right" is output. Audio is output (played back).

In step S3103, the MPU 402 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S3101. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 starts playing navigation in step S3104. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the performance data storage area 1032 . Based on an instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to read out the video data D from the performance data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started. .

In step S3105, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the image effect of the effect MC. Specifically, the MPU 402 is the MPU 5 of the display control device 500
02 to read out and reproduce the video data C stored in the performance data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads out the video data C from the performance data storage area 1032 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 and stores it in the VDP 505 .
is displayed on the display screen G. If the MPU 402 does not determine that the ending period has ended in step S3103 (NO), it ends the transition process.

In step S3106, the MPU 402 performs loop processing. Specifically, MPU4
02 determines whether or not the output of the music data C has ended. If the output of the music data C has ended, the sequence data and parameters corresponding to the loop portion (excluding the intro portion) of the music data C are generated. The data and sound data are read out from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the loop portion of the music data C is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the MPU 402 does not read the loop portion of the music data C when the output of the music data C is not finished.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in step 3103 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 puts "A R
USH Rush”, “B RUSH Rush”, and “C RUSH Rush” are included. Therefore, the music data and voice data of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are stored in the storage means (R
OM 412 and common ROM 404).
There is no need to measure the time for outputting the voices of "H Rush", "B RUSH Rush", and "C RUSH Rush". Therefore, storage means (ROM 412 and common R
OM 404) storage capacity can be saved. Also, the arithmetic processing of the MPU 402 can be reduced. Also, "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush" included in the first data
The player can recognize the game state from the voices of "Rush" and "C RUSH Rush". Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, and to improve the sense of anticipation for the game. Also, "A RUSH Rush", "B RUSH Rush", "C RUSH Rush"
The data of the intro part that contains the voice data of "SH rush" is not played repeatedly, and the data after the A melody excluding the intro part is played repeatedly, so "A RUSH rush"
, ``B RUSH rush'', and ``C RUSH rush'' are not repeatedly played back, and the player does not feel annoyed. Other effects are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

In the above-described first and sixth embodiments, there are three types of effects in the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode), MA, MB, and MC. The types of effects in the fourth mode M4 are not limited to the three types described above, and may be arbitrary, and may be two types or four types or more.

Further, in the above-described first and sixth embodiments, an embodiment has been described in which the intro portion of the music is reproduced when transitioning to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode).
It can be applied not only to the transition to mode M4 but also to all mode transitions accompanied by changes in music.

[Seventh embodiment]
In the above-described first and sixth embodiments, the audio light emission control board 401 of the audio light emission control device 400 is provided with an MP.
In this embodiment, U402, sound output LSI403, and common ROM404 are installed. In the first and sixth embodiments, the MPU 402 determines the contents of the effect for a predetermined period based on the command received from the main control device 300, and performs light emission control on various lamp units according to the contents. have a function. In addition, the MPU 402, in line with the content of the determined production,
A sound output instruction is issued to the sound output LSI 403, and the speaker unit 2 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 403.
Sound output control from 6A to 26C is performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
An embodiment in which a system on a chip) 620 and a sound and light ROM 610 are provided will be described. The sound and light SOC 620 determines the content of performance to be executed according to the command received from the main control device, and controls the display lamp device 2 according to the determined content of performance.
3A, 23B and the error display lamp unit 24, a sound output core 622 that controls the sound output of the speaker units 26A to 26C in accordance with the effect contents determined by the control core 621, and the control core 621. Data transfer unit (DMA: Direct Memory
and a memory controller 624 for reading out data from the sound and light ROM 610 in accordance with the address data transmitted from the y Access) 621c and the address data transmitted from the data transfer section 622c of the sound output core 622. In this case, the sound output core 622 has priority over the control core 621 in reading data.

<Electrical configuration related to production execution control>
The electrical configuration for controlling the performance of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and sixth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted.

A sound emission control device 400 is provided as a control device for controlling the execution of effects based on instructions from the main control device 300 . The sound emission control device 400, as shown in FIG.
It has an audio emission control board 401 on which a sound and light SOC 620, a sound and light ROM 610 and an amplifier circuit 630 are mounted. The sound and light SOC 620 includes a control core 621, a sound output core 622, a sound data processing unit 625, and a memory controller 624, and the sound and light SOC 620 is configured by integrating these elements into one chip.

The control core 621 determines the specific contents of the presentation based on the command received from the main controller 300, and controls the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp section 24 according to the determined contents. In addition, the control core 621 sets data corresponding to the content of the determined effect to the register 622a provided in the sound output core 622, and sends a command corresponding to the content of the determined effect to the display control device 500. Send to As a result, the sound output core 622 executes sound output control in accordance with the content instructed by the control core 621, and the display control device 500 performs display control in accordance with the content instructed by the control core 621. Run. Incidentally, the sound output core 622 by the control core 621
data setting for the register 622a of the control core 621 in the SOC 620 for sound and light
and the sound output core 622 through a data bus SL that electrically connects them. Two-way communication is possible between the control core 621 and the sound output core 622 through the data bus SL. A signal is transmitted from 622 to the control core 621 to indicate that a sound is being output.

The control core 621 includes a CPU 621a which is a central processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit.
In addition, a RAM 621b is incorporated for temporarily storing data necessary for program execution as well as being used for reading out program data and control data pre-stored in the ROM 610 for sound and light. The RAM 621b is configured to use a memory such as an SRAM or a DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to retain data (that is, a volatile storage means) for both reading and writing. , the time required for reading is shorter than that of the ROM 610 for sound and light. The data capacity of the RAM 621b has a data capacity of many bytes so that a plurality of data can be stored and retained at the same time, and has a data capacity in units of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 4 megabytes. The data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the ROM 610 for sound and light. However, RA
The data capacity of the M621b is not limited to this, and is arbitrary as long as the control core 621 can suitably execute control.

In addition, the control core 621 has a ROM 610 for sound and light based on instructions from the CPU 621a.
data transfer unit 621 that instructs the memory controller 624 to read data from
c is also built in. When the CPU 621a writes the data corresponding to the data read instruction to the internal register of the data transfer unit 621c, the data transfer unit 621c waits until all the data corresponding to the read instruction is read to the RAM 621b. to transmit the address data for the data read instruction. The transmission of this address data is performed in synchronization with a clock signal (for example, 4 MHz) periodically transmitted from a clock circuit incorporated in the data transfer section 621c.

The sound output core 622 executes sound output control of the speaker units 26A to 26C according to the content of the presentation determined by the control core 621. FIG. The sound output core 622 includes registers 622a,
HWD 622b, SCM 622d and data transfer section 622c are built in.

The register 622a has a function as storage means for temporarily storing various data used by the sound output core 622, and is used as a read/write memory that requires power supply from the outside to hold the data. configured to use. In addition, random access is possible, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is shorter than that of the ROM 610 for sound and light. The register 622a has a data capacity of multiple bytes so that it can store a plurality of data simultaneously, and has a data capacity in units of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 2 megabytes. The data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the sound and light ROM 610 and smaller than the data capacity of the RAM 621 b of the control core 621 . However, the data capacity of the register 622a is not limited to this, and is arbitrary as long as the sound output core 622 can preferably execute control.

HWD 622b and SCM 622d are sent from control core 621 and register 622a
It has a function of creating digital musical tone data using the tone data read out from the sound and light ROM 610 in accordance with the sequence data and parameter data stored in the . The sequence data includes time data indicating the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data that determines the pitch, volume, and timbre of sounds at a predetermined timing. there is These sequence data and parameter data are set as a set of mutually corresponding data, and a series of sound outputs are enabled by using the set of sequence data and parameter data. In addition, the period of sound output determined by a set of sequence data and parameter data is constant at a specific time regardless of the types of sequence data and parameter data. It is 2.1 sec, which is shorter than the mode. However, it is not limited to this, and may be shorter or longer than 2.1 sec. Moreover, it may be configured to be a series of melodies, and in this case, the sound output period determined by the sequence data and the parameter data will vary according to the types of those data.

The HWD 622b creates digital musical tone data in order to reproduce pre-sampled recorded data. , enabling playback of recorded data. The recorded data may be compressed data such as MP3 or non-compressed data. The SCM 622d does not create digital musical tone data from recorded data for a predetermined time, but rather creates digital musical tone data by combining rectangular wave data preliminarily stored in the sound and light ROM 610 in chronological order. It enables the reproduction of sound (so-called "pico-pico" sound).

Here, the configuration of the register 622a used for creating digital musical tone data in the HWD 622b and SCM 622d will be described with reference to FIG. The register 622a includes a sequence area 711, a parameter area 712,
An HWD area 713 and an SCM area 714 are provided. Already described sequence data is written in the sequence area 711 , and already described parameter data is written in the parameter area 712 .

The HWD 622b refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 711 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 712 to generate sound and light RO
Recording data stored in the M610 is read out to the HWD area 713, and digital musical tone data is created from the recording data, thereby making it possible to output the recorded sound. The HWD area 713 is provided with a 1st CH area 713a to a 16th CH area 713p, and digital musical tone data can be created based on different recorded data in each of the CH areas 713a to 713p. This makes it possible to simultaneously output sounds corresponding to a plurality of different recorded data.

By referring to the sequence data written in the sequence area 711 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 712, the SCM 622d reads the sound and light ROM
The square wave data stored in 610 is read out to the SCM area 714, and digital musical tone data is created from the square wave data, thereby enabling the output of electronic sound. Area 7 for SCM
14 is provided with a 1st CH area 714a to a 16th CH area 714p,
Different digital musical tone data can be created in each of the CH areas 714a to 714p. This makes it possible to simultaneously output a plurality of different electronic sounds.

The 1st CH area 713a to 16th CH area 713p of the HWD area 713 and the 1st CH area 714a to 16th CH area 714p of the SCM area 714 each have an area capable of storing two pieces of already created digital musical tone data. In the middle of sound output control using the digital musical sound data created in one of the storable areas, digital data corresponding to the next execution period for the execution period of the sound output control Musical sound data is created in the other storable area. As a result, while sound is being output, digital musical sound data necessary for the execution period of the next sound output control can be generated in parallel, and sound can be output continuously.

Returning to the description of FIG. 78, the sound data processing unit 973 of the SOC 620 for sound and light has a function as a digital/analog converter, and the digital musical sound data created in the HWD area 713 of the register 622a and the SCM area The digital musical tone data created in 714 is converted into an analog sound signal and output to the amplifier circuit 630 formed on the display control board 501 . The amplifier circuit 630 amplifies the output level of the analog sound signal to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume, and outputs the amplified sound signal to the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, predetermined sounds are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, the sound data processing unit 973 is configured so that a plurality of CH areas 713a to 713a to 713a in the HWD area 713
13p simultaneously, the digital musical tone data are synthesized, and a plurality of CH areas 714a to 714a-7 in the SCM area 714 are synthesized.
If digital musical tone data are simultaneously created in 14p, the digital musical tone data are synthesized. Further, when digital musical tone data is created in each of the HWD area 713 and the SCM area 714, these digital musical tone data are synthesized. When synthesis is performed in this way, the synthesized digital synthesized musical tone data is converted into an analog sound signal, amplified by the amplifier circuit 630 as described above, and then amplified by the speaker sections 26A-2.
6C. This makes it possible to simultaneously output a plurality of different sounds from the speaker units 26A-26C.

As described above, when outputting sound, sound data, which is either recording data or rectangular wave data, is read from the sound and light ROM 610 to the register 622a. This is performed by the data transfer section 622c of the sound output core 622 based on the stored sequence data.

80 showing an example of the sequence data, the sequence data SD includes pointer data set in correspondence with the processing timing of the sound output core 622. , content data for sound output and content data for data transfer are determined in association with each pointer data. The processing timing of the sound output core 622 is generated in synchronization with a clock signal periodically transmitted from a clock circuit (not shown) incorporated in the sound output core 622 . In this case, the period of the clock signal is
22c, and specifically 10 MHz. When the processing timing of the sound output core 622 comes, the HWD 622b, SCM 622d and data transfer section 622c each perform operations corresponding to the sequence data and parameter data.

Content data of the sound output in the sequence data SD are stored in the HWD 622b and the SCM 62
2d is used to create digital musical tone data for each channel. In this case, the content data of the sound output is set in correspondence with the pointer data, and the creation of the digital musical sound data based on the content data of the sound output set in correspondence with each pointer data is transferred to the register 622a in advance. It is performed using the sound data obtained.

The data transfer content data in the sequence data SD is used in the data transfer unit 622c to specify the timing of reading data from the sound and light ROM 610, and is used to specify the area of the sound and light ROM 610 in which the data to be read is stored. Used to identify address data. The content data of the data transfer is data so that there are a plurality of predetermined pointer data between the read timing of the sound data corresponding to one channel and the read timing of the sound data corresponding to the next channel. Read instruction data is set. The data of the data readout instruction of 1 is set with data for reading sound data having a data amount that enables sound output for a predetermined time. Supports individual channels. Therefore, when outputting sound by synthesizing a plurality of digital musical tone data, data readout instructions are issued for the same number of digital musical tone data. Further, the sound data read out based on one data readout instruction corresponds to data that enables sound output over the predetermined time of 700 μsec in the corresponding channel. In this case, the HWD 622b and SCM 622d each have 16 channels, and the time required to read 700 μsec worth of sound data for each of these 16 channels is shorter than 700 μsec. As a result, while outputting sound for a predetermined time,
It is possible to create digital musical tone data for enabling the output of sounds for the next predetermined period of time that is continuous with respect to the predetermined period of time.

Data transfer unit 621c of control core 621 and data transfer unit 622c of sound output core 622
, data is read from the common ROM 610 for sound and light. R for sound and light
The OM 610 is configured to use a read-only memory that does not require an external power supply for storing data (that is, a non-volatile storage means). Specifically, ROM for sound and light
A NOR flash memory is used as 610, but a NAND flash memory may also be used. The sound and light ROM 610 stores fixed value data used for executing various control programs and processes according to the programs.

The data configuration of the sound/light ROM 610 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the sound and light ROM 610, program data (1), program data (2), . remembered. By using these program data, C
Main processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, are executed in the PU 621a. The sound and light ROM 610 stores processing data (1), processing data (2), . These processing data include a data table used to execute each effect, and sequence data and parameter data to be provided to the sound output core 622 . Command data (1), command data (2), . These command data are used by the CPU 621a of the control core 621 to instruct the display control device 500 on the contents of the presentation.

In the ROM 610 for sound and light, in addition to data used for executing processing by the CPU 621a of the control core 621 as described above, light emission data (1), light emission data (2), .
, light emission data (P), sound data (1), sound data (2), .
, the sound data (Q) is stored. In each light emission data, during a predetermined production period,
Information on the type, lighting period, and lighting order of the light-emitting portions to be lit in the display lamp devices 23A and 23B is set, and the content of these light-emission patterns differs according to the type of each light-emission data. The light emission data stored in the ROM 610 for sound and light differ in the target light emission control period and in the content of the light emission pattern. Further, each sound data includes recorded data composed of a sine wave and rectangular wave data used for outputting an electronic sound.

As shown in FIG. 78, the sound and light ROM 610 has an address bus SL1 and a data bus SL.
2 to the memory controller 624 of the sound/light SOC 620 .
The memory controller 624 is electrically connected to the control core 621 via an address bus SL3 and a data bus SL4, and an address bus SL5 and a data bus SL6.
is electrically connected to the sound output core 622 via the .

The memory controller 624 receives the address data to be read from the data transfer unit 621c of the control core 621 via the address bus SL3. The memory controller 624 has a control-side address buffer 624a for storing the address data received from the data transfer section 621c. is received, the address data is stored in the control side address buffer 624a. At this time, a normal reception signal indicating that the address data has been normally received is transmitted from the memory controller 624 to the data transfer section 621c via the data bus SL4, whereby the address data is normally received in the data transfer section 621c. It is specified that On the other hand, when new address data is received from the data transfer unit 621c while unprocessed address data is stored in the control side address buffer 624a, the address data is stored in the control side address buffer 624a.
24a. In this case, since the normal acceptance signal is not transmitted to the data transfer section 621c, the data transfer section 621c specifies that it is necessary to resend the same address data.

When corresponding to the address data transmitted from the data transfer unit 621c, the memory controller 624 transmits the address data to the sound and light ROM 610 via the address bus SL1, and transmits the data corresponding to the address data via the data bus SL2. sound and light ROM61
Receive from 0. Then, the control core 62 receives the received data via the data bus SL4.
1 to the RAM 621b or the internal register of the CPU 621a.

To the memory controller 624, the address data to be read is transmitted from the data transfer section 622c of the sound output core 622 via the address bus SL5. The memory controller 624 has a sound output side address buffer 624b for storing the address data received from the data transfer section 622c. When data is received, the address data is stored in the sound output side address buffer 624b. At this time, a normal reception signal indicating that the address data has been normally received is transmitted from the memory controller 624 to the data transfer section 622c via the data bus SL6, whereby the address data is normally received in the data transfer section 622c. It is specified that On the other hand, when unprocessed address data is stored in the sound output side address buffer 624b, the data transfer unit 62
2c, the address data is not stored in the sound output side address buffer 624b. In this case, since the normal reception signal is not transmitted to the data transfer section 622c, the data transfer section 622c specifies that the same address data needs to be sent again.

When corresponding to the address data transmitted from the data transfer section 622c, the memory controller 624 transmits the address data to the sound and light ROM 610 via the address bus SL1, and transmits the data corresponding to the address data via the data bus SL2. sound and light ROM6
Receive from 10. Then, it transmits the received data to the register 622a of the sound output core 622 via the data bus SL6.

The memory controller 624 has a built-in clock circuit.
The processing at 24 is performed in synchronization with a clock signal periodically transmitted from the clock circuit. In this case, the period of the clock signal is shorter than the period of the clock signal of the data transfer section 622c and the period of the clock signal of the sound output core 622, specifically 15M.
Hz.

[Eighth embodiment]
In the first to seventh embodiments, the case where the ending period of the jackpot game is fixed has been described. In this embodiment, according to the type of jackpot, specifically, the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability mode or low probability mode), all the round games of the jackpot game have ended. An embodiment in which the ending period that occurs later is varied will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described below, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to seventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description will be omitted.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the pachinko machine 10 big winning opening opening/closing process according to the present embodiment.
In step S3201, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the big winning opening 83a is open. When the MPU 302 determines in step S3201 that the large winning opening 83a is not open (NO), it executes the processing from step S3202. Also, the MPU 302
If it is determined in step S3201 that the big winning opening 83a is open (YES), the processing from step S3206 is executed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S3201 that the big winning opening 83a is not open (NO), in step S3202, the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less, and the value of the round counter RC is "0". Determine whether or not: When the MPU 302 determines in step S3202 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0" (YES), the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S3202 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), in step S3203, the value of the timer counter T is set to "0". ” or less.
When the MPU 302 determines in step S3203 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" at step S3203 (YES), at step S3204, the MPU 302 executes a special winning opening opening process. Since the processing for opening the big winning opening has already been described with reference to FIG. 32, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

At step S3205, the MPU 302 sets an open command. Also, MPU3
02, in step S301 of the normal processing (see FIG. 24) described above, step S32
05 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400 . After that, MPU3
02 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process. Note that the audio light emission control device 400 includes the MPU 302
Based on the open command transmitted from, it recognizes that the opening/closing door 83b has been set to the open state, and executes a predetermined process.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S3201 that the large winning opening 83a is open (YES), in step S3206 it determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, that is, whether the large winning opening is open. Processing step S3203 or step S320
At 6, it is determined whether or not the upper limit continuous time set in the timer counter T has passed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S3206 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), in step S3207 it detects whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning opening 83a. It should be noted that the determination of whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special prize opening 83a is
It is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 153 corresponding to the big winning opening 83a.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S3207 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 83a (NO), it ends the large winning opening opening/closing process. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3207 that a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning opening 83a (YES), in step S3208, the value of the prize winning counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S3209, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less. In step S3209, the MPU 302 determines that the value of the winning counter PC is "
0” or less (NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. Also, MPU3
If 02 determines in step S3209 that the value of the winning counter PC is less than or equal to "0" (YES), in step S3210 it executes closing execution processing. In this closing execution process, the MPU 302 sets the open/close door 83b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 83c.

In step S3211, the MPU 302 sets a closing command. The MPU 302 transmits the closing command set in step S3211 to the sound emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 24). Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 302, the sound emission control device 400 recognizes that the opening/closing door 83b has been set to the closed state, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S3212, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the hit/fail result is a "special loss result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S3212 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result" (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S3218, which will be described later.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3212 that the win/fail result is not the “special loss result” (NO), it executes the processing from step S3213 onwards. Step S3213
Then, the MPU 302 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it. Also, in step S3214, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S3214 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S3215. After that, the MPU 302 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S3215 is the opening/closing door 83b.
is set to the open state, the open state is set to the closed state again, and the open standby time is defined until the open/close door 83b is set to the open state again. In the first embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec.
However, the opening standby time is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode and progress.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S3214 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0" (YES), it executes the processing from step S3216. In step S3216, the MPU 302 performs ending period setting processing. In this ending period setting process, the MPU 302 refers to the ending period determination table, determines the ending period according to the type and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the special symbol, and corresponds to the determined ending period. Set the value in the timer counter T. note that,
Details of the ending period setting process will be described later.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for the opening. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S3217, the MPU 302 sets an ending command. MPU
302 is step S3 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 24).
The ending command set in 217 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400 . After that, the MPU 302 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process. Note that the sound emission control device 400
Based on the ending command sent from PU 302, the end of the opening/closing execution mode is recognized, and predetermined processing is executed.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S3206 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" (YES), it executes the processing from step S3210 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3212 that the win/fail result is the “special losing result” (YES), in step S3218, the value of the open/close counter SOC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S3219, the MPU 302 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S3219 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S3215 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3219 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" (YES), it executes the processes after S3215 described above.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the data table of the ending period determination table stored in the ROM 312 of the main controller 300 of this embodiment. More specifically, it is an ending period determination table for determining the ending period after all the round games in the jackpot game are completed. In this embodiment, the ending period is determined according to the special symbol type and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode). For example, as shown in FIG. 83, in the case of special symbol 1 (hereinafter also referred to as special symbol 1), if the mode is high probability mode, "10 sec" is determined as the ending period, and if the mode is low probability mode If so, "5 sec" is determined as the ending period. In addition, special pattern 2 (hereinafter also referred to as special pattern 2)
In the case of , "5 sec" is determined as the ending period if the mode is the high-probability mode, and "2 sec" is determined as the ending period if the mode is the low-probability mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 83, when the special symbols are the same, the ending period is set differently depending on whether the mode is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode, but the special symbols are the same. In this case, the ending period may be set to be the same regardless of whether the mode is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode. Also, the ending period shown in FIG. 83 is merely an example, and is not limited to the time (10 sec, 5 sec, 2 sec) shown in FIG. It is sufficient if the ending period is different according to the probability mode.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the ending period setting process of the present embodiment. The ending period setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.
In step S3301, the MPU 302 confirms the game state when the jackpot game is won. Specifically, based on the contents of the flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 313 (flags corresponding to the type commands transmitted from the main control device 300), the game state at the time of winning the jackpot game is confirmed. Next, in step S3302, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the special symbol type of the jackpot game is special figure 1. In step S3302, when the special symbol type of the jackpot game is special figure 1 (YES), in step S3303, the MPU 302 determines whether the mode is the high probability mode. Step S330
3 if the mode is the high probability mode (YES), in step S3304, MP
U302 refers to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 83) stored in ROM 312 and sets the ending period to "10 sec". Specifically, since the timer interrupt processing is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 302 waits 10 seconds, which is the ending period.
"5000" corresponding to sec is set in the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 .

If the mode is not the high-probability mode (NO) in step S3303, in other words, if the mode is the low-probability mode, in step S3305, the MPU 302 stores the data in the ROM 31
2, and sets the ending period to "5 sec" by referring to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 83). Specifically, since timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 302 sets "2500" corresponding to the ending period of 5 sec.
” is set in a timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 .

In addition, when the type of the special design of the big hit game is not the special figure 1 in step S3302 (NO), in other words, when the type of the special design of the big hit game is the special figure 2, step S
At 3306, the MPU 302 determines whether the mode is the high probability mode. If the mode is the high probability mode in step S3306 (YES), step S3305
Then, the MPU 302 uses the ending period determination table (see FIG. 8) stored in the ROM 312.
3) to set the ending period to "5 sec". Specifically, since timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 302 sets the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 to “2500” corresponding to the ending period of 5 sec.

If the mode is not the high-probability mode (NO) in step S3306, in other words, if the mode is the low-probability mode, in step S3307, the MPU 302 stores the data in the ROM 31
2, and sets the ending period to "2 sec" by referring to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 83). Specifically, since timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 302 sets "1000
” is set in the timer counter T.

The value set in the timer counter T in steps S3304, S3305 and S3307 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Note that the configuration for measuring the ending period is arbitrary, and for example, it may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the notification timing of RUSH entry and right-hand navigation for RUSH in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 85, in this embodiment, since the ending period changes depending on whether the type and mode of the special symbol is a high probability mode or a low probability mode,
The pachinko machine 10 changes the notification timing of RUSH entry and right-handed navigation for RUSH (suggestion of right-handed game when shifting to fourth mode M4 (hereinafter referred to as RUSH mode)) according to the ending period selected by MPU 302. Below, referring to FIG. 85, RUSH
Mode transition processing will be described in detail.

<Pattern A>
First, referring to FIG. 85(a), the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the addition of the notification time (audio output time) TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time (audio output time) TY of the right-hand navigation for RUSH. A case of (TE≧(TX+TY)) will be described. As shown in FIG. 85(a), when the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the sum of the notification time TX of RUSH entry and the notification time TY of right-handed navigation for RUSH, R
Notification of USH rush (specifically, voice output (playback) of "○○RUSH rush") and notification time of right-handed navigation for RUSH from speaker parts 26A to 26C (specifically, "Please hit right ” is controlled to be performed within the ending period TE.

More specifically, the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" is T1 at the start of the ending period
is started after the voice start time TW4, and after the voice output of "Rush into OO RUSH", the voice output of "Please hit right" is started. Here, the voice start time TW4 is a value obtained by subtracting the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time (voice output time) TY of the right-hand navigation for RUSH from the ending period TE. At the same time or substantially at the same time as the end time T2, the voice output of "please hit right" is controlled to end.

If the ending period TE is the same as the sum of the notification time TX of RUSH entry and the notification time TY of right-handed navigation for RUSH, the time of TW4 is 0 sec. Also, Fig. 8
Also in the example shown in 5(a), it is controlled to start outputting (reproducing) the music in the RUSH mode that shifts after the jackpot game from the ending period start time T1. Specifically, from the start time T1 of the ending period TE, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled to start outputting the intro portion of the music used in the presentation of the fourth mode M4. Here, Figure 8
In the example shown in 5(a), the period of the intro portion of the music used in the presentation of the fourth mode M4 is shorter than the ending period TE. Therefore, the output of the intro part ends before the end time T2 of the ending period TE. Further, the speakers 26A to 26C are controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the output of the intro part of the music is completed.

Also, in the transition process shown in FIG. 85(a), the speaker unit 26
A to 26C are controlled to output the sound "RUSH Rush". As mentioned above "
RUSH Rush” is output from the beginning of the ending period T1 to the beginning of the voice TW4
It is controlled so that the output of the voice of "RUSH rushing" ends at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part ends. In addition, following the output of the sound "Rush into RUSH", the sound "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game is output, and at the end of the ending period T2 At the same time or substantially at the same time as "Right hit" Please stop the voice output. Therefore, the game state can be changed without interrupting the flow of the game state, the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of the game state flow, and the interest of the game is improved. can be achieved. It should be noted that control may be performed so that characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G at the end time T2 of the ending period to suggest a right-handed game. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "Please hit right", characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, the fourth mode M4 (RUSH
mode) is controlled to be displayed at the start of

<Pattern B>
Next, referring to FIG. 85(b), the ending period TE is set to the RUSH entry notification time (
Voice output time) Shorter than the time obtained by adding TX and the notification time (voice output time) TY of right-hand navigation for RUSH (TE < (TX + TY)), and the notification time (voice output time) TX or more of RUSH rush ( A case where TE≧TX) will be described. As shown in FIG. 85(b),
If the ending period TE is shorter than the sum of the notification time TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time TY of the right-hand navigation for RUSH and is equal to or greater than the notification time TX of the RUSH entry, the RUSH entry from the speaker units 26A to 26C. (Specifically, the voice output (playback) of “○○ RUSH rush”) is performed within the ending period TE, and the notification of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (specifically, the voice of “Please hit right” Output (reproduction)) is controlled to be performed after the ending period TE.

More specifically, the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" is T1 at the start of the ending period
is started after the speech start time TW5. Here, the voice start time TW5 is a value obtained by subtracting the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH entry from the ending period TE,
Control is performed so that the voice output of "Rush into 〇〇 RUSH" ends at the same time or substantially at the same time as the ending time T2 of the ending period. Also, after the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush", in other words,
Simultaneously or substantially simultaneously with the ending time T2 of the ending period, the voice output of "please hit right" is started.

If the ending period TE is the same as the notification time TX of rushing into RUSH, the time of TW5 is 0 sec. Also in the example shown in FIG. 85(b), the ending period start time T
Control is performed so that the output (reproduction) of the music in the RUSH mode, which shifts from 1 after the jackpot game, is started. Specifically, from the start time T1 of the ending period TE, the speaker unit 26A
From ~26C, the output of the intro part of the music used in the fourth mode M4 is controlled to start outputting. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 85(b), the ending period TE and the period of the intro portion of the music used in the presentation of the fourth mode M4 have the same length (time). Therefore, the output of the intro part ends at the end time T2 of the ending period. again,
The speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the output of the intro part of the music is finished.

In addition, in the transition process shown in FIG. 85(b), the speaker unit 26
A to 26C are controlled to output the sound "RUSH Rush". As mentioned above,
The output of the voice of "RUSH rush" is from the start time T1 of the ending period to the voice start time TW
5, and is controlled so that the output of the voice of "RUSH Rush" ends at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part ends. In addition, at the time T2 when the ending period ends, a voice saying "please hit right" is output to suggest a right-handed game, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. That is, the output of the voice saying "Please hit right" is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, control is performed so that the image effect of the effect MA is started. Therefore, the game state can be changed without interrupting the flow of the game state, the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of the game state flow, and the amusement of the game is improved. can be achieved. It should be noted that control may be performed so that characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G at the end time T2 of the ending period to suggest a right-handed game. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "Please hit right", a text such as "Please hit right" is displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). controlled as follows.

<Pattern C>
Next, referring to FIG. 85(c), the ending period TE is set to the RUSH entry notification time (
Shorter than the time obtained by adding TX and the notification time (voice output time) TY of right-hand navigation for RUSH (TE < (TX + TY)), and shorter than the notification time (voice output time) TX of RUSH entry The short (TE<TX) case will be described. As shown in FIG. 85(c),
If the ending period TE is shorter than the notification time TX of rushing into RUSH, the speaker unit 26
Notification of RUSH entry from A to 26C (specifically, voice output (playback) of “○○ RUSH rush”) and notification of right-hand navigation for RUSH (specifically, voice output of “Please hit right”) (
Reproduction)) is controlled to be performed after the end time T2 of the ending period TE.

More specifically, the voice output of "Rush into OO RUSH" is started at the end time T2 of the ending period TE. Further, in the case shown in FIG. 85(c), the end time T of the ending period TE
From 2, the right-hand navigation for RUSH by video is started. After the voice output of "Inrush into 〇〇 RUSH", when the voice output of "Please hit the right" is started, the right-hand navigation for RUSH has not started even though it has already entered the RUSH mode. , which is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, when the player enters the RUSH mode and at the same time outputs the voice "Please hit right", the voice overlaps with "Enter RUSH". Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 85(c), right-handed navigation for RUSH by video is started from time T2 at the end of the ending period TE without outputting the voice "please hit right". Please change the voice output to "〇〇R
It starts after the voice output of "USH Rush".

Also in the example shown in FIG. 85(c), control is performed so that the output (reproduction) of the music in the RUSH mode, which shifts to after the jackpot game from the ending period start time T1, is started. Specifically, from the start time T1 of the ending period TE, from the speaker units 26A to 26C to the fourth
It is controlled to start outputting the intro part of the music used in the production of mode M4.
Here, in the example shown in FIG. 85(c), the period of the intro portion of the music used in the presentation of the fourth mode M4 is longer than the ending period TE. Therefore, the output of the intro part continues even after the end time T2 of the ending period TE. Also, the speaker units 26A to 26
From C, after the output of the intro part of the music is completed, control is performed so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output.

In addition, in the transition process shown in FIG. 85(c), the speaker unit 26
A to 26C are controlled to output the sound "RUSH Rush". As mentioned above,
The output of the voice of "RUSH rush" is from the start time T1 of the ending period to the voice start time TW
6, and is controlled so that the output of the voice of "RUSH rush" ends at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part ends. Here, the voice start time TW6 is the same as the ending period TE. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 85(c), the time T2 at the end of the ending period TE
Then, the sound "RUSH Rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Therefore, at the end of the ending period TE, when the sound "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game is output at T2, the sound "Rush rush" and the sound "Please hit right" are output. are output overlapping. Therefore, in the transition processing shown in FIG. 85(c), the sound "Please hit right" is not output at the end time T2 of the ending period TE, and the right-hand game is suggested at the end time T2 of the ending period TE. A character such as "please hit right" is displayed on the display screen G, and the right-hand navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. That is, the display of characters such as "Right hit" on the display screen G is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Therefore, the game state can be changed without interrupting the flow of the game state, the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of the game state flow, and the amusement of the game is improved. can be achieved.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flow chart of processing for transitioning to the RUSH mode of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 86, the process of transitioning to the RUSH mode of the present embodiment will be described.
In step S3401, the MPU 402 determines whether an ending command has been received. In this determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether an ending command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . In step S3401, MPU4
02 determines that the ending command has been received (YES), step S340
At 2, the MPU 402 obtains the ending period TE based on the ending command. The ending period TE may be acquired by including information on the length (sec) of the ending period TE in the ending command transmitted from the main controller 300, or the ending period determination table shown in FIG. the sound emission control device 40
0 of the ROM 412, and the type (type) and mode (high-probability mode or low-probability mode) of the special symbol are determined from the command type to recognize the ending period TE. Also, in step S3401, when the MPU 402 does not determine that the ending command has been received (NO), it ends the rendering transition process.

In step S3403, the MPU 402 starts outputting music in the RUSH mode that shifts after the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 402 receives RUSH mode music data (
sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to BGM) from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and set them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403;
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that music data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the RUSH mode music is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3404, the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time TY of the right-hand navigation for RUSH (TE≧(T
X+TY)) is determined. In step S3404, the ending period TE
is equal to or longer than the sum of the notification time TX of rushing into RUSH and the notification time TY of right-hand navigation for RUSH (YES), in step S3405, the MPU 402 stores the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S3409 described later. A timer counter T provided in various counter areas is set. Specifically, the data table stored in the ROM 412 is referenced, and a value corresponding to TW4 is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3404, the ending period TE is set to the notification time TX and R
If the time is not longer than the addition of the USH right-handed navigation notification time TY (NO), MPU 4
02, in step S3406, the ending period TE is set to the notification time T of the RUSH entry.
It is determined whether or not it is greater than or equal to X (TE≧TX). In step S3406, if the ending period TE is equal to or greater than the notification time TX of rushing into RUSH (YES), the MPU 402
At step S3407, the RAM 4
A timer counter T provided in 13 various counter areas is set. Specifically, R
The data table stored in the OM412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to TW5 is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3406, if the ending period TE is not equal to or longer than the notification time TX of rushing into RUSH (NO), in step S3408, the MPU 402 performs step S3 described later.
A timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 is set to measure the time of 409 . Specifically, the data table stored in the ROM 412 is referenced, and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set in the timer counter T. FIG. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3409, the MPU 402 performs steps S3405 and S3407.
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the time set in step S3408 has elapsed, that is, whether or not the value set in the timer counter T has become zero. At step S3409, when the time set at step S3405, step S3407 or step S3408 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 terminates the effect transition processing.

Also, if the time set in step S3405, step S3407 or step S3408 has passed in step S3409 (YES), in step S3410 the MPU 402 starts outputting RUSH rush audio data. Specifically, the MPU
402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the RUSH rush sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C
, the output (playback) of the RUSH rushing sound is started.

In step S3411, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the RUSH rushing audio data has been completed. When the output of the voice data for rushing into RUSH has been completed in step S3411 (YES), in step S3412, the MPU 402 starts outputting the voice data for right-hand navigation for RUSH. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data of right-hand navigation for RUSH in the ROM.
412 and the common ROM 404 to set it in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and control the sound output LSI 403 so that the RUSH-inrush sound data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH rushing sound is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Moreover, when the output of the sound data of RUSH rush is not completed in step S3411 (NO), MPU402 complete|finishes production|presentation transition processing.

85 and 86 above, the ending period TE determined according to whether the type and mode of the special symbol is a high probability mode or a low probability mode, and the notification time T of the RUSH rush
Based on the comparison with the notification time TY of the right-hand navigation for X and RUSH,
Please hit the right", but the ending period TE determined according to whether the type and mode of the special symbol is a high probability mode or a low probability mode, and RUS
The notification time TX of the H rush and the notification time TY of the right-hand navigation for RUSH are known in advance.
For this reason, depending on whether the type and mode of the special symbol is a high probability mode or a low probability mode, "
The notification timing of "Rush into RUSH" and "Please hit to the right" may be determined in advance.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a data table of a notification timing determination table for RUSH entry and right-hand navigation for RUSH stored in the ROM 412 of the sound emission control device of the present embodiment. More specifically, RU for notifying the player of the RUSH mode to be shifted after the jackpot game
It is a data table for determining the notification timing of SH rush. The notification timing of RUSH entry is determined with reference to the type and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of special symbols. For example, in the case of special figure 1, if the mode is the high probability mode, "TW4" is determined as the notification timing, and if the mode is the low probability mode, "TW4" is determined as the notification timing.
5” is determined. In addition, in the case of special figure 2, if the mode is the high probability mode, "TW5" is determined as the notification timing, and if the mode is the low probability mode, "TE" is determined as the notification timing.

Here, "TW4", "TW5" and "TE" are the waiting time (waiting time) from the start time T1 of the ending period, and when "TW4" is determined as the notification timing, the start time of the ending period After T1 to TW4, the notification of "rush into RUSH" is started. Further, when "TW5" is determined as the notification timing, the notification of "RUSH rush" is started after TW5 from the start time T1 of the ending period. Further, when "TE" is determined as the notification timing, the notification of "RUSH entry" is started after TE from the start time T1 of the ending period, that is, at the end of the ending period.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing another example of the flow chart of the rendering transition processing to the RUSH mode of this embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 88, another example of the flow chart of the effect transition processing to the RUSH mode of this embodiment will be described.
In step S3501, the MPU 402 determines whether or not an ending command has been received. In this determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether an ending command is stored in various flag storage areas. If the MPU 402 determines in step S3501 that an ending command has been received (YES), in step S3502 the MPU
402 acquires information as to whether the type and mode of the special symbol of the jackpot game is a high probability mode or a low probability mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 acquires whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high probability mode or the low probability mode based on the type command received from the main controller 300 . Also, in step S3501, when the MPU 402 does not determine that the ending command has been received (NO), it ends the rendering transition processing.

In step S3503, the MPU 402 starts outputting RUSH mode music (BGM) that shifts after the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the RUSH mode music data from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403,
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the RUSH mode music is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3504, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the special symbol type of the jackpot game is the special figure 1 and the mode is the high probability mode. At step S3504, when the type of special symbol is special figure 1 and the mode is high probability mode (YES), MPU402 at step S3505, RAM41 to measure the time of step S3509 described later.
A timer counter T provided in each counter area of 3 is set. Specifically, RO
Referring to the notification timing determination table (FIG. 87) stored in M412, a value corresponding to TW4 is set in timer counter T. The value set in this timer counter T is
Each time the timer interrupt process is executed, the previous value is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S3504, when the special symbol type of the jackpot game is special figure 1 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), MPU 402 determines in step S3506 that the special symbol type is special figure 1 and the mode is low. It is determined whether the mode is the probability mode, or the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode. In step S3506, when the type of special symbol is special figure 1 and the mode is low probability mode, or the type of special symbol is special figure 2 and the mode is high probability mode (YES), MPU 402 goes to step S3507 Then, a timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 is set in order to measure the time in step S3509, which will be described later. Specifically, referring to the notification timing determination table (FIG. 87) stored in the ROM 412, a value corresponding to TW5 is set in the timer counter T. FIG. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

At step S3506, when the special symbol type is special figure 1 and the mode is low probability mode, and the special symbol type is special figure 2 and the mode is not high probability mode (NO), MPU 402
, in step S3508, RA
A timer counter T provided in various counter areas of M413 is set. Specifically, referring to the notification timing determination table (FIG. 87) stored in the ROM 412, the timer counter T is set to a value corresponding to the ending period TE. This timer counter T
is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3509, the MPU 402 performs steps S3505 and S3507.
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the time set in step S3508 has elapsed, that is, whether or not the value set in the timer counter T has become zero. At step S3509, when the time set at step S3505, step S3507 or step S3508 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 terminates the effect shift process.

Also, if the time set in step S3505, step S3507 or step S3508 has passed in step S3509 (YES), in step S3510 the MPU 402 starts outputting RUSH rush audio data. Specifically, the MPU
402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the RUSH rush sound data from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the RUSH rush sound data is read from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C
, the output (playback) of the RUSH rushing sound is started.

In step S3511, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the RUSH rushing audio data has been completed. When the output of the voice data of rushing into RUSH is completed in step S3511 (YES), in step S3512, the MPU 402 starts outputting the voice data of right-hand navigation for RUSH. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data of right-hand navigation for RUSH in the ROM.
412 and the common ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the RUSH rushing sound data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH rushing sound is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Moreover, when the output of the sound data of RUSH rush is not completed in step S3511 (NO), MPU402 complete|finishes production|presentation transition processing.

In the above description, in pattern B of FIG. 85(b), the ending period TE is
Shorter than the sum of the notification time (audio output time) TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time (audio output time) TY of the right-hand navigation for RUSH (TE < (TX + TY)), and the notification time of the RUSH entry (audio Output time) TX or more (TE ≥ TX), the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" starts after the voice start time TW5 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and at the same time or almost at the same time as the end time T2 of the ending period It is controlled so that the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" ends. However, the voice output of "00 RUSH rush" may be started from the start time T1 of the ending period. Also, in this case, "○○ RUSH
At the same time or substantially at the same time as the voice output of "Rush", the voice output of "Right shot" may be started.

In this way, in pattern B of FIG. 85(b), when controlling so that the voice output of "Rush into XX RUSH" is started from the start time T1 of the ending period, step S of FIG.
At 3407, the value to be set to the timer counter T may be set to 0, and at step S3406 of FIG. may be performed.

Furthermore, in the pattern B of FIG. 85(b), when controlling the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" to start from the start time T1 of the ending period, the value of TW5 in the notification timing determination table shown in FIG. may be set to 0, or in step S3506 of FIG. 88,
If the type of special symbol is special figure 1 and the mode is low probability mode, or the type of special symbol is special figure 2 and the mode is high probability mode (YES), MPU 402 performs the operation of step S3510 good too.

Further, in the above description, in the pattern C of FIG. 85(c), the ending period TE is
Shorter than the sum of the notification time (audio output time) TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time (audio output time) TY of the right-hand navigation for RUSH (TE < (TX + TY)), and the notification time of the RUSH entry (audio If the output time is shorter than TX (TE<TX), the speaker unit 26A
Notification of RUSH rush from 26C (specifically, voice output (playback) of "○○ RUSH rush"
) and notification of right-handed navigation for RUSH (specifically, voice output (reproduction) of "please hit right") is controlled to be performed after the end time T2 of the ending period TE. however,
The voice output of "Rush into OO RUSH" may be started from the start time T1 of the ending period. Further, in this case, the voice output of "Please hit right" may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time as the voice output of "Rush into 〇〇 RUSH".

In this way, in pattern C of FIG. 85(c), when controlling so that the voice output of "Rush into XX RUSH" is started from the start time T1 of the ending period, step S of FIG.
At 3408, the value set to the timer counter T may be set to 0, and at step S3406 in FIG. You can do it.

Furthermore, in the pattern C of FIG. 85(c), when controlling the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" to start from the start time T1 of the ending period, the value of TE in the notification timing determination table shown in FIG. may be set to 0, and in step S3506 of FIG. 88, if the special symbol type is special figure 1 and the mode is low probability mode, and the special symbol type is special figure 2 and the mode is not high probability mode ( NO), the MPU 402 may perform the operation of step S3510.

Next, another example of the transition processing to the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter referred to as RUSH mode) of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 89, the ending period TE and the fourth mode M
4, the length of the intro part of the music (BGM) (hereinafter referred to as the intro length TI) will be described. Hereinafter, another example of the transition processing to the RUSH mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 89 .

<Transition processing A>
First, referring to FIG. 89(a), the case where the ending period TE is longer than the intro length TI (when 10 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 84) will be described. In the transition process in this case, the ending period TE
is longer than the intro length TI, the output of the intro ends during the ending period TE. For this reason, from the end of the intro output to the end of the ending period TE,
A first special effect is executed. In this first special effect, for example, a sound such as "It's starting!"
The image of the character talking) is controlled to be displayed on the display screen G, and the player can see the RUS
An effect is executed to give a sense of anticipation and a sense of exhilaration for shifting to the H mode.

Specifically, from the start time T1 of the ending period TE, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled to start outputting the intro portion of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode. Further, after the output of the intro part is completed, the A melody part following the intro part is controlled to be output continuously. Also, the first special effect is executed from the end of outputting the intro to the end of the ending period TE. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, control is performed so that right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting a right-handed game is started. That is, RU
Right-hand navigation for SH is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Further, at the end time T2 of the ending period TE, control is performed so that the image effect of the effect is started.

Note that the volume of right-hand navigation for RUSH is controlled so that it is played back lower than usual. By reducing the volume of the right-hand navigation for RUSH when entering RUSH, RUS
It is possible to prevent the player from being disturbed by the voice of the right-handed navigation for RUSH "Please hit the right" at the time of H rushing, and to prevent the player from losing interest. Also, at the end of the ending period T
2, control may be performed so that characters such as "please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G to suggest a right-handed game. In this case, the display screen G may be controlled to display characters such as "Please hit right" in addition to the voice output of "Right hit". Further, in this transition processing, control is performed so that the sound of "Rush into RUSH" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro part is completed. In addition, in the example of FIG. 89(a), RU is displayed before right-hand navigation.
Although the SH entry notification is performed, the RUSH entry notification may be performed after the right navigation.

<Migration process B>
Next, the case where the ending period TE is shorter than the intro length TI (when 5 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 84) will be described with reference to FIG. 89(b). In the transition process in this case, since the ending period TE is shorter than the intro length TI, the intro is output even after the ending period TE ends.
Therefore, the second special effect is executed from the end of the ending period TE to the end of the intro output. In this second special effect, the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game and the logo mark are displayed on the display screen G, and the feeling as if the ending period continues even though the RUSH mode is entered. An effect given to the player is executed. If the difference between the length of the ending period TE and the length of the intro TI is long (large), the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game or the logo mark may be displayed on the display screen G, or an arbitrary character may be displayed. may be controlled to display and adjust the time.

Specifically, from the start time T1 of the ending period TE, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled to start outputting the intro portion of the music used in the presentation of the fourth mode M4. Further, after the output of the intro part is completed, the A melody part following the intro part is controlled to be output continuously. Also, the second special effect is executed from the end time T2 of the ending period TE to the end of outputting the intro. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, control is performed so that right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting a right-handed game is started. i.e.
Right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Also, at T4 when the intro output ends, RUSH
Control is performed so that the video effect of the effect of the mode is started.

Note that the volume of right-hand navigation for RUSH is controlled so that it is played back lower than usual. By reducing the volume of the right-hand navigation for RUSH when entering RUSH, RUS
It is possible to prevent the player from being disturbed by the voice of the right-handed navigation for RUSH "Please hit the right" when entering H, and to prevent the player from losing interest. Also, at the end of the ending period T
Second, control may be performed so that characters such as "please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G to suggest a right-handed game. In this case, control may be performed so that characters such as "please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G in addition to the voice output of "right hit". Further, in this transition processing, control is performed so that the sound of "Rush into RUSH" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro part is completed. Also, in the example of FIG. 89(b), RU after right-hand navigation
Although the SH entry notification is performed, the RUSH entry notification may be performed before the right navigation.

<Transition processing C>
Next, referring to FIG. 89(c), when the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI (the ending period TE is set to 2 sec in the ending period setting process of FIG. 84).
is set) will be explained. In the transition process in this case, the ending period T
Since E is much shorter than the intro length TI, the ending period TE ends without almost any intro part being output during the ending period TE. Therefore, in the case shown in FIG. 89(c), the intro is started to be output after the ending period TE ends. Further, after the output of the intro is finished, control is performed so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output.

Specifically, from the end time T2 of the ending period TE, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled to start outputting the intro portion of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode. Also, after the output of the intro part is completed, the A melody part following the intro part is controlled to be output continuously. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, control is performed so that right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting a right-handed game is started. That is, the RUSH right-handed navigation is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period TE, control is performed so that the image effect of the RUSH mode effect is started.

Note that the volume of right-hand navigation for RUSH is controlled so that it is played back lower than usual. By reducing the volume of the right-hand navigation for RUSH when entering RUSH, RUS
It is possible to prevent the player from being disturbed by the voice of the right-handed navigation for RUSH "Please hit the right" when entering H, and to prevent the player from losing interest. Also, at the end of the ending period T
Second, control may be performed so that characters such as "please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G to suggest a right-handed game. In this case, control may be performed so that characters such as "please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G in addition to the voice output of "right hit". Further, in this transition processing, control is performed so that the sound of "Rush into RUSH" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro part is completed.

Note that when the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI (when 2 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 84), FIG.
As shown in 9(d), without outputting the intro part, the output of the A melody part of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode starts from the speaker units 26A to 26C from the end time T2 of the ending period TE. may be controlled to In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 89(c) and 89(d), RUSH entry notification is performed after right-handed navigation, but RUSH is notified before right-handed navigation.
Intrusion notification may be performed.

<Production Transition Processing>
90 to 9 for the transition processing to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG.
3 for a detailed description. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for shifting to RUSH mode. Here, the operation of the audio light emission control device 400 in the transition processing to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG. 90 will be described.

In step S3601, the MPU 402 determines whether an ending command has been received. In this determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether an ending command is stored in various flag storage areas. If the MPU 402 determines in step S3601 that an ending command has been received (YES), in step S3602 the MPU
402 acquires information as to whether the type and mode of the special symbol of the jackpot game is a high probability mode or a low probability mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 acquires whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high probability mode or the low probability mode based on the type command received from the main controller 300 . Also, in step S3601, when the MPU 402 does not determine that the ending command has been received (NO), it ends the rendering transition process.

In step S3603, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the special symbol type of the jackpot game is the special figure 1 and the mode is the high probability mode. At step S3603, when the type of special symbol is special figure 1 and the mode is high probability mode (YES), MPU 402 at step S3604, transition processing A ( If the ending period TE is longer than the intro length TI) is executed. Details of the migration process A will be described later.

In step S3603, when the special symbol type of the jackpot game is special figure 1 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), MPU 402 determines in step S3605 that the special symbol type is special figure 1 and the mode is low. It is determined whether the mode is the probability mode, or the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode. In step S3605, if the type of special symbol is special figure 1 and the mode is low probability mode, or the type of special symbol is special figure 2 and the mode is high probability mode (YES), MPU 402 goes to step S3606 89(b
) (when the ending period TE is shorter than the intro length TI) described with reference to FIG. Details of the migration process B will be described later.

At step S3605, when the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is special figure 1 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), MPU 402 at step S3607, FIG.
, the transition process C (the ending period TE is the intro length T
is much shorter than I). Details of the migration process C will be described later.

<Transition processing A>
Next, transition processing A in step S3604 in FIG. 90 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a flowchart of migration processing A. FIG.
In step S3701, the MPU 402 sets timer counters T1 and T2 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the times of steps S3703 and S3705, which will be described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses a timer counter T
A value corresponding to the ending period TE (10 sec) is set to 1 as the measurement time, and a value corresponding to the intro length TI is set to the timer counter T2 as the measurement time. for example,
When the period of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T1
is set to "5000" and the intro length TI is 7 sec, the MPU 402
"3500" is set in the timer counter T2. The values set in the timer counters T1 and T2 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3702, the MPU 402 generates music (BGM) for effecting the RUSH mode.
to start outputting Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for effecting the RUSH mode from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data to the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Also, the MPU 402 starts displaying the effect image for the ending period. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a command to the display control device 500 so that the effect image for the ending period is displayed on the display screen G. FIG. In the display control device 500 , the MPU 502 performs control so that the effect image for the ending period is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 402 .

In step S3703, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S3701 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro part has not ended (
NO), the transition processing A is terminated without executing the processing after step S3704. Also, MP
When U402 determines that the output of the intro part has ended (YES), step S37
04 and subsequent steps are executed.

At step S3704, the MPU 402 starts the first special effect. Specifically, M
The PU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice of "Start!"
is set in the register 403b, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the voice of "Start!" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C
, the output (reproduction) of the voice "It's starting!" is started. Also, the MPU 402 controls to display on the display screen G an image corresponding to this voice (for example, an image of the character speaking). Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits the first special effect start command to the display control device 500 so that the video corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G. Display control device 5
In 00, the MPU 502 performs control so that the video corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G based on the first special effect start command transmitted from the MPU 402 .

Also, in step S3704, the MPU 402 outputs the voice "Start!"
The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice of "RUSH rush" for USH rush are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and the sound output LSI 403
is set in the register 403b, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound "RUSH Rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C
, the output (reproduction) of the voice of "RUSH Rush" is started. It is also possible to display "Start!" in characters on the display screen and output the voice of "RUSH rush" from the speaker units 26A to 26C, or to output the voice of "Start!" 26C, and the characters "RUSH Rush" may be displayed on the display screen G.

In step S3705, the MPU 402 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T1 set in step S3701 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO
), the transition processing A is terminated without executing the processing after step S3706. Also, MPU4
02 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), step S370
6 and subsequent steps are executed. At step S3706, the MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 to end the first special effect. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the sound such as "It's starting!" from the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped. Also, the MPU 402
A special effect stop command is transmitted to the display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, MP
U502 performs control so that the display of the video corresponding to the sound on the display screen G is stopped based on the first special effect stop command transmitted from MPU402.

In step S3707, the MPU 402 stores the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data for right-handed navigation for RUSH "Right-handed."
412 and the common ROM 404 to set it in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and control the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data "Right shot" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please hit right" from the speaker units 26A to 26C is started, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S3708, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the image effect for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 is the M of the display control device 500 .
The PU 502 is instructed to read and reproduce the video data for the RUSH effect stored in the effect data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 is an MP
Based on the instruction from U402, the video data for the RUSH effect is read from the effect data storage area 1032 and controlled to be displayed on the display screen G by the VDP505.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in steps S3703 and S3705 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Migration process B>
Next, transition processing B in step S3606 of FIG. 90 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of migration processing B. FIG.
In step S3801, the MPU 402 sets timer counters T1 and T2 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the times of steps S3803 and S3806, which will be described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses a timer counter T
A value corresponding to the ending period TE (5 sec) is set to 1 as the measurement time, and a value corresponding to the intro length TI is set to the timer counter T2 as the measurement time. For example, if the cycle of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T1 to "2500", and if the intro length TI is 7 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T2 to "3500". . The values set in the timer counters T1 and T2 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3802, the MPU 402 generates music (BGM) for effecting the RUSH mode.
to start outputting Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for effecting the RUSH mode from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data to the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Also, the MPU 402 starts displaying the effect image for the ending period. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a command to the display control device 500 so that the effect image for the ending period is displayed on the display screen G. FIG. In the display control device 500 , the MPU 502 performs control so that the effect image for the ending period is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 402 .

In step S3803, the MPU 402 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T1 set in step S3801 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO
), the transition process B is terminated without executing the processes after step S3804. Also, MPU4
02 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), step S380
4 and subsequent steps are executed. At step S3804, the MPU 402 starts the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 causes the display control device 50 to display on the display screen G a character image (for example, logoized Arabic numerals) corresponding to the number of winning balls won in the jackpot game.
Point to 0. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display a character image corresponding to the number of winning balls on the display screen G based on an instruction from the MPU 402 .

In step S3805, the MPU 402 stores the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data for right-handed navigation for RUSH "Right-handed."
412 and the common ROM 404 and set it in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data "Right shot" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please strike right" from the speaker units 26A to 26C is started, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S3806, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S3801 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro part has not ended (
NO), the transition process B is terminated without executing the processes after step S3807. Also, MP
When U402 determines that the output of the intro part has ended (YES), step S38
07 and subsequent steps are executed.
In step S3807, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to stop the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a second special effect stop command to the display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls the display of the character image corresponding to the number of winning balls won in the jackpot game on the display screen G based on the second special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 402 to be stopped. I do.

In step S3808, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the "RUSH rush" sound for the RUSH rush from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets "RUS
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound "H rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice of "RUSH Rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, "RUSH rush" is displayed in characters on the display screen, and "R
USH rush" may be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3809, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the image effect for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 is the M of the display control device 500 .
The PU 502 is instructed to read and reproduce the video data for the RUSH effect stored in the effect data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 is an MP
Based on the instruction from U402, the video data for the RUSH effect is read from the effect data storage area 1032 and controlled to be displayed on the display screen G by the VDP505.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in steps S3803 and S3806 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition processing C>
Next, migration processing C in step S3607 of FIG. 90 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a flow chart of migration processing C. FIG.
At step S3901, the MPU 402 sets a timer counter T1 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 to measure the time at step S3902, which will be described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T1 to the ending period TE (2s
A value corresponding to ec) is set as the measurement time. For example, if the cycle of timer interrupt processing is 2
If it is msec, the MPU 402 sets "1000" to the timer counter T1. The value set in the timer counter T1 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3902, the MPU 402 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T1 set in step S3901 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO
), the transition process B is terminated without executing the processes after step S3903. Also, MPU4
02 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), step S390
3 and subsequent processes are executed.

In step S3903, the MPU 402 generates music (BGM) for effecting the RUSH mode.
to start outputting Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for effecting the RUSH mode from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data to the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Also, the MPU 402 starts displaying the RUSH mode effect image. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a command to the display control device 500 so that the RUSH mode effect image is displayed on the display screen G. FIG. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502
Based on the command transmitted from PU402, it controls so that the image for production|presentation of RUSH mode will be displayed on the display screen G. FIG.

In step S3904, the MPU 402 stores the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data for right-handed navigation for RUSH, "Please hit right-handed."
412 and the common ROM 404 to set it in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and control the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data "Right shot" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please hit right" from the speaker units 26A to 26C is started, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in step S3902 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes transition means (MPU 302) for shifting the game state from the jackpot game (first game state) to the RUSH mode (second game state), and the RUSH mode (second game state) to the player. Notification control of RUSH entry (first notification) that enables recognition at different timings according to the type of jackpot game, specifically, the type and mode of special symbols is high probability mode or low probability mode. Means (MPU 402, speaker units 26A to 26C
) and Pachinko machines may have different ending periods depending on the type of jackpot, specifically the type and mode of the special figure, whether it is a high-probability mode or a low-probability mode.
In such a case, if the first notification is performed without considering the length of the ending period, the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the RUSH
There is a possibility that the first notification may be notified at a timing that gives a sense of discomfort, such as the first notification being performed after entering the mode (with a slight delay). However, since the pachinko machine 10 performs notification of RUSH entry (first notification) at different timings according to the type of jackpot game (first game state),
It is possible to notify the player of the RUSH entry (first notification) without making the player feel uncomfortable, thereby improving the amusement.

(2) Notification control means of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment (MPU 402, speaker unit 26
A to 26C) are RU depending on the length of the ending period of the jackpot game (first game state)
Notification of SH entry (first notification) is performed at different timings. Therefore, the RUSH entry is notified (first notification) without considering the length of the ending period, and the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the RUSH mode is entered. It is possible to prevent the first notification from being notified at a timing that gives a sense of discomfort, such as the first notification being performed later (with a slight delay).

(3) Notification control means of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment (MPU 402, speaker unit 26
A to 26C), the length of the ending period of the jackpot game (first game state) is shorter than the time required for the notification of the RUSH rush (first notification).
notification) at different times. For this reason, RU
The SH entry is notified (first notification), the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the first notification is performed after entering the RUSH mode (with a slight delay). It is possible to prevent the first notification from being notified at a timing that gives a sense of incompatibility.

[Ninth Embodiment]
In the above-described first to eighth embodiments, an embodiment has been described in which the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect is selected during the round of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, an embodiment will be described in which the type (type) of the effect of the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter referred to as RUSH mode) is selected during the ending period of the jackpot game. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described below, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to eighth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and overlapping descriptions will be omitted.

FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing the timing of the effect type selection process of this embodiment. For comparison, FIG. 94 describes the timing of the effect type selection process corresponding to the first to eighth embodiments and the timing of the effect type selection process corresponding to the present embodiment. Figure 94(a)
) is a diagram showing the flow of executing the selection effect during the round game of the first to eighth embodiments. FIG. 94(b) is a diagram showing the flow of executing the selection effect during the ending period of the present embodiment. In FIG. 94, "OP" indicates opening, "ED" indicates ending, and "R" indicates round.

First, with reference to FIG. 94(a), the flow of the effect during the jackpot game when the selection effect is executed during the round game will be described. In the sound emission control device 400, an opening effect is started with the start of the jackpot game (time t10). Next, when the opening time ends, the sound emission control device 400 ends the opening effect, starts the round game, and starts the round effect (time t11). After that, when the round game of a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) is completed, the sound emission control device 400
An effect type selection process is executed as a round effect (time t12).

In addition, in the sound emission control device 400, when the effect type selection process is executed during the round game, the selection effect is executed in the same display mode as when the effect type selection process is executed as the ending effect. After that, when all the round games are finished, the sound emission control device 400 ends the round effect and starts the ending effect (time t
13). After that, when the ending period ends, the sound emission control device 400 ends the ending effect and ends the jackpot game (time t14). After the jackpot game ends, the selected effect mode (for example, effect MB) is set, and the sound emission control device 400 displays a background image corresponding to the effect MB.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94(b), the flow of the effect during the jackpot game when the selection effect is executed during the ending period will be described. In the sound emission control device 400, an opening effect is started with the start of the jackpot game (time t20). Next, when the opening time ends, the sound emission control device 400 ends the opening effect, starts the round game, and starts the round effect (time t21).

After that, when all round games (for example, 15 rounds) are completed, the sound emission control device 400 terminates the round effect and starts the ending effect (time t22). At this time, the sound emission control device 400 executes a selection effect as an ending effect. Specifically, in the sound emission control device 400, the production MA in the RUSH mode
An operation image corresponding to ~MC is displayed. Further, in the sound emission control device 400, the information corresponding to the currently selected effect MB is different from the currently selected effect MB.
, MC is displayed larger than the information corresponding to MC.

Further, when the operation button 35 is operated during execution of the selection effect and the selected effect is changed, the information corresponding to the newly selected effect MA is not selected in the sound emission control device 400. Displayed larger than the information corresponding to the effects MB and MC (time t23)
. After that, when the ending period ends, the sound emission control device 400 ends the ending effect (selection effect) and ends the jackpot game (time t24). After the jackpot game ends, the selected production mode (here, production MA) is set,
The sound emission control device 400 displays a background image corresponding to the effect MA.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect type selection process of this embodiment. In this embodiment, the effect type selection process is executed during the ending period. Therefore, in this embodiment, the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes the effect type selection process after receiving the ending command in step S1514 of FIG. different. Effect type selection processing according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S4001, the MPU 402, based on the content of the received type command,
It is determined whether or not the game result is the "best result". MPU 402 performs step S400
If it is determined at 1 that the game result is not the "best result" (NO), the effect type selection process is terminated.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S4001 that the game result is the "best result" (YES), in step S4002 it determines whether an ending command has been received (R
It is determined whether or not the flag of the ending command is stored in various flag areas of the AM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S4002 that the ending command has not been received (NO), it ends the effect type selection process.

In step S4002, if the MPU 402 determines that the ending command has been received (YES), in step S4003, the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 for measuring the ending period is set to the ending period TE. Set the corresponding value. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

At step S4004, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 to start the effect type selection effect. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the image of the effect type selection effect, specifically the image shown in FIG. indicate.

At step S4005, the MPU 402 accepts the selection of the effect type mode MA, MB, MC by the operation button 35 by the player. The player presses the left direction button 35b and/or the right direction button 35c of the operation buttons 35 to display the image GA displayed on the display screen G.
Select an image corresponding to a desired effect MA-MC from ~GC. In this step S4005, when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GA, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 50 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.
control 0. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.

Further, when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GB, the MPU 402
The display control device 500 is controlled to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. Further, when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GC, the MPU 402 replaces the selected image GC with the other images GA and G.
The display control device 500 is controlled to display larger than B. In the display control device 500,
Based on an instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500
to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB.

In step S4006, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player has operated the operation button 35 to decide the effect, that is, whether or not the pressing operation of the decision button 35a has been accepted.
If it is determined in step S4006 that the pressing operation of the decision button 35a has been accepted (YES), in step S4007 the MPU 402 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the RUSH mode effect. In other words, in step S4006, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GA selected, in step S4007,
The MPU 402 sets the effect MA as the effect of the RUSH mode that shifts after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores RU in various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 .
A flag of the effect MA is set as the effect of the SH mode.

Also, in step S4006, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GB selected, in step S4007, the MPU 402 sets the effect MB as a RUSH mode effect that shifts after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 41
A flag of the production MB is set as the production of the RUSH mode in the various setting flag storage area of 3. Also, in step S4006, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GC selected, in step S4007, the MPU 402 sets the effect MC as a RUSH mode effect that shifts after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 4
A flag of the production MC is set in the 13 various setting flag storage area as the production of the RUSH mode.

In step S4008, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE set in step S4003 has elapsed based on the value of the timer counter. If it is determined in step S4008 that the ending period TE has passed (YES)
, the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process. Also, in step S4008,
If it is determined that the ending period TE has not passed (NO), the MPU 402 instructs the player to confirm whether or not to cancel the determined effect in step S4009.

Specifically, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 to display on the display screen G a character image for confirming whether to cancel the determined effect, such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display a character image such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" Also, the MPU 402 asks, "Do you want to cancel the presentation?
” is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, MP
U402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice "Do you want to cancel the effect?" From 26A to 26C "
Do you want to cancel the performance? ” is controlled so that the sound output LSI 403 is output.

At step S4010, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the effect determined at step S4006 has been cancelled. Specifically, the MPU 402 operates the player's operation button 35
It is determined whether or not the performance has been canceled based on the operation of . In step S4010, if it is determined that the effect has been canceled (YES), the MPU 402
Return to operation 4005 . Also, in step S4010, when it is determined that the effect has not been canceled (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection effect process.

If it is determined in step S4006 that the pressing operation of the enter button 35a has not been accepted (NO), the MPU 402 checks in step S4011 whether or not the ending period set in step S4003 has ended. Determined based on the value of In step S4011, when it is determined that the ending period has ended (YES), in step S4012, the MPU 402 sets a predetermined effect (for example, effect MA) as the effect in RUSH mode in step S4012. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA as the effect of the RUSH mode in various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . If it is determined in step S4011 that the ending period has ended (YES), the effect corresponding to the image being selected on the display screen G may be automatically determined as the effect in the RUSH mode. In addition, MP
U402 ends the effect type selection effect processing when the effect is set in step S4012.

Also, when it is determined that the ending period has not ended in step S4011 (NO), the MPU 402 instructs the player to make a notification prompting selection/decision of the effect in step S4013. Specifically, the MPU 402 displays "
Decide on the performance! , ``Determine the effect! In the display control device 500, based on an instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display effects such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" Display a character image that prompts the selection/decision of In addition, the MPU 402 controls so that sounds such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. in particular,
The MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to sounds such as “Determine the effect!”, “Determine the effect!” , and controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the speaker units 26A to 26C output sounds such as "Determine the performance!"

FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the notification timing of RUSH entry and right-hand navigation for RUSH in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, the RUSH effect is determined during the ending period of the jackpot game. Change the notification timing of right-handed navigation (suggestion of right-handed game at the time of shifting to RUSH mode). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 96, the processing for shifting to the RUSH mode will be described in detail.

In this embodiment, since the RUSH mode effect is selected and determined during the ending period, the RUSH mode effect is not determined at the start of the ending period, and the RUSH mode music is output (played) from the start of the ending period. )Can not do it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96(a) to (c), output (reproduction) of RUSH mode music (BGM) is started from time T3 when the effect of RUSH mode is determined. controlled by

<Pattern A>
First, referring to FIG. 96(a), the remaining time TR of the ending period TE after the determination of the RUSH mode effect (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining time TR) is the notification time (audio output time) TX of the RUSH entry. and the notification time (audio output time) TY of right-handed navigation for RUSH are added (TR≧(TX+TY)).

As shown in FIG. 96(a), the remaining time TR is equal to the RUSH entry notification time TX and the RUSH
If the time is equal to or longer than the sum of the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation system, the speaker units 26A to 26
Notification of RUSH rush from C (specifically, voice output (reproduction) of "○○ RUSH rush") and notification time of right-handed navigation for RUSH from speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically, "right-handed Please” is controlled to be output (reproduced) within the remaining time TR.
More specifically, the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" is the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush from the time T3 when the production is decided, the remaining time TR, and the notification time of the right-hand navigation for RUSH (voice After the time (TR-(TX+TY)) obtained by subtracting the output time) TY has passed, the voice output of "Please hit right" starts after the RUSH entry is announced.

<Pattern B>
Next, referring to FIG. 96(b), ending period T after determination of RUSH mode effect
The remaining time TR of E is shorter than the time obtained by adding the notification time (audio output time) TX of RUSH entry and the notification time (audio output time) TY of right-hand navigation for RUSH (TR < (TX + TY
)), and the notification time (audio output time) of RUSH entry is longer than or equal to TX (TR≧TX). As shown in FIG. 96(b), when the remaining time TR is shorter than the sum of the notification time TX of RUSH entry and the notification time TY of right-hand navigation for RUSH, and is equal to or greater than the notification time TX of RUSH entry. , the notification of the RUSH rush from the speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically, the voice output (reproduction) of "○○ RUSH rush") is performed within the remaining time TR, and R
The voice output of the USH right-handed navigation notification (specifically, the voice output (reproduction) of "Please hit right") is controlled to be performed after the ending period ends.

More specifically, the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" is the time (TR-TX) obtained by subtracting the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush from the remaining time TR from the production decision time T3.
After the elapse of , the voice output of "please hit right" is started.

<Pattern C>
Next, referring to FIG. 96(c), ending period T after determination of RUSH mode effect
The remaining time TR of E is shorter than the notification time (audio output time) TX of rushing into RUSH (TR<
TX) case. As shown in FIG. 96(c), when the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is shorter than the notification time TX of the RUSH rush, the speaker units 26A to 26C announce the RUSH rush (specifically, "○○ RUSH The sound output (reproduction) of "Rush" is controlled so as to be performed after the end time T2 of the ending period TE.

More specifically, the voice output of "Rush into OO RUSH" is started after the remaining time TR has elapsed from the time T3 when the effect is decided. Further, in the case shown in FIG. 96(c), right-handed navigation for RUSH by video is started at time T2 when the ending period TE ends. After the voice output of "Rush into 〇〇RUSH", when the voice output of "Please hit right" is started, the right-hand navigation for RUSH has not started even though it has already entered RUSH mode. , which is disadvantageous to the player. Also, when the player enters the RUSH mode and at the same time outputs the voice "Please hit right", the voice overlaps with "Enter RUSH". For this reason, in the example shown in FIG.
From 2, start right-handed navigation for RUSH by video, and output the voice of "Please hit right" to "
It starts after the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush".

In this embodiment, since the RUSH mode effect is selected and determined during the ending period, the RUSH mode effect is not determined at the start of the ending period, and the RUSH mode music is output (played) from the start of the ending period. )Can not do it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96(c), control is performed to start outputting (reproducing) RUSH mode music (BGM) from the time the RUSH mode effect is determined.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for shifting to the RUSH mode according to this embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 97, the processing for shifting to the RUSH mode according to this embodiment will be described. In addition, in this embodiment, in order to select and determine the effect of RUSH mode during the ending period,
At the start of the ending period, the effect of the RUSH mode has not been determined, and the music in the RUSH mode cannot be output (reproduced) from the start of the ending period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the RUSH mode music (BGM
) is configured to start output (reproduction).

In step S4101, the MPU 402 determines whether or not an ending command has been received. In this determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether an ending command is stored in various flag storage areas. If it is determined in step S4101 that an ending command has been received (YES), in step S4102 the MPU 402 acquires the ending period TE. Here, acquisition of the ending period TE is performed by main controller 300
Information on the length (sec) of the ending period TE may be included in the ending command transmitted from, or the time of the ending period TE may be stored in the ROM 412 of the sound emission control device 400 in advance. It may also be possible to obtain the

Next, in step S4103, the MPU 402 starts a timer to calculate the remaining time TR in step S4106, which will be described later. Also, in step S4101, if the MPU 402 does not determine that the ending command has been received (NO),
Terminate the production transition process.

Next, in step S4104, the MPU 402 moves to RUS after the jackpot game.
It is determined whether or not the type (type) of H mode presentation has been determined. Step S4104
In, when the type (type) of the effect of the RUSH mode that shifts after the jackpot game is determined (YES), in step S4105, the MPU 402 starts outputting the music (BGM) of the RUSH mode that shifts after the jackpot game . Specifically, the MPU 402
The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the determined effects MA to MC are read out from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data is output to the speaker unit. 26A-26
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from C. As a result, the speaker section 26A~
Output (playback) of the intro portion of the RUSH mode music corresponding to the effect determined from 26C is started.

More specifically, when the effect MA is determined, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the effect MA from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404, and outputs sound. Register 40 of LSI 403
3b, and the sound output LSI is set so that the music data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
403 is controlled. Further, when the effect MB has been determined, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the effect MB from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and stores them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. , and controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the music data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the effect MC is determined, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the effect MC from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and outputs the sound output LSI 403 .
, and controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the music data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Next, in step S4106, the MPU 402 calculates the remaining time TR of the ending period TE (hereinafter also referred to as remaining time TR). Specifically, the MPU 402 stops the timer started in step S4103, and calculates the time (hereinafter also referred to as measurement time) for which the timer was started in step S4103 and stopped in step S4106. Next, the MPU 402 subtracts the measured time from the ending period TE to obtain the ending period TE.
remaining time TR is calculated. Moreover, in step S4104, MPU402 complete|finishes production|presentation transfer processing, when it is not determined that the classification of the production|presentation of RUSH mode which transfers after a jackpot game is determined (NO).

In step S4107, the MPU 402 determines that the remaining time TR is equal to or greater than the sum of the notification time TX of RUSH entry and the notification time TY of right-hand navigation for RUSH (TR≧(TX+TY
))). In step S4107, if the remaining time TR is equal to or greater than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of rushing into RUSH and the notification time TY of right-handed navigation for RUSH (YES), the MPU 402 proceeds to step S4108, which will be described later. A timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 to measure the time of S4112
to set. Specifically, from the remaining time TR to the notification time of RUSH entry (audio output time)
Time (TR-(
A value corresponding to TX+TY)) is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4107, if the remaining time TR is shorter than the sum of the notification time TX of RUSH entry and the notification time TY of right-hand navigation for RUSH (NO), the MPU 402
In step S4109, the remaining time TR is equal to or greater than the notification time TX of rushing into RUSH (TE≧T
X) is determined. At step S4109, if the remaining time TR is equal to or greater than the notification time TX of rushing into RUSH (YES), the MPU 402 at step S4110
A timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 is set in order to measure the time in step S4112, which will be described later. Specifically, the timer counter T is set to a value corresponding to the time (TR-TX) obtained by subtracting the notification time (audio output time) TX of the RUSH entry from the remaining time TR. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

At step S4109, if the remaining time TR is shorter than the notification time TX of rushing into RUSH (NO), at step S4111, the MPU 402 sets various counter areas of the RAM 413 to measure the time at step S4112, which will be described later. timer counter T
to set. Specifically, the timer counter T is set to a value corresponding to the remaining time TR. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4112, the MPU 402 performs steps S4108 and S4110.
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the time set in step S4111 has elapsed, that is, whether or not the value set in the timer counter T has become zero. At step S4112, when the time set at step S4108, step S4110 or step S4111 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 terminates the effect transition process.

If the time set in step S4108, step S4110, or step S4111 has passed in step S4112 (YES), in step S4113, the MPU 402 starts outputting RUSH rush audio data. Specifically, the MPU
402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the RUSH rush sound data from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the RUSH rush sound data is read from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C
, the output (playback) of the RUSH rushing sound is started.

In step S4114, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the RUSH rushing audio data has ended. When the output of the RUSH rushing voice data has ended in step S4114 (YES), in step S4115, the MPU 402 starts outputting the voice data of right-hand navigation for RUSH. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data of right-hand navigation for RUSH in the ROM.
412 and the common ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the RUSH rushing sound data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH rushing sound is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Moreover, when the output of the sound data of RUSH rush is not completed in step S4114 (NO), MPU402 complete|finishes production|presentation transition processing.

In the above description, in the pattern B of FIG. 96(b), the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is the notification time (audio output time) TX for rushing into RUSH and the notification time (audio output time) for right-hand navigation for RUSH. shorter than the time added with TY (TE < (TX + TY)),
And if the notification time (audio output time) of the RUSH rush is TX or more (TE ≥ TX), the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" will be from the time T3 when the production is decided, the notification time of the RUSH rush from the remaining time TR ( It is controlled to start after the passage of time (TR-TX) obtained by subtracting the audio output time) TX. However, the voice output of "00 RUSH rush" may be started from the production decision time T3. Also in this case, the voice output of "Please hit right" may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time as the voice output of "Rush into 〇〇 RUSH".

In this way, in pattern B of FIG. 96(b), when controlling so that the sound output of "Rush into XX RUSH" is started from the production decision time T3, in step S4110 of FIG. The value to be set may be 0, or step S410 in FIG.
9, when the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the notification time TX of the RUSH entry (YES), the MPU 402 may perform the operation of step S4113.

Further, in the above description, in pattern C of FIG. 96(c), the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is the notification time (audio output time) TX for rushing into RUSH and the notification time (audio output time) for right-hand navigation for RUSH. shorter than the time added with TY (TE < (TX + TY)),
And if it is shorter than the notification time (audio output time) TX of the RUSH rush (TE < TX), the RUSH rush notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically, the voice output (playback) of "○○ RUSH rush" ) is performed after the end time T2 of the ending period TE. However, the voice output of "00 RUSH rush" may be started from the production decision time T3. Also, in this case, the voice output of "Please hit right" may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time as after the voice output of "Rush into 〇〇 RUSH".

In this way, in pattern C of FIG. 96(c), when controlling so that the voice output of "Rush into 〇〇 RUSH" is started from the production decision time T3, step S4111 of FIG. 97 is executed.
, the value set in the timer counter T may be set to 0, or step S4 in FIG.
In 109, when the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is not equal to or longer than the notification time TX of rushing into RUSH (NO), the MPU 402 may perform the operation of step S4113.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes transition means (MPU 302) for transitioning the game state from a jackpot game (first game state) to a RUSH mode (second game state) after the jackpot game,
Notification of RUSH entry (first notification) that allows the player to recognize the RUSH mode
Notification control means (MPU 402, speaker units 26A to 26C) for performing, and RUSH mode (
and an operation means (operation button 35) for accepting determination of the type of effect in the second game state), and the notification control means is configured to RUSH in response to the timing at which the type of effect in the RUSH mode (second game state) is determined. Notification of rushing (first notification) is performed at different timings.

There is a pachinko machine in which the selection of the type of presentation of the RUSH mode to be shifted after the jackpot game is performed during the ending period of the jackpot game. In such a case, without considering the timing at which the type of effect in RUSH mode was determined, in other words, the length of the remaining time of the ending period,
When the USH entry is notified, the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the first notification is performed after entering the RUSH mode (with a slight delay). There is a possibility that the 1 notification will be notified at a timing that gives a sense of incongruity. However, according to the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the RUSH entry is notified at different timings according to the timing at which the selection of the effect type of the RUSH mode is received. Notification can be performed, and interest can be improved.

(2) The notification control means of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment performs notification of RUSH entry at different timings according to the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot technique. For this reason,
The RUSH entry is notified without considering the length of the remaining time of the ending period, and the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the RUSH.
It is possible to prevent the first notification from being notified at a timing that gives a sense of discomfort, such as the first notification being performed after entering the mode (with a slight delay).

(3) The notification control means of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot technique is shorter than the time required for notification of the RUSH entry.
The SH entry is notified at different timings. For this reason, the RUSH entry is notified without considering the length of the remaining time of the ending period, and the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH
To prevent the first notification from being notified at an uncomfortable timing, such as the first notification being performed across a mode or the first notification being performed after entering the RUSH mode (with a slight delay). be able to.

[Modified Examples of Eighth and Ninth Embodiments]
It should be noted that even when the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability mode or low probability mode) as described in the eighth embodiment, the ninth embodiment A form of selecting the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect during the round game can be applied. In this case, the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability mode or low probability mode), and the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect during this changing ending period ) will be selected.

However, during the ending period, perform the first notification (“RUSH entry”) and the second notification (“Please hit right”), or perform only the first notification during the ending period, and perform the second notification when entering the RUSH mode or do not perform the first and second notifications during the ending period and perform the first and second notifications when entering the RUSH mode, the remaining time TR of the ending period
depends on Therefore, when the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol of the eighth embodiment and the mode of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability mode or low probability mode),
When applying the form of selecting the type (type) of the effect of the RUSH mode during the round game of the ninth embodiment, it is possible to correspond with the flow chart of the transition processing described with reference to FIG. 97 .

Specifically, when an ending command is received in step S4101 of FIG. 97 (Y
ES), in step S4102 of FIG. 97, the ending period TE corresponding to the type and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the symbol of the jackpot game is obtained as in step S3402 of FIG. And when calculating the remaining time TR in step S4106 of FIG.
By subtracting the measured time from the ending period TE corresponding to and calculating the remaining time TR of the ending period TE, the type (type) of the special symbol of the eighth embodiment and the mode of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability mode or If the ending period changes depending on the low probability mode,
The form which selects the kind (type) of production|presentation of RUSH mode during the round game of 9th Embodiment is applicable.

<Migration processing A>
First, referring to FIG. 98(a), when the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI (
For example, the case where the effect is selected immediately after the ending period TE starts) will be described. In the transition process in this case, since the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI, the output of the intro ends during the ending period TE. Therefore, the first special effect is executed from the end of outputting the intro to the end of the ending period TE. This first special production is
For example, the speaker units 26A to 26C output sounds such as "It's starting!" A production that gives a sense of anticipation and a sense of exhilaration to shift to the RUSH mode is executed.

Specifically, from the time T3 when the RUSH mode effect is determined, the speaker units 26A to 26C to R
Control is performed to start outputting the intro part of the music used in the USH mode production. Further, after the output of the intro part is completed, the A melody part following the intro part is controlled to be output continuously. Also, the first special effect is executed from the end of outputting the intro to the end of the ending period TE. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, control is performed so that right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting a right-handed game is started. That is, RUS
Right-hand navigation for H is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Further, at the end time T2 of the ending period TE, RUS
It is controlled so that the video effect of the effect for H is started.

Note that the volume of right-hand navigation for RUSH is controlled so that it is played back lower than usual. By reducing the volume of the right-hand navigation for RUSH when entering RUSH, RUS
It is possible to prevent the player from being disturbed by the voice of the right-handed navigation for RUSH "Please hit the right" when entering H, and to prevent the player from losing interest. Also, at the end of the ending period T
Second, control may be performed so that characters such as "please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G to suggest a right-handed game. In this case, control may be performed so that characters such as "please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G in addition to the voice output of "right hit". Further, in this transition processing, control is performed so that the sound of "Rush into RUSH" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro part is completed. Also, in the example of FIG. 98(a), RU after right-hand navigation
Although the SH entry notification is performed, the RUSH entry notification may be performed before the right navigation.

<Migration process B>
Next, referring to FIG. 98(b), the case where the remaining time TR is shorter than the intro length TI (for example, the case where the effect is selected after several seconds have passed since the start of the ending period) will be described. . In the transition process in this case, since the remaining time TR is shorter than the intro length TI, the intro is output even after the ending period TE ends. Therefore, the second special effect is executed from the end of the ending period TE to the end of the intro output. In this second special effect, the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game and the logo mark are displayed on the display screen G, and the RUSH
An effect is executed that gives the player a feeling as if the ending period continues in spite of being in the mode. Note that the length of the remaining time TR and the intro length T
If the difference from I is long (large), the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game or the logo mark may be displayed on the display screen G, or an arbitrary character may be displayed to adjust the time. may be controlled.

Specifically, from time T3 when the RUSH mode effect is determined, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled to start outputting the intro portion of the music used in the fourth mode M4 effect. Further, after the output of the intro part is completed, the A melody part following the intro part is controlled to be output continuously. Also, the second special effect is executed from the end time T2 of the ending period TE to the end of outputting the intro. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, control is performed to start right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting a right-handed game. That is, R
USH right-handed navigation is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Further, when the intro output ends, control is performed so that the image effect of the RUSH mode effect is started.

Note that the volume of right-hand navigation for RUSH is controlled so that it is played back lower than usual. By reducing the volume of the right-hand navigation for RUSH when entering RUSH, RUS
It is possible to prevent the player from being disturbed by the voice of the right-handed navigation for RUSH "Please hit the right" when entering H, and to prevent the player from losing interest. Also, at the end of the ending period T
Second, control may be performed so that characters such as "please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G to suggest a right-handed game. In this case, control may be performed so that characters such as "please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G in addition to the voice output of "right hit". Further, in this transition processing, control is performed so that the sound of "Rush into RUSH" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro part is completed. Also, in the example of FIG. 98(b), RU after right-hand navigation
Although the SH entry notification is performed, the RUSH entry notification may be performed before the right navigation.

<Transition processing C>
Next, referring to FIG. 98(c), the case where the remaining time TR is much shorter than the intro length TI (for example, the case where the effect is selected immediately before the end of the ending period TE) will be described. In the transition process in this case, since the remaining time TR is much shorter than the intro length TI,
The ending period TE ends with almost no intro part being output during the ending period TE. Therefore, in the case shown in FIG. 98(c), the intro is started to be output after the ending period TE ends. Further, after the output of the intro is finished, control is performed so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output.

Specifically, from the end time T2 of the ending period TE, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled to start outputting the intro portion of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode. Further, after the output of the intro part is completed, the A melody part following the intro part is controlled to be output continuously. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, control is performed so that right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting a right-handed game is started. That is, the RUSH right-handed navigation is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period TE, control is performed so that the image effect of the RUSH mode effect is started.

Note that the volume of right-hand navigation for RUSH is controlled so that it is played back lower than usual. By reducing the volume of the right-hand navigation for RUSH when entering RUSH, RUS
It is possible to prevent the player from being disturbed by the voice of the right-handed navigation for RUSH "Please hit the right" at the time of H rushing, and to prevent the player from losing interest. Also, at the end of the ending period T
2, control may be performed so that characters such as "please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G to suggest a right-handed game. In this case, the display screen G may be controlled to display characters such as "Please hit right" in addition to the voice output of "Right hit". Further, in this transition processing, control is performed so that the sound of "Rush into RUSH" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro part is completed.

When the remaining time TR is much shorter than the intro length TI, as shown in FIG. 98(d), the speaker units 26A to 26C are started from the end time T2 of the ending period TE without outputting the intro part. , may be controlled to start outputting the A melody part of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode. Further, in the examples of FIGS. 98(c) and 98(d), the RUSH entry notification is performed after the right-handed navigation, but the RUSH entry notification may be performed before the right-handed navigation.

<Production Transition Processing>
99 to 1 for the transition processing to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG.
03 for a detailed description. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for shifting to RUSH mode. Here, the operation of the audio light emission control device 400 in the transition processing to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG. 98 will be described.

In step S4201, the MPU 402 determines whether or not an ending command has been received. In this determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether an ending command is stored in various flag storage areas. If the MPU 402 determines in step S4201 that an ending command has been received (YES), in step S4202 the MPU
402 obtains the ending duration TE based on the ending command. Note that the length of the ending period TE (s
The ending period TE may be obtained by including the information of ec), or the value corresponding to the indicated ending period TE is also stored in the ROM 412 of the sound emission control device 400, and the jackpot is determined from the command type. The type may be determined to recognize the ending period TE. Moreover, in step S4201, when MPU402 determines with not having received the ending command (NO), it complete|finishes production|presentation transition processing.

At step S4203, the MPU 402 starts a timer to calculate the remaining time TR at step S4205, which will be described later.
Next, in step S4204, the MPU 402 moves to RUS after the jackpot game.
It is determined whether or not the type (type) of H mode presentation has been determined. Step S4204
In the case where the type (type) of the effect of the RUSH mode to be shifted after the jackpot game is not determined (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.
Also, in step S4204, when the type (type) of the effect of the RUSH mode to be shifted after the jackpot game is determined (YES), in step S4205, MPU40
2 calculates the remaining time TR. Specifically, the MPU 402 stops the timer started in step S4203 and subtracts the time measured by the timer from the ending period TE acquired in step S4202 to calculate the remaining time TR of the ending.

In step S4206, the MPU 402 selects the music (B
GM) is longer than the intro length TI. If the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI in step S4206 (YES), the MPU 402 executes transition processing D (if the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI) in step S4207. Details of the migration process D will be described later.

If the remaining time TR is not longer than the intro length TI in step S4206 (NO), the MPU 402 determines whether the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length T1 in step S4208.
It is determined whether or not it is the same as I. In step S4208, if the remaining time TR is the same as the intro length TI (YES), the MPU 402, in step S4209,
Execute the transition process E (if the remaining time TR is the same as the intro length TI). Details of the migration process E will be described later.

In step S4208, if the remaining time TR is not the same as the intro length TI (
NO), MPU 402, in step S4210, sets the remaining time TR to the intro length TI.
is longer than half (TI/2). In step S4210, if the remaining time TR is longer than half the intro length TI (TI/2) (YES), the MPU 40
2 executes transition processing F (if remaining time TR is longer than half of intro length TI (TI/2)) described with reference to FIG. 98(b) in step S4211. Details of the migration process F will be described later.

In step S4210, if the remaining time TR is not longer than half the intro length TI (TI/2) (NO), the MPU 402 in step S4212
Transition processing G (remaining time TR is half of intro length TI (
TI/2) if not longer than). Details of the migration process G will be described later.

Note that in step S4210, the remaining time TR is half the intro length TI (TI/2).
However, the length of the remaining time TR to be classified in step S4210 is arbitrary.

<Transition processing D>
Next, migration processing D in step S4207 in FIG. 99 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a flow chart of migration processing D. FIG.
In step S4301, the MPU 402 calculates the absolute value |TR-TI| of the value obtained by subtracting the intro length TI from the remaining time TR.
In step S4302, the MPU 402 sets timer counters T2 and T3 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the times of steps S4304 and S4306, which will be described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses a timer counter T
A value corresponding to the intro length TI is set as the measurement time in 2, and a value corresponding to the absolute value (|TR-TI|) calculated in step S4301 is set as the measurement time in the timer counter T3. For example, the period of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec, and the intro length TI
is 10 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T2 to "5000", and if the absolute value is 2 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T3 to "1000".
to set. The values set in the timer counters T2 and T3 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4303, the MPU 402 generates music (BGM) for effecting the RUSH mode.
to start outputting Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for effecting the RUSH mode from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data to the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4304, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended, based on whether the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S4302 is 0 or not. When the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro part has not ended (
NO), the transition process D is terminated without executing the processes after step S4305. Also, MP
When U402 determines that the output of the intro part has ended (YES), step S43
05 and subsequent steps are executed.

At step S4305, the MPU 402 starts the first special effect. Specifically, M
The PU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice of "Start!"
is set in the register 403b, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the voice of "Start!" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C
, the output (playback) of the voice "It's starting!" is started. Also, the MPU 402 controls to display on the display screen G an image corresponding to this voice (for example, an image of the character speaking). Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits the first special effect start command to the display control device 500 so that the video corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G. Display control device 5
In 00, the MPU 502 performs control so that the video corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G based on the first special effect start command transmitted from the MPU 402 .

Also, in step S4305, the MPU 402 outputs the voice of "Start!"
The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice of "RUSH rush" for USH rush are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and the sound output LSI 403
is set in the register 403b, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound "RUSH Rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C
, the output (reproduction) of the voice of "RUSH Rush" is started. It is also possible to display "Start!" in characters on the display screen and output the voice of "RUSH rush" from the speaker units 26A to 26C, or to output the voice of "Start!" 26C, and the characters "RUSH Rush" may be displayed on the display screen G.

In step S4306, the MPU 402 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T3 set in step S4302 is zero. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO
), the transition process D is terminated without executing the processes after step S4307. Also, MPU4
02 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), step S430
7 and subsequent steps are executed. At step S4307, the MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 to end the first special effect. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the sound such as "It's starting!" from the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped. Also, the MPU 402
A special effect stop command is transmitted to the display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, MP
U502 performs control so that the display of the video corresponding to the sound on the display screen G is stopped based on the first special effect stop command transmitted from MPU402.

In step S4308, the MPU 402 stores the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data for right-handed navigation for RUSH, "Please hit right-handed."
412 and the common ROM 404 and set it in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data "Right shot" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please strike right" from the speaker units 26A to 26C is started, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S4309, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the image effect for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 is the M of the display control device 500 .
The PU 502 is instructed to read out and reproduce the video data for the RUSH effect stored in the effect data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 is an MP
Based on the instruction from U402, the video data for the RUSH effect is read from the effect data storage area 1032 and controlled to be displayed on the display screen G by the VDP505.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in steps S4304 and S4306 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition processing E>
Next, transition processing E in step S4209 of FIG. 99 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a flowchart of migration processing E. FIG.
At step S4401, the MPU 402 sets a timer counter T2 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time at step S4403, which will be described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets a value corresponding to the intro length TI to the timer counter T2 as the measurement time. For example, if the cycle of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec and the intro length TI is 10 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T2 to "5000". The value set in the timer counter T2 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 99, since the intro length TI and the remaining time TR are the same length, instead of setting a value corresponding to the intro length TI to the timer counter T2 in step S4401, A value corresponding to the remaining time TR may be set in the timer counter T4.

In step S4402, the MPU 402 generates music (BGM) for the production of the RUSH mode.
to start outputting Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for effecting the RUSH mode from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data to the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4403, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended, based on whether the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S4402 is 0 or not. When the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro part has not ended (
NO), the transition process D is terminated without executing the processes after step S4405. Also, MP
When U402 determines that the output of the intro part has ended (YES), step S44
04 and subsequent steps are executed.

In step S4404, the MPU 402 stores the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data for right-handed navigation for RUSH, "Please hit right."
412 and the common ROM 404 and set it in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data "Right shot" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please strike right" from the speaker units 26A to 26C is started, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S4405, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the image effect for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 is the M of the display control device 500 .
The PU 502 is instructed to read out and reproduce the video data for the RUSH effect stored in the effect data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 is an MP
Based on the instruction from U402, the video data for the RUSH effect is read from the effect data storage area 1032 and controlled to be displayed on the display screen G by the VDP505.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in step S4403 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition process F>
Next, the transition processing F in step S4211 of FIG. 99 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a flowchart of migration processing F. FIG.
In step S4501, the MPU 402 sets timer counters T2 and T4 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the times of steps S4503 and S4506, which will be described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses a timer counter T
A value corresponding to the length TI of the intro is set as the measurement time in T2, and a value corresponding to the remaining time TR is set in the timer counter T4 as the measurement time. For example, if the period of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec and the intro length TI is 10 sec, the MPU 402
When "5000" is set in the timer counter T2 and the remaining time TR is 7 sec, M
PU 402 sets "3500" to timer counter T4. This timer counter T
2, The value set in T4 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4502, the MPU 402 generates music (BGM) for effecting the RUSH mode.
to start outputting Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for effecting the RUSH mode from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data to the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4503, the MPU 402 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T4 set in step S4501 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO
), the transition process F is terminated without executing the processes after step S4504. Also, MPU4
02 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), step S450
4 and subsequent steps are executed. At step S4504, the MPU 402 executes the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 causes the display control device 50 to display on the display screen G a character image (for example, logoized Arabic numerals) corresponding to the number of winning balls won in the jackpot game.
Point to 0. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display a character image corresponding to the number of winning balls on the display screen G based on an instruction from the MPU 402 .

In step S4505, the MPU 402 stores the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data for right-handed navigation for RUSH "Right-handed."
412 and the common ROM 404 and set it in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data "Right shot" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please strike right" from the speaker units 26A to 26C is started, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S4506, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S4501 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro part has not ended (
NO), the transition process F is terminated without executing the processes after step S4507. Also, MP
When U402 determines that the output of the intro part has ended (YES), step S45
07 and subsequent steps are executed.
In step S4507, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to stop the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a second special effect stop command to the display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls to stop the display of the character image corresponding to the number of winning balls won in the jackpot game on the display screen G based on the second special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 402. I do.

In step S4508, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the "RUSH rush" sound for the RUSH rush from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets "RUS
The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound "H rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C start to output (reproduce) the "RUSH rush" notification, in other words, the "RUSH rush" sound. It should be noted that "RUSH Rush" may be displayed in characters on the display screen and the voice of "RUSH Rush" may be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4509, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the image effect for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 is the M of the display control device 500 .
The PU 502 is instructed to read out and reproduce the video data for the RUSH effect stored in the effect data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 is an MP
Based on the instruction from U402, the video data for the RUSH effect is read from the effect data storage area 1032 and controlled to be displayed on the display screen G by the VDP505.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in steps S4503 and S4506 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition processing G>
Next, the transition processing G in step S4212 of FIG. 99 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a flowchart of migration processing G. FIG.
At step S4601, the MPU 402 sets a timer counter T4 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time at step S4602, which will be described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets a value corresponding to the remaining time TR to the timer counter T4 as the measurement time. For example, if the cycle of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec and the remaining time TR is 2 sec, the MPU 402 sets "1000" to the timer counter T4. The value set in the timer counter T4 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4602, the MPU 402 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T4 set in step S4601 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO
), the transition process G is terminated without executing the processes after step S4603. Also, MPU4
02 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), step S460
3 and subsequent processes are executed.

In step S4603, the MPU 402 generates music (BGM) for effecting the RUSH mode.
to start outputting Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for effecting the RUSH mode from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data to the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Also, the MPU 402 starts displaying the RUSH mode effect image. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a command to the display control device 500 so that the RUSH mode effect image is displayed on the display screen G. FIG. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502
Based on the command transmitted from PU402, it controls so that the image for production|presentation of RUSH mode will be displayed on the display screen G. FIG.

In step S4604, the MPU 402 stores the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data for right-handed navigation for RUSH "Right-handed."
412 and the common ROM 404 and set it in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data "Right shot" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please strike right" from the speaker units 26A to 26C is started, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in step S4602 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

[Tenth embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment, a pachinko machine 10 having a so-called latent probability variable function that hides without clearly indicating that it is in the probability variable state will be described. The latent probability variation is to execute in a manner in which it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the state has shifted to a probability variation state in which the probability of a big hit is high. In the following description, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those already described in the above-described embodiment, redundant description is omitted, and only different points will be described.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing values of random numbers related to allocation destinations of types of jackpots of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 104, the values of random numbers related to the sorting destination of the jackpot type are stored in the sorting table storage area (see FIG. 1) of the ROM 312 provided as sorting information group storage means.
7) as a distribution table (distribution information group). The allocation table is shown in FIG.
4(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 104(b). The MPU 302 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the first result display section reservation area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the first start port 84a It is a table that is referred to when a jackpot type lottery is performed. The first distribution table, as shown in FIG. 104(a), includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)", "small round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to few rounds)", A plurality of distribution results of "few rounds low probability result (low probability result corresponding to few rounds)" and "most favorable result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)" are assigned as distribution destinations. Note that the second distribution table is shown in FIG.
1 is the same as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

Each distribution result shown in FIG. 104 has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winner lottery mode after completion of opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 83 in opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the win/fail lottery modes (1) will be described. The "low-probability result" and "small-round low-probability result" are sorting results in which the win-or-fail lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode is
At least, it continues until "big hit winning" is achieved in the lottery. The "few-round high-probability result" and "most advantageous result" are sorting results in which the win-fail lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described. The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

“Few-round high-probability result” and “few-round low-probability result” are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times). The "most advantageous result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Since the difference in the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 83 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) has already been explained, redundant explanation will be omitted.

<Reach display>
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the case of "big hit winning" in the winning lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 91 displays the same result as the stop result. A symbol combination having an odd number (for example, "1.1.1") or the same even number (for example, "2.2.2") is stop-displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. In addition, when the winning lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution lottery results in a "low probability result", the symbol display device 91 displays the same even number (for example, "2 2 2”) is stop-displayed on the stop-symbol-effective line L. In addition, when it becomes "big hit winning" in the winning lottery and is distributed to "small round high probability result" or "small round low probability result" in the distribution lottery, the pattern display device 91
As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same even number (for example, "4.4.4") is stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. FIG. Furthermore, if the result of the lottery is "special loss" instead of "big win", the symbol display device 91 will not display a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result, but will display "normal loss" in the lottery. A special combination of symbols with different numbers that will not be selected in the event of a "result" (
For example, "3.4.1") is stop-displayed on the stop symbol effective line L.

Reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (
In the case of "jackpot winning" in the success or failure lottery and being distributed to "best result", "low probability result", "small round high probability result" or "small round low probability result" in the distribution lottery) , occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is used when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed ("jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, and "special losing result" without becoming "jackpot winning" in the distribution lottery) (if
, does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S505 of FIG. 26 in the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Only steps different from those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted.

(Step S711)
In the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, the MPU 302 sets a flag in the RAM 313 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, the MPU 302
If the sorting result is specified as "low probability result", set the low probability result flag, and if it is specified as "small round high probability result", set the small round high probability result flag, "
If it is specified as "few rounds, low probability result", the flag for the few rounds, low probability result is set, and if it is specified as "most favorable result", the most favorable result flag is set. afterwards,
MPU302 performs the process after step S716.

<Display duration setting processing>
Next, the display duration setting process of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
will be described in detail with reference to.

In step S<b>4701 , the MPU 302 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 313 . Also, the MPU 302 determines whether or not a ready-to-win display is generated on the symbol display device 91 . Specifically, in step S4702, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the sorting result determined in step S709 is the "special exclusion result".

In step S4702, the MPU 302, if the sorting result is not the "special loss result" (
NO), in step S4703, it is determined whether the success/failure result determined in step S704 of FIG. If the MPU 302 determines in step S4703 that the success/failure result is the “normal outlier result” (YES), in step S4704, the reach table stored in advance in the ROM 312 and the reach random number stored in the reserved ball storage area A ready-to-win generation lottery is executed by comparison with the value of the counter C3.

In step S4705, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs in the ready-to-win occurrence lottery in step S4704. When the MPU 302 determines in step S4705 that the ready-to-win display occurs (YES), in step S4706, the ROM 31
2 is referred to the display duration table for reach generation stored in 2. Also, the MPU 302
If it is determined in step S4702 that the sorting result is a "special loss result" (YES),
If it is determined in step S4703 that the success/failure result is not the "normal deviation result" (NO), or if it is determined that the reach lottery is not won in step S4705, in other words, the reach display does not occur (NO), step In S4707, the non-reach display duration table stored in the ROM 312 is referred to.

In step S4708, the MPU 302 performs step S4706 or step S470.
After executing the process of 7, the display continuation time is determined. Specifically, the MPU 302, based on the reach occurrence display duration table referred to in step S4706 or the reach non-occurrence display duration table referred to in step S4707, the variation type counter CS acquired from the movement type counter buffer Determines the display duration corresponding to the value of Also, MPU3
02 sets the display continuation time determined in step S4707 to display continuation time counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 .

Also in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 400 may be configured to perform a lottery as to whether or not to generate this ready-to-win display.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Only steps different from those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted.

(Step S906)
When the MPU 302 determines in step S904 that the win/fail result is the “special loss result” (YES), in step S905, the MPU 302 sets “2” to the open/close counter SOC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 . This opening/closing counter SOC counts the total number of opening/closing times of the large winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.
02 is a counter for specifying. In addition, when the MPU 302 determines that the success/failure result is not the "special loss result" in step S904 (NO), that is, when it determines that the success/failure result is the "jackpot winning", the distribution result is small in step S906. It is determined whether or not it is a round result (“few rounds high probability result” or “few rounds low probability result”).

<Transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode>
Next, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described in detail.
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment.
In step S4801, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "best result". If the MPU 302 determines in step S4801 that the distribution result is the "best result" (YES), in step S4802 the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM.
Set to 313. If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode to the high-frequency support mode.

In step S<b>4803 , the MPU 302 clears the count limit flag stored in the RAM 313 .
Here, the high-frequency support mode is continued at least until "big hit" is won in the lottery if the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number of times limit flag is not set.

In step S4804, the MPU 302 sets the high probability mode flag to the RAM313. If the high-probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the winning/failing lottery mode to the high-probability mode. This high probability mode is at least "jackpot winning" in the lottery
This is continued until After that, the MPU 302 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When ending the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 302 sets the flags (low-probability result flag, high-probability result flag for few rounds, high-probability result flag for few rounds, low-probability result flag , and best result flags) and special outlier flags. Further, in step S701 of the above-described fluctuation start process (see FIG. 27), the MPU 302 determines whether the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 313, thereby determining whether the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. It is determined whether

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S4801 that the distribution result is not the "best result" (NO), in step S4805 the distribution result is the "few rounds high probability result".
It is determined whether or not. When the MPU 302 determines in step S4805 that the allocation result is the "few rounds high probability result" (YES), in step S4806 the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM313. If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. With this, the MPU 30
2 sets or maintains the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S4807, the MPU 302 sets "100" to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313. FIG. In step S4808, MP
U302 sets a count limit flag in RAM313. The MPU 302 has a RAM 31
If the number limit flag is already set in 3, it is maintained.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end standard number of times set in the number-of-games counter, are counted. Continue until digested. MPU 302 is 1
When 00 games have been played, the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 302 executes these processes in step S3 of the above-described normal process (see FIG. 23).
06, it is executed as an electrical support process, but the detailed description is omitted.

In step S4809, the MPU 302 sets the high probability mode flag to the RAM313. If the high-probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the winning/failing lottery mode to the high-probability mode. This high probability mode is at least "jackpot winning" in the lottery
This is continued until After that, the MPU 302 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, when the MPU 302 determines in step S4805 that the distribution result is not the "few rounds high probability result" (NO), in step S4810, the MPU 302 determines whether the distribution result is the "few rounds low probability result". judge. When the MPU 302 determines in step S4810 that the sorting result is the “small round low probability result” (YES), in step S4811 the high probability mode flag is cleared. As a result, the MPU 302 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is continued at least until a "big win" is obtained in the winning lottery and the distribution result is other than "small round low-probability result" or "low-probability result".

In step S4812, the MPU 302 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 313. FIG. If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode to the high-frequency support mode. In step S4813, the MPU 302 stores the RAM 31
"100" is set to the value of the number-of-games counters provided in the various counter areas of 3.
In step S4814, the MPU 302 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 313. FIG. The MPU 302 maintains the count limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313 . After that, the MPU 302 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end standard number of times set in the number-of-games counter, are counted. Continue until digested. MPU 302 is 1
When 00 games have been played, the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 302 executes these processes in step S3 of the above-described normal process (see FIG. 23).
06, it is executed as an electrical support process, but the detailed description is omitted.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S4810 that the distribution result is not the "small round low probability result" (NO), in step S4815 it determines whether the distribution result is the "low probability result".

If the MPU 302 determines in step S4815 that the sorting result is not the "low probability result" (NO), that is, if it determines that the success/failure result is the "special failure result", the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is performed. exit.
Moreover, when MPU302 determines with a distribution result being a "low probability result" in step S4815 (YES), in step S4816, it clears a high probability mode flag.
As a result, the MPU 302 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is continued at least until a "big win" is obtained in the winning lottery and the distribution result is other than "small round low-probability result" or "low-probability result".

In step S4817, the MPU 302 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 313. FIG. If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode to the high-frequency support mode. In step S4818, the MPU 302 stores the RAM 31
"100" is set to the value of the number-of-games counters provided in the various counter areas of 3.
In step S4819, the MPU 302 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 313. FIG. The MPU 302 maintains the count limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313 . After that, the MPU 302 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end standard number of times set in the number-of-games counter, are counted. Continue until digested. MPU 302 is 1
When 00 games have been played, the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 302 executes these processes in step S3 of the above-described normal process (see FIG. 23).
06, it is executed as an electrical support process, but the detailed description is omitted.

In this way, if the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the allocation result in the distribution lottery is the "most advantageous result" or the "small round high probability result", the game state changes to the current game state. Regardless, after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. Here, when the distribution result is the "best result" in the distribution lottery, the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery. In addition, if the distribution result in the distribution lottery is "small round high probability result", the high probability mode continues until at least "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, and the high frequency support mode is the specified number of times (100
times).

Also, if the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is a "low probability result" or a "small round low probability result", the game state will be regardless of the current game state. After the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode are entered. The low-probability mode continues at least until a "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode is a low-frequency support when 100 game rounds are completed without "jackpot win" in the lottery. mode.

Further, when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, when the winning result in the winning lottery is a "special losing result" or a "normal losing result", the game state does not shift.

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. MPU 402 of audio light emission control device 400
executes a timer interrupt process that advances the game. In this timer interrupt processing, the MPU
402 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes the timer interrupt process of FIG.

In step S4901, the MPU 402 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 402 receives a command from the MPU 302 , it stores the received command in the RAM 413 . Specifically, the RAM 413 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 302 .
2 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 302 . The MPU 402 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

For example, the MPU 302 controls performance control including basic information necessary for the game, such as the result of the jackpot lottery (lottery result of whether it is a jackpot or a loss, and if it is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot), information on the number of pending balls in operation, and the fluctuation time of special symbols. A command (type command, variation pattern command, or decorative drawing designation command) is transmitted, and the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 receives this. Moreover, MPU302 transmits the production|presentation control command (production stop command) which instruct|indicates production stop after predetermined time (special design fluctuation time) progress, and MPU402 receives this. Furthermore, with respect to the information specifying the game state, the MPU 302 transmits an effect control command (game state specification command or jackpot command) including the information at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the game state transition occurs). and the MPU 402 receives it. MP
U402, in other words, the current game state is grasped on the side of the sound emission control device 400, and the transition to a predetermined effect mode is controlled.

In step S4902, the MPU 402 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 302 of the main controller 300. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 402
It executes an effect for a game round, an effect for an open/close execution mode, and the like. In step S4903, M
PU 402 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the command received from MPU 302 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 402 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. . Since the effect determination processing in step S4902 has already been described, redundant description will be omitted.

In step S4904, the MPU 402 controls the display lamp devices 23A and 23B based on the effect determination processing in step S4902 and the demonstration display execution processing in step S4903.
, light emission control processing for controlling the light emission of the first to third holding lamp portions 95a to 95a to 96a.
In step S4905, the MPU 402 executes audio control processing for audio-controlling the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the effect determination processing in step S4902 and the demonstration display execution processing in step S4903.

In step S4906, the MPU 402 performs power recovery notification processing (step S416) in the main processing (see FIG. 25) and normal notification processing (step S1303) in the front door frame open monitoring processing (FIG. 34). Then, an abnormality notification process is performed. Since the details of the abnormality notification process have already been described, redundant description will be omitted.

In step S4907, the MPU 402 executes result display processing. In the result display process, a process for displaying a result screen is executed when the high-frequency support mode (time saving) ends without winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the variable probability state.
The details of the result display processing will be described later.

In step S4908, the MPU 402 executes suggestion effect processing. In the suggestive effect process, the MPU 402 executes an effect suggesting the possibility that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state at a predetermined timing. Details of the suggestion effect processing in step S4908 will be described later.
After that, the MPU 402 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by sound emission control device 400>
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like.

In step S5001, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302 have been received. MPU 402 performs step S50
If it is determined in 01 that each command has not been received (NO), the processing from step S5009 is executed. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that each command has been received in step S5001 (YES), in step S5002, based on the content of the type command, the game result is "loss result"("special failure result", other than "few rounds high probability result", "few rounds low probability result", "best result", and "low probability result").

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5002 that the game result is not the "loss result" (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S5003 whether or not the game result is the "special loss result". When the MPU 402 determines in step S5003 that the game result is not the "special loss result" (NO), in step S5004, it executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines that the game result is "
When it is determined to be the most advantageous result, the symbols having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers (for example, "1.1.
1” or “2.2.2”) is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Also, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a “few rounds high probability result” or a “few rounds low probability result”, the same even number Information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers (for example, "4, 4, 4") is determined. Furthermore, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a "low-probability result", the symbols having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L (for example, "2 2 2”) to determine the information related to the combination.

Also, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the “special loss result” in step S5003 (YES), the MPU 402 executes common symbol determination processing in step S5005. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 402 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3-4-1"). It should be noted that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

In addition, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "loss result" in step S5002 (YES), in other words, when it determines that the game result is the "normal failure result", step S5
At 006, a symbol determination process for normal failure is executed. In this normal-off symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When determining that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 402 determines information relating to a combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like. When the MPU 402 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 402 determines information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. Specifically, the MPU 402 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S5004, step S5005, or step S5006, the MPU 402 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S5007. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 402 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to data pre-stored in the ROM 412 . Specifically, the MPU 402 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In addition, the MPU 402 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and audio control of the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S5008, the MPU 402 performs steps S5003 and S5005.
Alternatively, a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes in step S5006 and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected in step S5007 are transmitted to the display control device 500. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 is the MPU 40
Based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from 2, the data table for executing the effect for the game cycle on the pattern display device 91 is read from various data storage areas of the program ROM 512. Then, the MPU 502 updates the VDP 5 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) comes.
05 to output a command. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the effect for the game cycle based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400, and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 402 on the stop symbol effective line L. to finally stop displaying.

After executing the process of step S5008, or if it is determined in step S5001 that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S5009 and subsequent steps. In step S5009, the MPU 402 performs open/close execution mode processing. In the opening/closing execution mode process of step S5009, the MPU 402 determines whether or not an opening command has been received, and if it determines that an opening command has not been received, executes the processes from step S5010. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the opening command is received, the MPU 402 determines the type of the game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the determined type of the game result. Execute the process.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 402 selects the effect A as the opening/closing execution mode effect when determining that the game result is the “special loss result”. Also, MP
U402 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode when determining that the game result is the "few rounds high probability result" or "few rounds low probability result". Also, the MPU 402
When it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the effect C is displayed as the effect for the open/close execution mode.
to select. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "low probability result", it selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Incidentally, the duration of the effect A corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short period of time in the opening and closing execution mode. Also, the duration of the effect B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed twice in a long time mode in the opening and closing execution mode. Also, the duration of the production C and the production D is
It corresponds to the time when opening and closing the big winning opening 83a is executed 15 times in a long time mode in the opening and closing execution mode.

Next, the MPU 402 selects the display lamp device 23 based on the selection result of the effects A to D.
A and 23B are controlled for light emission, and voice control is executed for speaker units 26A to 26C. Next, the MPU 402 transmits to the display control device 500 an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to an effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the determined type of game result. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads from the program ROM 512 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 91 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91
The effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 is executed.

After executing the process of step S5009, the MPU 402 determines in step S5010 whether or not to generate an effect type selection process for causing the player to select the mode effect after the end of the jackpot game. Execute the selection process. This effect type selection process will be described later in detail.

In step S5011, the MPU 402 executes effect transition processing. In effect transition processing, the MPU 402 performs transition processing to the mode effect after the end of the jackpot game selected in step S5010. Details of the effect transition processing in step S5011 will be described later.

In step S5012, the MPU 402 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 402 executes processing for advancing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode and the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends, for example, based on the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 302. . After that, the MPU 402 ends the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment and the game state. Specifically, FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction. The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. Probable Result", "Most Favorable Result", and "Low Probable Result" distribution results.

Here, as shown in the second column of the table in FIG.
This is the game result selected when the jackpot winning is not achieved (symbol x in the figure). again,
The sorting result is the game result selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure). Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 83a is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", it does not shift to the lottery mode. Also, in the "special out-of-game result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols (for example, "3, 4, 1"). Also, in the case of the "special out-of-range result", the transition to the support mode is not made.

In the "small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of two times, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed twice in a long time mode. . In addition, in the "small round high probability result", the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "few-round high-probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number (for example, "4.4.4"). In addition, in the "small round high probability result", the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times. In addition, the symbol display device 91 does not display, on the display screen G, an image indicating that the high-probability mode is set in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In the "small round low probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of two times, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed twice in a long time mode. . In addition, in the "small round low probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. In addition, in the "few rounds low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number (for example, "4.4.4"). In addition, in the "small round low probability result", the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed 15 times in a long time mode. In addition, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number (for example, "1.1.1" or "2.2.2").
), the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode. In addition, in the "best result", the support mode shifts to a high-frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times.

In the "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed 15 times in a long time mode. Here, in the "best result", the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same even number. In addition, in the "low-probability result", the support mode shifts to a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment and the effects.
The effect selected in the “special out-of-order result” is the effect A. The production A includes an opening production A1 for the opening/closing execution mode, an production A2 for opening and closing the variable winning device in the opening/closing execution mode, and an ending production A3 for the opening/closing execution mode. there is

The effect selected in the "few rounds high probability result" is the effect B. The effects B include an opening effect B1 for the opening/closing execution mode, a effect B2 for opening and closing the variable winning device, an ending effect B3 for the opening/closing execution mode, and a high-frequency support mode effect. B4 is included.

The effect selected in the "few rounds low probability result" is the same effect B as the "few rounds high probability result". The effects B include an opening effect B1 for the opening/closing execution mode, a effect B2 for opening and closing the variable winning device, and an ending effect B3 for the opening/closing execution mode.
Effect B4 during the high-frequency support mode is included.

The effect selected in the "best result" is the effect C. The effect C includes an effect C1 for opening the open/close execution mode, an effect C2 for opening and closing the variable winning device,
The effect C3 during the ending of the opening/closing execution mode and the effect C4 during the high frequency support mode are included.

The effect selected in the "low-probability result" is the effect D. The effects D include an opening effect D1 for the opening/closing execution mode, a effect D2 for opening and closing the variable winning device, an ending effect D3 for the opening/closing execution mode, and a high-frequency support mode effect. D4 is included.

As described above, the "few-round high-probability result" and the "few-round low-probability result" differ depending on whether the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode.
are executed twice for a long period of time, the support mode shifts to a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times, and the effect is the effect B. Further, in the "few rounds high probability result", the symbol display device 91 does not display on the display screen G an image clearly indicating the high probability mode. Therefore, the player confirms the stop result (if the stop result of the "few rounds high probability result" is a combination of symbols having the same even number), the game result is "few rounds high probability result". and "few round low probability results" cannot be grasped. In other words, the "small round high probability result" is a latent probability change, and even if it becomes "small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery and shifts to the high probability mode, the pattern display device 91 is disguised as if the win/loss lottery mode has not been shifted in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode.

However, despite being a high probability mode, the latent probability mode that does not notify that fact,
Because it is difficult to determine whether the current mode is the high probability mode, some players immediately lose their expectation for the big win and continue to play the game even though it is in the latent probability mode. may be discontinued. For this reason, as will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes, at a predetermined timing, an effect suggesting the possibility of a variable latent probability state. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state, and can enjoy the game without stress. In addition, it is possible to play the game while enjoying at what timing the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability change state appears.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance time of the opening performance in each performance is the same. Also, in the present embodiment, the effect time of the ending effect in each effect is the same. However, the presentation time of the opening presentation and the presentation time of the ending presentation are arbitrary, and the presentation time of the opening presentation and the presentation of the ending presentation may be different times. Also, for each game result (excluding the small round high probability result and the small round low probability result), that is, the production time may be around for each opening production, or even if the production time is different only for some opening production good. Furthermore, for each game result (excluding the small round high probability result and the small round low probability result), that is, the production time may be around for each ending production, or even if the production time is different only for part of the ending production good.

Note that the performance of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment does not necessarily have to be configured as a series of performances. For example, depending on the model of the gaming machine, a "promotion effect" or a "step-up notice effect" may be performed. When the promotion effect is performed, the promotion occurrence effect is performed as the promotion effect during the operation of the variable winning device 83 (during the opening/closing execution mode). Also, when the step-up notice effect is performed, the effect contents differ depending on how far the step-up is performed. In this way, when a promotion effect or a step-up effect is performed, at least a part of the effect is different, so it is not always necessary to form a series of effects.

In the "promoting effect", the combination of the jackpot results with even-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed on one effective line regardless of whether the result is a low-probability result or the most advantageous result in the game round that results in the jackpot result. In addition to the stop result, an effect indicating whether or not the winning lottery mode after the open/close execution mode will be the high probability mode during the subsequent opening/closing execution mode is included. For example, in the opening and closing execution mode after the most advantageous result, a promotion occurrence effect is performed as a promotion effect,
In the opening/closing execution mode after the low probability result or the small round low probability result, the promotion non-generating effect is performed as the promotion effect.

In addition, the "step-up notice performance" is to perform the jackpot notice step by step while changing the content of the notice and the reliability of the notice. Specifically, in the step-up notice effect, a predetermined effect step including the display of effect images on the symbol display device 91 is executed up to a predetermined step out of a plurality of stages (for example, 5 stages) according to the reliability of the big win. be. That is, in the step-up notice effect, the reliability of the big hit is set to be higher as the stage of the effect step progresses.

<Regarding Suggestion Effect Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIGS. 111 to 117 (excluding FIG. 112) are diagrams showing flowcharts of the suggestive rendering process (S4908 in FIG. 107) of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the lottery result of the jackpot game is "small round high probability result" (
It is configured so that it is not possible to grasp whether it is a low probability result) or a “few round low probability result” (fake), but depending on the player, the expectation for the big win immediately decreases Even though it is in the mode (latent probability variable state), the game may be stopped. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, an effect (
Suggestion effect) is configured to be executed at a predetermined timing. 111 to 11 below
7 (excluding FIG. 112), the suggestion effect by the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a flow chart for executing the suggestive effect during the high-frequency support mode (during time saving). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 111, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 when executing the suggestive effect during the high-frequency support mode will be described. In addition, the suggestive effect is executed before the number of fluctuations in the high-frequency support mode reaches the specified number of times (100 times). It is described as being executed.

In step S5101, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S5101 that it has not received the type command of "few rounds high probability result" (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5101 that the type command of "small round high probability result" has been received (YES), the MPU 402 checks in step S5102 whether the high frequency support mode after the end of the jackpot game has been started. judge. in particular,
The MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “high frequency support mode” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . The MPU 402, step S5102
, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode has not started (NO), the MPU 4
02 ends the execution processing of the suggestive effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5102 that the high-frequency support mode has started (YES), the MPU 402 sets a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations in the high-frequency support mode in step S5103. Specifically, the MPU 402
"n" (n is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and less than 100) is set in a variation counter FC provided in various counter areas of the AM 413 . This fluctuation number counter FC, when the game result is a "few round high probability result", M
This is a counter for identification by PU 402 .

In step S5104, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a fluctuation end command has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether a flag corresponding to the fluctuation end command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S5104 that the fluctuation end command has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution process.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5104 that the fluctuation end command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation number counter FC to update the value in step S5105.
In step S5106, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the variation number counter FC is "0" or less. When the MPU 402 determines in step S5106 that the value of the variation number counter FC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it ends the suggestion rendering process.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the value of the variation number counter FC is equal to or less than "0" in step S5106 (YES), in step S5107, it executes the process of suggestion effect. As an example of the suggestive effect, the MPU 402 executes one or a combination of sound, light emission, video and movable character. For example, when outputting a sound, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read sound data suggesting the latent probability change from the common ROM 404 and reproduce it. Based on an instruction from the MPU 402, the sound output LSI 403 reads out sound data suggesting that the latency probability is variable from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it (outputs it from the speaker units 26A to 26C).

Further, when the light emission suggests that the latency probability is variable, the MPU 402 reads the light emission data suggesting the latency probability variation from the ROM 412 or the common ROM 404,
The display lamp devices 23A and 23B are caused to emit light based on the read emission data. In addition, when suggesting that the probability of latency is variable, the MPU 402 transmits to the display control device 500 a latency probability suggestion command for displaying a video (including an image) suggesting that the probability of latency is variable. The display control device 500 causes the display screen G to display a video (including an image) suggesting that the probability of latency is changed based on the latency probability suggestion command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 (MPU 402). In addition, when suggesting that the image (image) is latent probability change,
The production B4 in the high-frequency support mode between the low-probability result of the few rounds and the low-probability result of the few rounds described in FIG. . Also, in this case, in the battle effect described above with reference to FIG. may be suggested to

In the above description, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect is fixed (after the n-th change), but the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, a number from 1 to 49 is determined by lottery (a counter may be used for the lottery) before step S5103. The MPU 402, step S51
At 03, a value determined by lottery is set in the variable number counter FC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 . In addition, the MPU 402 performs a lottery as to whether or not to execute the suggestive effect each time the game (fluctuation) during the high-frequency support mode (during time reduction), and the number of games (variation number) during the high-frequency support mode (during time reduction) ) is the specified number of times, if the lottery is won within the specified number of times, the suggestive effect is executed, and the number of games during the high-frequency support mode (time saving) is the specified number of times, which is the specified number of times. If you do not win the above lottery, at the time of the final game (100
The suggestion effect may be executed in the second variation). Further, the contents of the suggestive effect may be changed according to the number of times the player wins the lottery to decide whether to execute the suggestive effect. In this case, since the content of the suggestive effect differs depending on when the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is won, the player can be given the pleasure of trying to see various suggestive effects.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment cannot grasp whether the game result is the “few rounds high probability result” or the “few rounds low probability result”. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, an effect suggesting the possibility of a variable latency state is executed at a predetermined timing (during the high-frequency support mode (during time reduction)). As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state, and can enjoy the game without stress. In addition, it is possible to play the game while enjoying at what timing during the shortening of the working hours the effect suggesting the possibility of the variable latent state appears.

Next, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestion effect when the result screen is displayed after the high-frequency support mode will be described. In the following description, since the suggestive effect is executed on the presentation screen (result screen) such as the number of winning balls after the high-frequency support mode, the result display of step S4907 in FIG. 107 will be described. After explaining the processing for use, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect after the high-frequency support mode (during the display of the result screen) will be explained.

It should be noted that the result screen is a screen showing information about the privilege given to the player in the high-probability mode. For example, when a player wins a big win and shifts to the high probability mode, the player wins a big win again during the high probability mode, and the high probability mode may continue. Information on the benefits given to the player in the high probability mode, such as the number of times the high probability mode has been won again during the high probability mode and information on the prize balls paid out due to the winning of the jackpot. is displayed on the pattern display device 91 as a result screen.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a flow chart of result display processing of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. The result display processing will be described below with reference to FIG. The result display processing is a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (step S4907 in FIG. 107).
is executed by the MPU 402 of the audio light emission control device 400 as.

In step S5201, total processing for result display is executed. The tallying process for result display calculates the information necessary for displaying the result screen based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 300 and the command indicating the number of times the jackpot has been won during the high probability mode. do.

In step S5202, it is determined whether or not a final special game round end command has been received from the MPU 302 of the main control device 300. In step S5202, when it is determined that the final special game round end command is received from MPU 302 (YES), step S5
Proceeding to 203 , a result display start command is transmitted to the display control device 500 . The display control device 500 that has received the result display start command executes processing for displaying the result screen on the pattern display device 91 . After that, the process for result display ends. On the other hand, in step S5202, when it is determined that the last special game round end command has not been received from the MPU 302 (NO), this result display process is terminated without executing step S5203.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a flow chart for executing a suggestion effect when the result screen is displayed after the high-frequency support mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 113, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect when the result screen is displayed after the high-frequency support mode will be described.

In step S5301, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S5301 that the type command of "few rounds high probability result" has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5301 that it has received the type command of "few rounds high probability result" (YES), in step S5302 the MPU 402 determines whether or not a result display start command has been transmitted to the display control device 500. do. The MPU 402 is
If it is determined that the result display start command has been transmitted in step S5302 (YES)
, the MPU 402 executes suggestive effect processing in step S5303. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been described in step S5107 of FIG. 111, so redundant description will be omitted.

In addition, when suggesting that the probability of latency is changed by video, the MPU 402 transmits to the display control device 500 a latency probability suggestion command for displaying a video (including an image) suggesting that the probability of latency is changed. The display control device 500 includes an audio emission control device 400 (MPU 402).
Based on the latent probability suggesting command transmitted from, a video (including an image) suggesting that the latent probability is changed is superimposed on the result screen and displayed on the display screen G. Also, in the above description, MP
The timing at which U402 executes the suggestion effect is after it is determined that the result display start command has been transmitted, in other words, immediately after the result screen is displayed on the display screen G.
The timing at which the PU 402 executes the suggestion effect may be while the result screen is being displayed on the display screen G. Also, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect may be after the result screen is displayed. In this case, in step S5302 in FIG. 113, the MPU 402 issues a "result display stop command" to the display control device 500 to end the display of the result screen.
has been sent, and if a "result display stop command" has been sent to the display control device 500 (YES), the MPU 402 in step S5303 is configured to execute a suggestive rendering process. good.

In addition, on the result screen after the high frequency support mode, the number of continuations of the jackpot game (so-called number of consecutive games), the type of each jackpot game (number of rounds and name of the jackpot game), the total number of winning balls, etc. are displayed on the display screen G. You may make it Also, on the result screen, when displaying the type of each jackpot game (the number of rounds and the name of the jackpot game), for each jackpot game, whether the lottery was won in the variable state or the lottery in the normal state as a suggestive effect may be displayed on the display screen G at the same time. Furthermore, when the number of consecutive villas is large, the amount of information displayed on the result screen also increases. Therefore, the time for displaying the result screen on the display screen G may be changed according to the number of consecutive villas. For example, the time for displaying the result screen on the display screen G may be increased by a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) each time the number of consecutive villas increases by one.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a flow chart for executing suggestive effect processing during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high-frequency support mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. the following,
With reference to FIG. 114, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 when executing the suggestive effect during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high-frequency support mode will be described.

In step S5401, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S5401 that it has not received the type command of "few rounds high probability result" (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5401 that the type command of "small round high probability result" has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S5402 whether or not the high frequency support mode after the end of the jackpot game has been started. judge. Specifically, M
The PU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the "high-frequency support mode" is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S5402 that the high-frequency support mode has not started (NO), the MPU 40
2 ends the execution processing of the suggestive effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5402 that the high-frequency support mode has started (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S5403 whether or not a jackpot has been won. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores "few rounds high probability result", "few rounds low probability result", and "most advantageous result" corresponding to the big win in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413.
, "low-probability result" is stored. MPU
402, when it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in step S5403 (NO),
The execution processing of the suggestion effect is ended.

In step S5404, when the MPU 402 determines that the jackpot has been won in step S5403 (YES), the MPU 402 decides whether or not the jackpot has been won in step S5403 before the end of the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether a flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413, in other words, whether the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is not cleared. . M.
If the PU 402 determines in step S5404 that the high-frequency support mode is not yet to end, in other words, that the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is cleared (NO),
The execution processing of the suggestion effect is ended.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5404 that the high-frequency support mode has not ended, in other words, the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode has not been cleared (Y
ES), the MPU 402 executes suggestive effect processing in step S5405. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been described in step S5107 of FIG. 111, so redundant description will be omitted.

In the above description, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect is when the jackpot is won, but the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, it is determined by lottery (a counter may be used for the lottery) in which round of the jackpot game won in step S5403 the suggestion effect is to be executed. The MPU 402, at the time of the round game determined by lottery, step S54
05 suggestion effect is executed. In addition, the MPU 402 performs a lottery for each round to determine whether or not to execute the suggestive effect, and if the lottery is won until the ending command is received or the final round (second round) of the winning jackpot game is won, If the above-mentioned lottery is not won until the ending command is received or until the final round of the winning jackpot game, the suggesting effect is executed in the ending period of the jackpot game or the final round of the winning jackpot game. can be Further, the content of the suggestive effect may be changed according to the number of rounds in which the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is won. In this case, since the content of the suggestive effect differs depending on when the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is won, the player can be given the pleasure of trying to see various suggestive effects.

Also, in the above description, the suggestive effect process is executed during the big win game (next big win) after the high-frequency support mode, but the suggestive effect process may be executed during the big win game. Specifically, in step S5401, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" has been received, and in step S5401, the MPU 402 has received a type command of "few rounds high probability result". (YES), the MPU 402 performs step S5
It may be configured so as to execute the process of suggesting effect of 405 .

Also in this case, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect may be when the jackpot is won, or the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, it is determined by lottery (a counter may be used for the lottery) in which round of the jackpot game the suggestive effect is to be executed. The MPU 402 is
At the time of the round game determined by lottery, the suggestive effect of step S5405 is executed.
In addition, the MPU 402 performs a lottery for each round as to whether or not to execute the suggestive effect, and until the ending command is received or the final round (second round) of the winning jackpot game.
If the above lottery is won during the above period, the suggestive effect is executed, and if the above lottery is not won until the ending command is received or until the final round of the winning jackpot game, the ending period of the jackpot game or the winning jackpot The suggestion effect may be executed in the final round of the game. Further, the content of the suggestive effect may be changed according to the number of rounds in which the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is won. In this case, since the content of the suggestive effect differs depending on when the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is won, the player can be given the pleasure of trying to see various suggestive effects.

115 to 117 are diagrams showing flowcharts of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to the modification of the first embodiment. Here, a mode of executing the suggestive effect process when the player's operation is accepted will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 115, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in executing the suggestive effect when the player's operation is accepted during the high-frequency support mode will be described.

In step S5501, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S5501 that the type command of "few rounds high probability result" has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5501 that the type command of "small round high probability result" has been received (YES), the MPU 402 checks in step S5502 whether the high frequency support mode after the end of the jackpot game has been started. judge. in particular,
The MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “high frequency support mode” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . The MPU 402, step S5502
, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode has not started (NO), the MPU 4
02 ends the execution processing of the suggestive effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5502 that the high-frequency support mode has started (YES), in step S5503 the MPU 402 sets a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations in the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the MPU 402
The specified number of times "1
00” is set. This fluctuation number counter FC is a counter for the MPU 402 to specify the number of fluctuations in the high-frequency support that shifts after the jackpot game when the game result is a "few-round high-probability result".

In step S5504, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any button (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 as operation means has been pressed. MPU 402 performs step S5
If it is determined at 504 that the player's operation is accepted (YES), the MPU 402
In step S5505, a suggestion effect process is executed. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been described in step S5107 of FIG. 111, so redundant description will be omitted.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5504 that the player's operation has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S5506 whether or not a variation end command has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether a flag corresponding to the fluctuation end command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . MPU40
2 is when it is determined in step S5506 that the fluctuation end command has not been received (NO
), the execution processing of the suggestion effect is terminated.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5506 that the fluctuation end command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation number counter FC to update the value in step S5507.
In step S5508, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the variation number counter FC is "0" or less. When the MPU 402 determines in step S5508 that the value of the variation number counter FC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it ends the suggestion rendering process.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the value of the variation number counter FC is equal to or less than "0" at step S5508 (YES), at step S5505, it executes the process of suggestion effect. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has already been explained, so overlapping explanations will be omitted.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment cannot clearly grasp whether the game result is the “few rounds high probability result” or the “few rounds low probability result”. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the player's operation is accepted, an effect is executed that suggests the possibility of the latent probability variable state. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state, and can enjoy the game without stress. Also, even if the player's operation is not accepted, the performance suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state is executed at the end of the high-frequency support mode, so the player can surely grasp the transition of the game state.
In addition, when the player's operation is not accepted, the suggestive effect processing may be ended without executing the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state at the end of the high-frequency support mode (time saving). In the description referring to FIG. 115, the end of the high-frequency support mode is detected when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number. The high frequency support mode end command may be received to detect the end of the high frequency support mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 116, regarding the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestion effect when the player's operation is accepted while the result screen of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is being displayed. explain.
In step S5601, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S5601 that the type command of "few rounds high probability result" has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5601 that it has received the type command of "few rounds high probability result" (YES), in step S5602, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a result display start command has been transmitted to the display control device 500. do. The MPU 402 is
If it is determined in step S5602 that the result display start command has been sent (YES)
, in step S5603, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any button (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 as operation means has been pressed. MPU 402 performs step S5
If it is determined in 603 that the player's operation is accepted (YES), the MPU 402
In step S5604, a suggestion effect process is executed. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been described in step S5107 of FIG. 111, so redundant description will be omitted.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5603 that the player's operation has not been received (NO), in step S5605 the MPU 402 determines whether or not a result display end command has been transmitted. When the MPU 402 determines in step S5605 that the result display start command has been transmitted (YES), the MPU 402 executes a suggestive rendering process. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S5605 that the result display start command has not been transmitted (NO), the MPU 402 executes a suggestive rendering process.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment cannot grasp whether the game result is the “few rounds high probability result” or the “few rounds low probability result”. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a player's operation is accepted, an effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability changing state is executed. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state, and can enjoy the game without stress. Also, even when the player's operation is not accepted, the performance suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state is executed at the end of the display of the result screen, so the player can surely grasp the transition of the game state. In addition, when the player's operation is not accepted, the suggestive effect processing may be ended without executing the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state at the end of the high-frequency support mode (time saving).

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, sound emission is performed when a player's operation is accepted during a jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high-frequency support mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The operation of control device 400 will be described. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestive effect processing of the pachinko machine 10 (suggested when operation is accepted). Hereinafter, referring to FIG. 117, jackpot game after high frequency support mode (next jackpot)
The operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect when the player's operation is accepted during the game will be described.

In step S5701, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S5701 that the type command of "few rounds high probability result" has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5701 that the type command of "small round high probability result" has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S5702 whether or not the high frequency support mode after the end of the jackpot game has been started. judge. Specifically, M
The PU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “high-frequency support mode” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S5702 that the high-frequency support mode has not started (NO), the MPU 40
2 ends the execution processing of the suggestive effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5702 that the high-frequency support mode has started (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S5703 whether or not a jackpot has been won. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores "few rounds high probability result", "few rounds low probability result", and "most advantageous result" corresponding to the big win in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413.
, "low-probability result" is stored. MPU
402, when it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in step S5703 (NO),
The execution processing of the suggestion effect is ended.

In step S5704, when the MPU 402 determines that the jackpot has been won in step S5703 (YES), the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any button (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 as operation means has been pressed. MPU 402 performs step S5
If it is determined in 704 that the player's operation has not been received (NO), the execution processing of the suggestive effect is terminated.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5704 that the player's operation is accepted (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S5705 whether or not the jackpot is won before the end of the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 4
It is determined whether the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode is stored in the 13 various flag storage areas, in other words, whether the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode is not cleared. When the MPU 402 determines in step S5705 that the high-frequency support mode is not yet to end, in other words, that the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is cleared (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5705 that the high-frequency support mode has not yet ended, in other words, the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode has not been cleared (Y
ES), in step S5706, the MPU 402 executes suggestive effect processing in step S5706. Note that the example of the suggestive effect is the same as the example of the suggestive effect described with reference to FIG. 111, so redundant description will be omitted.

115 to 117, the MPU 402 operates the operation button 3 as operation means.
It is determined whether or not any one of the buttons (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 is pressed down, and if any of the buttons (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 is pressed down, the suggestion effect is executed. Alternatively, the suggestion effect may be executed when the buttons 35a to 35c of the operation button 35 are pressed in a predetermined order. In this case, the player can enjoy searching for what kind of operation will perform the effect suggesting the possibility of being in the latent probability variable state, and the amusement is improved. In addition, it is possible to prompt the player to more actively intervene. Further, the tenth embodiment is provided with operation receiving means other than the operation button 35, for example, a touch sensor, etc., and the possibility of being in a latent probability changing state when the operation of this operation receiving means (touch sensor) is received. It may be configured such that a suggestive effect is executed.

In addition, in the suggestive rendering process described in FIGS. 111 to 117 (excluding FIG. 112), the MP
U402, when the received type command is "few rounds high probability result", is executing the suggestive effect, but when the received type command is "few rounds low probability result", high probability result won It is possible to execute an effect suggesting that there was no result, in other words, a low-probability result. In addition, the MPU 402 determines whether the received type command is "few rounds high probability result" or "few rounds low probability result", and if the received type command is "few rounds high probability result", Execute a production that suggests that you have won a high probability result, and if the type command received is "small round low probability result", it means that you did not win a high probability result, in other words, it is a low probability result You may make it perform the production|presentation which carries out.

Further, in the suggestive effect processing of the gaming machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, FIG.
5, after step S5503 in the suggestive effect process described with reference to FIG. 116, after step S5607 in the suggestive effect process described with reference to FIG. Perform a production to prompt the operation acceptance. In the presentation prompting the player to accept the operation, for example, an image or video prompting the player to operate the operation button 35 is displayed on the display screen G (for example, the image of the operation button 35 is displayed together with the characters "Press!"). ), or a voice saying "press the button" may be output from at least one of the speakers 26A to 26C. Also, an image or video prompting the user to operate the operation button 35 may be displayed on the display screen G, and a voice saying "press the button" may be output from at least one of the speakers 26A to 26C.

[Eleventh embodiment]
In the eleventh embodiment, a pachinko machine 10 having a falling lottery function will be described. Falling lottery means that the game state shifts from a probability variable state in which the lottery probability of the jackpot lottery means is advantageous to a normal state lower than the probability variable state by lottery. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment performs the drop lottery together with the jackpot lottery during the variable probability state, and when the drop lottery is won, it falls from the variable probability state to the low probability state. And, in the conventional pachinko machine 10,
There are those that do not notify whether or not the fall lottery is won and the probability variable state falls to the low probability state. In this case, the player does not know whether the current game state is a variable probability state or a low probability state. For this reason, some players may immediately lose their sense of expectation for a big win and stop playing the game despite the fact that the probability is variable. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect suggesting that the player has fallen at a predetermined timing. Below, the second
Although the pachinko machine 10 according to the embodiment will be described, only the process of notifying the result of the falling lottery will be described. Also, the configuration different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described, and redundant description of the same configuration will be omitted.

Fig. 118 shows the winning of a jackpot occurrence stored as a success/failure table (a success/failure information group) in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 312 provided as success/failure information group storage means of the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing values of random numbers to be used; As shown in FIG. 118, the low-probability mode validity table includes the low-probability mode validity table (low-probability (normal) validity information group) shown in FIG. It also has a right/wrong table for the mode (high-probability (high-probability) right/wrong information group). The MPU 302 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big win by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the big win random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the hit/fail table stored in the ROM 312 of the main controller 300 has "fall result" in the hit/fail table for the high probability mode. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to Specifically, under the game state (normal state) in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. Result" and "Normal Outlier Result". In addition, under the game state (normal state) in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to when the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot occurs, as shown in FIG. It has a plurality of lottery results (win/fail results) of occurrence of big hits, such as "result of falling" and "result of normal failure". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, there are two random number values for the “fall result”.

The value and the number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and the high probability mode should have a higher probability of winning a "big win" than the low probability mode. Further, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode must not include the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and become the "big win". Also, the value and number of random numbers for the "fall result" are arbitrary.

When the "fall result" is won, the MPU 302 shifts the game state from the probability variable state with an advantageous lottery probability to the normal state lower than the probability variable state. Specifically, the MPU 302 uses the RAM 3
A high-probability mode flag set in a high-probability mode flag storage area (not shown) of 13 is cleared, and the game state and the lottery probability of the pachinko machine 10 shift from an advantageous variable probability state to a normal state lower than the variable probability state. Let

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail. Figure 119
[Fig. 10] is a diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing.
In step S5801, the MPU 302 determines whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the MPU 302 determines in step S5801 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (NO), in step S5802, the win/fail table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 118(a)) is retrieved from the win/fail table storage area of the ROM 312. read out.
If the MPU 302 determines in step S5801 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode (YES), in step S5803 the win/fail table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 118(b)) Read from storage area.

After executing the process of step S5802 or step S5803, the MPU 302 executes the suitability determination process in step S5804. Specifically, MPU302, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, the success or failure table for the low probability mode read in step S5802 or the success or failure table for the high probability mode read in step S5803 The result of the winning lottery (winning result) is determined by comparing with. The hit/fail result is one of "big win", "special failure result", "fall result", and "normal failure result", and the hit/fail table of the high probability mode has "failure result". is different from the success/failure table of the low probability mode.

In step S5805, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S5804 is "big hit". If the MPU 302 determines in step S5805 that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning" (YES), it executes the processing from step S5806 onwards, and if it determines that the win/loss result is not "jackpot winning" in step S5805 ( NO), the process after step S5812 is executed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S5805 that the win/loss result is "big win" (YES), in step S5806 it determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313 .

Here, when the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 313, it indicates that the first result display section 93a is caused to start the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 84a. Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines in step S5806 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 313 (NO), in step S5807 the first distribution table (see FIG. 21A) is stored in the ROM 312. read from the sorting table storage area.

Further, when the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 313, the second start port 84
This indicates that the second result display section 93b is caused to start the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to b. Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines in step S5806 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313 (YES), in step S5808,
The second distribution table (see FIG. 21(b)) is read from the distribution table storage area of the ROM 312 .

After executing the processing of step S5807 or step S5808, the MPU 302 executes distribution determination processing in step S5809. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 3
02 is the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, and step S58
07 or by comparing with the distribution table read in step S5808, the result of the distribution lottery (distribution result) is determined.

In step S5810, the MPU 302 executes stop result setting processing for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 302 causes the main display unit 93
Then, the RAM 313 stores the determined information, that is, the information about the symbols to be stopped and displayed. Here, the MPU 302 uses the allocation result determined in step S5809 and the R
Information related to symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 is determined by comparison with the stop result table for the jackpot results stored in advance in the OM 312 . The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display section 93 so as to be different for each sorting result.

In step S5811, the MPU 302 sets a flag in the RAM 313 according to the distribution result determined in step S5809. Specifically, when the MPU 302 specifies that the sorting result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag, and specifies that it is a "small round high probability result", a small number of rounds If the high probability result flag is set and it is specified as "few rounds low probability result", if the few rounds low probability result flag is set and it is specified as "most favorable result", the most favorable result flag to set. After that, MPU30
2 executes the processes after step S5819. In addition, in the processing of each step below, the MPU 302 refers to the presence or absence of a flag set in the RAM 313 to determine the sorting result.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S5805 that the win/loss result is not "big win winning" (NO), in step S5812 it determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S5804 is a "special loss result". If the MPU 302 determines in step S5812 that the success/failure result is the "special failure result" (YES), it executes the processing from step S5813 onwards, and determines that the success/failure result is not the "special failure result" in step S5812. In the case (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S5815 whether or not the win/loss result is the "fall result".
If the MPU 302 determines in step S5815 that the success/failure result is not the “fall result” (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processing from step S5816 onwards, and if it determines in step S5815 that the success/failure result is the “fall result” (YES ), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S5817.

In step S5813, the MPU 302 executes stop result setting processing for a special outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 302 causes the main display unit 93
Then, the RAM 313 stores the determined information, that is, the information about the symbols to be stopped and displayed. Here, the MPU 302 determines information related to symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 by referring to a stop result table for special loss results stored in advance in the ROM 312 . The mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the big win result.
In step S5814, the MPU 302 sets a special exclusion flag in the RAM313. In each of the following processes, the MPU 302 refers to the presence or absence of a special loss flag set in the RAM 313 to determine whether the win/loss result is a "special loss result".

In step S5816, the MPU 302 executes stop result setting processing for the normal deviation result. In this stop result setting process for the out-of-normal result, the MPU 302 causes the main display unit 93
The information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 93a or the second result display portion 93b is determined, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 313. FIG. Here, the MPU 302 refers to a stop result table for out-of-normal results pre-stored in the ROM 312 to determine information related to symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 93 . It should be noted that the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the normal failure result is different from the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special failure result.

In step S5817, the MPU 302 executes stop result setting processing for the fall result. In this stop result setting process for the fall result, the MPU 302 determines information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 93a or the second result display portion 93b of the main display portion 93, and The information is stored in RAM 313 . Here, the MPU 302 is a ROM
By referring to the stop result table for fall results stored in advance in 312, the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 93 is determined. Note that, in the present embodiment, the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for falling results is the same as the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for normal failure results. Therefore, the MPU 302 may refer to the stop result table for the out-of-ordinary result when executing the stop result setting process for the fall result. The memory capacity can be saved by making the same table referred to by the MPU 302 for the "fall result" and the "normal deviation result".

In step S5818, the MPU 302 executes a fall result process. Specifically, the MPU 302 clears the high-probability mode flag set in the high-probability mode flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 313, and the game state and the lottery probability of the pachinko machine 10 are changed from the advantageous variable state to the variable state. transition to a lower normal state.

Step S5811, Step S5814, Step S5816, and Step S58
18, the MPU 302 executes display duration time (display duration) setting processing in step S5819. Note that the processing for setting the display duration (display duration) has been described in the first embodiment, and redundant description will be omitted.

In step S5820, the MPU 302 sets a variation command and a type command. In step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 24), the MPU 302 sends the variation command and type command set in step S5820 to the sound emission control device 40.
Send to 0. The sound emission control device 400 executes a predetermined process (start of variable display in step S5821) based on the command for variation and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302. This process will be described later in detail.

Note that the variation command includes information regarding the display duration time, but does not include information regarding whether or not the ready-to-reach display will occur. In addition, the type command includes information related to win/fail results and information related to sorting results. More specifically, the type command includes each information related to "jackpot winning", "special failure result", "normal failure result", and "fall result" as information related to win/fail results. In addition, in the type command, as information related to the sorting result, each Contains information. It should be noted that in the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are also collectively referred to as the game result. That is, the type command includes information about the game result.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by sound emission control device 400>
Next, the effect determination processing of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described. Note that the effect determination process of the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment and the effect determination process of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment differ only in part. 10 effect determination processing will be described.

In step S5001, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302 have been received. MPU 402 performs step S50
If it is determined in 01 that each command has not been received (NO), the processing from step S5009 is executed. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that each command has been received in step S5001 (YES), in step S5002, based on the content of the type command, the game result is "loss result"("special failure result", other than "few rounds high probability result", "few rounds low probability result", "best result", and "low probability result").

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5002 that the game result is not the "loss result" (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S5003 whether or not the game result is the "special loss result". When the MPU 402 determines in step S5003 that the game result is not the "special loss result" (NO), in step S5004, it executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines that the game result is "
If it is determined to be the most advantageous result", the symbols having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers (for example, "1.1.
1” or “2.2.2”) is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a “few rounds high probability result” or a “few rounds low probability result”, the same even number Information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers (for example, "4, 4, 4") is determined. Furthermore, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a "low-probability result", the symbols having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L (for example, "2 2 2”) to determine the information related to the combination.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the “special loss result” in step S5003 (YES), the MPU 402 executes common symbol determination processing in step S5005. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 402 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3.4.1") is determined. It should be noted that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

In addition, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the “loss result” in step S5002 (YES), in other words, when it determines that the game result is the “normal failure result” or the “fall result”, in step S5006, the normal A symbol determination process for out is executed. In this normal-off symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

It should be noted that the step processing after step S5006 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, so redundant description will be omitted. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 110, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment determines which effect is selected for the "few rounds high probability result" or "few rounds low probability result". was the same in production B,
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect selected for the "few rounds high probability result" and the effect selected for the "few rounds low probability result" may be the same or different. In addition, in the symbol determination in step S5004, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", the same odd number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. Or a symbol with the same even number (e.g. "1 1 1
” or “2.2.2”) may be determined.

<Regarding Suggestion Effect Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
120 to 125 are diagrams showing flowcharts of the suggestive effect processing (S4908 in FIG. 107) of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. In the following description, the case where the result of the falling lottery is notified in the suggestive effect process will be described, and other descriptions will be omitted.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a flow chart for executing a suggestive effect (announcing the result of the fall lottery) at the time of falling. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 120, the operation of sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect at the time of falling will be described.

In step S5901, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "best result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 4
It is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" is stored in the 13 various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S5901 that the type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "most favorable result" has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

In step S5901, the MPU 402 selects "few rounds high probability result" or "best result".
type command is received (YES), the MPU 402 proceeds to step S59
02, it is determined whether or not a type command of "fall result" has been received. in particular,
The MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “fall result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S5902 that it has not received the "fall result" type command (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5902 that the type command of "Fall result" has been received (YES), in step S5903, the MPU 402 executes suggestive effect processing. As an example of the suggestive effect, the MPU 402 executes one or a combination of sound, light emission, video and movable character. For example, when outputting audio, the MPU 402
instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read from the common ROM 404 and reproduce sound data suggesting that the state has fallen from the high-precision state to the normal state. The sound output LSI 403 is M
Based on an instruction from PU 402, sound data suggesting a fall is read from common ROM 404 and reproduced (output from speaker units 26A to 26C).

Further, when the light emission suggests that the user has fallen, the MPU 402 reads light emission data indicating that the user has fallen from the ROM 412 or the common ROM 404, and causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B to emit light based on the read light emission data. . In addition, if the video suggests that the user has fallen, the MPU 402 displays the video (including the image) that suggests that the user has fallen.
to the display control device 500. Display control device 5
00 displays a video (including an image) suggesting a fall on the display screen G based on a fall suggestion command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 (MPU 402).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes an effect suggesting a fall when the player falls from the variable probability state to the normal state. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state, and can enjoy the game without stress. In addition, you may make it present (suggest) the frequency|count of a fluctuation|variation at the time of falling from a high probability state to a normal state.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a flowchart for executing a suggestive effect when the result screen is displayed after the high-frequency support mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 121, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect when displaying the result screen after the high-frequency support mode will be described.

In step S6001, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "best result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 4
It is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" is stored in the 13 various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S6001 that it has not received the "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

In step S6001, the MPU 402 selects "few rounds high probability result" or "best result".
type command is received (YES), the MPU 402 proceeds to step S60
02, it is determined whether or not a type command of "fall result" has been received. in particular,
The MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “fall result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S6002 that it has not received the type command of "fall result" (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S6002 that it has received the type command of "fall result" (YES), the MPU 402 in step S6003 displays the display control device 5
00 determines whether a result display start command has been sent. MPU 402 performs step S
If it is determined in 6003 that the result display start command has been sent (YES), the MPU 4
In step S6004, 02 executes a suggestive rendering process. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been described in step S5903 of FIG. 120, so redundant description will be omitted. If the MPU 402 determines in step S6003 that the result display start command has not been transmitted (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution process.

Note that when the video suggests that the user has fallen, the MPU 402 transmits to the display control device 500 a fall suggestion command for displaying a video (including an image) that suggests that the user has fallen. The display control device 500 superimposes a video (including an image) suggesting that the probability of falling is variable on the result screen based on the fall suggestion command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 (MPU 402), and displays it on the display screen G. display. Also, in the above description, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the fall effect is after it is determined that the result display start command has been transmitted.
In other words, it is immediately after the result screen is displayed on the display screen G, but the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect may be while the result screen is displayed on the display screen G. Also, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect may be after the result screen is displayed. In this case, in step S6003 of FIG. 121, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a “result display stop command” for ending the display of the result screen has been transmitted to the display control device 500, and the “result display If the "stop command" has been transmitted (YES), the MPU 402 may be configured to execute suggestive effect processing in step S6004. It should be noted that the result screen may present (suggest) the number of fluctuations when falling from the high-probability state to the normal state.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a flow chart for executing suggestive effect processing during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high-frequency support mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. the following,
With reference to FIG. 122, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 when executing the suggestive effect during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high-frequency support mode will be described.

In step S6101, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "best result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 4
It is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to a "few rounds high probability result" or "best result" is stored in 13 various flag storage areas. If the MPU 402 determines in step S6101 that it has not received a type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" (
NO), the execution processing of the suggestion effect is terminated.

In step S6101, the MPU 402 selects "few rounds high probability result" or "best result".
type command is received (YES), the MPU 402 proceeds to step S61
At 02, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode after the end of the jackpot game is started. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “high frequency support mode” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . If the MPU 402 determines in step S6102 that the high-frequency support mode has not started (
NO), the MPU 402 terminates the suggestive effect execution process.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S6102 that the high-frequency support mode has started (YES), in step S6103 the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "fall result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “fall result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S6103 that it has not received the type command of "fall result" (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6103 that it has received the type command of "falling result" (YES), in step S6104, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a jackpot has been won. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 in any of the "few rounds high probability result", "few rounds low probability result", "best result", and "low probability result" corresponding to the jackpot. Determine whether the corresponding flag is stored.
When the MPU 402 determines that the jackpot has not been won in step S6104 (N
O), the execution processing of the suggestive effect is terminated.

In step S6105, when the MPU 402 determines that the jackpot has been won in step S6104 (YES), the MPU 402 decides whether or not the jackpot has been won in step S6104 before the end of the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether a flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413, in other words, whether the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is not cleared. . M.
If the PU 402 determines in step S6105 that the high-frequency support mode is not yet to end, in other words, that the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is cleared (NO),
The execution processing of the suggestion effect is ended.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S6105 that the high-frequency support mode has not ended yet, in other words, if it determines that the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode has not been cleared (Y
ES), the MPU 402 executes suggestive effect processing in step S6106. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been described in step S5903 of FIG. 120, so duplicate description will be omitted.

In the above description, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect is when the jackpot is won, but the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, it is determined by lottery (a counter may be used for the lottery) in which round of the jackpot game won in step S6104 to execute the suggestive effect. The MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect of step S6106 in the round determined by lottery. In addition, the MPU 402 performs a lottery for each round as to whether or not to execute the suggestive effect, and until the ending command is received or the final round (second round or 15th round) of the winning jackpot game, the lottery is performed. When winning, the suggesting effect is executed, and if the above lottery is not won until the ending command is received or until the final round of the winning jackpot game, the suggesting effect is executed during the ending period or the final round of the jackpot game. may Further, the content of the suggestive effect may be changed according to the number of rounds in which the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is won. In this case, since the content of the suggestive effect differs depending on when the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is won, the player can be given the pleasure of trying to see various suggestive effects.

123 to 125 are diagrams showing flowcharts of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to the modification of the present embodiment. Here, a mode of executing the suggestive effect process when the player's operation is accepted will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 123, regarding the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect when the player's operation is accepted during the high-frequency support mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. explain.

In step S6201, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "best result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 4
It is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" is stored in the 13 various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S6201 that it has not received the "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

In step S6201, the MPU 402 selects "few rounds high probability result" or "best result".
If the MPU 402 determines that it has received the type command of (YES), in step S62
02, it is determined whether or not a type command of "fall result" has been received. in particular,
The MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “fall result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S6202 that it has not received the "fall result" type command (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6202 that it has received the type command of "falling result" (YES), in step S6203, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any button (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 as operation means has been pressed. M.
If the PU 402 determines in step S6203 that the player's operation is accepted (
YES), MPU 402 executes a suggestive rendering process in step S6204.
Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been described in step S5903 of FIG. 120, so duplicate description will be omitted.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6203 that the player's operation has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 terminates the suggestive effect execution process.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes an effect suggesting the possibility of a fall when the player's operation is accepted. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state, and can enjoy the game without stress. In addition, you may make it present (suggestion) the fluctuation|variation frequency|count (game frequency|count) at the time of falling from a high probability state in high frequency support mode to a normal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 124, regarding the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect when the player's operation is accepted during the display of the result screen of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. explain.
In step S6301, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "best result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 4
It is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" is stored in the 13 various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S6301 that it has not received the "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

In step S6301, the MPU 402 selects "few rounds high probability result" or "best result".
type command is received (YES), the MPU 402 proceeds to step S63
02, it is determined whether or not a type command of "fall result" has been received. in particular,
The MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “fall result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S6302 that it has not received the type command of "fall result" (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S6302 that it has received a "fall result" type command (YES), it determines in step S6303 whether a result display start command has been sent to the display control device 500. FIG. When the MPU 402 determines in step S6303 that the result display start command has not been transmitted (NO)
, terminates the execution processing of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6303 that the result display start command has been transmitted (YES), in step S6304 the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the operation buttons 35 as operation means.
button (35a to 35c) has been pressed. MPU40
2, when it is determined that the player's operation is accepted in step S6304 (YES)
, MPU 402 executes a suggestive rendering process in step S6305. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been described in step S5903 of FIG. 120, so duplicate description will be omitted.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6304 that the player's operation has not been accepted (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S6306 whether or not a result display end command has been transmitted. When the MPU 402 determines in step S6306 that the result display start command has been transmitted (YES), the MPU 402 executes a suggestion effect process. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S6306 that the result display start command has not been transmitted (NO), the MPU 402 executes a suggestive rendering process.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes an effect suggesting the possibility of falling when the player's operation is accepted. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state, and can enjoy the game without stress. Also, even if the player's operation is not accepted, an effect suggesting the possibility of falling is executed at the end of the display of the result screen, so the player can surely grasp the transition of the game state. It should be noted that the result screen may present (suggest) the number of fluctuations when falling from the high-probability state to the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, sound emission is performed when a player's operation is accepted during a jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high-frequency support mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The operation of control device 400 will be described. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a flow chart of suggestion effect processing of the pachinko machine 10 (suggestion when there is an operation reception). Hereinafter, referring to FIG. 125, jackpot game after high frequency support mode (next jackpot)
The operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect when the player's operation is accepted during the game will be described.

In step S6401, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "best result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 4
It is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" is stored in the 13 various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S6401 that it has not received the "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

In step S6401, the MPU 402 selects "few rounds high probability result" or "best result".
type command is received (YES), the MPU 402 proceeds to step S64
At 02, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode after the end of the jackpot game is started. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether a flag corresponding to the “high frequency support mode” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . If the MPU 402 determines in step S6402 that the high-frequency support mode has not started (
NO), the MPU 402 terminates the suggestive effect execution process.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6402 that the high frequency support mode has started (YES), in step S6403 the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "fall result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “fall result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S6403 that it has not received the type command of "fall result" (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6403 that it has received the "Falling Result" type command (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S6404 whether or not it has won a jackpot. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 in any of the "few rounds high probability result", "few rounds low probability result", "best result", and "low probability result" corresponding to the jackpot. Determine whether the corresponding flag is stored. When the MPU 402 determines that the jackpot has not been won in step S6404 (
NO), the execution processing of the suggestion effect is terminated.

In step S6405, when the MPU 402 determines that the jackpot has been won in step S6404 (YES), the MPU 402 decides whether or not the jackpot has been won in step S6404 before the end of the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether a flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413, in other words, whether the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is not cleared. . M.
If the PU 402 determines in step S6405 that the high-frequency support mode is not yet to end, in other words, that the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is cleared (NO),
The execution processing of the suggestion effect is ended.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S6405 that the high-frequency support mode has not ended yet, in other words, if it determines that the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode has not been cleared (Y
ES), in step S6406, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any button (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 as operation means has been pressed. When the MPU 402 determines that the player's operation is accepted in step S6406 (YES), the MPU 40
2, in step S6407, a suggestive effect process is executed. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been described in step S5903 of FIG. 120, so redundant description will be omitted.

123 to 125, the MPU 402 has the operation button 3 as operation means.
It is determined whether or not any one of the buttons (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 is pressed down, and if any of the buttons (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 is pressed down, the suggestion effect is executed. Alternatively, the suggestion effect may be executed when the buttons 35a to 35c of the operation button 35 are pressed in a predetermined order. In this case, the player enjoys exploring what kind of operation is used to execute the effect suggesting the possibility of falling, and the interest is improved. Also, it is possible to prompt the player to more actively intervene. In addition, this embodiment 10
In addition to the operation button 35, an operation receiving means, such as a touch sensor, is provided, and when the operation of this operation receiving means (touch sensor) is received, an effect suggesting the possibility of falling is executed. may be configured.

120 to 125, the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect when it receives the "fall result" type command, in other words, when it falls from the definite change state to the normal state. However, if the type command of "falling result" is not received, in other words, if the probability change state does not fall to the normal state, the suggestive effect may be executed.

Further, in the suggestion effect processing of the gaming machine according to the modified example of the present embodiment described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, FIG.
In the suggestive effect process described with reference to step S6202 and after, in the suggestive effect process described with reference to FIG. 124 after step S6303, in the suggestive effect process described with reference to FIG. A production prompting for acceptance of the operation is performed. In the presentation prompting the player to accept the operation, for example, an image or video prompting the player to operate the operation button 35 is displayed on the display screen G (for example, the image of the operation button 35 is displayed together with the characters "Press!"). ), or a voice saying "press the button" may be output from at least one of the speakers 26A to 26C. Also, an image or video prompting the user to operate the operation button 35 may be displayed on the display screen G, and a voice saying "press the button" may be output from at least one of the speakers 26A to 26C.

[Another modification of the eleventh embodiment]
In the eleventh embodiment described above, by adding the "fall result" to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 118(b)) stored in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 312 of the main controller 300, Although an embodiment in which a drop lottery is performed has been described, the drop random number counter C5 for the drop lottery is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313, and the MPU 302 uses the values (information) of the counters C1 to C5, CINI, and CS to internally control the random number counter C5. A lottery (jackpot lottery, falling lottery, etc.) or the like may be executed. The counter C5 is a loop counter that adds (increments) 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching a predetermined maximum value. A random number initial value counter CINI may be used to set the initial value of the falling random number counter C5. Here, each counter C1-C4, CINI, CS
has been described in the first embodiment, so redundant description will be omitted.

In the modified example of this embodiment, the falling random number counter C5 periodically (for example, every 4 msec)
is updated to The updated value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 . Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the fall random number counter C5 is set to R at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 84a or the second start port 84b.
Stored in the reserved ball storage area (see FIG. 19) provided as acquisition information storage means in the AM 313, and based on the value of the fall random number counter C5 stored in the reserved ball storage area, a lottery for falling from the variable probability state to the normal state. to run. Also in this embodiment, the values of the random numbers for winning the drop are stored as a success/failure table (a success/failure information group) in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 312 provided as success/failure information group storage means.

Further, the MPU 302 of the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment clears the variable probability flags in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 313 when the drop lottery is won, thereby changing the game state of the pachinko machine 10 from the variable probability state to the normal state. state, and transmits a fall command indicating that it has fallen to the sound emission control device 400 . Sound emission control device 4
The MPU 402 of 00 executes, at a predetermined timing, an effect suggesting the possibility that the state of the pachinko machine 10 has fallen from the variable probability state to the normal state based on the fall command transmitted from the MPU 302 of the main control device 300.例文帳に追加As for the suggestive effect in the sound emission control device 400, in each suggestive effect process described with reference to FIGS. ?” (Main controller 3
00 has been received).

A fall random number counter C5 for a fall lottery is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313, and the MPU 302 uses the values (information) of the counters C1 to C5, CINI, and CS to perform an internal lottery (jackpot lottery, fall lottery, etc.). etc., the fall lottery may be performed before the big win lottery, or the fall lottery may be performed after the big win lottery.
When the drop lottery is performed before the jackpot lottery, the jackpot lottery is performed after the game state changes from the probability variable state to the normal state when the fall lottery is won. For this reason, the player plays the game while worrying that the game state will fall to the normal state, so that the player can get a feeling of nervousness. On the other hand, when the falling lottery is performed after the big winning lottery, the falling lottery is performed after the big winning lottery is performed in the variable probability state in which the game state is advantageous.

In addition, in the present embodiment and modifications, the high-frequency support mode provided after the jackpot game, when the number of games (same as the number of fluctuations) reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times), low frequency Switch to support mode. In other words, in the present embodiment and modifications, the high-frequency support mode ends when the number of games played is 100. However, the number of games played in the high frequency support mode is not limited to 100 times. For example, in high frequency support mode, the number of games is 1
It may be less than 00 times, or may be 101 times or more.

In addition, even if the number of games (same as the number of fluctuations) exceeds 100 in the high-frequency support mode provided after the jackpot game, the high-frequency support mode may be continued until the fall lottery is won. . In this case, when the drop lottery is won with the number of games exceeding 100, the high-frequency support mode ends. That is, when the high-frequency support mode is continued until the drop lottery is won, the player, due to the end of the high-frequency support mode,
It can be recognized that the falling lottery is won and the game state has fallen from the high probability state to the normal state. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode provided after the jackpot game, when the number of games exceeds 100 times and the falling lottery is won, it suggests that the game state has fallen from the variable probability state to the normal state. It is preferable to configure so as not to execute the suggestion effect to be performed.

Although the player can recognize that the game state has fallen from the high-probability state to the normal state, if the above suggestive effect is executed, the player may be emotionally hurt or feel frustrated. It is not desirable because it becomes an act of rubbing salt on the wound. Also, if the player is emotionally hurt or becomes irritated, there is a risk that the player will stop playing the game. However, as described above, in a state in which the number of games exceeds 100 times in the high-frequency support mode provided after the jackpot game, if the falling lottery is won, the game state falls from the variable probability state to the normal state. By configuring so as not to execute the suggestive performance suggesting that the game has been played, the player is prevented from being emotionally hurt or irritated, and the player can comfortably continue the game.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes a game board 81 having a game area on which game balls roll, and a game area 1
04 specific area (first start port 84a, second start port 84b), a jackpot lottery means (MPU 302) that performs a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player; A game state control means (MPU 302) for controlling a variable probability state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is advantageous and a normal state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is lower than the variable probability state as the game state according to the result of the game. Then, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, a drop lottery means (MPU 302) that performs a drop lottery with the variable probability state as a normal state, and an effect control means (MPU 402, voice a light emission control device 400, a display control device 500, etc.). Therefore, the player can know whether the game state is an advantageous probability variable state or a normal state by the effect. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a player who is bored from quitting the game because the player's expectation for the big win cannot be maintained despite the variable probability state. Also, when the player falls to the normal state, the player can recognize that the player is in the normal state. Thus, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

(2) The performance control means (MPU 402, sound emission control device 400, display control device 500, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 executes a performance suggesting the result of the fall lottery when the fall lottery by the fall lottery means (MPU 302) is won. . Therefore, the player can immediately know that he/she has fallen. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not to continue the game even after winning the drop lottery and the lottery probability is not in an advantageous variable probability state. In addition, since the player can immediately know that he or she has fallen, the player can avoid wasting game balls when not continuing the game. In addition, when continuing the game, the player can continue the game after knowing that the lottery probability is not an advantageous variable probability state, but can continue the game, which is highly convincing.

[Twelfth embodiment]
2. Description of the Related Art In game halls where game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines are installed, BGM is played at a high volume from speakers provided in the game hall. In addition, game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines allow the player to set the volume. there is In this way, the game hall is normally in a state where the sound volume is very loud. On the other hand, there are players who do not like to play games at high volume and play games with the volume setting of the gaming machine low. However, as described above, in the game hall, the sound volume is usually very loud. For this reason, if the volume setting of the game machine is reduced, it is considered that the background music and lines of the game machine are difficult to hear.
There is a risk that the player will not be able to fully enjoy the presentation of the gaming machine. In the present embodiment, in view of the above-described circumstances, etc., an embodiment of a gaming machine that can favorably enhance the interest of the player will be described. Although the present embodiment will be described below using a pachinko machine as an example of a game machine, the present invention can be applied to various game machines other than pachinko machines, such as slot machines.
Further, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those described in the first to sixth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment executes different effects according to the magnitude of the output volume from the speakers 26A to 26C. More specifically, the speaker 26A provided in the pachinko machine 10
Different effects are executed based on the volume setting of ~26C. Here, the effect includes the effect of outputting voice (dialogue), BGM, and sound effects from the speakers 26A to 26C, which are sound output means (hereinafter also referred to as sound effect), and the display screen of the pattern display device 91, which is the display means. Effects displayed in G (hereinafter also referred to as image effects), lighting/blinking effects of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B as light emitting means (hereinafter also referred to as light emission effects), and the like are included. In addition, although the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is not provided, the above-mentioned effect is performed by a movable accessory (hereinafter also referred to as a role effect).
, or a vibration effect (hereinafter also referred to as a vibration effect) may be added. Here, the character effect and the vibe effect are included in the effect other than the sound effect.

In the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, the operation button 35 can be used to set the output volume of the speakers 26A to 26C. An operation button for setting the output volume of the speakers 26A to 26C may be provided separately from the operation button 35. FIG. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of output volume settings for the speakers 26A to 26C of the pachinko machine 10 is described as five levels, but the number of output volume settings that can be set is not limited to five levels. may be set to two or more stages. In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the speakers 26A-2
The setting of the output sound volume of 6C is set as follows: setting 5>setting 4>setting 3>setting 2>setting 1 (> indicates the magnitude relationship of the sound volume). In other words, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, setting 5
is the loudest, and setting 1 is the quietest. Also, as the volume setting is changed from setting 5 to setting 1, the volume is set to decrease in stages.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect mode and the volume setting of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 126, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, speakers 26A to 26C
Different production modes DMA to DME are associated with the volume settings 1 to 5, respectively, so that different production modes are provided according to the settings of the output volume of the .
Specifically, the volume setting "1" is associated with the effect mode DMA. Also, the volume setting "2" is associated with the effect mode DMB. Also, the volume setting "3" is associated with the production mode DMC. Also, the volume setting "4" is associated with the effect mode DMD. Also, the volume setting "5" is associated with the effect mode DME. Here, each of the production modes DMA to DME has a sound production, an image production, and a light emission production, respectively. Various productions such as production, hidden suggestion production, etc. are performed.

Next, the contents of the effects of each of the effects modes DMA to DME will be explained.
The effect mode DMA (corresponding to the volume setting "1") is a effect mode with more effects (image effect, light emitting effect) than the effect mode DMB (corresponding to the volume setting "2"). To put it the other way around, the production mode DMB is more effective than the production mode DMA for effects other than voice effects (image effects, image effects, etc.).
This is a production mode with less light emission production.
The production mode DMB (corresponding to the volume setting "2") is a production mode with more productions (image production, light emission production) other than the audio production than the production mode DMC (corresponding to the volume setting "3"). To put it the other way around, the production mode DMC is more effective than the production mode DMB in effects other than sound effects (image effects,
This is a production mode with less light emission production.
The production mode DMC (corresponding to the volume setting "3") is a production mode with more productions (image production, light emission production) other than the audio production than the production mode DMD (corresponding to the volume setting "4"). To put it the other way around, the production mode DMD is more effective than the production mode DMC except for the audio production (image production, image production, etc.).
This is a production mode with less light emission production.
The production mode DMD (corresponding to volume setting "4") is a production mode with more productions (image production, light emission production) other than voice production than the production mode DME (corresponding to volume setting "5"). To put it the other way around, the production mode DME is more effective than the production mode DMD except for the audio production (image production,
This is a production mode with less light emission production.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the volume setting is changed from "1" to "5", and the higher the output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C, the more effects other than voice effects (image effects, light emission, etc.) production) is configured to be less. Conversely, the volume setting is "5"
. . . "1", and the smaller the output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C, the more effects (image effects, light emission effects) other than voice effects.

It should be noted that there are many effects other than voice effects (image effects, light-emitting effects), for example, when the volume setting is large (for example, the volume setting is "5" or "4"), the dialogue suggesting the latent probability change is played by the speaker. 26A-26C only output as sound (suggestion effect of latency probability change is performed only by sound effect), but when the volume setting is small (for example, volume setting is "1" to "3"), latency probability change is output. In addition to outputting the suggesting lines as voice from the speakers 26A to 26C, the lines suggesting the probability of lurking are displayed as subtitles on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91 (the effect of suggesting the probability of lurking is also performed by image production). You may do so. In addition to outputting the words suggesting the probability of latent change from the speakers 26A to 26C as voices, the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, which are light emitting means, are illuminated and flashed to produce a light-emitting effect, a role-playing effect using a movable accessory, and a vibration-based effect. You may make it add production|presentation, such as a vibe production|presentation. In addition, the said line is not restricted to what suggests a latent certainty change.
In this way, when the volume setting is low, the player can play the game without worrying about missing the lines output from the speakers 26A to 26C, thereby improving the amusement.

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment.
The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes timer interrupt processing to progress the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 402 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes the timer interrupt process of FIG.

(Step S6501)
The MPU 402 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, MPU4
02 stores the received command in the RAM 41 when it receives a command from the MPU 302.
Store in 3. Specifically, the RAM 413 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 302 , and the MPU 402 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 302 . Note that the MPU 402
reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

For example, the MPU 302 controls performance control including basic information necessary for the game, such as the result of the jackpot lottery (lottery result of whether it is a jackpot or a loss, and if it is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot), information on the number of pending balls in operation, and the fluctuation time of special symbols. A command (type command, variation pattern command, or decorative drawing designation command) is transmitted, and the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 receives this. Moreover, MPU302 transmits the production|presentation control command (production stop command) which instruct|indicates production stop after predetermined time (special design fluctuation time) progress, and MPU402 receives this. Furthermore, with respect to the information specifying the game state, the MPU 302 transmits an effect control command (game state specification command or jackpot command) including the information at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the game state transition occurs). and the MPU 402 receives it. MP
U402, in other words, the current game state is grasped on the side of the sound emission control device 400. FIG.

(Step S6502)
The MPU 402 executes volume setting processing. Specifically, the MPU 402 executes a process of controlling the volume output from the speaker units 26A to 26C to the received volume setting when the volume setting is performed by the operation button 35 as the operation means. As a result, the volume output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is controlled to the volume set by the player. Details of the volume setting process will be described later.

(Step S6503)
MPU402 performs production mode determination processing based on the volume setting in step S6502. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines in which of the production modes DMA to DME the production is to be executed, based on the volume setting in step S6502. Details of the effect mode determination process will be described later.

(Step S6504)
The MPU 402 executes effect determination processing based on commands received from the MPU 302 of the main control device 300 . Specifically, based on the command received from MPU 302, MPU 402 executes various effects such as ready-to-win effect, advance notice effect, look-ahead effect, and hiding suggestion effect corresponding to the effect mode determined in step S6503.

(Step S6505)
The MPU 402 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the command received from the MPU 302 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 402 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. .

(Step S6506)
The MPU 402 includes the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, first to third reservation lamp units 95a to 9
6 is executed. Specifically, the MPU 402 executes the light emission effect corresponding to the command transmitted from the main controller 300 based on the results of the effect mode determination process in step S6503 and the effect determination process in step S6504.

(Step S6507)
The MPU 402 executes audio control processing for outputting sounds from the speaker units 26A-26C. Specifically, the MPU 402, based on the result of the effect mode determination process in step S6503 and the effect determination process in step S6504, the sound effect (BGM, voice (dialogue)) corresponding to the command transmitted from the main controller 300 , output of sound effects, etc.).

(Step S6508)
The MPU 402 executes image control processing for displaying an effect image on the display screen G. FIG. Specifically, MPU402, production mode determination processing of step S6503 and step S6
Based on the result of the effect determination processing in 504, a command for executing the image effect is transmitted to the display control device 500. FIG. The display control device 500 displays an effect image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91 based on the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 .

(Step S6509)
The MPU 402 executes the notification process for power recovery (step S416) in the main process (see FIG. 25).
And based on the contents of the normal time notification process (step S1303) of the front door frame opening monitoring process (FIG. 34), the abnormal time notification process is performed. Since the details of the abnormality notification process have already been described, redundant description will be omitted.

(Step S6510)
The MPU 402 executes result display processing. In the result display process, a process for displaying a result screen is executed when the high-frequency support mode (time saving) ends without winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the variable probability state. Since the details of the result display process have already been described, redundant description will be omitted.

(Step S6511)
The MPU 402 executes a suggestion rendering process. Specifically, the MPU 402 performs step S
Based on the results of the effect mode determination processing in step S6503 and the effect determination processing in step S6504, a suggestive effect (an effect that suggests the possibility that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state) is executed at a predetermined timing. Since the timing of executing the suggestive rendering process has already been described, redundant description will be omitted. After that, the MPU 402 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding Volume Setting Processing Executed by Audio Light Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 128 shows the volume setting process (step S in FIG. 127) of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment.
6502).

(Step S6601)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, MPU4
02 determines whether or not any button (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 as operation means has been pushed down. When the MPU 402 determines that the player's operation is accepted (YES), the process of step S6602 is executed. When the MPU 402 determines that the player's operation has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the volume setting process.

(Step S6602)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the left button 35b of the operation buttons 35 has been pressed. When the MPU 402 determines that the left direction button 35b has been pushed down (YES)
, the process of step S6603 is executed. If the MPU 402 determines that the left button 35b has not been pressed (NO), it executes the process of step S6605.

(Step S6603)
The MPU 402 determines whether the volume setting is "1" (minimum). Specifically, M
The PU 402 sets the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 to "1".
” (minimum). When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage area of the RAM 413 corresponds to "1" (minimum) (YES), it ends the volume setting process. When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 does not correspond to "1" (minimum) (NO), it executes the process of step S6604.

(Step S6604)
The MPU 402 reduces the volume setting by one. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets "4" if the volume setting is "5", sets "3" if the volume setting is "4", and sets the volume setting to "3".
If the volume setting is "2", it is set to "1".

(Step S6605)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the right button 35c of the operation buttons 35 has been pressed. When the MPU 402 determines that the right direction button 35c has been pressed (YES)
, the process of step S6606 is executed. If the MPU 402 determines that the right direction button 35c is not pressed (NO), it ends the volume setting process.

(Step S6606)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "5" (maximum). Specifically, M
The PU 402 sets the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage area of the RAM 413 to "5".
” (maximum). When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage area of the RAM 413 corresponds to "5" (maximum) (YES), it ends the volume setting process. When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage area of the RAM 413 does not correspond to "5" (maximum) (NO), it executes the process of step S6607.

(Step S6607)
The MPU 402 increments the volume setting by one. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets "2" if the volume setting is "1", sets "3" if the volume setting is "2", and sets the volume setting to "3".
If the volume setting is "4", it is set to "5".

(Step S6608)
The MPU 402 sets the output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to the volume set in step S6604 or step S6607. Specifically, the MPU 402 uses the RAM 4
13 is changed (rewritten) to correspond to the volume setting in step S6604 or step S6607. This will
The output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C becomes the volume set by the player.

In the above description, the left and right direction buttons 35b and 35c of the operation button 35 are used to set the volume, but an operation button for setting the volume may be provided separately from the operation button 35. Further, in the above description, pressing the left button 35b of the operation button 35 decreases the volume setting by one step, and pressing the right button 35c of the operation button 35 increases the volume setting by one step. The volume setting may be increased by one step when the left button 35b of the operation button 35 is pressed, and the volume setting may be decreased by one step when the right button 35c of the operation button 35 is pressed.

<Regarding production mode determination processing executed by sound emission control device 400>
FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect mode determination processing (step S6503 in FIG. 127) of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment.

(Step S6701)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "1". Specifically, MPU40
2 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "1". When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "1" (YES)
, the process of step S6702 is executed. When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 does not correspond to "1" (NO), it executes the process of step S6703.

(Step S6702)
The MPU 402 determines the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 to be the effect mode DMA corresponding to the volume setting flag "1".

(Step S6703)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "2". Specifically, MPU40
2 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "2". When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "2" (YES)
, the process of step S6704 is executed. When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 does not correspond to "2" (NO), it executes the process of step S6705.

(Step S6704)
The MPU 402 determines the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 to be the effect mode DMB corresponding to the volume setting flag "2".

(Step S6705)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "3". Specifically, MPU40
2 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "3". When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "3" (YES)
, the process of step S6706 is executed. When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 does not correspond to "3" (NO), it executes the process of step S6707.

(Step S6706)
The MPU 402 determines the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 to be the effect mode DMC corresponding to the volume setting flag "3".

(Step S6707)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "4". Specifically, MPU40
2 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "4". When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "4" (YES)
, the process of step S6708 is executed. When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 does not correspond to "4" (NO), it executes the process of step S6709.

(Step S6708)
The MPU 402 determines the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 to be the effect mode DMD corresponding to the volume setting flag "4".

(Step S6709)
The MPU 402 determines the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 to be the effect mode DME corresponding to the volume setting flag "5".

(Step S6710)
The MPU 402 sets the effect mode to steps S6702, S6704, S6706, and S67.
08 or the mode set in S6709. Specifically, the MPU 402
The effect mode flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the AM 413 are stored in step S670.
2. Change (rewrite) to one corresponding to the effect mode determined in S6704, S6706, S6708 or S6709. As a result, the presentation mode of the pachinko machine 10 corresponds to the set sound volume.

[Modification of the 12th embodiment]
In the twelfth embodiment, different productions (production modes DMA to DME) are executed according to the magnitude of the output volume from the speakers 26A to 26C, that is, the volume setting, but the production mode MDA ~MDE may be configured to be selectable by the player. In this case, regardless of the magnitude of the output volume from the speakers 26A-26C, that is, regardless of the volume setting, the player can select the effect modes DMA-DME, thus increasing options for the player.
As a result, the player's sufficiency and satisfaction with the pachinko machine 10 are improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a sound collector (eg, a microphone), and the sound collector (eg, a microphone)
Different effects may be executed according to the difference between the sound volume of the surrounding environment of the game hall and the set sound volume of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁More specifically, depending on the difference β-α (db) between the surrounding environment volume α (db) of the gaming hall collected by the sound collecting device of the gaming machine 10 and the set volume β (db) of the pachinko machine 10 , any one of the presentation modes DMA to DME may be executed. In this case, the greater the volume difference β-α (db), the more effect modes (for example, effect modes DMA, DMB, etc.) with more effects (image effects, light-emitting effects) other than sound effects are executed.
If the volume difference β-α (db) is negative, it means that the set volume β is greater than the surrounding environment volume α. Therefore, if the volume difference β-α (db) is negative, Execute the production mode DME.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes effect execution means (MPU 402) for executing effects, and sound output means (speaker units 26A to 26A) for outputting sounds based on the effects executed by the effect execution means.
6C), and a volume setting reception unit (operation button 35,
MPU 402), volume control means (MPU 402) for adjusting the volume of the sound output means based on the settings accepted by the volume setting acceptance unit, and effect execution means based on the settings accepted by the volume setting acceptance unit and an effect control means (MPU 402) for executing different effects. According to such a pachinko machine 10, the effect executing means is caused to execute different effects based on the setting of the output sound volume, so that different effects can be enjoyed by setting the output sound volume.
As a result, interest is improved.

(2) The pachinko machine 10 has a first effect and a second effect in which the effect by the sound output means is relatively less than the first effect. Then, the effect control means causes the effect executing means to switch between the first effect and the second effect based on the setting received by the volume setting receiving section. According to such a pachinko machine 10, based on the setting received by the volume setting receiving unit, the first effect is relatively large in the effect by the sound output means, and the second effect is relatively small in the effect by the sound output means. Since the performance is switched and executed, it is possible to enjoy performances with different ratios of performances by sound, and the amusement is improved.

(3) The effect control means of the pachinko machine 10 causes the effect executing means to execute the first effect when the setting of the output sound volume received by the sound volume setting receiving section is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. According to such a pachinko machine 10, when the setting of the output sound volume is equal to or higher than the predetermined value, the first effect with the relatively large effect by the sound output means is executed. The player can easily hear the sound even in a noisy situation. Therefore, the player can enjoy the performance by the sound even if the ratio of the performance by the sound is increased. Also, players who increase the output sound volume are thought to want to enjoy sound effects, and increasing the ratio of sound effects also matches the tastes of the players. As a result, interest is improved.

[Thirteenth embodiment]
The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment (hereinafter also simply referred to as the pachinko machine 10) includes a game board 8
1 (1st and 2nd starting openings 84a, 84b) The result of the internal lottery that is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening (first and second starting openings 84a, 84b) is referred to in advance (prefetching determination), and the result of this prefetching determination Based on this, the display effect (read-ahead effect) of the pattern display device is executed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of game performance modes 1 to 3, and any one of these game performance modes can be selected and changed by operating a game performance mode selection button 600 described later. It's becoming The pachinko machine 10 changes the game presentation mode according to the signal output by pressing the game presentation mode selection button 600 . As a result, when the selection of the game effect mode is changed, the background image is changed to the background image for the selected game effect mode at that time, and the substantial display effect of the selected game effect mode is executed. be.

<Outline of look-ahead production>
The look-ahead effect is executed for the hold stored in the hold storage area of the main control device 300, and is an effect capable of starting a predetermined suggestion regarding the hold of the target before execution of the variable production related to the hold of the target. . In the pachinko machine 10, as the look-ahead performance, the pattern display device 91 stores a hold look-ahead performance of executing a hold display in a display mode indicating the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, or when the first special figure or the second special figure is stored. In addition, during the variable performance based on the random number, or across a plurality of variable performances from the variable performance executed before the variable performance based on the random number to the variable performance based on the random number, the pattern display device 91 , it is possible to execute a special effect or the like that executes a specific display or the like. In addition, a plurality of types of execution modes of each look-ahead effect are provided, and various types of images to be displayed and the like are set.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the ROM 412 of the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 stores various look-ahead effect determination tables for determining the execution mode of each look-ahead effect. The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 receives the look-ahead correctness command transmitted from the main control device 300 (a command indicating which of the first to eighth reservations has been won (in the look-ahead correctness command, which reservation is and information on whether or not you have won the jackpot))), the prefetch effect according to the contents of the received prefetch right or wrong command (which of the 1st to 8th reservations is won) A determination table is selected, and the execution mode of the look-ahead effect is determined based on the selected look-ahead effect determination table. For example, in the look-ahead effect determination table, the win of the first reserve is associated with the first look-ahead effect mode, the win of the second reserve is associated with the second look-ahead effect mode, and the win of the third reserve is associated with the second look-ahead effect mode. 3 prefetching effect modes are associated, winning of the fourth reservation is associated with the fourth prefetching effect mode, winning of the fifth reserve is associated with the fifth prefetching effect mode, and winning of the sixth reserve is associated with the fifth prefetching effect mode. The sixth look-ahead performance mode is associated with the winning of the seventh reservation, the seventh look-ahead performance mode is associated with the winning of the seventh reservation, and the eighth look-ahead performance mode is associated with the winning of the eighth reservation.
A look-ahead effect mode is associated.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the configuration different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to twelfth embodiments will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be omitted.

<Game production mode selection button 600>
130 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown in FIG. 130, the upper swelling portion 31
A game performance mode selection button 600 as a game performance mode selection means is provided on the left side of the front. This game effect mode selection button 600 is a button for selecting a plurality of game effect modes having different display effect modes on the pattern display device 91 . The player can switch the game presentation mode by pressing the game presentation mode selection button 600 . Note that the game effect mode selection button 600 does not necessarily have to be provided on the front left side of the upper swelling portion 31, and its installation position is arbitrary. However, it is preferable that the installation position of the game presentation mode selection button 600 is not a position that prevents the player from viewing the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In addition, since the player needs to operate the shooting handle 41 with the right hand to shoot the game ball, the installation position of the game production mode selection button 600 is set at a position where the player can easily operate with the left hand. It is more preferable to be on the left side when facing the front of 10 . Further, the operation button 35 provided on the upper surface of the upper bulging portion 31 of the pachinko machine 10 may also be used as the game presentation mode selection button 600 .

<Game production mode>
FIG. 131 shows an example of images displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 in the three game presentation modes of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.
In the pachinko machine 10, three game presentation modes are set. The game production mode 1 shown in FIG. 131(a) is also called a natural stage mode, and for example, the background is an image of shallow water in which sunlight is sufficiently poured over rocks and corals. The design is a character with a number. In this game presentation mode 1, a display presentation effect is performed to foretell that there is a high possibility of a big win due to the appearance of bubbles or a school of fish. In addition, in the initial state,
If the game performance mode 1 is set and there is no change operation of the game performance mode, the game performance mode remains in the state of the game performance mode 1, and the variable display in the game performance mode 1 is performed.

Game production mode 2 shown in FIG. 131(b) is also called a treasure stage mode. It is an image, and the variable pattern is a character with a number similar to the game production mode 1. In this game presentation mode 2, for example, a display presentation effect such as a step-up notice for notifying that there is a high possibility of a big win state is performed by a mode in which predetermined characters appear sequentially.

The game presentation mode 3 shown in FIG. 131(c) is also called a lagoon stage mode, and for example, a sunken ship exists on the seabed as a background, and the image is an image of the deep sea where sunlight does not shine at all. , and the variable symbols are characters with numbers similar to those in the game presentation mode 1 . In this game presentation mode 3, display presentation effects such as button announcement and continuous announcement, for example, are performed.

In the pachinko machine 10, game presentation mode 1 (natural stage mode) shown in FIG. 131(a) is set as default, and in the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, the game presentation mode 1 is selected. Then, each time the player presses the game presentation mode selection button 600, the game presentation mode of the pachinko machine 10 changes to the game presentation mode 1 (
natural stage mode)→game production mode 2 (treasure stage mode) shown in FIG. 131(b)→game production mode 3 (lagoon stage mode) shown in FIG. is configured to

As shown in FIG. 131, the symbol display device 91 of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a plurality of symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 capable of variably displaying decorative symbols. Triggered by winning a prize in the starting port 84b, the decoration patterns start to change in each of the pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Effective stop positions of decorative symbols are set in each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, and a stop symbol effective line is formed by combining the effective stop positions of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 by means of symbol variation performance. The symbol combinations of the decoration figures to be stopped and displayed in L1 to L3 are derived. It should be noted that three stop symbol effective lines L1 to L3 are set in the symbol display device 91 of the present embodiment.

The pattern display device 91 has a predetermined variation direction (in this embodiment, the horizontal direction from the left side to the right side of the paper surface of FIG. 131 and / or the horizontal direction from the right side to the left side of the paper surface of FIG. 131).
The variably displayed decorative figures are displayed in a predetermined stop order at the effective stop positions of the respective symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3. Stop is displayed. In addition, the symbol display device 91 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the effective stop positions of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 before the completion of the symbol variation effect.
, Z2 and Z3 are stopped and displayed to complete one pattern variation effect. That is, the pattern variation production (special figure 1 variation display and second special figure variation display) is performed based on one start reservation information (special figure 1 and special figure 2) From the start of fluctuation to the fixed stop It is designed to be executed once.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 131, on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91, the decorative figures are displayed in three rows of left, middle, and right for each of the upper, middle, and lower row of pattern rows Z1 to Z3. be done. When a prize is won in the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b, the variable display of the decorative figure is performed, and the variable display stops after a certain period of time according to the variation pattern selected by the main controller 300. , 9 decorative figures of 3 vertical×3 horizontal are displayed on the pattern display device 91 as a display result. In the variable display for winning the jackpot lottery, the display control device 500 displays three or more of the same main patterns (number patterns with characters) on a horizontal or oblique straight line out of the nine decorative patterns so that they stop. controls and indicates to the player that a jackpot has occurred. On the other hand, in the variable display in which the jackpot lottery is lost, the display control device 500 performs control so that three or more of the same main symbols are aligned horizontally or diagonally among the nine decoration symbols and do not stop. The player is shown the occurrence of a miss.

Here, the decoration figures displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the symbol display device 91 according to the present embodiment are vertically It is formed by connecting 18 patterns. The middle pattern row Z2 is formed by vertically connecting 20 patterns. Each pattern row is normally variably displayed so as to scroll from right to left with periodicity at the same time when the special pattern starts to fluctuate, and the fluctuation of all the pattern rows stops before the special pattern stops. In addition, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is normally scrolled from right to left for variable display. The numbers appear in ascending order, and since the numbers are arranged in descending order toward the left in the symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order.

It should be noted that the pattern display device 91 is not limited to this, and the pattern display device 91 is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbol rows, the scrolling direction of each symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of a picture and a number instead of only numbers, or may be a picture only. In addition, in the decoration diagram, there is a first game that allows the player to definitely recognize that a variable probability state (described later) will be given after the end of the jackpot game.
and a second identification symbol that can be non-deterministically recognized that the possibility of being given a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game.

[Main controller 300]
First, the control of main controller 300 will be described.
<Winning processing for the starting gate>
FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for the starting gate. In the pachinko machine 10, a prefetching lottery process (step S6808) is performed in the winning process for the starter. Since the processing from steps S6801 to S6807 is the same as the processing from steps S201 to S207 in FIG. 23 described in the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

<Winning processing for the starting gate>
FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the prefetch lottery process (step S6808) in FIG. The prefetch lottery process by the MPU 302 of the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below with reference to FIG.

(Step S6901)
The MPU 302 of the main controller 300 executes a prefetching lottery to determine whether or not the result of the variation display for the unexecuted ball stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313 will be a big win. Specifically, the MPU 302 performs the first reservation (reservation area for the first result display section Ra
The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first area Ra1 of ) is compared with the hit/fail table (hit/fail information group) stored in the hit/fail table storage area shown in FIG. MPU302, jackpot random number counter C stored in the first area Ra1
If the value 1 wins the jackpot (YES), the process of step S6902 is executed.
Moreover, MPU302 performs the process of step S6903, when the jackpot random number counter C1 value stored in 1st area Ra1 is not elected to a jackpot (NO).

(Step S6902)
The MPU 302 sets a look-ahead propriety command indicating that the first reservation has won the jackpot. This command is used for external output processing of main controller 300 (step S3 in FIG. 24).
01) to the audio light emission control device 400 .

(Step S6903)
The MPU 302 sets a look-ahead success/failure command indicating that the first reservation has not won the jackpot. This command is used for external output processing of main controller 300 (step S in FIG. 24).
301) to the audio emission control device 400. FIG.

(Step S6904)
The MPU 302 determines whether or not a lottery has been drawn to determine whether or not all the results of the fluctuation display for the unexecuted portion stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313 will result in a big win. The MPU 302 has a RAM 3
If it is determined that a lottery has been drawn to see if all the results of fluctuation display for all unexecuted balls stored in the 13 reserved ball storage areas will result in a big win (YES), the prefetching lottery process is terminated. Also, MPU30
2, if it is not determined that a lottery has been made as to whether all the unexecuted variable display results stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313 will result in a big hit (NO), the process of step S6905 is executed.

(Step S6905)
The MPU 302 increments the pending number for determining whether or not the result of the variation display for the unexecuted portion stored in the pending ball storage area of the RAM 313 is a big hit, and step S690.
Returning to the process of 1, the second reservation (the jackpot random number counter C1 value stored in the first area Ra2 of the reservation area Ra for the first result display section) and the success/failure table storage area shown in FIG. Whether or not it is a big win is determined by comparing with a stored success/failure table (a success/failure information group). In this way, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the jackpot will be won for all reservations (first to eighth reservations), and if the jackpot is won, the prediction propriety indicating that the jackpot has been won. A command is set, and if the jackpot has not been won, a look-ahead success or failure command indicating that the jackpot has not been won is set. It should be noted that the look-ahead success/failure command includes information about what number of suspension (what number of suspension) it is and whether or not the jackpot has been won.

The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 stores in the RAM 413 the read-ahead correctness command transmitted from the main control device 300 in the command storage processing (step S7001 in FIG. 135) of the timer interrupt processing. The read-ahead success/failure command includes information as to what number is pending and whether or not the jackpot has been won. Therefore, the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 can recognize in which of the first to eighth reservations the jackpot has been won by analyzing the content of the look-ahead propriety command.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the prefetching lottery is performed when the number of pending is one or more, but it is not limited to this. For example, if the number of reservations is 2 or more, a prefetching lottery may be executed, and if the number of reservations is 3 or more, a prefetching lottery may be executed.

[Audio emission control device 400]
FIG. 134 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 130, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a game presentation mode selection button 600 as game presentation mode selection means. Figure 134
, the game effect mode selection button 600 is connected to an input port (not shown) of the sound emission control board 401 provided in the sound emission control device 400. As shown in FIG. That is, the signal corresponding to the pressing operation of the game presentation mode selection button 600 by the player is the sound emission control board 401
is input to

Also, the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 300 and analyzes these various commands. Then, based on the analyzed contents, the MPU 402 extracts the program and processing data from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404,
Light emission data and sound data are read, and based on the read data, various lamp units 23A,
23B and 95a to 96 are driven to light up, and the speaker units 26A to 26C are acoustically driven. again,
The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 300 and transmits control commands to the display control device 500 based on the contents of analysis of the various commands.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the RAM 413 of the MPU 402 includes a variable period flag storage area, a game presentation mode flag storage area, a game presentation mode reservation flag storage area, a game presentation mode reservation completion flag storage area, a prefetch winning flag storage area, and the like. area.
The MPU 402 also includes a game presentation mode counter C6 (not shown) that counts the number of pressing operations of the game presentation mode selection button 600 by the player.

The fluctuation period flag storage area is an area for storing a fluctuation period flag indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the fluctuation period. The MPU 402 sets the value of the variable period flag to "1" during the variable period, and sets the value of the variable period flag to "0" during periods other than the variable period. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the value of the flag during the fluctuation period to "0" in the initialization process, sets the value of the flag during the fluctuation period to "1" when the fluctuation display is started,
When the variable display ends, the value of the variable period flag is set to "0". More specifically, MP
When U402 receives the variation command (variation pattern command) set in step S717 of FIG. When the fluctuation end command is received from main controller 300, the value of the fluctuation period flag is set to "0". It should be noted that the value of the during-variation-period flag may be set to "0" when the variation display time included in the variation pattern command elapses.

The game performance mode flag storage area is an area for storing the game performance mode flag indicating the game performance mode currently executed by the pachinko machine 10, in other words, the game performance mode displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91. be. When the MPU 402 receives a game production mode confirmation command indicating that the change of the game production mode is confirmed, which is transmitted from the display control device 500, the game production mode flag stored in the game production mode flag storage area is confirmed. Update to a game performance mode flag corresponding to the performance mode.

The game presentation mode reservation flag storage area is an area for storing the game presentation mode reservation flag indicating the game presentation mode when requesting the display control device 500 to change the game presentation mode. When the player presses the game presentation mode selection button 600, the MPU 402
stores the accepted game effect mode in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the RAM 413 . Specifically, the MPU 402 corresponds to the selected game presentation mode by setting the value of the game presentation mode reservation flag stored in the game presentation mode reservation flag storage area of the RAM 413 according to the operation of the game presentation mode selection button 600. value. Also, the MPU 402
sets a game performance mode change command for changing to the game performance mode corresponding to the game performance mode reservation flag stored in the game performance mode reservation flag storage area. This command is sent to the display control device 500 in the external output process (step S7009 in FIG. 135) for sending the set command to the display control device 500. FIG.

The game presentation mode reservation completion flag storage area is an area for storing the game presentation mode reservation completion flag indicating the game presentation mode when the reception of the reservation for the game presentation mode is completed in the display control device 500 . When the MPU 402 receives the reservation acceptance completion command transmitted from the display control device 500, the MPU 402 updates the game production mode reservation completion flag stored in the game production mode reservation completion flag storage area. In other words, the game presentation mode reservation completion flag storage area is an area for storing a flag indicating the game presentation mode when the game presentation mode change command is accepted by the display control device 500 .

It should be noted that, when the look-ahead effect occurs and cancels the reservation for changing the game effect mode, the MPU
402 stores the value of the game presentation mode reservation flag stored in the game presentation mode reservation flag storage area and the game presentation mode reservation completion flag stored in the game presentation mode reservation completion flag storage area, in the game presentation mode flag storage area. to the value of the game presentation mode flag stored in . By this processing, the information of the game effect mode held by the sound emission control device 400 matches the information of the game effect mode in the display control device 500, and the period during which the game effect mode can be changed (in this embodiment, other than the variable period) (for example, at the start of the next fluctuation, etc.), the reservation for changing the game effect mode is canceled without changing the game effect mode.

The prefetching winning flag storage area is an area for storing a flag indicating that the prefetching has been won (the prefetching that has won the jackpot).
The first to eighth reserved winning flags can be stored in the look-ahead winning flag storage area. M.
When the prefetching right/wrong command transmitted from the main controller 300 is received, the PU 402 stores the prefetching winning flag in the prefetching winning flag storage area of the RAM 413 according to the content of the received prefetch right/wrong command. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the values of the first to eighth reserved winning flags in the prefetch winning flag storage area to "0" in the initialization process, and the main controller 300
Upon receiving a look-ahead success or failure command from the player, the content is analyzed, and the value of a look-ahead winning flag is set according to which of the 1st to 8th reserves the jackpot is won. For example, MPU4
02 sets the value of the first reservation winning flag to "1" when the jackpot is won in the first reservation (also called prefetching), and the jackpot is won in the second reservation (also called prefetching). ), the value of the second pending winning flag is set to "1", and if the jackpot is won in the third pending (also referred to as prefetching winning), the value of the third pending winning flag is set to "1" ” and has won a jackpot in the 4th reserve (also called prefetch win), set the value of the 4th reserve win flag to “1” and win a jackpot in the 5th reserve (prefetch win) ), the value of the 5th pending winning flag is set to "1", and if the jackpot is won in the 6th pending (also called pre-reading winning), the value of the 6th pending winning flag is set to "1". If it is set to "1" and the jackpot is won in the 7th reservation (also referred to as prefetching), the value of the 7th reservation winning flag is set to "1" and the jackpot is won in the 8th reservation (prefetching ), the value of the eighth reserved winning flag is set to "1". In addition, when the value of any one of the first to eighth pending winning flags stored in the prefetching winning flag storage area is other than "0", in other words, when the prefetching wins, the MPU 402 enters the game effect mode. The value of the game production mode reservation flag stored in the reservation flag storage area and the game production mode reservation completion flag stored in the game production mode reservation completion flag storage area are stored in the game production mode flag storage area. By rewriting the value of the performance mode flag, the change reservation of the game performance mode is cancelled.

The game effect mode counter C6 is a counter for counting the number of pressing operations of the game effect mode selection button 600 by the player. The game production mode selection button 600 is
An operation signal is output each time a pressing operation is performed by the player. The MPU 402 adds 1 to the count value of the game effect mode counter C6 each time it receives a signal corresponding to the pressing operation by the player. In addition, the game production mode counter C6 has a count value from "0" to "2",
It is a loop counter that returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value "2". The count value "0" of the game presentation mode counter C6 corresponds to the game presentation mode 1, the count value "1" corresponds to the game presentation mode 2, and the count value "2" corresponds to the game presentation mode 3.

The MPU 402 updates the count value of the game presentation mode counter C6 and also updates the RAM 4
The value of the game performance mode reservation flag stored in the game performance mode reservation flag storage area No. 13 is updated to a value corresponding to the updated count value. For example, when the game production mode selection button 600 is pressed and the game production mode 2 is selected as the game production mode, the MPU
402 sets the count value of the game presentation mode counter C6 to "1", and
The game performance mode reservation flag stored in is rewritten to a flag corresponding to "game performance mode 2".

Thus, when the game presentation mode selection button 600 is pressed, the MPU 402
The game performance mode reservation flag stored in the game performance mode reservation flag storage area of the RAM 413 is rewritten to a flag corresponding to the selected game performance mode. In addition, as described above, when canceling the reservation for changing the game effect mode, the MPU 402 stores the value of the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area and the game effect mode reservation completion flag storage area. The stored game performance mode reservation completion flag is rewritten to the value of the game performance mode flag stored in the game performance mode flag storage area.

[Display control device 500]
The display control device 500 receives various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 and causes the pattern display device 91 to display a predetermined variable display effect based on the various commands. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 receives various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 , analyzes the contents of the commands, and executes display control of the pattern display device 91 . For example, the MPU 502 analyzes various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 and stores the currently set game effect mode in various flag storage areas of the work RAM 513 . In the pachinko machine 10, the work RAM 513 of the MPU 502 is
It has areas such as a fluctuation period flag storage area, a game performance mode reservation flag storage area, and a game performance mode flag storage area.

The fluctuation period flag storage area is an area for storing a fluctuation period flag indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the fluctuation period. The MPU 502 sets the value of the variable period flag to "1" during the variable period, and sets the value of the variable period flag to "0" during periods other than the variable period. Specifically, the MPU 502 sets the value of the flag during the fluctuation period to "0" in the initialization process, sets the value of the flag during the fluctuation period to "1" when the fluctuation display is started,
When the variable display ends, the value of the variable period flag is set to "0". More specifically, MP
U502 sends a variation command (variation pattern command) via the sound emission control device 400
is received, the variable period flag value is set to "1", and when the variable end command is received via the sound emission control device 400, the variable period flag value is set to "0". When the fluctuation display time included in the fluctuation pattern command elapses, the value of the fluctuation period flag is set to "0".
may be set to

Also, the game presentation mode reservation flag storage area is an area for storing the game presentation mode reservation flag corresponding to the game presentation mode change command received from the sound emission control device 400 . When receiving the game effect mode change command, the MPU 502 stores the game effect mode reservation flag corresponding to the received game effect mode change command in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the work RAM 513 . Further, when the MPU 502 stores the game presentation mode reservation flag, the MPU 502 sets a game presentation mode change acceptance command indicating that the game presentation mode change command has been accepted. This command is sent to the sound emission control device 40 in the external output process (step S7306 in FIG. 139) for transmitting the set command to the sound emission control device 400.
0.

The game performance mode flag storage area is an area for storing the game performance mode flag indicating the game performance mode currently executed by the pachinko machine 10, in other words, the game performance mode displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91. be. The MPU 502 determines whether or not the game effect mode can be changed, in other words, whether or not it is in the variable period by the flag during the variable period in the flag storage area during the variable period, and can change the game effect mode. In other words, if it is not during the fluctuation period, the VDP 505 is controlled to change to the game presentation mode corresponding to the received game presentation mode change command. When the MPU 502 completes the change to the game presentation mode corresponding to the received game presentation mode change command by controlling the VDP 505, the work R
The value of the game performance mode flag stored in the game performance mode flag storage area of AM513 is set to the value corresponding to the changed game performance mode. Also, the MPU 502 sets a game presentation mode confirmation command. This command is sent to sound emission control device 400 in the external output process (step S7306 in FIG. 139) for sending the set command to sound emission control device 400. FIG.

The character ROM 506 of the display control device 500 stores three variation pattern conversion tables TB1 to TB3 corresponding to game presentation modes 1 to 3 (not shown). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 has three game presentation modes ("game presentation mode 1" is a game presentation mode also called a natural stage mode, and "game presentation mode 2" is a game presentation mode also called a treasure stage mode). mode, "game presentation mode 3" is a game presentation mode also called a lagoon stage mode), and variation pattern conversion tables TB1 to TB3 are provided for each of these three game presentation modes.

Table TB1 is a table for game production mode 1, table TB2 is a table for game production mode 2, table TB3 is a table for game production mode 3, and the tables TB1 to TB3 contain production control commands. A variation pattern corresponding to is stored in advance. Therefore, by using the tables TB1 to TB3, the variation pattern is determined by the received effect control command and the game effect mode stored in the game effect mode flag storage area of the work RAM513.

The VDP 505 has a function of forming a decorative figure image, a function of forming a background image corresponding to the game production mode, a function of forming a variable pattern (character) image corresponding to the game production mode, and a function corresponding to the game production mode. It has a function of forming an image such as a notice pattern, a function of generating a one-frame image from a layer on which a background image is formed, a layer on which a character image is formed, and a layer on which an image such as a notice pattern is formed. . When the VDP 505 receives an effect control command (such as complete loss, normal reach, super reach, premium reach, jackpot command) analyzed by the MPU 502, the VDP 505 executes the game effect currently set in the game effect mode flag storage area of the work RAM 513. The mode is read, and the variation pattern associated with the performance control command of the table corresponding to this game performance mode is read. Also, VDP50
5 forms an image such as a background image, a character image, a notice pattern, etc., based on the read variation pattern, and forms a layer on which the background image is formed, a layer on which the character image is formed, and an image of the notice pattern, etc. A one-frame image is generated from these layers. The VDP 505 rewrites the storage contents of the video RAM 507 with the generated image data. Thereby, the display image of the pattern display device 91 is updated.

The VDP 505 basically forms images such as a background image, a character image, and an advance notice pattern according to the current game effect mode during the variable period, and a layer on which the background image is formed and a layer on which the character image is formed. , and a layer on which an image such as a preview pattern is formed, to generate a one-frame image. Moreover, VDP505 changes game production mode based on the instruction|indication from MPU502. Specifically, the VDP 505 reads data from the table corresponding to the game presentation mode instructed by the MPU 502 and rewrites the data in the video RAM 507 .

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 135 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device. The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes timer interrupt processing to progress the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 402 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes the timer interrupt process of FIG. Note that step S70 in FIG.
01 to S7006 are the steps S1401 to S1 in FIG. 39 described in the first embodiment.
406, redundant description will be omitted, and only steps S7007 to S7009 will be described.

(Step S7007)
The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes game presentation mode change processing. Specifically, the MPU 402 outputs the background displayed on the pattern display device 91 and the speaker units 26A to 26C when the selection operation of the game presentation mode is performed by the game presentation mode selection button 600 as the operation means. A process for changing the BGM or the like to the accepted mode is executed. Details of the game effect mode changing process will be described later.

(Step S7008)
The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes prefetch effect processing. in particular,
MPU 402 selects a prefetch effect determination table according to the contents of the prefetch success/failure command (which one of the first to eighth reserved winning commands wins) when the prefetch success/failure command is stored in the RAM 413, and selects the prefetch effect determination table. Based on the read-ahead effect determination table, the execution mode of the read-ahead effect is determined and executed. Details of the look-ahead effect processing will be described later.

(Step S7009)
The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes external output processing for transmitting the set command to the display control device 500 . Specifically, MPU402, such as production control command (type command, variation pattern command and decorative drawing designation command) and production control command (production stop command) instructing to stop production, commands corresponding to the production for the game round, , command corresponding to the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, a game effect mode change command for changing the game effect mode, and the like are set, and if it is determined that the command is set, the A command is sent to the display control device 500 .

<Regarding game production mode change processing executed by sound emission control device 400>
FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a game effect mode change process executed by the sound emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

(Step S7101)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the game presentation mode selection button 600 has been pressed. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not an operation signal output from the game presentation mode selection button 600 is received. When the MPU 402 determines that the game presentation mode selection button 600 has been pressed (YES), the process of step S7102 is executed. MPU
402, if it is not determined that the game production mode selection button 600 is pressed (N
O), end the game effect mode change processing.

(Step S7102)
The MPU 402 adds 1 to the count value of the game presentation mode counter C6 upon receiving a signal corresponding to the pressing operation by the player.

(Step S7103)
The MPU 402 rewrites the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the RAM 413 to the flag corresponding to the selected game effect mode according to the value of the game effect mode counter C6 in step S7102. When the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area is rewritten, the MPU 402 notifies (presents) the game effect mode corresponding to the rewritten content to the player.
You may make it perform the process to carry out.

(Step S7104)
MPU402 sets the game production mode change command which corresponds to the game production mode reservation flag which is set with step S7103. As described above, this command is an external output process for transmitting the set command to the display control device 500 (step S700 in FIG. 135).
In 9), it is transmitted to the display control device 500 .

(Step S7105)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received a game presentation mode change acceptance command indicating that the game presentation mode change command has been accepted from the display control device 500 . When the MPU 402 determines that it has received the game production mode change reception command from the display control device 500 (YES
), the process of step S7106 is executed. If the MPU 402 does not determine that it has received the game presentation mode change acceptance command from the display control device 500 (NO), step S7
109 is executed.

(Step S7106)
When the MPU 402 determines that it has received the game presentation mode change acceptance command from the display control device 500, it sets the game presentation mode reservation completion flag stored in the game presentation mode reservation completion flag storage area to the game presentation mode for which the reservation has been received. Update to the corresponding value.

(Step S7107)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received from the display control device 500 a game presentation mode confirmation command indicating that the game presentation mode has been decided. When the MPU 402 determines that it has received the game production mode confirmation command from the display control device 500 (YES), step S7108.
process. MPU402 performs the process of step S7109, when not determining that the game production|presentation mode confirmation command was received from the display control apparatus 500 (NO).

(Step S7108)
When the MPU 402 determines that the game performance mode confirmation command is received from the display control device 500, it updates the game performance mode flag stored in the game performance mode flag storage area to a value corresponding to the determined game performance mode.

(Step S7109)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not a prefetching validity command transmitted from the main controller 300 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the values of the first to eighth pending winning flags stored in the prefetch winning flag storage area of the RAM 413 are "0". When the values of the first to eighth pending winning flags are "0", in other words, when the look-ahead effect is not executed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the game effect mode change process. Also, MPU4
02 executes the process of step S7110 when the value of any one of the first to eighth pending winning flags is other than "0", in other words, when the prefetch effect is to be executed (YES).

(Step S7110)
The MPU 402 cancels the reservation for changing the game effect mode when executing the look-ahead effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores the value of the game presentation mode reservation flag stored in the game presentation mode reservation flag storage area and the game presentation mode reservation completion flag stored in the game presentation mode reservation completion flag storage area. The value of the game performance mode flag stored in the performance mode flag storage area is rewritten. By this processing, the sound emission control device 4
00 matches the information of the game presentation mode in the display control device 500, and the change of the game presentation mode is allowed during the period in which the change of the game presentation mode is possible (for example, at the start of the next fluctuation). The change reservation of the game presentation mode is canceled without being performed.

<Regarding the look-ahead effect processing executed by the sound emission control device 400>
FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a flow chart of prefetch effect processing executed by the sound emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

(Step S7201)
The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 determines whether or not it has received the prefetch correctness command transmitted from the main control device 300 . If the prefetch correctness command is received (YE
S), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7202. When the read-ahead propriety command is not received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the read-ahead effect processing.

(Step S7202)
The MPU 402 recognizes the reservation number and whether or not the prefetching has been won based on the information included in the prefetching propriety command received in step S7201. For example, MPU402
determines whether or not the second reservation wins the prefetch, if the prefetch right/wrong command received in step S7201 relates to the second reservation. Specifically, the MPU 402
recognizes that it is the second pending and whether the prefetching has been won from the information included in the prefetching propriety command. If the prefetching right/wrong command received in step S7201 wins prefetching (YES), the MPU 402 executes step S7203. Step S7
If the reservation of the prefetching validity command received in 201 is not elected for prefetching (NO), M
PU 402 ends the look-ahead effect processing.

(Step S7203)
The MPU 402 refers to the look-ahead effect determination table stored in the ROM 412 .
The look-ahead effect determination table is a table for determining the execution mode of the look-ahead effect, etc.
Different execution modes of the prefetching effect are associated with the command contents of the prefetching propriety command. Specifically, the prefetch win of the first reservation is associated with the first prefetch effect mode, the prefetch win of the second reserve is associated with the second prefetch effect mode, and the prefetch win of the third reserve is associated with the second prefetch effect mode. 3 prefetching effect modes are associated, prefetch win of the fourth reservation is associated with the fourth prefetch effect mode, prefetch win of the fifth reserve is associated with the fifth prefetch effect mode, prefetch of the sixth reserve. Winning is associated with a sixth prefetching performance mode, prefetching winning of the seventh reservation is associated with a seventh prefetching performance mode, and prefetching winning of the eighth reservation is associated with an eighth prefetching performance mode. .

(Step S7204)
The MPU 402 selects/determines the execution mode of the look-ahead effect corresponding to the contents of the look-ahead success/denial command (in which of the 1st to 8th reserves was won) from the look-ahead effect determination table referred to. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores a look-ahead effect selection flag corresponding to the determined look-ahead effect execution mode in a look-ahead effect selection flag storage area of the RAM 413 . As a result, the manner of the look-ahead effect in the sound emission control device 400 in the look-ahead effect, in other words, the light emission mode of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the sound reproduction mode of the speaker units 26A to 26C are determined.

(Step S7205)
Also, the MPU 402 sets a look-ahead effect determination command for determining the mode of the look-ahead effect. This command is transmitted to the display control device 500 in the external output processing in step S7009 of FIG.

<Example of look-ahead effect executed by display control device 500>
FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead effect executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the display control device 500 displays on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91. FIG. This is an example of a look-ahead effect. The display control device 500 controls the sound emission control device 40
When the prefetching performance determination command transmitted from 0 is received, the prefetching performance is executed based on the contents of the received prefetching performance determination command.

In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 138, the look-ahead effect is a effect in which a large number of bubbles rise from the lower side of the display screen to the upper side. It should be noted that the aspect of the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 138 is merely an example, and is not limited to the example shown in FIG. For example, an effect such as displaying an image of a specific character or fixing and stopping a combination of specific symbols (so-called chance eye) may be executed. Also, a specific effect may be executed over a plurality of variable periods. For example, when the jackpot is won in the fourth reservation, in other words, when the value of the fourth reservation winning flag is "1", the pre-reading effect is executed when the first to third reservations are changed,
It is preferable that the look-ahead effect, which is executed as the process progresses from the first reservation to the third reservation, increases the expectation for the big win.

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Display Control Device 500>
FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this timer interrupt processing, the MPU 502
periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

(Step S7301)
The MPU 502 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, the MPU 5
02 stores the received command in the work RAM 513 when receiving a command from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 . Specifically, the work RAM 513 has M
It has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the PU 402 , and the MPU 502 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 402 . The MPU 502 reads the commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer. For example, the MPU 502 controls performance control including basic information necessary for the game such as the result of the jackpot lottery (lottery result of whether it is a jackpot or a loss, and if it is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot), information on the number of activated balls, and the fluctuation time of special symbols. Receive commands (game production mode change command, type command, variation command (variation pattern command), decoration designating command, variation end command, etc.). In addition, MPU502, after the lapse of a predetermined time (special symbol fluctuation time), production control command to instruct the production stop (production stop command)
receive.

(Step S7302)
The MPU 502 executes decorative symbol counter update processing. Details of the decorative symbol counter update process will be described later.

(Step S7303)
The MPU 502 executes a decoration design display process for causing the design main display device 91 to display the decoration graphics on the display screen G in a variable manner. Details of the decorative pattern display process will be described later.

(Step S7304)
The MPU 502 executes game effect mode change processing. Details of the game effect mode changing process will be described later.

(Step S7305)
The MPU 502 executes prefetch effect processing. Specifically, the MPU 502 instructs the VDP 505 to form an image for the pre-reading effect based on the pre-reading effect determination command received from the sound emission control device 400, and the VDP 505, based on the instruction, changes the background image to A one-frame image is generated from the formed layer and the layer formed with the character image. The VDP 505 rewrites the data in the video RAM 507 with the generated image, so that the image displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91 becomes the prefetch effect image.

(Step S7306)
The MPU 502 executes external output processing for transmitting the set command to the sound emission control device 400 . Specifically, the MPU 502 is a production control command, for example, a game production mode change acceptance command indicating that a game production mode change command has been accepted, or a change to the game production mode instructed by the game production mode change command has been confirmed. It is determined whether or not a command such as a game performance mode confirmation command to that effect is set, and when it is determined that the command is set, the command for the performance is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400.例文帳に追加

<Operation after Command Storage Processing Executed by Display Control Device 500>
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the operation after the command storage process executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The processing in FIG. 140 is interrupt processing executed when a command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 is received and stored in the display control device 500. By this processing, the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 is performed in the display control device 500 .

In the following description, the content of the variation pattern command is analyzed by the display control device 500. However, even if the content of the variation pattern command analyzed by the audio emission control device 400 is transmitted to the display control device 500 good. Specifically, the sound emission control device 400
A command corresponding to the contents of the variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 500 . This eliminates the need for the display control device 500 to analyze the variation pattern command, and the processing load on the display control device 500 can be reduced.

(Step S7401)
The MPU 502 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer of the work RAM 513 . The MPU 502 analyzes this read command and confirms the content of the command.

(Step S7402)
If the command is a variation pattern command, the MPU 502 writes the variation pattern command into the effect execution area. Corresponding to this variation pattern command, the variation pattern such as the presence or absence of variation time and reach in the special symbol is predetermined, and the MP of the main controller 300
The pattern display device 91 executes variable display corresponding to various lotteries performed in U302.

(Step S7403)
The MPU 502 confirms the contents of the received variation pattern command. The MPU 502 is
If it is a big hit variation pattern command, the process of step S7404 is executed. MP
U502 executes the process of step S7405 if it is a variation pattern command for reach. If the MPU 502 is a losing variation pattern command, step S7406
process.

(Step S7404)
The MPU 502 writes the value of the jackpot symbol counter buffer into the effect execution area of the work RAM 513 as the stop symbol of the decoration symbol for the current variation display.

(Step S7405)
The MPU 502 stores the value of the ready-to-win pattern buffer corresponding to the variation pattern in the work RAM 51
Write in the effect execution area of 3.

(Step S7406)
The MPU 502 stores the value of the outlier pattern buffer corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the work RAM 513
Write to the production execution area of .

(Step S7407)
The MPU 502 causes the pattern display device 91 to start the variable display of the decoration pattern.

(Step S7408)
When the command is a stop symbol command, the MPU 502 writes stop symbol data into the effect execution area of the work RAM 513 .

(Step S7409)
If the command is a fixed command, the MPU 502 fixes and stops the variable display, and terminates the command reception process.

(Step S7410)
If the command is neither the variation pattern command, the stop symbol command, nor the confirmation command, the MPU 502 executes each process according to the received command.

<Decoration figure counter update process executed by the display control device 500>
FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a flow chart showing decorative symbol counter update processing executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

(Step S7501)
The MPU 502 determines which of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 the decoration figure counter is to be updated, and executes counter update processing for updating the decoration figure counter of the symbol row that has reached the update timing in accordance with the update timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the decorative figure counter S1 of the symbol row Z1,
If it is time to update, the decorative figure counter S1 of the symbol row Z1 is updated. On the other hand, if it is not the time to update the symbol row Z1, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the decoration figure counter S2 of the symbol row Z2, and if it is the time to update, the decoration figure counter S2 of the symbol row Z2 is updated. Similarly, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the symbol row Z3, and if it is time to update, the decorative figure counter S3 of the symbol row Z3 is updated.

In updating the decoration counters S1 to S3, the MPU 502 adds the value of the lower 3 bits of the register to the previous counter value, and subtracts the maximum value if the addition result exceeds the maximum value. The result is used as the current value of the decorative figure counters S1 to S3. By executing the updating process in this manner, the decorative figure counters S1 to S3 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are updated one by one in one normal process, so that the updating timing of each counter value may overlap. Therefore, one set of decoration counters S1 to S3 is updated each time the normal process is executed three times.

(Step S7502)
The MPU 502 determines whether or not the combination of the decorative figure counters S1 to S3 updated in step S7501 is a combination of the jackpot symbols. MPU502 performs the process of step S7503, when it is a combination of a jackpot design (YES). Also, the MPU 502
is not a combination of jackpot symbols (NO), the process of step S7504 is executed.

(Step S7503)
The MPU 502 stores the combination of the decorative symbol counters S1 to S3 in the jackpot symbol buffer of the work RAM 513 . It should be noted that the combination of the jackpot pattern is determined by the 3-row pattern row Z1
All combinations of counter values that form a combination of jackpot symbols on any of the effective lines L set to Z3 are stored in advance in the program ROM 512 of the display control device 500, and are compared with the values. .

(Step S7504)
The MPU 502 determines whether or not the combination of the decorative figure counters S1 to S3 updated in step S7501 is a combination of ready-to-win symbols. MPU502 performs the process of step S7505, when it is a combination of reach designs (YES). Also, the MPU 502
If it is not a combination of reach symbols (NO), the process of step S7506 is executed.

(Step S7505)
The MPU 502 stores the combination of the decorative figure counters S1 to S3 in the ready-to-win pattern buffer of the work RAM 513. FIG. In addition, as a determination of the combination of the reach pattern, the three pattern rows Z1 to Z
All combinations of counter values that form a combination of ready-to-win symbols on any of the effective lines L set to 3 are stored in advance in the program ROM 512 of the display control device 500, and are compared with the values.

(Step S7506)
The MPU 502 stores the combination of the decorative symbol counters S1 to S3 in the outlier symbol buffer B22 of the work RAM513. Here, the combination of ready-to-win symbols and the combination of outlier symbols may differ depending on each variation pattern of normal stop variation, forward stop variation and pinch stop variation. , a combination of symbols corresponding to each variation pattern.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to provide counters for the number of symbol rows for determining the combination of decoration figures, but counters are provided for one symbol row Z2 in the center, and others are fixedly displayed according to predetermined combinations. Also good. Alternatively, a table in which a plurality of fluctuation patterns to be reach are set in advance may be stored in the display control device 500, and the fluctuation pattern may be derived from the table.

<Regarding game production mode change processing executed by display control device 500>
FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a game effect mode change process executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

(Step S7601)
The MPU 502 determines whether or not it has received a game presentation mode change command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 . When the MPU 502 determines that it has received the game effect mode change command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 (YES), step S7602.
process. Further, when not determining that the game effect mode change command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 is received (NO), the MPU 502 ends execution of the game effect mode change process.

(Step S7602)
When receiving the game effect mode change command, the MPU 502 stores the game effect mode reservation flag corresponding to the received game effect mode change command in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the work RAM 513 .

(Step S7603)
When the MPU 502 sets the flag stored in the game presentation mode reservation flag storage area of the work RAM 513 to a value corresponding to the received game presentation mode change command, the MPU 502 issues a game presentation mode change acceptance command indicating that the game presentation mode change command has been accepted. set. This command is an external output process (Fig. 1
39 (step S7306), it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400. FIG.

(Step S7604)
The MPU 502 determines whether or not it is during the fluctuation period. Specifically, the MPU 502
By referring to the fluctuation period flag in the fluctuation period flag storage area of the work RAM 513, it is determined whether or not it is in the fluctuation period. When the MPU 502 determines that it is in the fluctuation period (Y
ES), the execution of the game effect mode change process is terminated. If the MPU 502 does not determine that it is in the fluctuation period (NO), the MPU 502 executes the process of step S7605.

(Step S7605)
The MPU 502 changes the VDP 505 to the game presentation mode corresponding to the game presentation mode reservation flag stored in the game presentation mode reservation flag storage area of the work RAM 513.
to control. The VDP 505 forms an image for the game effect mode corresponding to the game effect mode reservation flag. Specifically, the VDP 505 refers to the table corresponding to the game presentation mode corresponding to the skill presentation mode reservation flag, reads the variation pattern associated with the presentation control command, and based on this variation pattern, the background image is changed. Generate formed layers. In addition, the VDP 505 forms images such as character images and preview symbols, and generates one frame image from a layer in which a background image is formed, a layer in which character images are formed, and a layer in which images such as preview symbols are formed. to generate The VDP 505 rewrites the data in the video RAM 507 with the generated image so that the image displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91 corresponds to the selected game presentation mode.

(Step S7606)
The MPU 502 sets the flag stored in the game performance mode flag storage area of the work RAM 513 to a value corresponding to the changed game performance mode.

(Step S7607)
The MPU 502 sets a game production mode confirmation command in the work RAM 513 . This command is an external output process (Fig. 1
39 (step S7306), it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400. FIG.

<Specific example of game effect mode change processing executed by display control device 500>
FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a specific example of the game effect mode changing process executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. FIG. 143(a) shows a state in which the game presentation mode selection button 600 is pressed from "game presentation mode 1" to "game presentation mode 2", and the values of the first to eighth reserved winning flags are "0", In other words, it is a diagram explaining the game effect mode change processing when the look-ahead effect does not occur. In FIG. 143(b), the game performance mode selection button 600 is pressed from "game performance mode 1" to "game performance mode 2", and the value of any one of the first to eighth reserved winning flags is "1". It is a diagram for explaining the game effect mode change processing when the state of , in other words, the look-ahead effect occurs.

(Without look-ahead effect: Fig. 143(a))
In the first fluctuation display, from time t1, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 fluctuate at high speed, and then the symbol row Z
1 decelerates and fluctuates, and stops after a predetermined time has elapsed. Also, the symbol row Z2 and the symbol row Z3 are also the symbol row Z
After the stop of 1, the deceleration fluctuates sequentially, the symbol row Z3 stops, then the symbol row Z2 stops, and the time t
At 2 all variations end.
During this first fluctuation display (during the fluctuation period), the game production mode selection button 600
is operated and an operation signal is input from the game presentation selection button, a change reservation for the game presentation mode by the game presentation mode selection button 600 is accepted. Then, this time t
5 to the end time t2 of the first variable display, if the look-ahead effect does not occur and the game effect mode selection button 600 is not operated, the second variable display starting from time t3 is It becomes a variable display by the game production mode 2. If the game production mode selection switch 600 is operated once during the period from time t5 to time t2, the second variable display starting from time t3 will be the variable display by game production mode 3. .

(If there is a look-ahead effect: Fig. 143(b))
In the first fluctuation display, from time t1, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 fluctuate at high speed, and then the symbol row Z
1 decelerates and fluctuates, and stops after a predetermined time has elapsed. Also, the symbol row Z2 and the symbol row Z3 are also the symbol row Z
After the stop of 1, the deceleration fluctuates sequentially, the symbol row Z3 stops, then the symbol row Z2 stops, and the time t
At 2 all variations end.
During this first fluctuation display (during the fluctuation period), the game production mode selection button 600
is operated and an operation signal is input from the game effect selection button, but if the prefetch wins during the first fluctuation period, the value of any one of the first to eighth pending winning flags becomes "1". Therefore, a look-ahead effect is generated, and the change reservation of the game effect mode by the game effect mode selection button 600 is cancelled. Then, the second variable display starting from time t3 is the variable display in game presentation mode 1. FIG. It should be noted that even if the game production mode selection switch 600 is operated multiple times during the period from time t5 to time t2, since the reservation for changing the game production mode by the game production mode selection button 600 is canceled, the operation starts from time t3. The second variable display to be performed is the variable display in game presentation mode 1 . Further, when the prefetching is won during the first fluctuation period, this game presentation mode is selected regardless of whether the timing of winning the prefetching is before or after the game presentation mode selection button 600 is operated. The change reservation of the game presentation mode by the button 600 is not accepted and is canceled.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, when the pressing operation of the game production mode selection button 600 is performed during a period other than the fluctuation period, the game production mode is changed. When the game performance mode selection button 600 is pressed, a reservation for changing the game performance mode is made, and the change of the game performance mode is executed after the end of the variable period. Also, even if a reservation for changing the game production mode is made, if the pre-reading production is executed,
The reservation for changing the game performance mode is canceled and the change of the game performance mode is not executed after the end of the variable period.

To solve the problem that when a reservation for changing the game performance mode is made, the look-ahead performance to be performed at the time of the next change is not executed due to the change of the game performance mode, and the user cannot enjoy the look-ahead performance. can be done. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the look-ahead effect. In addition, when there is a look-ahead effect, the player can surely enjoy the look-ahead effect, which improves the amusement.

[Modification 1 of the thirteenth embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, when the prefetching is won (winning the jackpot), the prefetching effect is always executed, but when the prefetching is won, the prefetching effect is always executed. It does not have to be a form. For example, when the prefetching is won, it may be determined whether or not to execute the prefetching effect by lottery, and when the lottery is won, the prefetching effect may be executed.

In this case, a lottery as to whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect may be executed on the main control device 300 side, or may be executed on the sound emission control device 400 side. When the main controller 300 side executes the lottery for whether or not to execute the look-ahead performance, the main controller 300 is provided with a random number counter C7 for lottery for whether or not to execute the look-ahead performance, and the success or failure for the look-ahead performance is provided. Main controller 30
0 is stored in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 312 . Then, the MPU 302
When prefetching is won, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to execute the prefetching performance based on a random number counter C7 and a success/failure table for prefetching performance. Then, the MPU 302 transmits a look-ahead propriety command to the sound emission control device 400 when the execution of the look-ahead effect is won.

Further, when the lottery of whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed on the side of the voice issuing control device 400, the random number counter C for lottery of whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect to the sound emission control device 400.
7, and the success/failure table for the look-ahead effect is stored in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 412 of the sound emission control device 400.例文帳に追加Then, when the MPU 402 receives the prefetching right/wrong command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the MPU 402 draws a lottery as to whether or not to execute the prefetching effect based on the random number counter C7 and the prefetching effect success/failure table when the prefetching wins. Run. Then, the MPU 402 stores, in the RAM 413 of the sound emission control device 400 , the read-ahead propriety command transmitted from the main control device 300 when winning the execution of the look-ahead effect.

Other configurations and operations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, so overlapping descriptions will be omitted.

According to the above configuration, when the pre-reading effect is won by lottery, the reservation for changing the game effect mode is canceled, but when the pre-reading effect is not won, the reservation for changing the game effect mode is not canceled. It is changed to the selected game presentation mode. Therefore, even though the prefetching lottery is won, the reservation for changing the game performance mode is not canceled when the prefetching performance is not performed, thereby improving convenience for the player. Further, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the game performance mode is changed without canceling the reservation for changing the game performance mode, so that the player can enjoy the game in the selected game performance mode immediately after the fluctuation is completed. can be done.

[Modification 2 of the thirteenth embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the player presses the game presentation mode selection button 6
00 is pressed to change the game effect mode, but when a predetermined condition is met, for example, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined time has passed since the last change of the game effect mode. When the time has elapsed, the pachinko machine 10 may change the game presentation mode regardless of the pressing operation of the game presentation mode selection button 600 .

<Structure of Audio Light Emission Control Device 400>
When the sound emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example 2 of the present embodiment executes the change of the game production mode, the MPU of the sound emission control device 400 changes the elapsed time from the previous game production mode change ( A timer T for counting a predetermined time) and a game performance mode lottery random number counter C9 for selecting which game performance mode to select when the predetermined time elapses.
and Also, the ROM 412 of the sound emission control device 400 stores a game effect mode selection table in which the value of the counter C9 and the game effect mode are associated with each other. It should be noted that the number of receptions of the variation command instead of the variation end command may be counted. When counting the number of receptions of variation commands, the game effect mode is changed in the next variation.

The MPU 402 uses the timer T to determine whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the last game effect mode change. MPU402 will perform the lottery of game production mode mentioned later, if predetermined time has passed. Further, the MPU 402 resets the count value of the timer T to "0" when a lottery in the game presentation mode, which will be described later, is executed after a predetermined time has passed.

The game production mode lottery random number counter C9 adds (increments) 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching a predetermined maximum value (“2” in Modification 2 of the present embodiment), the loop returns to 0. It is a counter. Game production mode lottery random number counter C9 periodically (for example,
(every 4 msec). When the predetermined time measured by the timer T elapses, the MPU 402 acquires the value of the game effect mode lottery random number counter C9 and stores it in the game effect mode lottery buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 413 . Next, the MPU 402 stores the RAM 41
The value of the game performance mode lottery random number counter C9 stored in the game performance mode lottery buffer of No. 3 is collated with the game performance mode selection table stored in the ROM 412, and the changed game performance mode is determined.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a game effect mode selection table stored in the ROM 412 of the sound emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown in FIG. 144, the value of the game effect mode lottery random number counter C9 is associated with the game effect mode. Specifically, the value "0" of the game presentation mode lottery random number counter C9 is associated with the game presentation mode 1 (natural stage mode), and the value "1" of the game presentation mode lottery random number counter C9 is associated with the game presentation mode. 2 (treasure stage mode) is associated with the game presentation mode lottery random number counter C
The value "2" of 9 is associated with game presentation mode 3 (lagoon stage mode).

<Regarding game production mode change processing executed by sound emission control device 400>
FIG. 145 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game effect mode change processing executed by the sound emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

(Step S7701)
The MPU 402 uses the timer T to determine whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the last game effect mode change. When the MPU 402 determines that the predetermined time has passed (YES),
The process of step S7702 is executed. Moreover, when determining that the predetermined time has not passed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the game effect mode change processing.

(Step S7702)
The MPU 402 acquires the value of the game effect mode lottery random number counter C9 and stores it in a game effect mode lottery buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 413 .

(Step S7703)
The MPU 402 collates the value of the game performance mode lottery random number counter C9 stored in the game performance mode lottery buffer of the RAM 413 with the game performance mode selection table stored in the ROM 412, and determines the changed game performance mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 changes the game effect mode to the game effect mode 1 when the value of the game effect mode lottery random number counter C9 is "0".
(Natural stage mode) is determined, and the value of the game production mode lottery random number counter C9 is set to "
1", the game production mode is determined to be the game production mode 2 (treasure stage mode), and if the value of the game production mode lottery random number counter C9 is "2", the game production mode is changed to the game production mode 3 (lagoon stage mode). ).

(Step S7704)
MPU402 RAM41 according to the game production mode which is decided with step S7703
The game performance mode reservation flag stored in the game performance mode reservation flag storage area of 3 is rewritten to a flag corresponding to the determined game performance mode. It should be noted that when the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area is rewritten, the MPU 4
02 may execute a process of announcing (presenting) the game presentation mode corresponding to the rewritten content to the player.

(Step S7705)
MPU402 sets the game production mode change command which corresponds to the game production mode reservation flag which is set with step S7704. As described above, this command is an external output process for transmitting the set command to the display control device 500 (step S700 in FIG. 135).
In 9), it is transmitted to the display control device 500 .

(Step S7706)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received a game presentation mode change acceptance command indicating that the game presentation mode change command has been accepted from the display control device 500 . When the MPU 402 determines that it has received the game production mode change reception command from the display control device 500 (YES
), the process of step S7107 is executed. If the MPU 402 does not determine that it has received the game presentation mode change reception command from the display control device 500 (NO), step S7
110 is executed.

(Step S7707)
When the MPU 402 determines that it has received the game presentation mode change acceptance command from the display control device 500, it sets the game presentation mode reservation completion flag stored in the game presentation mode reservation completion flag storage area to the game presentation mode for which the reservation has been received. Update to the corresponding value.

(Step S7708)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received from the display control device 500 a game presentation mode confirmation command indicating that the game presentation mode has been decided. When the MPU 402 determines that it has received the game production mode confirmation command from the display control device 500 (YES), step S7709.
process. MPU402 performs the process of step S7710, when not determining that the game production|presentation mode confirmation command was received from the display control apparatus 500 (NO).

(Step S7709)
When the MPU 402 determines that the game performance mode confirmation command is received from the display control device 500, it updates the game performance mode flag stored in the game performance mode flag storage area to a value corresponding to the determined game performance mode.

(Step S7710)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not a prefetching validity command transmitted from the main controller 300 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the values of the first to eighth pending winning flags stored in the prefetch winning flag storage area of the RAM 413 are "0". When the values of the first to eighth pending winning flags are "0", in other words, when the look-ahead effect is not executed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the game effect mode change process. Also, MPU4
02 executes the process of step S7711 when the value of any one of the first to eighth pending winning flags is other than "0", in other words, when the prefetch effect is to be executed (YES).

(Step S7711)
The MPU 402 cancels the reservation for changing the game effect mode when executing the look-ahead effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores the value of the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area and the game effect mode reservation completion flag stored in the game effect mode reservation completion flag storage area. The value of the game performance mode flag stored in the performance mode flag storage area is rewritten. By this processing, the sound emission control device 4
00 matches the information of the game presentation mode in the display control device 500, and the change of the game presentation mode is allowed during the period in which the change of the game presentation mode is possible (for example, at the start of the next fluctuation). The change reservation of the game presentation mode is canceled without being performed.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times from the last change of the game presentation mode, the pachinko machine 1
When 0 takes the form of changing the game production mode, the sound emission control device 40 of the pachinko machine 10
The MPU 402 of 0 is provided with a variation count counter C8 for measuring the number of variations from the previous change in the game effect mode, and when the number of variations measured by the variation count counter C8 reaches a predetermined number, the game effect The value of the mode lottery random number counter C9 may be acquired and the game presentation mode to be shifted may be determined by referring to the game presentation mode selection table.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times from the last change of the game presentation mode, the pachinko machine 1
When 0 changes the game production mode, the fluctuation period is over, in other words, when the fluctuation end command is received and there is no prefetch production, it may be configured to execute the change of the game production mode, or the next fluctuation period has started, in other words, when the next command for variation is received and there is no look-ahead effect, the change of the game effect mode may be executed.

Furthermore, when the player presses the game production mode selection button 600 to change the game production mode and a predetermined condition, for example, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number or when the previous game production mode You may make it combine with the form which changes game production modes, such as when predetermined time passes after change. When configured in such a combination, the player can change the game performance mode at his or her own will, and enjoy the change of the game performance mode determined by the lottery by the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the amusement. do. Further, when the player does not like the game performance mode determined by lottery by the pachinko machine 10, the player can press the game performance mode selection button 600 to change the game performance mode, which improves convenience. do.

[Modification 3 of the thirteenth embodiment]
In the thirteenth embodiment and modified examples 1 and 2, from the start to the end of the variation period, in other words, from the reception of the variation command to the reception of the variation end command, the game presentation mode is not changed, and the game presentation mode However, it is possible to change the game production mode for a predetermined period from the reception of the variation command to the reception of the variation end command (in the third modification of this embodiment, during high-speed variation). configuration. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment will be described, but the configuration and operation different from those of the pachinko machine 10 according to Modifications 1 and 2 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described below, and redundant description will be omitted. do.

The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10 has a first timer TM1 for measuring the period of high-speed fluctuation during the fluctuation period. The first timer TM1 manages the period during which the game production mode can be changed during the fluctuation period. is set to a period from high-speed fluctuation to deceleration fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation period W1). When the MPU 502 receives the fluctuation pattern command from, it sets the first timer TM1 and counts (measures) the high speed fluctuation period W1. In addition, in Modification 3 of the present embodiment, the period during which the game effect mode can be changed during the fluctuation period may be set to the period from the start of fluctuation until the symbol row Z2 or Z3 changes from high speed fluctuation to deceleration fluctuation.

<Regarding game production mode change processing executed by display control device 500>
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a game effect mode change process executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

(Step S7801)
The MPU 502 determines whether or not it has received a game presentation mode change command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 . When the MPU 502 determines that it has received the game effect mode change command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 (YES), step S7802.
process. Further, when not determining that the game effect mode change command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 is received (NO), the MPU 502 ends execution of the game effect mode change process.

(Step S7802)
When receiving the game effect mode change command, the MPU 502 stores the game effect mode reservation flag corresponding to the received game effect mode change command in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the work RAM 513 .

(Step S7803)
When the MPU 502 sets the flag stored in the game presentation mode reservation flag storage area of the work RAM 513 to a value corresponding to the received game presentation mode change command, the MPU 502 issues a game presentation mode change acceptance command indicating that the game presentation mode change command has been accepted. set. This command is an external output process (Fig. 1
39 (step S7306), it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400. FIG.

(Step S7804)
The MPU 502 determines whether or not it is during the fluctuation period. Specifically, the MPU 502
By referring to the fluctuation period flag in the fluctuation period flag storage area of the work RAM 513, it is determined whether or not it is in the fluctuation period. When the MPU 502 determines that it is in the fluctuation period (Y
ES), the process of step S7805 is executed. If the MPU 502 does not determine that it is in the fluctuation period (NO), the MPU 502 executes the process of step S7807.

(Step S7805)
The MPU 502 determines whether or not it is during the high-speed fluctuation period W1. Specifically, MPU5
02 determines whether or not the high-speed fluctuation period W1 is in progress by checking whether or not the first timer TM1 set at the start of the fluctuation is counting. When the MPU 502 determines that it is during the high-speed fluctuation period W1 (YES), it executes the process of step S7806. Also, the MPU 502
If it is not determined that it is during the high-speed fluctuation period W1 (NO), the execution of the game effect mode change process is terminated.

(Step S7806)
The MPU 502 instructs the VDP 505 to set only the background image to the game presentation mode specified by the game presentation mode change command. The VDP 505 forms a background image for the game presentation mode specified by the game presentation mode change command, and continues image formation in the game presentation mode before the change for images other than the background screen. Specifically, the VDP 505 refers to the table corresponding to the game effect mode whose setting has been changed, reads the variation pattern associated with the effect control command, and based on this variation pattern, the layer in which the background image is formed. to generate In addition, the VDP 505 forms images such as character images and preview symbols while referring to the table corresponding to the game effect mode before the setting change, and creates a layer in which the background image is formed and a layer in which the character image is formed. , 1 from the layer on which the image such as the preview pattern is formed
Generate a frame image.

(Step S7807)
The MPU 502 changes the VDP 505 to the game presentation mode corresponding to the game presentation mode reservation flag stored in the game presentation mode reservation flag storage area of the work RAM 513.
to control. The VDP 505 forms an image for the game effect mode corresponding to the game effect mode reservation flag. Specifically, the VDP 505 refers to the table corresponding to the game presentation mode corresponding to the game presentation mode reservation flag, reads the variation pattern associated with the presentation control command, and based on this variation pattern, the background image is changed. Generate formed layers.
In addition, the VDP 505 forms images such as character images and preview symbols, and generates one frame image from a layer in which a background image is formed, a layer in which character images are formed, and a layer in which images such as preview symbols are formed. to generate The VDP 505 rewrites the data in the video RAM 507 with the generated image so that the image displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91 corresponds to the selected game presentation mode.

(Step S7808)
The MPU 502 sets the flag stored in the game performance mode flag storage area of the work RAM 513 to a value corresponding to the changed game performance mode.

(Step S7809)
The MPU 502 sets a game production mode confirmation command in the work RAM 513 . This command is an external output process (Fig. 1
39 (step S7306), it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400. FIG.

<Specific example of game effect mode change processing executed by display control device 500>
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a specific example of the game effect mode changing process executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.
FIG. 147(a) shows a state in which the values of the first to eighth pending winning flags are "0", in other words, the game presentation mode selection button 600 is pressed from "game presentation mode 1" to "game presentation mode 2". And, it is a diagram for explaining the game effect mode change processing when the look-ahead effect does not occur.
FIG. 147(b) shows a state where the value of any one of the first to eighth pending winning flags is "1", in other words, from "game presentation mode 1" to "game presentation mode 2", the game presentation mode selection button 600
is a diagram for explaining game effect mode change processing when is pressed and a look-ahead effect occurs.

(Without look-ahead effect: Fig. 147(a))
In the first fluctuation display, both the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 fluctuate at high speed from the fluctuation start time t1, then the symbol row Z1 undergoes deceleration fluctuation at time t2, and stops after a predetermined time has elapsed. Also, the symbol row Z2
, the symbol row Z3 also gradually decelerates and fluctuates after the symbol row Z1 stops, the symbol row Z3 stops, then the symbol row Z2 stops, and all the fluctuations end at time t2.
During this variable display, the period during which the game effect mode can be changed is the period from time t1 to time t2 (the high-speed variable period W1 of the symbol row Z1. The time during this first variable display (during the variable period) During the period from t1 to time t2, when the game production mode selection button 600 is operated and an operation signal is input from the game production selection button, the background image is changed to the background image for the game production mode 2 from time t7. By changing the background image, the player can visually confirm that the selection of the game effect mode has been accepted and that the next change will be effect mode 2. Note that effect Substantial display effect contents of mode 2 are transferred during the next change.

(If there is a look-ahead effect: Fig. 147(b))
In the first fluctuation display, both the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 fluctuate at high speed from the fluctuation start time t1, then the symbol row Z1 undergoes deceleration fluctuation at time t2, and stops after a predetermined time has elapsed. Also, the symbol row Z2
, the symbol row Z3 also gradually decelerates and fluctuates after the symbol row Z1 stops, the symbol row Z3 stops, then the symbol row Z2 stops, and all the fluctuations end at time t2.
During the period from time t1 to time t2 during the first fluctuation display (during the fluctuation period), even if the game production mode selection button 600 is operated and an operation signal from the game production selection button is input, the first If prefetching is won during the first fluctuation period, the value of any one of the first to eighth reserved winning flags is "1", so that the prefetching effect occurs, so the game effect mode by this game effect mode selection button 600 will be canceled. Then, at time t4
The second variable display starting from is the variable display by the game presentation mode 1 . note that,
During the period from time t1 to time t3, even if the game effect mode selection switch 600 is operated one or more times, since the change reservation of the game effect mode by the game effect mode selection button 600 is canceled, the process starts from time t4. The second fluctuation display is the game production mode 1
It becomes a fluctuating display due to Further, when prefetching is won during the first fluctuation period, this game presentation mode is selected regardless of whether the timing of winning the prefetching is before or after the game presentation mode selection button 600 is operated. The change reservation of the game presentation mode by the button 600 is not accepted and is canceled.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period during which the game effect mode can be changed is constant (W1) regardless of the number of reserved balls. The MPU 5 of the display control device 500 is set to the same number of timers TM for measuring such periods.
02 should be provided. For example, when the number of reserved balls is 5 or more, if the variation period is shortened compared to when the number of reserved balls is less than 3, a first timer that measures the period during which the game production mode can be changed when the number of reserved balls is less than 3 The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 is provided with TM1 and a second timer TM2 for measuring the period during which the game effect mode can be changed when the number of held balls is 5 or more.
In step S7802, if the number of held balls is less than 5, the first timer TM1 is set, and if the number of held balls is 5 or more, the second timer TM2 is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to Modification 3 of the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to select and change the effect mode even during the fluctuation period. As a result, it is possible to select and change the presentation mode even when there is a reserved ball. As a result, the game can be enjoyed in a different presentation mode for each reserved ball. In particular, the probability of a big hit is high (high expectations)
If it is configured to change the lighting color of the suspension lamp to give notice of the event (for example, the suspension lamp is usually lit in blue, and if the degree of expectation is high, the suspension lamp is lit in red to give notice of that) When it lights up), the player can enjoy the display effect in a different effect mode for each reserved ball, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In addition, it is possible to solve the problem that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered by stopping the game until there are no reserved balls.

[Modification 4 of the thirteenth embodiment]
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modified examples 1 to 3, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the reservation for changing the game effect mode is cancelled. In the modification 4 of the thirteenth embodiment, instead of completely canceling the change reservation of the game effect mode, the prefetch effect is executed after the game effect mode is changed or the game effect is executed according to the execution timing of the prefetch effect. A form of determining whether to cancel without changing the mode will be described. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to Modification 4 of the present embodiment will be described, but the configuration and operation different from those of the pachinko machine 10 according to Modifications 1 to 3 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described below, and redundant description will be omitted. do.

<Look-ahead production decision table>
In the look-ahead effect determination table of the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification 4 of the present embodiment, different look-ahead effect execution modes are stored for each game effect mode depending on what number of hold is a jackpot.
FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead effect determination table provided in the pachinko machine 10.
(a) is an example of a look-ahead effect determination table stored in the ROM 412 of the sound emission control device 400, and (b) is an example of a look-ahead effect determination table stored in the program ROM 512 of the display control device 500. For the sake of explanation, in FIG. 148, the pending number is 4
(first to fourth reservations). In addition, as a matter of course, the first suspension does not have a look-ahead effect to be executed after the next change.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the pachinko machine 10, different execution modes are stipulated according to the prefetched winning reservation numbers (first reservation to fourth reservation). Here, the audio mode in FIG. 148(a) defines the audio, BGM, sound effects, etc., output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
Also, the light emission mode of FIG. 148(a) defines the light emission patterns (lighting, blinking, light emission intensity, etc.) of the various lamp portions 23A and 23B. 148(b) defines the display (cut-in image, character image, etc.) on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91. FIG. Also, the execution timing defines the timing for executing the look-ahead effect.

In this embodiment, for the sake of simplification, the execution timing of the look-ahead effect is set to two types, that is, one that is executed immediately after the execution mode of the look-ahead effect is determined, and the other that is executed after the next variation. The execution timing is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 148, and various timings can be adopted. For example, when the jackpot is won in the fourth reservation, the prefetch effect may be executed in two variations ahead. Also, when the big win is won in the third and fourth reservations, the look-ahead effect may be executed across the number fluctuations. For example, the third
When the big win is won in the reservation, the look-ahead performance may be executed over two fluctuations after the next change, and when the big win is won in the fourth reservation, the next change. It may be a mode in which the look-ahead effect is executed over the subsequent three fluctuations.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the prefetching effect determination table, different execution modes are associated with each game effect mode according to the prefetching winning reservation number. You can enjoy a different look-ahead effect for each reservation number. In addition, in the modification 4 of the present embodiment, the read-ahead effect is performed in all the game effect modes 1 to 3, but a game effect mode in which the read-ahead effect is not performed may be provided. For example, the game effect mode 3 may be a game effect mode in which the look-ahead effect is not performed.

In addition, in the look-ahead effect determination table shown in FIG. 148, a different look-ahead effect is associated with each game effect mode and each pre-reading winning reservation number. It is optional what kind of prefetching effect is associated with each game effect mode and prefetching winning reservation number. For example, the same look-ahead effect may exist in different game effect modes.

<Regarding game production mode change processing executed by sound emission control device 400>
FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game effect mode change processing executed by the sound emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Note that steps S7901 to S7 in FIG.
Since the processing of 908 is the same as the processing of steps S7101 to S7108 in FIG. 136, redundant description will be omitted.

(Step S7909)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received a prefetch correctness command transmitted from the main controller 300 . Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the values of the first to eighth pending winning flags stored in the prefetch winning flag storage area of the RAM 413 are "0". When the values of the first to eighth pending winning flags are "0", in other words, when the look-ahead effect is not executed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the game effect mode change process. The MPU 402 executes the process of step S7910 when the value of any one of the first to eighth pending winning flags is other than "0", in other words, when the look-ahead effect is to be executed (YES).

(Step S7910)
The MPU 402 refers to the look-ahead effect determination table stored in the ROM 412,
In the received game performance mode, in other words, in the game performance mode corresponding to the game performance mode reservation flag, there is a prefetch performance corresponding to the current game performance mode, in other words, whether there is a prefetch performance whose execution timing is "after the next change". determine whether or not If the corresponding look-ahead effect exists (YES), the MPU 402 ends the game effect mode change process. Moreover, when the corresponding look-ahead effect does not exist (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7911.

(Step S7911)
The MPU 402 cancels the reservation for changing the game presentation mode. Specifically, MPU4
02 stores the value of the game presentation mode reservation flag stored in the game presentation mode reservation flag storage area and the game presentation mode reservation completion flag stored in the game presentation mode reservation completion flag storage area, in the game presentation mode flag storage area. to the value of the game presentation mode flag stored in . By this processing, the information of the game effect mode held by the sound emission control device 400 matches the information of the game effect mode in the display control device 500, and the period during which the game effect mode can be changed (for example, when the next fluctuation starts) , the reservation for changing the game performance mode is canceled without changing the game performance mode.

In the above description, the variable period has ended, in other words, when the variable end command is received and there is no prefetch effect, the game effect mode is changed, but the next variable period has started. In other words, when the next variation command is received and there is no look-ahead effect, the game effect mode may be changed.

<Regarding the look-ahead effect processing executed by the sound emission control device 400>
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a flow chart of prefetch effect processing executed by the sound emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

(Step S8001)
The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 determines whether or not it has received the prefetch correctness command transmitted from the main control device 300 . If the prefetch correctness command is received (YE
S), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S8002. When the read-ahead right or wrong command is not received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the read-ahead effect processing.

(Step S8002)
The MPU 402 recognizes the reservation number and whether or not prefetching has been won based on the information included in the prefetching validity command received in step S8001. For example, MPU402
determines whether or not the second reservation wins the prefetch, if the prefetch right/wrong command received in step S8001 relates to the second reservation. Specifically, the MPU 402
recognizes that it is the second pending and whether the prefetching has been won from the information included in the prefetching propriety command. If the prefetching right/wrong command received in step S8001 wins prefetching (YES), the MPU 402 executes step S8003. Step S8
If the reservation of the prefetching validity command received in 001 is not prefetched (NO), M
PU 402 ends the look-ahead effect processing.

(Step S8002)
The MPU 402 refers to the look-ahead effect determination table stored in the ROM 412 .
The look-ahead effect determination table is a table for determining the execution mode of the look-ahead effect, etc.
As shown in FIG. 148, different execution modes of the look-ahead effect are associated with the current game effect mode and the contents of the look-ahead propriety command.

(Step S8004)
The MPU 402 selects/determines the content of the read-ahead success/denial command (which one of the first to fourth reserves is won) and the execution mode of the read-ahead performance corresponding to the current game performance mode from the look-ahead performance determination table referred to. Specifically, the MPU 402 selects/determines the execution timing of the prefetching effect from the aspect of the prefetching effect associated with the winning reservation number, either "immediate execution" or "after the next change". For example, in the state of the game production mode 1, when the third hold is prefetched in the jackpot game (special game state), the MPU 402 has a voice mode, a light emission mode, and an execution timing of A4, B4, "immediate execution" or voice Mode, light emission mode, and execution timing are each selected and determined by lottery from A5, B5, and "after the next change". Next, the MPU 402 stores the look-ahead effect selection flag corresponding to the determined look-ahead effect execution mode in the look-ahead effect selection flag storage area of the RAM 413 . As a result, the manner of the look-ahead effect in the sound emission control device 400 in the look-ahead effect, in other words, the light emission mode of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the sound reproduction mode of the speaker units 26A to 26C are determined. In addition, the MPU 402, in the external output process of step S7009 in FIG.
A look-ahead effect determination command is transmitted to the display control device 500 . It should be noted that the MPU 402 can recognize the current game effect mode from the game effect mode flag stored in the game effect mode flag storage area of the RAM 413 .

(Step S8005)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the game presentation mode has been changed. Specifically, the MPU
402 determines whether or not the value of the game effect mode flag stored in the game effect mode flag storage area of the RAM 413 has been changed. When the MPU 402 determines that the game effect mode has not been changed (NO), it ends the prefetch effect process. Also, the MPU 402
If it is determined that the game effect mode has been changed (YES), the process of step S8006 is executed.

(Step S8006)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the execution timing of the look-ahead effect determined in step S8004 is "immediate execution". When the MPU 402 determines that the execution timing of the look-ahead effect is "immediate execution" (YES), it ends the look-ahead effect processing. Also, MPU4
02, when it is determined that the execution timing of the look-ahead effect is not "immediate execution" (NO),
The process of step S8007 is executed.

(Step S8007)
The MPU 402 refers to the look-ahead effect determination table stored in the ROM 412 .
The look-ahead effect determination table is a table for determining the execution mode of the look-ahead effect, etc.
As shown in FIG. 148, different execution modes of the look-ahead effect are associated with the current game effect mode and the contents of the look-ahead propriety command.

(Step S8008)
The MPU 402 sets the game effect mode received in step S8005, in other words, the game effect mode corresponding to the game effect mode reservation flag, to the pre-read effect corresponding to the current game effect mode, in other words, the pre-read effect whose execution timing is after the next change. exists. For example, when the game production mode received in step S8005 is the game production mode 2, the current game production mode is the game production mode 1, and the third hold is prefetched in the jackpot game (special game state). , the MPU 402 refers to the prefetch effect determination table stored in the ROM 412, and executes the prefetch effect ( It is determined whether or not there is a corresponding look-ahead effect). If there is a corresponding look-ahead effect (YES),
MPU402 performs the process of step S8009. If the corresponding prefetch effect does not exist (NO), the MPU 402 terminates the prefetch effect process.

(Step S8009)
The MPU 402 selects/determines the content of the read-ahead success/denial command (which one of the first to fourth reservations is won) and the execution mode of the read-ahead performance corresponding to the changed game performance mode from the look-ahead performance determination table referred to. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores a look-ahead effect selection flag corresponding to the determined look-ahead effect execution mode in a look-ahead effect selection flag storage area of the RAM 413 . As a result, the manner of the look-ahead effect in the sound emission control device 400 in the look-ahead effect, in other words, the light emission mode of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the speaker units 26A-2
The audio playback mode in 6C is newly determined. It should be noted that the MPU 402 transmits a look-ahead effect determination command to the display control device 500 in the external output process of step S7009 in FIG. As a result, the aspect of the look-ahead effect executed by the display control device 500 corresponds to the changed game effect mode.

In addition, in the description of the above modification 4, when the execution timing is not immediately executed prefetch effect, there is a prefetch effect (corresponding prefetch effect) in which the execution timing is not immediately executed in the prefetch effect after the game effect mode change. If there is a look-ahead effect (corresponding look-ahead effect) whose execution timing is not executed immediately in the look-ahead effect after changing the game effect mode, the game effect mode is changed, and the game effect mode after the change is determined. Although the look-ahead effect is executed in , it is not always necessary to perform the look-ahead effect in the above mode.

For example, in the look-ahead effect selection table, even if the execution timing of the look-ahead effect is after the next fluctuation, the look-ahead effect that is executed over a plurality of fluctuation periods is likely to be a big hit (special game state). This is the look-ahead effect that the player looks forward to. If such a look-ahead effect becomes a different look-ahead effect by changing the game effect mode, the player who cannot enjoy the look-ahead effect executed over a plurality of fluctuation periods will feel more disappointed. In order to avoid such a problem, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the execution period of the prefetching effect of the current game effect mode spans a plurality of fluctuation periods, and the execution period of the prefetching effect of the current game effect mode is If it is determined that the period spans a plurality of fluctuation periods, the reservation for the game presentation mode may be discarded. As described above, when the look-ahead performance straddles the number fluctuation, the change of the game performance mode is canceled and the execution of the look-ahead performance is given priority, so that the interest is enhanced without disappointing the player. can be done.

[Modification 5 of the thirteenth embodiment]
In the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications 1 to 4, the look-ahead effect is generated only when the main controller 300 wins the look-ahead. In modification 5 of the present embodiment, main controller 3
A mode will be described in which the prefetching effect is generated with a certain probability even when the prefetching is not won with 00.例文帳に追加

In this modification, the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 includes a random number counter C10 for drawing lots for the generation of the look-ahead effect, a success/failure table (a group of information) for the generation of the look-ahead effect, and a random number initial value counter C11.
<Random Number Counter C10>
For example, each time the random number counter C10 is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and the maximum value is 59.
By returning to 0 after reaching 9, the loop counter loops within the range of 0-599. Also, the random number counter C10 reads the value of the random number initial value counter C11 at that time as an initial value each time it loops. The random number initial value counter C11 is
It is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 like the random number counter C10.

By using a random number counter C10 and a random number initial value counter C11, a big winning lottery is performed by a plus method in which the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers appears is determined by a random value. Specifically, the random number counter C11 advances the random number from the initial value of 0 when the power is turned on. The value obtained from the counter C11 becomes the initial value. Assuming that 100 is obtained as the initial value from the random number initial value counter C11, the random number counter C10 continues counting from 100, 101, 102 until it reaches 599, then returns to 0 and continues counting until it reaches 99. The initial value is again obtained from the random number initial value counter CINIrandom. In other words, in this method, since the initial value is changed each time the random number counter C10 completes one cycle, the timing at which the specific random number appears does not appear to be periodic.

<Acceptability table>
Among the values of the random number counter C10, the values of the random numbers that win the generation of the look-ahead effect are stored as a success/failure table (a success/failure information group) in a success/failure table storage area of the ROM 412 provided as success/failure information group storage means.
Here, the success/failure table has a first success/failure table for prefetching non-winning which is read when prefetching has not been won, and a second success/failure table for prefetching winning which is read when prefetching has been won. are doing.
The first success/failure table stores a small number of random numbers (eg, 0 to 10). On the other hand, the second right/wrong table is
There are many stored random numbers (0 to 100, for example).
The MPU 402 executes a lottery for generating a look-ahead effect by comparing these success/failure tables with the value of the random number counter C10.
The value and number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and the second success/failure table only needs to have a higher probability of "prefetching effect winning" than the first success/failure table. In addition, the random number value for "prefetching effect winning" stored in the second success/failure table may not include the random number value for "prefetching effect winning" stored in the first success/failure table. It may include a part or all of the random number value that is the "read-ahead effect" stored in the one success/failure table.

<Regarding the look-ahead effect processing executed by the sound emission control device>
FIG. 151 is a diagram showing a flowchart of prefetch effect processing executed by the sound emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth modification. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 151, the look-ahead effect processing executed by the sound emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

(Step S8101)
Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received a prefetching validity command transmitted from the main controller 300 . If the prefetch correctness command is received (YES), the MPU
402 executes the process of step S8102. When the read-ahead propriety command is not received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the read-ahead effect processing.

(Step S8102)
The MPU 402 recognizes the reservation number and whether or not prefetching has been won based on the information included in the prefetching validity command received in step S8101. For example, MPU402
determines whether or not the second reservation wins the prefetch, if the prefetch right/wrong command received in step S8101 relates to the second reservation. Specifically, the MPU 402
recognizes that it is the second pending and whether the prefetching has been won from the information included in the prefetching propriety command. If the prefetching right/wrong command received in step S8101 wins prefetching (YES), the MPU 402 executes step S8103. Step S8
If the reservation of the prefetching validity command received in 101 is not elected for prefetching (NO), M
PU 402 executes step S8104.

(Step S8103)
The MPU 402 reads out the second win/loss table for prefetch winning, which is read when the prefetch win is made, among the win/fail tables stored in the ROM 412 .

(Step S8104)
The MPU 402 reads out the first success/failure table for prefetch failure winning that is read when the prefetch failure is not won, among the success/failure tables stored in the ROM 412 .

(Step S8105)
The MPU 402 executes a win/fail determination process. Specifically, the MPU 402 acquires the value of the random number counter C10, and the acquired random value and the second success/failure table for prefetch winning read in step S8103 or the prefetch non-win winning table read in step S8104. The result of the winning lottery (winner result) is determined by comparison with the first win-or-fail table.

(Step S8106)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the result determined in step S9205 is "won". When the MPU 402 determines that the winning result is "winning" (YES), the process of step S8107 is executed. When the MPU 402 does not determine that the winning result is “winning” (NO), it ends the prefetch effect processing.

(Step S8107)
The MPU 402 refers to the look-ahead effect determination table stored in the ROM 412 .
The look-ahead effect determination table is a table for determining the execution mode of the look-ahead effect.
Since the look-ahead effect determination table has already been described, redundant description will be omitted.

(Step S8108)
The MPU 402 selects and executes a look-ahead effect from the look-ahead effect determination table referred to.
decide. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores a look-ahead effect selection flag corresponding to the determined look-ahead effect execution mode in a look-ahead effect selection flag storage area of the RAM 413 . As a result, the manner of the look-ahead effect in the sound emission control device 400 in the look-ahead effect, in other words, the light emission mode of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the sound reproduction mode of the speaker units 26A to 26C are determined. Also, the MPU 402 transmits a look-ahead effect determination command to the display control device 500 in the external output process of step S7009 in FIG.

<Regarding the game production mode change process executed by the sound emission control device>
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game effect mode change processing executed by the sound emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 152, the game effect mode change processing executed by the sound emission control device 400 of this modified example will be described.
2 correspond to steps S7101 to S7109 in FIG. 136, steps S8210 to S8211 in FIG. 152 will be described below, and redundant description of other steps will be omitted.

(Step S8210)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not it is a look-ahead effect in which a jackpot game is won. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines that the prefetch effect that is set as "with prefetch effect" in step S8209 is the prefetch effect that occurs when the jackpot game is won, or the prefetch effect that occurs when the jackpot game is not won. It is determined whether it is a performance. MPU 402 performs step S8
If the pre-reading effect indicated as "with pre-reading effect" in 209 is the pre-reading effect generated when the jackpot game is won, the process of step S8211 is executed. Also, the MPU 402
If the pre-reading effect "with pre-reading effect" in step S8209 is the pre-reading effect generated when the jackpot game is not won, the game effect mode change processing is terminated.

(Step S8211)
The MPU 402 cancels the reservation for changing the game presentation mode. Specifically, MPU4
02 stores the value of the game presentation mode reservation flag stored in the game presentation mode reservation flag storage area and the game presentation mode reservation completion flag stored in the game presentation mode reservation completion flag storage area, in the game presentation mode flag storage area. rewrite to the value of the game performance mode flag stored in , and cancel the change reservation of the game performance mode. By this processing, the information of the game effect mode held by the sound emission control device 400 matches the information of the game effect mode in the display control device 500, and the period during which the game effect mode can be changed (for example, when the next fluctuation starts) , the reservation is canceled without changing the game presentation mode.

[Modification 6 of the thirteenth embodiment]
In the modification 5 of the thirteenth embodiment, when the prefetching right/failure command is received and the prefetching success/failure command is won, in other words, the prefetching success/failure command wins the jackpot game, the reservation for changing the game effect mode is discarded (cancelled). When the prefetching effect is executed and the prefetching is not won, in other words, if it is a prefetching propriety command that is not winning the jackpot game, the change reservation of the game effect mode is discarded and the change reservation of the game effect mode is executed. ing. However, even when the prefetching right/wrong command is received and the prefetching right/wrong command wins the prefetching, in other words, even when the prefetching right/wrong command wins the big win game, the prefetching performance is executed without canceling (cancelling) the change reservation of the game performance mode, and the big win game is played. After the end, the mode may be changed to the reserved game presentation mode. In this case, after receiving the ending command indicating the end of the jackpot game and after the ending period elapses, the mode is changed to the reserved game presentation mode.

In addition, since the production for the big winning game is executed during the big winning game, it is preferable that the game production mode cannot be changed. For this reason, the RAM 413 of the sound emission control device 400 and the work RAM 513 of the display control means 500 are each provided with a jackpot game period flag storage area for storing a jackpot game period flag indicating that the jackpot game period is in progress. . The flag storage area during the jackpot game period is pachinko machine 1
0 is an area for storing a during jackpot game period flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game period is in progress. The MPU 402 and MPU 502 set the value of the flag during the jackpot game period to "1" during the jackpot game period, and set the value of the flag during the jackpot game period to "0" during the period other than the jackpot game period. Specifically, MPU402 and MPU502
sets the value of the flag during the jackpot game period to "0" in the initialization process, sets the value of the flag during the jackpot game period to "1" when the jackpot game is started, and sets the flag value during the jackpot game period to "1" when the jackpot game ends. Set the value of the flag during the period to "0". More specifically, MPU 402 and MPU 502 send the opening command (step S910 in FIG. 30) to main controller 30
When received from 0, the value of the flag during the jackpot game period is set to "1", and when the ending command (step S1017 in FIG. 31) is received from the main control device 300 and the ending period elapses, during the jackpot game period Set the value of the flag to "0". In addition, when the opening command is received, the value of the flag during the jackpot game period is set to "1", and when the time of the corresponding jackpot game period elapses, the value of the flag during the fluctuation period may be set to "0". . 142 step S7604 and step S7804 in FIG. 146, in addition to determining whether or not it is during the fluctuation period, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress. (N in step S7604 in FIG. 142
O or NO in step S7804 in FIG. 146), the game production mode is changed, and if it is during the fluctuation period or during the jackpot game (YES in step S7604 in FIG. 142 or YES in step S7804 in FIG. 146), the game production mode is changed. If configured so as not to be changed, the game performance mode is not changed even during the jackpot game, and a change reservation for the game performance mode is made during the jackpot game or during the fluctuation period. Also, in this case, during the jackpot game or during the fluctuation period, the reserved game effect mode changes cyclically each time the game effect mode selection button 600 is pressed.

[Modification 7 of the thirteenth embodiment]
Further, in the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications 1 to 6, the game production mode selection button 60
The sound emission control device 400 accepts the pressing operation of 0, and in the sound emission control device 400,
Based on whether or not the prefetch correctness command transmitted from the main controller 300 is received,
It is determined whether or not to cancel the change of the game presentation mode, and the display control device 50 displays the determination result.
0 is sent. However, the display control device 500 accepts the pressing operation of the game production mode selection button 600, and in the display control device 500, the main control device 300
It is also possible to determine whether or not to cancel the change of the game presentation mode based on whether or not the pre-reading correctness command transmitted from is received, and transmit the determination result to the sound emission control device 400.

In the display control device 500, it is determined whether or not to cancel the change of the game effect mode based on whether or not the pre-reading correctness command transmitted from the main control device 300 is received. In the case of transmission to the device 400 , the game effect mode selection button 600 is operated by the display control board 5 of the display control device 500 provided in the sound emission control device 400 .
01 input port (not shown). That is, a signal corresponding to the pressing operation of the game presentation mode selection button 600 by the player is input to the display control board 501 .

Then, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 is provided with a game presentation mode counter C6 (not shown) for counting the number of pressing operations of the game presentation mode selection button 600 by the player,
The work RAM 513 has areas such as a fluctuation period flag storage area, a game performance mode flag storage area, a game performance mode reservation flag storage area, a prefetch winning flag storage area, and the like. is executed by the MPU 502 of again,
The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 may be provided with a first timer TM1, and may be configured to receive a reservation for changing the game effect mode until the middle of the fluctuation period. Furthermore, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 has a game production mode lottery random number counter C9 and a game production mode selection table (
144), and the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 may perform the lottery for the game presentation mode.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment and its modification has a plurality of game presentation modes with different presentation modes, and a game presentation mode change reception means (MPU 402) for accepting selection and change of the game presentation mode; A special game determination means (MPU 302) for determining whether or not to make a special game state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a prefetch determination whether or not to enter the special game state before making the determination. Look-ahead determination means (MPU302), look-ahead effect execution means (MPU402, MPU502) for executing a predetermined look-ahead effect when it is determined to be in a special game state in the look-ahead determination, and game effect mode selection change is impossible Game production mode change disabled period determination means (MPU 402) for determining whether or not it is a game production mode change disabled period
), and if the selection change of the game production mode is accepted during the period when the game production mode cannot be changed,
Game production mode reservation means (MPU 402) for reserving change to the selected game production mode
and, after the game performance mode is reserved by the game performance mode reservation means, if the look-ahead performance occurs or if the look-ahead performance has already occurred, the game performance cancels the reservation of the game performance mode by the game performance mode reservation means. Mode reservation canceling means (MPU 402). In other words, when the change reservation of the game effect mode is made, if the look-ahead effect occurs, the change reservation of the game effect mode is discarded without being executed. As a result, the game performance mode is not changed, and the look-ahead performance is preferentially executed. As a result, the look-ahead performance is not canceled by the change of the game performance mode, the player can enjoy the look-ahead performance, and the amusement of the game is improved. In particular, the look-ahead effect that is executed over a plurality of fluctuations is highly likely to result in a big win (special game state), and thus is the look-ahead effect that the player looks forward to. When such a look-ahead performance is canceled by changing the game performance mode, the player who cannot enjoy the look-ahead performance is disappointed because the game performance mode after the change results in a big win without the look-ahead performance. It feels great too. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is not canceled by changing the game effect mode, and the look-ahead effect is reliably executed. As described above, according to the present invention, the look-ahead effect can be favorably performed, so that the amusement can be enhanced without disappointing the player.

(2) In the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, when the reservation of the game production mode is not canceled by the game production mode reservation cancellation means after the game production mode change prohibition period has elapsed, the current game A game performance mode changing means (MPU 402) is provided for changing the performance mode to a reserved game performance mode and not changing the current game performance mode when the reservation of the game performance mode is canceled by the game performance mode reservation canceling means. . In other words, if the reservation of the game production mode is not canceled, in other words, if the look-ahead production has not occurred,
Since the mode is changed to the reserved game performance mode, the player can enjoy the game in the reserved game performance mode. Further, when the reservation of the game performance mode is canceled, in other words, when the prefetch performance is generated, the current game performance mode is not changed, so that the prefetch performance can be enjoyed. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

(3) The pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment and its modification includes a first game presentation mode storage means (game presentation mode flag storage area of the RAM 413 of the MPU 402) for storing the current game presentation mode, and a game presentation mode A second game performance mode storage means (a game performance mode reservation flag storage area and a game performance mode reservation completion flag storage area of a RAM 413 of an MPU 402) for storing a game performance mode reserved by the reservation means, and a game performance mode reservation. The discarding means (MPU 402) rewrites the game performance mode stored in the second game performance mode storage means to the game performance mode stored in the first game performance mode storage means, thereby canceling the reserved game performance mode. discard (cancel) the That is, when the current game performance mode is stored in the first game performance mode storage means, the reserved game performance mode is stored in the second game performance mode storage means, and the reserved game performance mode is cancelled, second
To surely cancel reservation of a game performance mode with a simple structure by rewriting the game performance mode stored in the game performance mode storage means with the game performance mode stored in the first game performance mode storage means. can be done.

[Other embodiments]
The pachinko machine 10 according to each embodiment and its modification has been described above. It can be changed and made concrete. For example, the configurations provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to thirteenth embodiments and modifications thereof may be combined.

[Group of Inventions Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the invention extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described below. Of the features of the group of inventions, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the group of inventions are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the features of the group of inventions. Combinations of features such as modifications, improvements, etc. within the range that can achieve the purpose are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature A1 is
Having a plurality of game production modes with different production modes,
Game production mode change reception means (MPU 402) for accepting selection change of game production mode
When,
Special game determination means (MPU 302) for determining whether or not to make a special game state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player;
A prefetch determination means (MPU 302) for performing prefetch determination as to whether or not the special game state is entered before the determination is performed;
Prefetching effect executing means (MPU402, MPU502) for executing a predetermined prefetching effect when it is determined in the prefetching determination that the special game state is entered;
A game presentation mode change disabled period determination means (MPU 402) for determining whether or not it is a game presentation mode change disabled period in which selection change of the game presentation mode is impossible;
A game presentation mode reservation means (MPU 40) for reserving a change to the selected game presentation mode when the selection change of the game presentation mode is accepted during the game presentation mode change disabled period.
2) and
a game performance mode reservation canceling means (MPU 402) for canceling the reservation of the game performance mode by the game performance mode reservation means when the look-ahead performance occurs after the game performance mode is reserved by the game performance mode reservation means; ,
characterized by comprising

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, when the look-ahead effect occurs after the game effect mode is reserved by the game effect mode reservation means, the change reservation of the game effect mode is discarded without being executed. As a result, the game performance mode is not changed, and the look-ahead performance is preferentially executed. As a result, the look-ahead effect is not canceled by changing the game effect mode, and the player can
The look-ahead performance can be enjoyed, and the amusement of the game is improved. In particular, the look-ahead effect that is executed over a plurality of fluctuations is highly likely to result in a big win (special game state), and thus is the look-ahead effect that the player looks forward to. When such a look-ahead performance is canceled by changing the game performance mode, the player who cannot enjoy the look-ahead performance is disappointed because the game performance mode after the change results in a big win without the look-ahead performance. It feels great too. In the feature A1 of the present invention group, the look-ahead effect is not canceled by changing the game effect mode, and the look-ahead effect is reliably executed. As described above, according to the present invention, the look-ahead effect can be favorably performed, so that the amusement can be enhanced without disappointing the player.

Feature A2.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature A2 is the gaming machine according to feature A1,
When the reservation of the game presentation mode is not canceled by the game presentation mode reservation discarding means after the game presentation mode change prohibition period has elapsed, the current game presentation mode is changed to the reserved game presentation mode, and It is characterized by comprising a game performance mode changing means (MPU 402) which does not change the current game performance mode when the reservation of the game performance mode is canceled by the game performance mode reservation canceling means.

According to feature A2 of the present invention group, when the reservation of the game effect mode is not canceled, in other words, when the look-ahead effect does not occur, the game effect mode is changed to the contracted game effect mode.
The player can enjoy the game in the reserved game presentation mode. In addition, when the reservation of the game performance mode is canceled, in other words, when the prefetch performance is generated, the current game performance mode is not changed, so that the prefetch performance can be enjoyed. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Feature A3.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature A3 is the gaming machine according to feature A2,
First game production mode storage means for storing the current game production mode (RAM of MPU 402
413) and
A second game effect mode storage means (RAM 413 of MPU 402) for storing the game effect mode reserved by the game effect mode reservation means,
The game production mode reservation canceling means rewrites the game production mode stored in the second game production mode storage means to the game production mode stored in the first game production mode storage means, thereby canceling the reservation. It is characterized by discarding (cancelling) the game presentation mode.

According to feature A3 of the present invention group, the current game performance mode is stored in the first game performance mode storage means, the reserved game performance mode is stored in the second game performance mode storage means, and the reserved game performance is stored. When canceling the mode, the game performance mode stored in the second game performance mode storage means is rewritten to the game performance mode stored in the first game performance mode storage means, thereby ensuring reliability with a simple configuration. You can cancel the reservation for the game production mode.

Feature A4.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature A4 is the gaming machine according to feature A3,
Provided with production mode change input means (game production mode selection button 600) for selectively changing any of the game production modes by manual input operation,
The game production mode change reception means (MPU402)
A selection change of the game production mode is accepted in response to a manual input operation by the production mode change input means.

According to feature A4 of the group of the present invention, the production mode change input means for selecting and changing any of the game production modes by manual input operation is provided, and the game production mode change reception means receives the manual input operation by the production mode change input means. Correspondingly, the selection change of the game presentation mode is accepted. Therefore, the player can change the game presentation mode at any time when he or she wants to change his/her mood, such as when it is difficult to win a big win, and the convenience of the player is improved. In addition, since the player can play the game while changing his/her mood, the playing time becomes longer. For this reason, it is also profitable for the operator who manages the game hall.

Feature A5.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature A5 is the gaming machine according to feature A4,
The game production mode change reception means (MPU402)
outputting a signal instructing to change the game production mode each time a manual input operation by the production mode change input means is received;
The game production mode reservation means (MPU402)
The game performance mode stored in the second game performance mode storage means (RAM 413 of MPU 402) is periodically changed each time the game performance mode change receiving means outputs a signal instructing the change of the game performance mode. characterized by

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, the game production mode change reception means outputs a signal instructing the change of the game production mode each time the manual input operation by the production mode change input means is received,
The game performance mode reservation means changes the game performance mode periodically, in other words, cyclically, each time a signal instructing the change of the game performance mode is output, so that the player operates one operation button. It is possible to select all the game presentation modes that the game machine has.
In other words, the player can select all the game effect modes that the gaming machine has without having to operate a plurality of operation buttons. Here, in order to operate the operation button, it is necessary to visually recognize the operation button arranged at hand. You need to check your hand every time you try to change modes. However, the player usually plays the game while looking at the game board provided with the liquid crystal display device, and it is very troublesome to check the player's hand every time he/she wants to change the game presentation mode. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to feature A5, once you confirm your hand and put your hand on the operation button, you can cyclically change the game production mode with one operation button without confirming your hand. target) to select all the game effect modes that the game machine has. As a result, the player is hardly hindered from playing the game while looking at the game board provided with the liquid crystal display device, thereby improving the convenience. In addition, since the player can concentrate on looking at the game board provided with the liquid crystal display device, the player's interest is enhanced.

Feature A6.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature A6 is the gaming machine according to feature A3,
A game production mode lottery means (MPU 402) that draws a lottery to select one of the game production modes based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The game production mode change reception means (MPU402)
The selection change of the game performance mode is accepted in accordance with the lottery result of the game performance mode lottery means.

According to feature A6 of the present invention group, when a predetermined condition such as the number of fluctuations reaching a predetermined number of times since the last change of the game effect mode or the passage of a predetermined time period is satisfied, the game effect mode is changed to the game effect mode selected by lottery. is executed, the player can change his/her mood and enjoy the game without getting bored. In addition, since the game performance mode is changed by lottery, the enjoyment increases as to which game performance mode will be selected.

Feature A7.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature A7 is the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6,
Reserved game effect mode information presenting means (MPU 402, speaker units 26A to 26C, MPU 502,
It is characterized by having a pattern display device 91).

According to feature A7 of the present invention group, the reserved game effect mode is presented, so that the player can recognize which game effect mode is reserved. In other words, it is not necessary to count the number of operations of the operation buttons or the like in order to know which game presentation mode is reserved. Therefore, convenience for the player is improved.

Feature A8.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature A8 is the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7,
Prefetching effect execution lottery means (MPU 402) for randomly determining whether or not to execute the prefetching effect when it is determined that the special game state is entered in the prefetching determination,
The look-ahead effect execution means is
The prefetch effect is executed based on the lottery result of the prefetch effect execution lottery means.

According to feature A8 of the present invention group, even if it is determined in the look-ahead determination that the special game state will be entered, the player does not know whether or not the look-ahead effect will actually occur, so the player does not have the look-ahead effect. Even in that case, you can feel the thrill of winning the jackpot.

Feature A9.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8,
The game production mode change-disabled period is at least part of the fluctuation period (for example, from after the high-speed fluctuation period until the end of the fluctuation).

According to feature A9 of the present invention group, the game effect mode can be changed even during the variable period. In a conventional game machine, the game effect mode cannot be changed until the variable display ends.
It was necessary to wait until the end of the variable display. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to feature A9, it is possible to change the game presentation mode even during the variable period, which improves convenience for the player.

Feature A10.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature A10 is a gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to 9,
A prefetch effect selection table (ROM 412, program ROM 512) in which the presence or absence of the prefetch effect mode is stored in association with each game effect mode;
Prefetching effect existence determination means (MPU 402) for determining whether or not there is a prefetching effect in the game effect mode reserved by the game effect mode reservation means,
The game production mode reservation discarding means is
When the look-ahead effect existence determination means determines that the game effect mode reserved by the game effect mode reservation means has a pre-read effect, the reservation of the game effect mode by the game effect mode reservation means is not canceled, When the look-ahead performance existence determination means determines that the game performance mode reserved by the game performance mode reservation means does not have the look-ahead performance, the reservation of the game performance mode by the game performance mode reservation means is cancelled. Characterized by

According to the feature A10 of the present invention group, when the reserved game effect mode also has a prefetch effect, the game effect mode is changed to the reserved game effect mode and the prefetch effect is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy both the game effect mode change and the look-ahead effect, and the player's satisfaction is improved.

Feature A11.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature A11 is the gaming machine according to feature A10,
In the look-ahead effect selection table, information as to when to execute the look-ahead effect is stored in association with each look-ahead effect,
The game production mode reservation discarding means is
When the execution timing of the look-ahead performance associated with the game performance mode reserved by the game performance mode reservation means is after the next change, the reservation of the game performance mode by the game performance mode reservation means is not canceled. and

According to the feature A11 of the present invention group, in the case of the look-ahead effect that is not immediately executed, the game effect mode is changed to the reserved game effect mode, and the look-ahead effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to secure sufficient time for changing to the reserved game effect mode and executing the look-ahead effect. As a result, the execution of the look-ahead effect and the change of the game effect mode cannot be timed, and the fear of failing in the execution of the look-ahead effect or the change of the game effect mode can be prevented.

According to the characteristic group A of the present invention, when the look-ahead effect occurs, the reservation for changing the game effect mode is canceled, so the following problems can be solved.

When the change reservation of the game performance mode is made, even if the look-ahead performance occurs, the execution of the look-ahead performance is canceled by the change of the game performance mode. In particular, the look-ahead effect that is executed over a plurality of fluctuations is highly likely to result in a big win (special game state), and thus is the look-ahead effect that the player looks forward to. When such a look-ahead performance is canceled by changing the game performance mode, the player who cannot enjoy the look-ahead performance is disappointed because the game performance mode after the change results in a big win without the look-ahead performance. It feels great too.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature B1 is
Having a plurality of game production modes with different production modes,
Game production mode change reception means (MPU 402) for accepting selection change of game production mode
When,
Special game determination means (MPU 302) for determining whether or not to make a special game state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player;
A prefetch determination means (MPU 302) for performing prefetch determination as to whether or not the special game state is entered before the determination is performed;
Prefetching effect executing means (MPU402, MPU502) for executing a predetermined prefetching effect when it is determined in the prefetching determination that the special game state is entered;
A game presentation mode change disabled period determination means (MPU 402) for determining whether or not it is a game presentation mode change disabled period in which selection change of the game presentation mode is impossible;
A game presentation mode reservation means (MPU 40) for reserving a change to the selected game presentation mode when the selection change of the game presentation mode is accepted during the game presentation mode change disabled period.
2) and
A prefetch effect selection table (ROM 412, program ROM 512) in which the presence or absence of the prefetch effect mode is stored in association with each game effect mode;
Prefetching effect existence determination means (MPU 402) for determining whether or not there is a prefetching effect in the game effect mode reserved by the game effect mode reservation means;
When the look-ahead effect existence determination means determines that the game effect mode reserved by the game effect mode reservation means has a pre-read effect, the reservation of the game effect mode by the game effect mode reservation means is not canceled, When the look-ahead performance existence determination means determines that the game performance mode reserved by the game performance mode reservation means does not have the look-ahead performance, the game performance cancels the reservation of the game performance mode by the game performance mode reservation means. mode reservation discarding means;
characterized by comprising

According to feature B1 of the present invention group, if there is also a prefetch effect in the reserved game effect mode,
The mode is changed to a reserved game performance mode, and a prefetch performance is executed. For this reason, the player
Both the change of the game performance mode and the look-ahead performance can be enjoyed, and the player's satisfaction is improved.

Feature B2.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature B2 is the gaming machine according to feature B1,
When the reservation of the game presentation mode is not canceled by the game presentation mode reservation discarding means after the game presentation mode change prohibition period has elapsed, the current game presentation mode is changed to the reserved game presentation mode, and A game performance mode change means (MPU 402) that does not change the current game performance mode when the reservation of the game performance mode is canceled by the game performance mode reservation cancellation means,
The look-ahead effect executing means
After the game presentation mode is reserved by the game presentation mode reservation means, when the look-ahead presentation occurs and the reservation of the game presentation mode is not canceled by the game presentation mode reservation cancellation means, the game presentation mode changing means. The pre-reading effect is executed in the game effect mode changed by.

According to feature B2 of the present invention group, if there is also a prefetch effect in the reserved game effect mode,
The mode is changed to a reserved game performance mode, and the read-ahead performance of the game performance mode after the change is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy both the game effect mode change and the look-ahead effect, and the player's satisfaction is improved.

Feature B3.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature B3 is the gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2,
Each look-ahead effect is stored in the look-ahead effect selection table in association with an execution period of the look-ahead effect,
Prefetching effect execution period determination means (MPU 402) for determining whether the execution period of the prefetching effect in the current game effect mode spans a plurality of fluctuation periods,
The game production mode reservation discarding means is
When it is determined that the execution period of the look-ahead effect of the current game effect mode extends over a plurality of fluctuation periods, the reservation of the game effect mode by the game effect mode reservation means is canceled.

According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, when the look-ahead effect in the current game effect mode straddles the number fluctuation, the change to the reserved game effect mode is cancelled. The look-ahead effect that is executed over a plurality of fluctuations is highly likely to result in a big win (special game state), so it is a look-ahead effect that the player looks forward to. If such a look-ahead effect becomes a different look-ahead effect by changing the game effect mode, the player who cannot enjoy the look-ahead effect executed over a plurality of variable periods will feel more disappointed. In the gaming machine according to feature B3,
When the look-ahead performance straddles the number fluctuation, the change of the game performance mode is canceled and the execution of the look-ahead performance is prioritized. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest without disappointing the player.

Feature B4.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature B4 is the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3,
In the look-ahead effect selection table, information as to when to execute the look-ahead effect is stored in association with each look-ahead effect,
The game production mode reservation discarding means is
When the execution timing of the look-ahead performance associated with the game performance mode reserved by the game performance mode reservation means is after the next change, the reservation of the game performance mode by the game performance mode reservation means is not canceled. and

According to the feature B4 of the group of the present invention, in the case of the look-ahead effect that is not immediately executed, the game effect mode is changed to the reserved game effect mode, and the look-ahead effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to secure sufficient time for changing to the reserved game effect mode and executing the look-ahead effect. As a result, the execution of the look-ahead effect and the change of the game effect mode cannot be timed, and the fear of failing in the execution of the look-ahead effect or the change of the game effect mode can be prevented.

Feature B5.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature B5 is the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4,
When the reservation of the game presentation mode is not canceled by the game presentation mode reservation discarding means after the game presentation mode change prohibition period has elapsed, the current game presentation mode is changed to the reserved game presentation mode, and It is characterized by comprising a game performance mode change means (MPU 402) that does not change the current game performance mode when the reservation of the game performance mode is canceled by the game performance mode reservation cancellation means.

According to feature B5 of the present invention group, when the reservation of the game effect mode is not canceled, in other words, when the look-ahead effect does not occur, the game effect mode is changed to the contracted game effect mode.
The player can enjoy the game in the reserved game presentation mode. In addition, when the reservation of the game performance mode is canceled, in other words, when the prefetch performance is generated, the current game performance mode is not changed, so that the prefetch performance can be enjoyed. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Feature B6.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature B6 is the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5,
A first game effect mode storage means (RAM413) for storing the current game effect mode;
a second game effect mode storage means (RAM413) for storing the game effect mode reserved by the game effect mode reservation means;
The game production mode reservation discarding means rewrites the game production mode stored in the second game production mode storage means to the game production mode stored in the first game production mode storage means, thereby canceling the reservation. It is characterized by discarding (cancelling) the game presentation mode.

According to feature B6 of the present invention group, the current game performance mode is stored in the first game performance mode storage means, the reserved game performance mode is stored in the second game performance mode storage means, and the reserved game performance is stored. When canceling the mode, the game performance mode stored in the second game performance mode storage means is rewritten to the game performance mode stored in the first game performance mode storage means, thereby ensuring reliability with a simple configuration. You can cancel the reservation for the game production mode.

Feature B7.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature B7 is the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6,
Provided with production mode change input means (game production mode selection button 600) for selectively changing any of the game production modes by manual input operation,
The game production mode change reception means (MPU402)
A selection change of the game production mode is accepted in response to a manual input operation by the production mode change input means.

According to the feature B7 of the group of the present invention, the production mode change input means for selecting and changing any of the game production modes by manual input operation is provided, and the game production mode change reception means responds to the manual input operation by the production mode change input means. Correspondingly, the selection change of the game presentation mode is accepted. Therefore, the player can change the game presentation mode at any time when he or she wants to change his/her mood, such as when it is difficult to win a big win, and the convenience of the player is improved. In addition, since the player can play the game while changing his/her mood, the playing time becomes longer. For this reason, it is also profitable for the operator who manages the game hall.

Feature B8.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature B8 is the gaming machine according to feature B7,
The game production mode change receiving means is
outputting a signal instructing to change the game production mode each time a manual input operation by the production mode change input means is received;
The game production mode reservation means,
The game performance mode stored in the second game performance mode storage means is periodically changed each time the game performance mode change receiving means outputs a signal instructing the change of the game performance mode. do.

According to feature B8 of the present invention group, the game effect mode change receiving means outputs a signal instructing change of the game effect mode each time a manual input operation is received by the effect mode change input means,
The game performance mode reservation means changes the game performance mode periodically, in other words, cyclically, each time a signal instructing the change of the game performance mode is output.
All game presentation modes of the game machine can be selected simply by operating one operation button. In other words, the player can select all the game effect modes that the gaming machine has without having to operate a plurality of operation buttons. Here, in order to operate the operation button, it is necessary to visually recognize the operation button arranged at hand. You need to check your hand every time you try to change modes. However, the player usually plays the game while looking at the game board provided with the liquid crystal display device, and it is very troublesome to check the player's hand every time he/she wants to change the game presentation mode. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the feature B8, once the hand is confirmed and the operation button is touched, the game production mode can be cyclically changed with one operation button without confirming the hand and the game can be played. All game production modes that the machine has can be selected. As a result, the player is hardly hindered from playing the game while looking at the game board provided with the liquid crystal display device, thereby improving the convenience. In addition, since the player can concentrate on looking at the game board provided with the liquid crystal display device, the player's interest is enhanced.

Feature B9.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature B9 is the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6,
A game production mode lottery means (MPU 402) that draws a lottery to select one of the game production modes based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The game production mode change receiving means is
The selection change of the game performance mode is accepted in accordance with the lottery result of the game performance mode lottery means.

According to feature B9 of the present invention group, when a predetermined condition is met, such as when the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number of times since the previous game effect mode change, or when a predetermined time has passed, the game effect mode is changed to a game effect mode selected by lottery. is executed, the player can change his/her mood and enjoy the game without getting bored. In addition, since the game performance mode is changed by lottery, the enjoyment increases as to which game performance mode is selected.

Feature B10.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature B10 is a gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9,
Reserved game effect mode information presenting means (MPU 402, speaker units 26A to 26C, MPU 502,
It is characterized by having a pattern display device 91).

According to feature B10 of the present invention group, the reserved game effect mode is presented, so that the player can recognize which game effect mode is reserved. In other words, it is not necessary to count the number of times the operation button is operated in order to know which game presentation mode is reserved. Therefore, convenience for the player is improved.

Feature B11.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature B11 is a gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10,
Prefetching effect execution lottery means (MPU 402) for randomly determining whether or not to execute the prefetching effect when it is determined in the prefetching determination that the special game state will be entered,
The look-ahead effect execution means is characterized by executing the look-ahead effect based on the lottery result of the look-ahead effect execution lottery means.

According to the feature B11 of the present invention group, even if it is determined in the look-ahead determination that the special game state will be entered, the player does not know whether or not the look-ahead effect will actually occur. Even in that case, you can feel the thrill of winning the jackpot.

Feature B12.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature B12 is a gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11,
The game production mode change-disabled period is at least part of the fluctuation period (for example, from after the high-speed fluctuation period until the end of the fluctuation).

According to feature B12 of the present invention group, the game effect mode can be changed even during the variable period. In a conventional game machine, the game performance mode cannot be changed until the variable display ends, and it is necessary to wait until the variable display ends. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to feature B12, the game performance mode can be changed even during the variable period, so the convenience for the player is improved.

According to the feature B group of the present invention, when the reserved game effect mode also has a prefetch effect, the game effect mode is changed to the reserved game effect mode and the prefetch effect is executed. can be resolved.

If the read-ahead performance is prioritized, the reservation for changing the game performance mode is canceled when the read-ahead performance occurs, so that the player cannot change the game performance mode and enjoy the changed game performance mode. Further, if the game effect mode is prioritized, the prefetch effect is canceled, so the player cannot enjoy the prefetch effect. Therefore, the player cannot enjoy both the game effect mode change and the look-ahead effect, and the player's satisfaction is not improved.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature C1 is
Having a plurality of game production modes with different production modes,
Game production mode change reception means (MPU 402) for accepting selection change of game production mode
When,
Special game determination means (MPU 302) for determining whether or not to make a special game state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player;
A prefetch determination means (MPU 302) for performing prefetch determination as to whether or not the special game state is entered before the determination is performed;
Prefetching effect executing means (MPU402, MPU502) for executing a predetermined prefetching effect when it is determined in the prefetching determination that the special game state is entered;
A game presentation mode change disabled period determination means (MPU 402) for determining whether or not it is a game presentation mode change disabled period in which selection change of the game presentation mode is impossible;
A game presentation mode reservation means (MPU 40) for reserving a change to the selected game presentation mode when the selection change of the game presentation mode is accepted during the game presentation mode change disabled period.
2) and
After the game performance mode is reserved by the game performance mode reservation means, when the look-ahead performance occurs or when the look-ahead performance has already occurred, the reservation of the game performance mode by the game performance mode reservation means is canceled. Game production mode reservation discarding means (MPU 402);
A first game effect mode storage means (RAM413) for storing the current game effect mode;
A second game effect mode storage means (RAM 413) for storing the game effect mode reserved by the game effect mode reservation means,
The game production mode reservation discarding means is
By rewriting the game performance mode stored in the second game performance mode storage means to the game performance mode stored in the first game performance mode storage means, the reserved game performance mode is discarded (cancelled). characterized by

According to feature C1 of the present invention group, the current game performance mode is stored in the first game performance mode storage means, the reserved game performance mode is stored in the second game performance mode storage means, and the reserved game performance is stored. When canceling the mode, the game performance mode stored in the second game performance mode storage means is rewritten to the game performance mode stored in the first game performance mode storage means, thereby ensuring reliability with a simple configuration. You can cancel the reservation for the game production mode.

Feature C2.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature C2 is the gaming machine according to feature C1,
When the reservation of the game presentation mode is not canceled by the game presentation mode reservation discarding means after the game presentation mode change prohibition period has elapsed, the current game presentation mode is changed to the reserved game presentation mode, and It is characterized by comprising a game performance mode change means (MPU 402) that does not change the current game performance mode when the reservation of the game performance mode is canceled by the game performance mode reservation cancellation means.

According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, when the reservation of the game effect mode is not canceled, in other words, when the look-ahead effect is not generated, the game effect mode is changed to the contracted game effect mode.
The player can enjoy the game in the reserved game presentation mode. Further, when the reservation of the game performance mode is canceled, in other words, when the prefetch performance is generated, the current game performance mode is not changed, so that the prefetch performance can be enjoyed. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Feature C3.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature C3 is the gaming machine according to feature C2,
The game production mode changing means is
By rewriting the game performance mode stored in the first game performance mode storage means to the game performance mode stored in the second game performance mode storage means, the current game performance mode is the reserved game performance. It is characterized by changing to a mode.

According to feature C3 of the present invention group, the current game performance mode is stored in the first game performance mode storage means, the reserved game performance mode is stored in the second game performance mode storage means, and the current game performance mode is stored. to the reserved game performance mode, the game performance mode stored in the first game performance mode storage means is rewritten to the game performance mode stored in the second game performance mode storage means. To surely change a game presentation mode with a simple configuration.

Feature C4.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature C4 is a gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3,
Provided with production mode change input means (game production mode selection button 600) for selectively changing any of the game production modes by manual input operation,
The game production mode change receiving means is
A selection change of the game effect mode is accepted in response to a manual input operation by the effect mode change input means.

According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the production mode change input means for selecting and changing any of the game production modes by manual input operation is provided, and the game production mode change reception means receives the manual input operation by the production mode change input means. Correspondingly, the selection change of the game presentation mode is accepted. Therefore, the player can change the game presentation mode at any time when he or she wants to change his/her mood, such as when it is difficult to win a big win, and the convenience of the player is improved. In addition, since the player can play the game while changing his/her mood, the playing time becomes longer. For this reason, it is also profitable for the operator who manages the game hall.

Feature C5.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature C5 is the gaming machine according to feature C4,
The game production mode change receiving means is
outputting a signal instructing to change the game production mode each time a manual input operation by the production mode change input means is received;
The game production mode reservation means,
The game performance mode stored in the second game performance mode storage means is periodically changed each time the game performance mode change receiving means outputs a signal instructing the change of the game performance mode. do.

According to feature C5 of the present invention group, the game effect mode change receiving means outputs a signal instructing the change of the game effect mode each time a manual input operation is received by the effect mode change input means,
The game performance mode reservation means changes the game performance mode periodically, in other words, cyclically, each time a signal instructing the change of the game performance mode is output.
All game presentation modes of the game machine can be selected simply by operating one operation button. In other words, the player can select all the game effect modes that the gaming machine has without having to operate a plurality of operation buttons. Here, in order to operate the operation button, it is necessary to visually recognize the operation button arranged at hand. You need to check your hand every time you try to change modes. However, the player usually plays the game while looking at the game board provided with the liquid crystal display device, and it is very troublesome to check the player's hand every time he/she wants to change the game presentation mode. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the feature C5, once the hand is confirmed and the operation button is touched, the game production mode can be cyclically changed with one operation button without confirming the hand and the game can be played. All game production modes that the machine has can be selected. As a result, the player is hardly hindered from playing the game while looking at the game board provided with the liquid crystal display device, thereby improving the convenience. In addition, since the player can concentrate on looking at the game board provided with the liquid crystal display device, the player's interest is enhanced.

Feature C6.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature C6 is the gaming machine according to feature C3,
A game production mode lottery means (MPU 402) that draws a lottery to select one of the game production modes based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The game production mode change receiving means is
It is characterized in that selection change of the game performance mode is accepted in accordance with the lottery result of the game performance mode lottery means.

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times since the last change of the game effect mode, or when a predetermined time elapses, the game effect mode is changed to the game effect mode selected by lottery. is executed, the player can change his/her mood and enjoy the game without getting bored. In addition, since the game performance mode is changed by lottery, the enjoyment increases as to which game performance mode is selected.

Feature C7.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature C7 is the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6,
Reserved game effect mode information presenting means (MPU 402, speaker units 26A to 26C, MPU 502,
It is characterized by having a pattern display device 91).

According to feature C7 of the present invention group, the reserved game effect mode is presented, so that the player can recognize which game effect mode is reserved. In other words, it is not necessary to count the number of times the operation button is operated in order to know which game presentation mode is reserved. Therefore, convenience for the player is improved.

Feature C8.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature C8 is the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7,
Prefetching effect execution lottery means (MPU 402) for randomly determining whether or not to execute the prefetching effect when it is determined in the prefetching determination that the special game state will be entered,
The look-ahead effect execution means is characterized by executing the look-ahead effect based on the lottery result of the look-ahead effect execution lottery means.

According to the feature C8 of the group of the present invention, even if it is determined in the look-ahead determination that the special game state will be entered, the player does not know whether or not the look-ahead effect will actually occur. Even in that case, you can feel the thrill of winning the jackpot.

Feature C9.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature C9 is a gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8,
The game production mode change-disabled period is at least part of the fluctuation period (for example, from after the high-speed fluctuation period until the end of the fluctuation).

According to feature C9 of the present invention group, the game effect mode can be changed even during the variable period. In a conventional game machine, the game effect mode cannot be changed until the variable display ends.
It was necessary to wait until the end of the variable display. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to feature C9, the game performance mode can be changed even during the variable period, so the convenience for the player is improved.

Feature C10.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature C10 is a gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to 9,
A prefetch effect selection table (ROM 412, program ROM 512) in which the presence or absence of the prefetch effect mode is stored in association with each game effect mode;
Prefetching effect existence determination means (MPU 402) for determining whether or not there is a prefetching effect in the game effect mode reserved by the game effect mode reservation means,
The game production mode reservation discarding means is
When the look-ahead effect existence determination means determines that the game effect mode reserved by the game effect mode reservation means has a pre-read effect, the reservation of the game effect mode by the game effect mode reservation means is not canceled, When the look-ahead performance existence determination means determines that the game performance mode reserved by the game performance mode reservation means does not have the look-ahead performance, the reservation of the game performance mode by the game performance mode reservation means is cancelled. Characterized by

According to the feature C10 of the group of the present invention, when the reserved game effect mode also has the prefetch effect, the game effect mode is changed to the reserved game effect mode and the prefetch effect is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy both the change of the game presentation mode and the look-ahead presentation, and the player's satisfaction is improved.

Feature C11.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature C11 is the gaming machine according to feature C10,
In the look-ahead effect selection table, an execution period of the look-ahead effect is stored in association with each of the look-ahead effects,
Prefetching effect execution period determination means (MPU 402) for determining whether the execution period of the prefetching effect in the current game effect mode spans a plurality of fluctuation periods,
The game production mode reservation discarding means is
When it is determined that the execution period of the look-ahead effect of the current game effect mode extends over a plurality of fluctuation periods, the reservation of the game effect mode by the game effect mode reservation means is canceled.

According to the feature C11 of the present invention group, when the look-ahead effect in the current game effect mode straddles the number fluctuation, the change to the reserved game effect mode is cancelled. The look-ahead effect that is executed over a plurality of fluctuations is highly likely to result in a big win (special game state), so it is a look-ahead effect that the player looks forward to. If such a look-ahead effect becomes a different look-ahead effect by changing the game effect mode, the player who cannot enjoy the look-ahead effect executed over a plurality of fluctuation periods will feel more disappointed. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic C11, when the look-ahead effect straddles the number fluctuation, the change of the game effect mode is canceled and the execution of the look-ahead effect is prioritized. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest without disappointing the player.

Feature C12.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature C12 is the gaming machine according to feature C10 or feature C11,
In the look-ahead effect selection table, information on when to execute the look-ahead effect is stored in association with each of the look-ahead effects,
The game production mode reservation discarding means is
When the execution timing of the look-ahead performance associated with the game performance mode reserved by the game performance mode reservation means is after the next fluctuation, the reservation of the game performance mode by the game performance mode reservation means is not canceled. and

According to the feature C12 of the group of the present invention, in the case of the look-ahead effect that is not immediately executed, the game effect mode is changed to the reserved game effect mode, and the look-ahead effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to secure sufficient time for changing to the reserved game effect mode and executing the look-ahead effect. As a result, the execution of the look-ahead effect and the change of the game effect mode cannot be timed, and the risk of failure in the execution of the look-ahead effect or the change of the game effect mode can be prevented.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, the current game performance mode is stored in the first game performance mode storage means, the reserved game performance mode is stored in the second game performance mode storage means, and the reserved game performance mode is stored in the second game performance mode storage means. When deleting (cancelling) the game performance mode, the game performance mode stored in the second game performance mode storage means is rewritten to the game performance mode stored in the first game performance mode storage means, The following problems can be solved.

When reserving a game performance mode, it is necessary to store the game performance mode to be reserved in a memory or the like. When the game performance mode is selected from the next time onward, there is a gap between the current game performance mode and the current game performance mode.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature D1 is
Having a plurality of game production modes with different production modes,
Game production mode change reception means (MPU 402) for accepting selection change of game production mode
When,
Special game determination means (MPU 302) for determining whether or not to make a special game state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player;
A prefetch determination means (MPU 302) for performing prefetch determination as to whether or not the special game state is entered before the determination is performed;
a prefetch effect execution lottery means (MPU 402) for randomly determining whether or not to execute a predetermined prefetch effect expected by the player when the special game state is entered;
Prefetching effect execution means (MPU402, MPU502) for executing the prefetching effect based on the lottery result of the prefetching effect execution lottery means;
A game presentation mode change disabled period determination means (MPU 402) for determining whether or not it is a game presentation mode change disabled period in which selection change of the game presentation mode is impossible;
A game presentation mode reservation means (MPU 40) for reserving a change to the selected game presentation mode when the selection change of the game presentation mode is accepted during the game presentation mode change disabled period.
2) and
When the look-ahead determination means does not determine that the special game state will be established and the look-ahead effect is executed by the look-ahead effect execution means, the reservation of the game effect mode by the game effect mode reservation means is discarded, and the look-ahead is performed. A game performance mode reservation canceling means for not canceling the reservation of the game performance mode by the game performance mode reservation means when the determination means determines that the special game state is to be established and the look-ahead performance execution means executes the look-ahead performance. (M
PU 402) and
characterized by comprising

According to feature D1 of the group of the present invention, when prefetching wins (jackpot), the reservation for changing the game presentation mode is discarded, and when prefetching wins (jackpot) do not occur, the reservation for changing the game presentation mode is discarded. do not do. If you are pre-reading winning (jackpot), usually after the pre-reading effect,
A special game state is entered as it is, and a special performance in the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, there is no problem even if the reservation for changing the game presentation mode is cancelled. In addition, since the player can enjoy playing the jackpot game, the player does not feel stress even if the game presentation mode is not changed. On the other hand, when the prefetching winning (jackpot) is not made, the game production mode change reservation is not canceled, so the game production mode is changed after the prefetching production. After the look-ahead performance, the game performance mode is changed even if the special game state does not occur, so that the player can play the game with a change of mood and the stress of the player is reduced. In addition, when the look-ahead effect is executed, it does not necessarily shift to the special game state, and even when it is determined that the special game state will occur, the look-ahead effect does not always occur. When is executed, the player can enjoy the game while being excited and nervous as to whether the game shifts to a special game state, in other words, whether the player has won a jackpot.

Feature D2.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to the characteristic D2 is the gaming machine according to the characteristic D1,
A first lottery table (ROM 412) for lottery as to whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect
and a second lottery table (ROM 412) having a higher probability of lottery if the prefetch effect is executed than the first lottery table,
The look-ahead effect execution lottery means
If the look-ahead determination means does not determine that the special game state will be entered, lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the first lottery table,
When it is determined by the look-ahead determination means that the special game state is to be entered, a lottery is made to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the second lottery table.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, when it is not determined that the special game state will be entered, the probability of executing the prefetching effect is low, and when it is determined that the special game state is entered, the probability of executing the prefetching effect is low. high. Therefore, there is a low possibility that the special game state will not continue even though the look-ahead performance is being executed, and the special game state will continue to be set even though the look-ahead performance is not being executed. less likely. As a result, the reliability of the correlation between whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed and whether or not the special game state is entered becomes high, and the player can enjoy the look-ahead effect with reliability without feeling troublesome.

Feature D3.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature D3 is the gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2,
When the reservation of the game presentation mode is not canceled by the game presentation mode reservation discarding means after the game presentation mode change prohibition period has elapsed, the current game presentation mode is changed to the reserved game presentation mode, and It is characterized by comprising a game performance mode change means (MPU 402) that does not change the current game performance mode when the reservation of the game performance mode is canceled by the game performance mode reservation cancellation means.

According to feature D3 of the present invention group, when the reservation of the game effect mode is not canceled, in other words, when the look-ahead effect does not occur, the game effect mode is changed to the contracted game effect mode.
The player can enjoy the game in the reserved game presentation mode. Further, when the reservation of the game performance mode is canceled, in other words, when the prefetch performance is generated, the current game performance mode is not changed, so that the prefetch performance can be enjoyed. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Feature D4.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature D4 is the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3,
A first game effect mode storage means (RAM413) for storing the current game effect mode;
A second game effect mode storage means (RAM 413) for storing the game effect mode reserved by the game effect mode reservation means,
The game production mode reservation canceling means rewrites the game production mode stored in the second game production mode storage means to the game production mode stored in the first game production mode storage means, thereby canceling the reservation. It is characterized by discarding (cancelling) the game presentation mode.

According to feature D4 of the present invention group, the current game performance mode is stored in the first game performance mode storage means, the reserved game performance mode is stored in the second game performance mode storage means, and the reserved game performance is stored. When canceling the mode, the game performance mode stored in the second game performance mode storage means is rewritten to the game performance mode stored in the first game performance mode storage means, thereby ensuring reliability with a simple configuration. You can cancel the reservation for the game production mode.

Feature D5.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature D5 is a gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4,
Provided with production mode change input means (game production mode selection button 600) for selectively changing any of the game production modes by manual input operation,
The game production mode change receiving means is
A selection change of the game effect mode is accepted in response to a manual input operation by the effect mode change input means.

According to feature D5 of the group of the present invention, an effect mode change input means for selecting and changing any of the game effect modes by manual input operation is provided, and the game effect mode change receiving means responds to the manual input operation by the effect mode change input means. Correspondingly, the selection change of the game presentation mode is accepted. Therefore, the player can change the game presentation mode at any time when he or she wants to change his/her mood, such as when it is difficult to win a big win, and the convenience of the player is improved. In addition, since the player can play the game while changing his/her mood, the playing time becomes longer. For this reason, it is also profitable for the operator who manages the game hall.

Feature D6.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature D6 is the gaming machine according to feature D5,
The game production mode change receiving means is
outputting a signal instructing to change the game production mode each time a manual input operation by the production mode change input means is received;
The game production mode reservation means,
The game performance mode stored in the second game performance mode storage means is periodically changed each time the game performance mode change receiving means outputs a signal instructing the change of the game performance mode. do.

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, the game effect mode change receiving means outputs a signal instructing change of the game effect mode each time a manual input operation is received by the effect mode change input means,
The game performance mode reservation means changes the game performance mode periodically, in other words, cyclically, each time a signal instructing the change of the game performance mode is output.
All game presentation modes of the game machine can be selected simply by operating one operation button. In other words, the player can select all the game effect modes that the gaming machine has without having to operate a plurality of operation buttons. Here, in order to operate the operation button, it is necessary to visually recognize the operation button arranged at hand. You need to check your hand every time you try to change modes. However, the player usually plays the game while looking at the game board provided with the liquid crystal display device, and it is very troublesome to check the player's hand every time he/she wants to change the game presentation mode. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic D6, once the hand is confirmed and the operation button is touched, the game production mode can be cyclically changed with one operation button without confirming the hand and the game can be played. All game production modes that the machine has can be selected. As a result, the player is hardly hindered from playing the game while looking at the game board provided with the liquid crystal display device, thereby improving the convenience. In addition, since the player can concentrate on looking at the game board provided with the liquid crystal display device, the player's interest is enhanced.

Feature D7.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature D7 is a gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4,
A game production mode lottery means (MPU 402) that draws a lottery to select one of the game production modes based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The game production mode change receiving means is
It is characterized in that selection change of the game performance mode is accepted in accordance with the lottery result of the game performance mode lottery means.

According to feature D7 of the present invention group, when a predetermined condition is met, such as when the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number of times since the previous game effect mode change, or when a predetermined time has passed, the game effect mode is changed to a game effect mode selected by lottery. is executed, the player can change his/her mood and enjoy the game without getting bored. In addition, since the game performance mode is changed by lottery, the enjoyment increases as to which game performance mode is selected.

Feature D8.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature D8 is a gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7,
Reserved game effect mode information presenting means (MPU 402, speaker units 26A to 26C, MPU 502,
It is characterized by having a pattern display device 91).

According to feature D8 of the present invention group, the reserved game effect mode is presented, so that the player can recognize which game effect mode is reserved. In other words, it is not necessary to count the number of times the operation button is operated in order to know which game presentation mode is reserved. Therefore, convenience for the player is improved.

Feature D9.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature D9 is a gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8,
The game production mode change disabled period is at least part of the variable period.

According to feature D9 of the present invention group, the game effect mode can be changed even during the variable period. In a conventional game machine, the game effect mode cannot be changed until the variable display ends.
If there was a held ball, it was necessary to wait until the held ball disappeared (until the fluctuation display ended). On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to feature D9, the game performance mode can be changed even during the variable period, so the convenience for the player is improved.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, when the look-ahead effect occurs when the transition to the special game state (jackpot) is not won, the reservation for changing the game effect mode is not canceled and the special game state is not canceled. When a look-ahead effect occurs when the transition to (jackpot) is won, the reservation for changing the game effect mode is canceled, so the following problems can be solved.

If the player does not get a big hit (special game state) despite the occurrence of the look-ahead effect, the player feels stressed about the fact that the big win (special game state) has not happened. If the change reservation of the performance mode is canceled, the player cannot change his mood and play the game, and the stress of the player is not reduced.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY As described above, the present invention can be suitably applied to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine (game machine) 11... Outer frame 12... Game machine main body 13... Inner frame 14... Front door frame 21... Window part 22... Window panel 23... Indicator lamp device 24... Error Indicator lamp portion 26A to 26E Speaker portion 30 Cover member driving portion 31 Upper bulging portion 32 Lower bulging portion 33 Upper plate 34 Lower plate 35 Operation button 41 Launch handle 81 Game board 82 General winning opening (10 prize balls) 83 Variable winning device 85 Thru gate 8
6 Variable display unit 87 Out port 88 Rotation guide member 89 Game nail 91 Symbol display device 250 First monitoring device 290 Second monitoring device 300 Main control device 40
0... Sound emission control device, 500... Display control device

Claims (3)

Having a plurality of game production modes with different production modes,
A game production mode change reception means for accepting a selection change of the game production mode;
special game determination means for determining whether or not to set a special game state advantageous to the player;
Prefetching determination means for performing a prefetching determination as to whether or not the special game state will occur before the determination is made;
a prefetch effect execution lottery means for randomly determining whether or not to execute a predetermined prefetch effect expected by the player when the special game state is entered;
a prefetch effect executing means for executing the prefetch effect based on the lottery result of the prefetch effect execution lottery means;
A game presentation mode change disabled period determining means for determining whether or not it is a game presentation mode change disabled period in which the selection change of the game presentation mode is impossible;
a game presentation mode reservation means for reserving a change to the selected game presentation mode when the selection change of the game presentation mode is accepted during the game presentation mode change disabled period;
When the look-ahead determination means does not determine that the special game state will be established and the look-ahead effect is executed by the look-ahead effect execution means, the reservation of the game effect mode by the game effect mode reservation means is discarded, and the look-ahead is performed. A game performance mode reservation canceling means for not canceling the reservation of the game performance mode by the game performance mode reservation means when the determination means determines that the special game state is to be established and the look-ahead performance execution means executes the look-ahead performance. and a game machine. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
A first lottery table for lottery to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead performance, and a second lottery table having a higher probability of lottery if the look-ahead performance is executed than the first lottery table,
The look-ahead effect execution lottery means
If the look-ahead determination means does not determine that the special game state will be entered, lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the first lottery table,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the look-ahead determination means determines that the special game state will be established, a lottery is made to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead performance based on the second lottery table. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
When the reservation of the game presentation mode is not canceled by the game presentation mode reservation discarding means after the game presentation mode change prohibition period has elapsed, the current game presentation mode is changed to the reserved game presentation mode, and The game machine is characterized by comprising a game performance mode changing means that does not change the current game performance mode when the reservation of the game performance mode is canceled by the game performance mode reservation canceling means.

Images